MFD Installation Guide

Multi-Functional
Display
Version 2.00.330
Installation Guide
Date of Issue: November 2012
Copyright: Transas MIP Ltd 19912012. All rights reserved.

The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas MIP Ltd and shall not be duplicated in whole or in
part. The technical details contained in this manual are accurate at the date of issue but are subject to change
without notice.
Transas MIP Ltd pursues a policy of continuous development. This may mean that the product delivered has
additional enhancements not yet covered by the latest version of this manual.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective
owners.
This document contains:

Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 5
Warnings and Cautions ........................................................................................ 7
High Voltage............................................................................................... 8
X-Ray Radiation ......................................................................................... 8
Radio-Frequency Radiation ....................................................................... 8
Safety Switch ............................................................................................. 9
Compass Safety Distance.......................................................................... 9
Equipment Mean Time between Failure (MTBF) ....................................... 9
Warranty Conditions ........................................................................................... 10
How to Use This Manual .................................................................................... 11
List of Documents............................................................................................... 12
Abbreviations in Use .......................................................................................... 12
Printing House Conventions ............................................................................... 14
Chapter 1. Hardware Installation ............................................................................ 15
MFD Hardware and Software Requirements ..................................................... 17
Hardware Requirements .......................................................................... 17
Operational System Requirements .......................................................... 17
MFD Physical Layout ......................................................................................... 18
Console Installation ............................................................................................ 19
Pre-Installation Requirements.................................................................. 19
Console Mounting .................................................................................... 19
Console Ventilation .................................................................................. 22
Installation of Transas Network Scanners 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast.............. 23
Introduction .............................................................................................. 23
Mechanical Installation............................................................................. 23
Electrical Installation ................................................................................ 28
Performance Monitor PM 30-02 Installation ............................................ 31
Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast ................................................. 35
Introduction .............................................................................................. 35
Mechanical Installation............................................................................. 35
Electrical Installation ................................................................................ 41
Grounding ................................................................................................ 44
Installation Check-Out.............................................................................. 44
Pre Setup Procedures.............................................................................. 44
Connection of MFD System to Scanner S-Band Up Mast ....................... 45
Preventive Action During Service Attendance on RTM MOS .................. 46
Excessive Interferences on Video on S-Band Radar Up Mast ................ 47
Sensor Connections ........................................................................................... 48
Workstation Installation ...................................................................................... 49
Dongle Installation ................................................................................... 50
RS6B Computer Installation..................................................................... 50
RS6 Computer ......................................................................................... 57
TPC24 Computer Installation ................................................................... 57
Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball Installation ................. 61
Radar Integrator Board RIB6 ................................................................... 64
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6 ................................................ 71
Transas Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System (BNWAS)
Components ............................................................................................. 86
Data Collector Unit DCU6 ........................................................................ 91
Power Connection .................................................................................... 97
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide
RS6B/RS6 Computers Discrete Signal Interface .................................... 97

WAGO I/O Modules for Conning ............................................................. 98
Network .............................................................................................................. 99
Physical Layout ....................................................................................... 99
IP Addresses ......................................................................................... 100
MFD Video Output to VDR .............................................................................. 100
RS6B Computer .................................................................................... 100
RS6 Computer ....................................................................................... 100
Transas Wave System..................................................................................... 101
General .................................................................................................. 101
Wave Workstation Installation ............................................................... 101
Chapter 2. System Settings .................................................................................. 105
Extended Mode Settings (only for NS MFD) ................................................... 107
RS6B Computer .................................................................................... 107
RS6 Computer ....................................................................................... 112
RS6B Computer Serial Ports Configuration .................................................... 117
Installation of National Fonts (If Necessary) .................................................... 118
Configuration of Synergy Utility ....................................................................... 121
Software Installation ........................................................................................ 128
Pre-installation ....................................................................................... 128
Installation of MFD ................................................................................ 129
Keyless Protection (If Necessary) ................................................................... 134
General .................................................................................................. 134
Using License Activation Utility ............................................................. 134
MFD Configuration........................................................................................... 136
General .................................................................................................. 137
Sensors Settings ................................................................................... 137
MFD Settings ......................................................................................... 150
Workstation Settings ............................................................................. 170
Radar Settings ....................................................................................... 176
Security Settings for MFD ..................................................................... 182
Security Settings for NS 4100 ............................................................... 183
SPOS Weather Module Adjustment ................................................................ 185
Navi-Conning 4000 Adjustment ....................................................................... 188
General .................................................................................................. 188
Indicator Setup Table ............................................................................ 192
CCTV Setup .......................................................................................... 194
Charts Installation and Chart Assistant Adjustment ........................................ 196
Charts Installation .................................................................................. 197
Chart Assistant Adjustment ................................................................... 199
Radar Adjustment ............................................................................................ 201
Transas Network 12/25 kW X-Band Scanners Adjustment .................. 201
30 kW S-Band Scanner Adjustment ...................................................... 206
Distance and Bearing Offset ................................................................. 213
Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6 .......................................................... 217
Settings in Autopilot ......................................................................................... 220
General .................................................................................................. 220
Raytheon Heading Control System NP 2025 (NP 2025 Plus) .............. 221
Navis Heading Control System AP 3000 .............................................. 222
Yokogawa Heading Control System PT500A ....................................... 224
EMRI Heading Control System SEM200 .............................................. 226
Procedure of TCS Control Setup Algorithms ................................................... 228

Essentials ............................................................................................... 228
Fine Adjustment ..................................................................................... 228
BNWAS Setup .................................................................................................. 231
Wave System Setup ......................................................................................... 235
Wave Configuration ............................................................................... 235
Wave Adjustment ................................................................................... 243
Autorun Configuration ...................................................................................... 248
Activation of Transas Integrator ....................................................................... 249
Commissioning Table Creation and System Configuration Back Up............... 250
Commissioning Table Creation .............................................................. 251
MFD Configuration Back Up .................................................................. 251
MFD Registry ......................................................................................... 253
Software Upgrade ............................................................................................ 254
Upgrade All Product MFD ...................................................................... 254
Upgrade of Most Recent MFD Versions ................................................ 257
Upgrade Navi-Conning 4000 ................................................................. 263
Radar Diagnostics and Typical Faults.............................................................. 265
Radar Diagnostics .................................................................................. 265
Typical Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 269
Chapter 3. Technical Specification ...................................................................... 271
General ............................................................................................................. 273
Software Technical Specification ..................................................................... 273
Radar ..................................................................................................... 273
ARPA ..................................................................................................... 274
Chart Related Features.......................................................................... 274
Navigation Tools .................................................................................... 277
Sensors (Input/Output)........................................................................... 278
GUI Capabilities ..................................................................................... 279
Radar Integrator Board RIB6 ................................................................. 280
Hardware Technical Specification .................................................................... 280
Scanners ................................................................................................ 280
Installation Set ....................................................................................... 284
RS6B Computer ..................................................................................... 284
RS6 Computer ....................................................................................... 287
TPC24 Computer ................................................................................... 289
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6 .............................................. 293
Components ........................................................................................... 302
Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball ................................. 305
Transas Monitors ................................................................................... 311
Radar Integrator Board RIB6 ................................................................. 319
Data Collecting Unit DCU6 .................................................................... 322
WAGO I/O Modules ............................................................................... 324
Ethernet Switches .................................................................................. 331
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector ............................................... 335
Video Splitters and Servers ................................................................... 341
Serial Splitters, Converters and Interfaces ............................................ 345
Industrial Gigabit Ethernet to Fiber Converter IMC-101G ..................... 353
Autopilots ......................................................................................................... 356

Autopilot Yokogawa PT5000A............................................................... 356
Autopilot Raytheon NP 2025 ................................................................. 359
Autopilot EMRI SEM200........................................................................ 361
Autopilot NAVIS AP3000 ....................................................................... 365
Chapter 4. Interface Capabilities.......................................................................... 367
General ............................................................................................................ 369
Format of Data Exchange Used in Accordance with IEC61162-1 Standard ... 370
Input....................................................................................................... 370
Format of Input Data ............................................................................. 371
Output .................................................................................................... 380
Format of Output Data ........................................................................... 380
Universal AIS Transponder Interface .............................................................. 387
Description of Universal AIS Transponder Interface ............................. 387
NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange Format ........................................................ 409
NMEA Format ........................................................................................ 409
ASCII Format ......................................................................................... 410
Description of the MFD and Rhotheta RT-202 RDF Interface......................... 411
Annex A .................................................................................................................. 413
Annex B .................................................................................................................. 417
Annex C .................................................................................................................. 457
Annex D .................................................................................................................. 469
Annex E .................................................................................................................. 483
Annex F .................................................................................................................. 487
Annex G .................................................................................................................. 559
Annex H .................................................................................................................. 585
Annex I.................................................................................................................... 597
Annex J................................................................................................................... 607
Annex K .................................................................................................................. 633
Annex L .................................................................................................................. 645
Annex M.................................................................................................................. 655
Annex N .................................................................................................................. 663
Annex O .................................................................................................................. 673
Annex P .................................................................................................................. 681
Annex Q .................................................................................................................. 697
Annex R .................................................................................................................. 723
PREAMBLE
Copyright Transas MIP Ltd., 2012
Warnings and Cautions
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This document is intended for use by service engineers only, providing installation or
service for Transas MIP Ltd. navigation systems, and holding Transas MIP Ltd.
certificates for aforementioned works.
WARNING!
Important Note!
For correct operation, please, read this document and instruction manual supplied
by the scanner manufacturer carefully, before operating the equipment.
WARNING!
Lethal Voltage Hazard!
Inside the equipment and in the cables lethal voltage hazard is present. When
access covers are removed, lethal voltages may be exposed. Some capacitors used
in the equipment, take several minutes to discharge their stored voltages after
the switching OFF, this is a lethal voltage hazard. Always set the supply switch-fuse
to OFF and remove the fuses, before removing the access covers of the equipment.
Cables must be connected to the power supplies only provided with grounding.
Cables must not have damaged insulation and must exclude contact with parts
conducting current.
WARNING!
Health Hazard!
When cleaning the inside of the equipment, take care not to inhale dust. The dust is
a temporary health hazard, depending on individual allergies.
Units radiate heat and must be installed in such way that free air circulation is ensured.
It is necessary to strictly follow the requirements set forth in the operation manuals
for computers and systems peripheral devices.
CAUTION!
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSDs)!
The equipment may contain ESSDs. Take care not to damage these devices
by discharge of electrostatic voltages.
Preamble
High Voltage
Radar equipment requires the use of high voltages. This can cause injury, or loss
of life. Danger exists only when the units are opened, exposing internal circuits,
as when servicing the equipment. You do not face any danger during normal
operation. The Radar System has been carefully designed to protect personnel
from possible injury from high voltages at normal operation.
Nevertheless, it is recommended that the Line Switch always be opened as an
added protection when inspecting or servicing the equipment.
Although every effort has been made to eliminate danger to personnel, no responsibility
is accepted for any injury or loss of life suffered in connection with the equipment.
X-Ray Radiation
X-Ray Radiation may be generated by S-band Transceiver units and care must be
taken to avoid possible harmful effects when they are opened for maintenance.
When power is on, care should be taken not to approach closer than 1 ft. or less,
from the unit unless front cover is in place.
Radio-Frequency Radiation
Harmful effects (particularly to the eyes) may be caused by exposure of any part of
the human body to radio-frequency mean power densities in excess of 100 mW/cm2.
This power density is exceeded at a distance of 1 ft. or less, from the 12 ft X-Band
aerial (when stationary).
Hazard distances at which power densities of 100 W/m2, 50 W/m2 and 10 W/m2
exist, are given in the following tables:
Table 1. Radio-frequency radiation levels for 12/25 kW SRT scanners
TX/RX Peak
Power/Transmission
Band
Antenna Type
Distance to 100
2
W/m point (m)
Distance to 50
2
W/m point (m)
Distance to 10
2
W/m point (m)
25 KW X-Band
6-feet
9-feet
0.1 m
N/A
0.2 m
0.1 m
1.3 m
1.0 m
12 kW X-Band
6-feet
9-feet
N/A
N/A
0.15 m
N/A
0.6 m
0.5 m
Table 2. Radio-frequency radiation levels for 10 kW scanner

TX/RX Peak
Power/Transmission Band
Antenna Type
Distance to
2
100 W/m point (m)
Distance to
2
10 W/m point (m)
10 kW X-Band
Open array 6-feet
0.06 m
0.9 m
The system is however designed to disable radiation when the antenna is not
rotating.
The pedestals have also been predisposed for the installation of an external safety
switch, which can be mounted on, or near the platform. This switch removes power
from the pedestal eliminating the possibility of accidental operation during servicing
and also causes disabling of transmission.
Whenever it is necessary to disconnect the waveguide system from a radar transmitter
for maintenance purpose, the transmitter output should, when practicable, be terminated
in a matched load. If this is not possible, care should be taken to avoid standing in front
of an open-ended waveguide from which power is being radiated.
NEVER look down a waveguide from which power is being radiated.
Safety Switch
The Radar unit is provided with a safety switch, which disable the Antenna
movement during maintenance operations and avoids high voltage damage. Always
turn the safety switch off, whenever advised in this manual (for instance, before
performing any maintenance or installation procedure). Ignoring safety switch
operation may produce hazard of electrocution as well as other severe injuries.
Compass Safety Distance

Every unit should be located outside the minimum magnetic compass safe distance.
Compass safety distance for the scanner units are provided in the table below.
Table 3. Compass safety distance for the scanner units
Type of the scanner
Compass safety distance (m)

To Standard Compass
Steering Compass
12/25 kW Transceiver
SRT Adapter Box
1.35
1.2
0.85
0.5
10 kW Transceiver
1.0
0.95
BridgeMaster E X-Band Scanner

Unit 10 kW
1.4
0.8
Compass safety distance for the PC and monitors are provided in the table below:
Table 4. Compass safety distance for the PC and monitors
Type of equipment
Compass safety distance (m)

To Standard Compass
Steering Compass
PC RS6
0.7
0.5
PC RS6B
0.85
0.85
19 TFT Display JH19T14
1.6
1.05
1.6
1.05
TBD
TBD
0.5
0.3
Equipment Mean Time between Failure (MTBF)

MTBF are provided in the tables below:
Table 5. WS parts required for periodic replacement
Type of eguipment
RS6
computer
Interval
Part type
Part number
Fan Processing unit Chasse
50000 hrs
PSD1206PTB1-A
18131201
Fan Processing unit CPU
50000 hrs
KDE1208PFV
18131202
50000 hrs
KDE1204PKV2
18131203
RS6B computer
Fan Processing unit GPU
62837 hrs
MC-4506 (TMIRS6B) V1.x
1813500
UPS Battery
5 years
QUINT-BAT/
24DC/3.4AH
18162302
Table 6. Scanners parts required for periodic replacement

Type of equipment
Model No.
Magnetron
Interval
SRT X-Band, Up Mast

SRT X-Band, Up Mast
SRT/25-002/25 kW
JRC M1475A, E2V MG5424*
8000 hrs
SRT/12-002/12,5 kW
JRC MSF1425A, E2V MG4010
8000 hrs
S-Band, Up Mast
09N-011/30 kW
JRC M1302L/M5020
8000 hrs
X-Band, Down Mast
09N-009/25 kW
JRC M1475A, E2V MG5424*
5000 hrs
S-Band, Down Mast
09N-010/30 kW
JRC M1302L/M5020
5000 hrs
Note: Both 25 kW magnetrons for the SRT transceivers are only permitted
in combination with 9.4 GHz band rejection filter.
Preamble
Warranty Conditions
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
The guarantee will not apply if the system has been used improperly, i.e. the system
is found to have been operated in a manner other than that set out in the user
manuals, or if the system has been connected or adjusted in ways other than
described and recommended in technical and/or installation manuals.
Users shall pay special attention to the following, to avoid damaging the system
and voiding the guarantee. Users shall not:
10
Expose the system to any liquids, including but not limited to tea, coffee, juices,
soft drinks or chemical cleaners.
Expose the system to fire, or to temperatures that exceed the normal operating
conditions specified for the system.
Expose the system to improper or insufficient ventilation by obstructing

ventilation holes, fans, etc., or by mounting the equipment in such a way that
proper ventilation cannot be achieved.
Expose the system to incorrect line voltages, voltage spikes, or use incorrect fuses.
Replace whole or part of the system or components of the system with parts
not specified, approved or certified by Transas or its sub manufacturers, without
prior Transas written approval.
Expose the system to violent movements, excessive vibration or any situation

where physical damage results.
Connect any type of storage device or data media that contains a virus or other
malware that can damage the system. It is the customers obligation to check
prior to connection that any such device or media does not contain any virus
or malware.
Install any applications or software on the system besides what has been
supplied by Transas, without prior written approval from Transas.
How to Use This Manual
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual is intended for use by service engineers. It should be used in
conjunction with other related documents (for the full list). The structure of this
manual and layout of the pages can help you to find the information that need.
Chapter 1
Hardware Installation.
Chapter 2
System Settings.
Chapter 3
Technical Specification.
Chapter 4
Interface Capabilities.
Annex A
Additional Information on Ports Interfaces.
Annex B
Additional Settings for Navi-Conning 4000.
Annex C
Commissioning Table.
Annex D
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector Adjustment.
Annex E
Upgrade RS3/RS4 to RS6/RS6B Computers.
Annex F
Transas Scanners Installation and Adjustment.
Annex G
Scanners Cables Handling.
Annex H
Scanners 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast Diagrams.
Annex I
Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast Diagrams.
Annex J
Scanners SRT 12/25 kW and 30 kW S-Band Down Mast

Diagrams.
Annex K
Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast Diagrams.
Annex L
Scanner BridgeMaster E 10 kW X-Band Up Mast Diagrams.
Annex M
Scanner Navico BR24 Broadband Diagrams.
Annex N
Transas Network 12/25 kW Scanners Up Mast Diagrams.
Annex O
MFD Power Supply Distribution Diagrams.
Annex P
NS 4000 Dual ECDIS Diagrams.
Annex Q
MFD Additional Diagrams.
Annex R
System Certificates.
Preamble
11
List of Documents
LIST OF DOCUMENTS
Multi-Functional Display (v.2.00.330). ECDIS User Manual.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). RADAR User Manual.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). Functional Description.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). Additional Functions.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). ECDIS Quick Reference.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). RADAR Quick Reference.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). Installation Guide.
Multi-Functional Display (v. 2.00. 330). Utilities.
Navi-Sailor 4100 ECDIS (v. 2.00. 330). Special Functions.
ABBREVIATIONS IN USE
12
AIS Automated Identification System;
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aids;
BRG Bearing;
COG Course Over Ground;
CPA Closest Point of Approach;
CTW Course Over the Water;
DGPS Differential Global Positioning System;
DIS Draught Information System;
DR Dead Reckoning;
EBL Electronic Bearing Line;
ECDIS Electronic Chart Display Information System;
ENC Electronic Navigational Chart;
GPS Global Positioning System;
GND Ground;
HDG Heading;
HL Head Line;
HO Hydrographic Office;
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission;
IHO International Hydrographic Organization;
IMO International Maritime Organization;
LP Long Pulse;
m metre;
min minute;
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identities;
MFD Multi-Functional Display;
Abbreviations in Use
MP Medium Pulse;
MSC Maritime Safety Committee (IMO);
NAVTEX Navigational Telex;
NM nautical mile;
NR Navi-Radar;
NS Navi-Sailor;
OS Operating System;
PM Performance Monitor;
PPI Plan Position Indicator;
RAM Random Access Memory;
RIB Radar Integrated Board;
RM Relative Motion;
RNG Range;
ROT Rate Of Turn;
sec second;
SENC System Electronic Navigational Chart;
SOG Speed Over Ground;
SP Short Pulse;
STW Speed Through Water;
TE Test Environment;
TGT Target;
TM True Motion;
UTC Universal Time Coordinated;
VDR Voyage Data Recorder;
VRM Variable Range Marker;
WPT Waypoint;
WS Workstation;
XTD Cross Track Distance.
Preamble
13
Printing House Conventions
PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS
14
Sample of notation
Usage comments
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V. 2.00. 330). INSTALLATION
GUIDE
To highlight names of documents
RS6B Computer
To highlight sections of a document
ECDIS
To highlight, in a printed document, user interface

elements and the MFD objects
Setup.exe
To highlight messages, commands, files, and other

Windows OS information
<Enter>
To highlight names of keyboard keys
Tasks
To highlight names of windows, pages, buttons, etc.
START\CONTROL PANEL\REGIONAL AND

LANGUAGE OPTIONS
To highlight menu items
C:
To highlight a path to the menu, file, etc.
CHAPTER 1
Hardware Installation
MFD Hardware and Software Requirements
MFD HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

ATTENTION!
The use of this computer for other purposes is discouraged. Other programs loaded
in RAM may adversely affect the video plotters operation.
Hardware Requirements
PC RS6B Computer Basic Configuration (see paragraph RS6B Computer

of the Chapter 3):
CPU: Intel Core i5 520E 2.4GHz;
Chipset: Intel QM57;
RAM: 2 GB DDR3 SDRAM;
Video: Intel HD Graphics;
Storage: SSD/HDD 60GB.
PC RS6 Computer Basic Configuration (see paragraph RS6 Computer

of the Chapter 3):
CPU: Intel Core2 CPU T7400 2.16GHz;
Chipset: Intel 945GME;
RAM: 1 x DDR2 SO-DIMM 2 GB;
Video: NVIDIA GeForce 9600M GT (512 MB);
Storage: Fujitsu MHV2080BH 80GB G2;
Devices with removable storage: Optiarc CD-RW CRX880A.
PC TPC24 Computer (see paragraph TPC24 Computer of the Chapter 3) for

Planing Station and for Back of the Bridge Station (BOB) in the configuration
with Dual ECDIS:
CPU: DualCore Intel Celeron P4505 (2MB cache, 1.86 GHz);
System Chipset: Intel BD82QM57;
Video Chipset: Intel Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0;
Storage: 1 x 250GB HDD.
Monitors: Jakob Hatteland LCD Maritime Multi Displays (MMD) (see paragraph
Transas Monitors of the Chapter 3).
Keyboard: Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboards (see paragraph Transas ES6

Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball of the Chapter 3).
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit: UPS6 (see paragraph Uninterruptible Power
Supply Unit UPS6 of the Chapter 3).
Operational System Requirements

Operational System Windows XP Pro Service Pack 2 or 3 + DirectX version at
least 9.0, or Windows 7 Pro SP1, English version.
Chapter 1. Hardware Installation
17
MFD Physical Layout
MFD PHYSICAL LAYOUT

MFD is a combined hard- and software system consisting of up
to 5 workstations, sensors interfaces (serial connection or via NMEA distributors),
interfaces with radar scanners, and network.
The following elements are included in the MFD:
Workstation 1;
Workstation 2;
Workstation 3;
Workstation 4;
Workstation 5;
Sensors interface;
Double network.
MFD hardware installation procedure includes modules installation and connection

them to the system.
MFD display must be installed by taking into consideration the following:
Install the display unit so that the user can easily conduct observations.
To reduce effect on the magnetic compass, install the display unit more than one
meter away from the compass.
Take precautions to prevent water from splashing through the window or door
of the bridge onto the display unit.
Install the display unit by considering convenience of maintenance.
Install the LCD monitor so that when the user is looking ahead, the lookout view is
not obscured.
Install the unit away from direct sunlight and heat source.
In MFD four screen colour palettes are used to suit the outside illumination.
The brilliance and contrast controls serve for setting the most suitable radar image
in order to reduce the operator fatigue.
The nominal viewing distance for the display equipment is 1 metre.
Fig. 1. Operator normal viewing distance
18
Console Installation
CONSOLE INSTALLATION
Pre-Installation Requirements
When installing the console, it is necessary to take the following into account:
The console is intended for on-deck installation;
The signal and power supply cables are fed to the console from the bottom;
The distance between the console and the compass should be at least 1.4 m
(compass safe distance);
The distance between the console and the heaters should be at least 1 m;
The console should be installed in a place with sufficient cooling and ventilation.
It is also necessary to take into account the operating modes of the equipment installed
in the console.
Table 7. Operating modes of the equipment installed in the console
Operating temperature range
Vibration levels
At relative humidity 0%
-15C to +55C
At relative humidity 95%
+40C
1 to 12.5 Hz
With excursion 1.6 mm
12.5 to 25 Hz
25 to 50 Hz
To a constant maximum acceleration of 10 m/s
Before installing the console, check that there is sufficient space before its front
panel for the normal operator work.
Console Mounting
Feed all the necessary cables through the console bottom part. Install the console
as shown in the drawing below.
Fig. 2. 23 Deck mount console installation
19
Fig. 3. 27 Deck mount console installation
Fig. 4. 23 Desk mount console installation
20
Fig. 5. 19 Desk mount console installation
Fig. 6. 19/26 Deck mount console 6 installation
After the installation, check that the console has reliable earthing.
21
Console Ventilation
For ventilation in deck mount consoles, fan and temperature sensor are used:
Fan for Consoles, 24V DC, 120x120mm Part No.: 18011802;
Temperature Sensor Part No.: 18011803.
Connect directly to the WAGO terminal:
Fig. 7. Fan connection
For cutout and mechanical mounting, see technical drawing below:
Fig. 8. Fan dimensional drawing
22
Installation of Transas Network Scanners

12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast
INSTALLATION OF TRANSAS NETWORK SCANNERS

12/25 KW X-BAND UP MAST
Introduction
This section describes all the procedures required for the correct installation and
performance check of SU70-14E/S (12kW) and SU70-25E/S (25kW) Type Approved
(TA) scanner units. These units can be connected to MFD system for radar
presentation and management through the Ethernet connection. The video signal
acquisition is realized inside the scanner unit and it is available via Ethernet on UDP
protocol.
The standard configuration supplied is the following:
Scanner unit: SU70-14E/S (12 kW), or SU70-25E/S (25 kW);
Antenna unit: AU11-06N - 6 feet, or AU11-07N - 7.5 feet;
Performance Monitor: PM 30-02 (optional);
Power and shielded Ethernet cables.
The diagrams of connection between the scanner and MFD console are provided in
Annex N. For scanner cables handling, see Annex G, paragraph General.
Technical specification of the 12/25 kW (also 4 kW SU78-14E/S non-TA) scanners is
presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
Mechanical Installation
The mechanical installation of SU70-14E/S and SU70-25E/S scanner units consists
of fitting and fixing the unit.
The installation area should not be subject to high temperatures or excessive vibrations.
Fixing must be carried out to allow easy access to the unit for assuring the easiest
managment of the maintenance operations.
Dimensions and weight are specified in the figure below.
Fig. 9. Scanner unit dimensions
23

Scanner Unit Installation

Avoid hoisting the SU70-14E/S and SU70-25E/S antenna blocks by taking them
from the array.
Fig. 10. Scanner unit hoisting
The scanner units SU70-14E/S and SU70-25E/S equipped with 6 ft or 7.5 ft array
are endowed with a local safety switch. Such switch inhibits the rotation and the
transmission of the scanner unit and is used when maintenance interventions are
carried out on the antenna or near it. This switch is used to enable (ON) / disable
(OFF) the rotation antenna (see the figure below).
When the safety switch is enabled, no operation performed from the master display
can enable the rotation and/or the radar transmission.
Note: During normal operating conditions as well as during maintenance, the engine
can be quickly disconnected from its power line by setting OFF the safety
switch.
Fig. 11. Safety switch
If not already available, realize a suitable platform for housing the transceiver with 6
or 7.5 ft array.
Such platform must allow to easily lay out the interconnection cable and to
comfortably perform the possible maintenance activities.
Besides, the platform must allow the array free rotation on the 360. Therefore,
make sure that no obstacles exist in the immediate closeness. For this purpose,
refer to the overall dimensions reported in the installation drawings (see the figure
above).
24

Drill the platform by using the drilling template supplied as an outfit of the scanner
unit.
Make sure that the holes machined on the platform are as parallel as possible with
respect to the ship head-stern line.
Besides, make sure that the scanner unit orientation, when the mechanical
installation is completed, corresponds to that reported in the figure below:
Fig. 12. Scanner unit orientation
Carefully open the package and position the scanner unit on the platform. Unscrew
the four screws fastening the scanner unit upper part and lift it.
Fig. 13. Scanner unit installation
Align the holes of the scanner unit lower part with the holes machined on the
platform. Secure the scanner unit to the platform by means of the 4 bolts and nuts
supplied in the delivery, by using a 17 mm wrench and by applying a force
comprehended between 20 Nm and 30 Nm. The supplied M10x60 mm bolts are fit
for realizing a mounting on a platform having a maximum thickness of 10 mm. For
the assembly, carefully observe the following instructions.
25

Fig. 14. Scanner unit installation scheme
Lay out the interconnection cable between the display and the antenna, by taking
into consideration that on the scanner unit side (J7, J8A), the cable is already
connected inside the same one.
Antenna Mechanical Installation

Remove the protection placed on the input in wave guide of the rotary joint.
Fig. 15. Protective cover removal
Make sure that the o-ring at the array base is correctly positioned, and grease, by
using silicon grease, the o-ring and the array base, as per the figure below:
Fig. 16. Greasing
26

Position the 6 or 7.5 ft array on the scanner unit, by letting the part in wave guide of
the same scanner unit coincide with the part in wave guide of the array, and tighten
the four M8x35mm fastening screws supplied as an outfit, by using a 13 mm wrench
and by applying a force up to 15 Nm.
Fig. 17. Antenna unit installation
Scanner Unit Grounding

In order to avoid interferences and electric shocks, always connect the scanner unit
to the ship grounding plant.
Connect the ground point of the scanner unit to the ship grounding plant, by using
the 4 mm yellow-green cable ready for use and supplied together with the kit.
Fig. 18. Grounding
If no ground point is available near the scanner unit, it will be necessary to realize it.
Unavoidable condition is that the platform is metal-realized and that there is an
electric continuity with the metal structure of the remaining hull.
The first method is to drill the platform and to get through it by means of a M10 x 30
mm bolt, on which an end of the ground cable will be connected. Protect the ground
terminal with sealing silicon.
Fig. 19. First method of grounding
27

The second method is to weld on the platform, on the head side, a M10 x 30 mm
bolt, to which an end of the ground cable will be connected. Protect the ground
terminal with sealing silicon.
Fig. 20. Second method of grounding
Electrical Installation
Electrical Installation of Scanner Unit
The SU70-14E/S and SU70-25E/S transceivers require that the plant is power
supplied by a +24VDC voltage.
The electric installation of the scanner units SU70-14E/S and SU70-25E/S only
requires that the supplied interconnection cable is correctly connected. Carefully
observe the following instructions, in order to realize the required connections.
1. Once the scanner unit is mechanically secured to the platform, unscrew the
screws fastening the upper cover of the same one by using a 13 mm wrench,
and open it:
28

2. Unscrew the scanner unit stuffing tube by using a 30 mm wrench and remove
the protecting plug inside it:
3. Let the interconnection cable pass through the stuffing tube of the scanner unit.
Secure the cable gauze to the antenna block chassis. Lock the cable inside the
scanner unit, by using the purposed cable-fasteners:
4. Connect the interconnection cable wires to the J8A terminal board, as reported
in the Table 28 and in the figure below. In order to facilitate the connecting
operations, J8A can be removed from its seat and then repositioned; the
terminal board is realized in such a way, not to allow any insertion errors:
29

5. Connect the J7 connector to the J7 connector of the card ST850:
6. Reposition J8A into its original seat. Lightly tighten the stuffing tube of the
scanner unit, in order to assure the seal, by applying a force not exceeding
15 Nm. Reposition the upper cover of the scanner unit and screw down again
the clamping screws, by applying a force not exceeding 10 Nm:
Connections of Scanner Unit

Table 8. J7 connector of scanner unit
SU70-25E/S,
SU70-14E/S,
SU78-14E/S
J7
RJ45
30
Function
Conductor conductor
section (sq. mm)
Destination
To RJ45
TXD+
WHITE/GREEN 0.22
TXD-
GREEN 0.22
To RJ45
RXD+
WHITE/ORANGE 0.22
To RJ45
RXD-
ORANGE 0.22
To RJ45

Table 9. J8A terminal board of scanner unit
SU70-25E/S,
SU70-14E/S,
SU78-14E/S
J8A
Terminal board
Function
Conductor conductor
section (sq. mm)
Destination
P_MOT
AWG20
To power supply # 1*
N_MOT
AWG20
15
+24V
AWG20
17
+24V
AWG20
19
GND
AWG20
21
GND
AWG20
23
ENABLE
AWG22
To safety switch
24
ENAB_RET
AWG22
To safety switch
Note: * - The two feedings needed, can come from the same power supply.
Signal Description
Table 10. Interface signals
Name
Description
Value/features
P_MOT
Positive motor power supply
+24 VDC +/- 20 %

I = 0.3 A (typical), 10 A (peak)
N_MOT
Negative motor power supply
-24 VDC +/- 20 %

I = 0.3 A (typical), 10 A (peak)
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
+24 V
+24 VDC voltage
TXD+, TXD-, RXD+, RXD-
Ethernet 100BASE-T interface
ENABLE, ENABLE_RET
Enable / disable switch
24 VDC +/- 10 %
I = 1 A (typical), 1.5 A (peak)
Contact closure
Table 11. Suitable frequencies for the TRG trigger signal

Pulse Width
(for SU70-14E/S)
SHORT
(80 ns)
MEDIUM
(200 ns)
LONG
(400 ns)
EXTRALONG
(800 ns)
PRF
(for SU70-14E/S)
FAST
(3200 Hz)
MEDIUM
(1600 Hz)
SLOW
(800 Hz)
VERY SLOW
(500 Hz)
Pulse Width
(for SU70-25E/S)
SHORT
(80 ns)
MEDIUM
(200 ns)
LONG
(400 ns)
EXTRALONG
(800 ns)
PRF
(for SU70-25E/S)
FAST
(2000 Hz)
MEDIUM
(1000 Hz)
SLOW
(750 Hz)
VERY SLOW
(500 Hz)
Antenna Speed Control

For open array, speed control is available with S10 jumper on processor board
(1-2 normal, 2-3 high). High-speed engine is needed for 36RPM in open array.
Performance Monitor PM 30-02 Installation

The standard configuration of PM 30-02 supplied is the following:
Sensor unit: SPM-010;
Power supply unit: APM-030;
Interconnection cable (between SPM-010 and APM-030): EH087818.
31

The mechanical installation consists of fitting and fixing the unit.
The installation area should not be subjected to high temperatures or excessive
vibrations.
Fixing should be carried out to allow easy access to the unit for assuring the easiest
performance of maintenance operations.
For the mechanical installation, place the SPM-010 unit opposite the radar antenna
(see the picture below) and APM-030 unit near to MFD consol.
Fig. 21. Performance monitor installation requirements
Dimensions and weights of performance monitor units are specified in the following
pictures:
APM-030:
Fig. 22. APM-030 unit dimensions
32

SPM-010:
Fig. 23. SPM-010 unit dimensions
It is recommended that SPM-010 unit should not be fixed finally until after the installation
procedure is completed, as, to reduce the effect of probable environment-caused
reflections on the radar antenna, it could be necessary to change the position of this unit.
For electrical installation of Performance Monitor units see the following tables and
Scanner 10 kW X-Band Up Mast Units. Connection Diagram presented in Annex H.
Table 12. Connection of APM-030 unit J1 for power supply
APM-030 J1
NUVAL 3p.p.p.
Function
Conductor
24 VDC
AWG18
24 VDC
AWG18
GROUND
AWG18
Table 13. Connection of APM-030 unit J2 connector for remote switching

APM-030 J2
030J2HRS 3p.p.s.
Function
Conductor
NO
AWG20
COM
AWG20
Table 14. Connection between APM-030 unit J3 connector and SPM-010 (through cable gland)
APM-030 J3
NUVAL 3p.p.p.
Function
Conductor
SPM-010 CABLE
GLAND (NH6 of PM510)
V12P
AWG20
GND
AWG20
V12N
AWG20
VEE
AWG20
TX_LEVEL
AWG20
RX_LEVEL
AWG20
33

Performance Monitor Mode Setup

Perform the following procedure:
Connect the sensor cable to J3 connector of APM-030 unit;
Connect the contact switch cable to J2 connector;
Supply 24V DC to J1 connector.
The contact switch is used for the remote switching on/off of the equipment.
For this reason the switch on APM-030 should be set to OFF.
Switch on the radar and performance monitor and wait for at least 30 minutes
to allow both systems to get temperature stabilised.
Switch the radar transmission to 24 NM range and check that it is at the maximum tune.
Due to the reflections from the obstacles nearest to the radar antenna,
the presentation of 4 markers may appear outlined; in order to improve the image
of the markers, rotate slightly the SPM-010 unit around the scanner unit axis.
VR2 trimmer allows fine tuning of the performance monitor thus optimising
the image of markers on the display.
The markers intensity can be varied by using VR2 trimmer; to do this, the radar receiver
gain should best be adjusted after the warm-up, to obtain a floor noise just visible.
Now keep rotating VR2 trimmer clockwise until the marker farthest from the centre
is barely distinguishable from the floor noise.
VR1 enables adjustment of the markers distance from the display centre;
as it is rotated clockwise, the markers come nearer to the centre at a step of 2 NM.
The distance from the display centre to the innermost marker should be adjusted
to 14 NM during the normal transmitter operation; the radar VRM should be moved
to 14 NM for reference.
Now rotate VR1 trimmer counter clockwise until the stop, the 4 markers will appear
close the centre with the angular width reduced. Slowly rotate VR1 clockwise until
the innermost marker shifts from 12 NM to 14 NM. If the marker distance from the
display centre is always 14 NM and fails to decrease by with the use of VR1 trimmer
(the SPM-010 unit picks up a signal which is too strong), it is necessary try to lower
the position of SPM-010 relative to the radar antenna, or to reduce the relative
distance, or to vary the SPM-010 inclination.
And the other way round, if you fail to put the markers to a distance of 14 NM
(SPM-010 unit picks up a signal which too weak), try to vary the distance of
SPM-010 unit from the radar antenna.
Now the installation is completed; close APM-030 unit with special clamping screws.
34
Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast
INSTALLATION OF SCANNER 30 KW S-BAND UP MAST

Introduction
This section describes all the procedures required for the correct installation
and performance check of the scanner units. The diagram of connection between
the scanner and MFD console is provided in MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast.
Block Diagram, and MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram
(see Annex I).
Technical specification of the scanner is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
S-Band scanner 30 kW with up mast transceiver location and 12 feet-long antenna
is used for work with the MFD application. The characteristics of the 30 kW
S-Band/U Antenna Group are given in the table below:
Table 15. S-Band/U Antenna Group specification
Dimensions
Length/
Width/Height
Weight
Power
Swing
circle with
12 feet
antenna
Operating
temperature
Relative
humidity
9594811000 mm
165 kg
pedestal with
transceiver
90 kg
antenna
220/380 VAC,
3 Ph, 50 Hz or
255/440 VAC
3 Ph, 60 Hz
3700 mm
-25C+55C
Up to 95%
at +40C
The transceiver is powered from ships supply via External Power Supply unit.
For more detailed description of the scanner installation procedure, see scanners
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL document. This document is supplied as
part of the equipment delivery set.
ATTENTION!
Special attention should be paid to the scanner antenna and transceiver installation
requirements set forth in the aforementioned document.
The 30 kW S-Band Up Mast Antenna Group consists of following units and type
designations:
Turning Unit with 30 kW Transceiver: 03R-039/B with 09N-011;
Transceiver Power Supply: 16PS-003;
12 feet Antenna: 02R-039/B;
Performance Monitor (PM) Arm: 303813A1;
Safety Switch: 74X376P001.
Handling
The antenna and the pedestal must be run up the mast separately and then
assembled.
The pedestal with attached transceiver is lifted by crane. Use slings attached
to the four eyebolts fitted on top of the pedestal.
Minimum angle at the base is 60.
35
The pedestal contains delicate electronic components handle accordingly.

The antenna is also lifted by crane using its two eye-bolts. The antenna surface
is sensitive to impacts and pressure. Any deformation of the antenna surface can
reduce the radar performance.
Fig. 24. Lifting by crane
Installation Principles
In order to obtain the best radar performance and accessibility, the following
precautions should be used:
Space for the antenna to swing freely;
Safety and easy access for maintenance purposes. It is preferable

to use a platform with safety handrail;
Fig. 25. Suggested masthead antenna mounting
36
The antenna to be accessible in all directions;
Avoid exposure to exhaust fumes from the funnel;
Avoid strong vibrations;
Avoid interference between two antennas;
Avoid obstacles in the radar beam, especially ahead of athwart ships directions.
If two radar sets are installed, their antennas should be installed on different levels.
The antennas can be mounted either on a single mast construction, so they are
on top of each-other, as illustrated in picture above, or the antennas can be mounted
on a platform, one on portside and one on starboard side.
Fig. 26. Suggested antenna mounting
The following formula and drawing, as illustrated in the picture below, will help you
to determine the correct distance and height between the two radar antennas.
The 25 angle on the drawing is the actual vertical beam-width with a safety margin
included.
Fig. 27. Antennas position
Example:
H=L/3, where:
H Height between the two antennas;
L Distance between the two antennas.
If the distance L is 6 m, then the height should be 6/3 = 2 m.
Blind sectors towards the bow and within a few degrees on port and/or starboard
side caused by the structure of the ship must be avoided with great care. In case
of a blind sector at the bow in mid-ships position, it is advisable to mount
the antennas on the starboard side of the ships keel-line.
37
When obstacles are sufficiently far from the antenna, they will result in a blind sector
on the radar display with approximately the same amplitude as observed by the human
eye, but these obstacles can produce false echoes. An echo produced by an obstacle
close to the antenna, can be suppressed by reflecting the antenna-beam skywards by
mounting a reflector made of metal. This solution however does not eliminate the blind
sector, but will reduce false echoes produced by the obstacle. The best position for
the reflector can be found by testing out different positions.
It is highly recommended that the shipyard submit the drawings of the radar antenna
position(s) to the manufacturer for approval.
The Installation consists of following basic steps:
Mount the Antenna Pedestal without the antenna on the mast.
Make relevant cable connections.
Install and connect the Performance Monitor Arm.
Install the safety switch.
Mount the Antenna on the Antenna Pedestal.
Note: Antenna Pedestal should be installed in such way that the performance
monitor arm is not facing funnels or other big ships obstruction. Sector
blanking is enabled to prevent false echoes caused by funnels and/or big
ships construction (see above). If performance monitor arm is positioned,
within this blanking area, the pedestal must be turned because the radar
performance monitor is not working where there is no transmission in
the sector of its sensor.
Installation of safety switch is compulsory. It is recommended to be installed at the
bottom of the stairs giving access to the Antenna Pedestal. The waterproof switch
is supplied by manufacturer, but a connection cable (22.5 mm2) should be provided
by the shipyard.
The Antenna Group must be covered by plastic sheet during any painting performed
after the installation.
Note: In no case, the Antenna should be used to hoist the assembly up the mast.
Pedestal with Transceiver

Prepare the platform for mounting of the pedestal, with its built in transceiver.
Hole diameters and distances are evident from the figure.
38
Fig. 28. 30 kW S-Band up mast Antenna Group dimensional drawing
The pedestal should be mounted with its lid hinges pointed forward and cable glands
pointed astern. However the antenna swinging plane must be horizontal in all
directions when ship is upright on even keel. Consider giving ample space for
service, especially astern of the antenna group. If such space cannot be achieved
then contact manufacturer for installation alternatives.
Note: The plastic protection cover on the pedestal rotary joint must not be removed
until just before mounting the antenna. Anyhow the rotary joint must not be left
uncovered when the antenna is not mounted.
Note: The fixing materials to fasten the antenna pedestal to the ships platform
are not provided by the manufacturer. Assuming a platform plate thickness
of 20 mm, four M20 stainless steel bolts of 80 mm length, with relative nuts
grooves and washers, must be used. The tightening couple is 256 Nm.
Antenna
The antenna and the pedestal must be run up the mast separately and then assembled.
The installation procedure of the antenna with fixed coax cable to the antenna
pedestal consists of the following steps:
Remove the bolts from the antenna shaft, which will be used to fasten
the antenna (antenna support) to the pedestal;
The antenna must be lifted in the mounted eye-bolts. Also see above Handling
item;
With the antenna hoisted, lay it on the pedestal matching the six leading bolts
with the relevant wholes, taking care that the front of the antenna is orientated
at the same direction as the arrow on the antenna shaft;
Tighten all antenna attaching bolts. The tightening couple is 130 Nm;
Insert the 90 degrees connector of the antenna coax cable on the rotary joint
connector and secure it by fastening the attaching ring.
39
Safety Switch
Installation of safety switch is compulsory. Standard safety switch delivered with all
S-band is NOT suitable for installation out door in open air.
Preferably switch shall be located inside bridge and close to door, or any other pass
way leading to antenna. If switch must be located outdoors a weather protecting
cover must be manufactured on both sides and top of switch. Any switch without
such cover must be opened and inspected for water ingress and corrosion before
relocated or weather protection is arranged.
The switch must be mounted with the cable glands pointing down. Connect the cable as
described below in paragraph Electrical Installation.
Fig. 29. Safety switch
Performance Monitor Arm

To install the PM arm, proceed as follows:
Open the cover of the pedestal;
Remove the 4 screws securing the small plate on the antenna pedestal;
Install the O-ring on the fixing plate of the PM arm;
Draw the cable from the PM arm through the supporting plastic pipe and through
the hole in the cast wall over the antenna generator disk as evident from the
figure below;
Mount the PM arm angled upwards;
Connect the cable as described below in paragraph Electrical Installation.
Fig. 30. Pedestal
40
External S-Band Power Supply Unit (PSU)

The External S-band PSU is producing the 70 VDC and 12 VAC power for 30 kW
S-band Transceiver used in both up and down version, and also for the 3-phase power
to Antenna Motor with a Torque Reducer and Antenna Start Circuit. The External
S-Band PSU is also the interconnection between the Transceiver and the RIB6 unit.
Installation Principles
The unit must be installed in an operative room or area protected against external
weather conditions and far from heaters or any warm surface. The interconnecting
cables shall be located in the best way and not obstructing the area. Special care
is required to guarantee access for maintenance actions during the unit operation;
therefore is mandatory to evaluate, as appropriate, free surrounding space
requirements.
To obtain the best working conditions we recommend that the room/area is provided
with an air conditioning system and also to guarantee a comfortable ambient to
operative and maintenance personnel. Temperature and Relative Humidity shall be
kept within the limits of the Environmental Data as described in Chapter 3.
Mechanical installation
The S-Band PSU can be installed in the electrical locker, or in other accessible
location on the bridge, respecting the environmental conditions. The PSU shall be
mounted by using the four holes in the PSU corners. Bolts/screws used, must be of
stainless steel M8. Tightening couple is 22 Nm. Dimensions are evident from figure
below.
Fig. 31. External PSU 16PS-003 dimensions
For connections see MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram
enclosed in Annex I.
41
Antenna Group
Pedestal is equipped with a three phase motor powered by the Transformer in
the Transceiver. The motor windings should be connected either in a star or in a triangle
configuration depending on the mains voltage available, in the following manner:
3220V 50 Hz or 3255V 60 Hz;
Y 3380V 50 Hz or 3440V 60 Hz.
Note: Motors are set by the Manufacturer for 3x380V 50 Hz main supply.
The motor setting can be modified according to the ships supply on
the motor terminal board.
The electrical installation of the 30 kW S-Band/U Antenna Group consists of cabling
and connection to terminals, as described below:
Normally the cable (16 core+3 Coax), P/N 55M455P002(3), is delivered to a length
of 60 m. The multi-core cable includes wires for Power, Video, Trigger and Antenna
data. It shall be used for connection between the Antenna Group and the External
S-Band PSU, as well as for connection between the External S-Band PSU and
the RIB6 unit. It is required to handle this cable with particular care (see Annex G
paragraph Multi-core Cable 55M455P002(3) Handling). The antenna end of
the multi-core cable shall be connected to (see figure below):
TB 9&10 and J1/J3 on the RTM Control B Board in the transceiver and
according to separate system drawings relevant to the application of the 30 kW
S-Band/U Antenna Group;
TB Filter at the inside bottom of the pedestal chassis for the 3 phase motor
power cores;
TB 1 at the inside left bottom of the transceiver chassis, according to system

drawings relevant to the application of the 30 kW S-Band/U Antenna Group.
Terminals, clamps and connectors etc. included in the Installation Kit must be used.
Content of the installation Kit can vary depending on the Application of the 30 kW
S-Band Antenna Group. E.g., if multi-core cable is already terminated in factory
corresponding parts are excluded.
42
Fig. 32. Antenna Group terminals drawing
Safety Switch
For electric connection of the safety switch, make the following actions:
Check the safety switch is placed as described in paragraph Mechanical Installation;
Connect the two poles of the safety switch to TB1 SF/SFR placed down left at
the inside of the transceiver chassis;
The cable gland not used must be properly sealed;
Make sure carefully that the switch is closed in I (On) position and open
in 0 (Off) position.

For electric connection of performance monitor arm, make the following actions:
After mounting the PM arm, as described in paragraph Mechanical Installation,

connect the PM arm cable to the plug and put it in the socket
at TB1 RM/RM05 on the ANT.SIGN.PCB placed at the inside bottom
of the pedestal chassis.
External S-Band Power Supply Unit

The Multi-core cable P/N 55M455P002(3) to the Transceiver/Antenna Group shall be
connected to TB2 on the Transformer Assembly and to TB4, J1 and J3 on
the RTMS power supply board. The Multi-core cable to the RIB6 unit shall be
connected to TB6, J2 and J4 on the RTMS power supply board.
The 220/380 AC 50 Hz or 244/440 AC 60 Hz 3 phases from the ship shall be
connected to TB2 on the Filter Assy:
43
Fig. 33. S-Band PSU terminals drawing
Grounding
For grounding the Pedestal connect a tinned braided copper wire (>25 mm2) between
the Ground Terminal on the Antenna Pedestal and the radar mast.
The grounding points of the External S-Band PSU are located at bottom of the unit.
The ground binding strap should be a tinned braided copper wire (>25mm2)
connected to the ships ground.
Installation Check-Out
After wiring connections, before closing the antenna pedestal and remounting the
External PSU cover, following procedures and controls must be carried out to prevent
any failure due to incorrect installation:
Clean the circuit boards with an antistatic brush;
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any possible particles from the cabinets;
Check for proper cable bends to assure a proper amount of slack;
Check that ground connections are dully tightened as well as terminal

connections on the terminal boards;
Check if cable glands have a firm grip around the cables.
Pre Setup Procedures

This paragraph provides information concerning the preliminary controls and
procedures to be performed as a completion of the electrical installation and before
supplying the unit with power and before performing the system setup.
Perform the following procedure for the Transceiver:
44
Carry out a careful visual inspection of the installed components referring

to the layouts of the unit and to the interconnection drawings;
Carefully check the integrity of the fuses;
Check that the switches S1 and S2 on the transceiver Control B board

are in position 0.
Perform the following procedure for the External S-Band PSU:
Verify that the links on Voltage Selector (on TB2 of External S-BAND PSU board)
and TB3 are connected in the correct configuration according to the main supply
applied to the External S-Band PSU (see labeled instruction inside the lid);
Check that the fuse F1 has the correct value with respect to the applied ships
mains power supply: VALUE F1 = 2.5A in case of 220/255 VAC or VALUE F1 =
1.6A in case of 380/440 VAC;
Check that the setting for the current on K4 has the correct value with
respect to the applied ships mains power supply: VALUE K4 = 10A in case
of 220/255 VAC or VALUE K4 = 6A in case of 380/440 VAC;
Check that the Power Service Switch SW1 is in position 0 OFF.
Checking Antenna Turning Motor Power Voltage and Phase

Check inside the Antenna Turning Motor junction box that the Star or Delta
configuration corresponds to the used 3 phase ship main power and frequency,
as shown in the figure below:
Fig. 34. Antenna Turning Motor voltage and phase configuration
Also check that TB 3 in the External S-Band PSU is configured for same power.
Connection of MFD System to Scanner S-Band Up Mast

This paragraph will further describe the equipment, which MFD system is comprised
of, its connection:
1. Connect the MFD components to each other by using the appropriate cables
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex I):
MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Power Supply Distribution. Connection
Diagram.
For connection RS6B, see section Workstation Installation, paragraph RS6B
Computer Installation below.
See also Annex O for different MFD power supply configuration.
45
2. Connect Antenna Group S-Band (J1, J3, TB9/TB10, TB, TB2) and External
Power Supply Unit (J1, J3, TB4, TB2) by means of the multi-conductor cable
55M455P002 as per MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram
(see Annex I).
3. Connect External Power Supply unit (J2, J4, TB6) and RIB6 unit (J2, J3, X9,
X10) by means of the cable 55M455P002 as per diagram.
4. Connect wires 18, 17 to 24 VDC Power Supply from UPS or from 24 VDC
Power Supply Unit as per diagram.
5. Connect ships main power supply to External Power Supply unit (TB1) as per
diagram.
6. Connect wires from the sensors in accordance with the installation directions
and MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram.
Preventive Action During Service Attendance on RTM MOS

It is recommended to check the position of D10 on Power MOS PCB.
Wrong position as showed in the below pictures can cause discharge between D10
and T2. Check Power MOS in your stock and also check during service or
installation if D10 is in correct position. Problem can be easily solved by bending
D10 on 90 degree.
D10 is in wrong position:
46
D10 is in correct position:
Excessive Interferences on Video on S-Band Radar Up Mast

The scope is to reduce interference on the S-Band radar up mast. The interference
appears as in the below picture:
It is necessary to check and make proper ground connectionThe pictures show

connections on the cable shield and on dedicate GND bolts:
47
Sensor Connections
In case of the problem is still visible try to remove the nut shown in the picture
below:
SENSOR CONNECTIONS
For the connection of the MFD with navigational sensors, use double core screened
cable in the insulating shell, category TP5. The screen is connected to earthing on
the sensor side. Where the level of electromagnetic field is insignificant, twisted
pair type unscreened cable may be used. As the electric current in the cable does
not exceed 20 mA, the conductors cross section is of no importance. The maximum
length of the cable will depend on the type of interface and is shown for each
specific sensor in the appropriate connection schedule.
The block diagram of connection between the sensors and MFD is provided below
(for more detailed information, see diagrams for each scanner presented in Annex H
Annex N and in Annex P):
48
Workstation Installation
Fig. 35. Sensors connection
You should select a suitable connection schedule for each sensor.

Interface and power cables must be laid in cable routes, fixed and marked
with labels.
Fig. 36. AIS transponder, sensors and MFD connection
See Annex A for more detailed information on the computer communication ports,
RS 422 standard.
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION
The MFD Workstation consists of the following elements:
RS6B or RS6 Computer;
TPC24 Computer for Planning station and Back of the Bridge workstation;
TFT Monitor;
ES6 Keyboard with Trackball;
Radar Integrator Board RIB6 (optional for NS MFD);
Power Connection Board X1;
49
Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS6, or other UPS IEC 60945 approved

(optional);
Data Collector Unit DCU6 (optional);
Ethernet Switches 8xRJ45 EDS-G308, or IE-SW-BL08-8TX;
WAGO Modules for Conning/BNWAS (optional).
For connection the all MFD units, see diagrams presented in Annex H Annex N
for different scanners and diagrams in Annex P for NS 4000 Dual ECDIS.
Dongle Installation
After the computer has been mounted securely in its place, connect the dongle
to the computers printer port, as marked DONGLE (see picture below).
The dongle should be connected to the printer port of a personal or industrial
computer before the software installation.
Fig. 37. RS6B LPT port for the dongle
The MFD System will not operate unless the dongle is connected to the computer.
Description of the dongle is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
RS6B Computer Installation

Part No.: 18131501.
Transas RS6B computer is the next generation hardware platform for Transas
software. RS6B marine computer has same form fit function as Transas previous
RS6. The computer has a fanless design with one removable hard drive in front.
The RS6B is based on the Intel Core i5 520E processor and comes with 4 serial
ports, 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 6 USB hosts, digital input/output channels, and a
storage socket, offering high performance and versatile peripherals for marine
applications.
Mounting
Specification of RS6B computer is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
The RS6B Marine Computer has been pre-installed with two brackets on both ends
of the computer. Use two screws per side to attach the RS6B Marine Computer to a
wall or cabinet.
Use two screws for each bracket and attach the bracket to the rear of the RS6B
Marine Computer.
50
Fig. 38. RS6B mounting
Wiring Requirements
This paragraph describes how to connect serial devices to the embedded computer.
You should read and follow these common safety precautions before proceeding
with the installation of any electronic device:
Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring and
device wiring paths must cross make sure the wires are perpendicular at the
intersection point;
Note: Do not run signal or communication wiring together with power wiring in the
same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal
characteristics should be routed separately.
Use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine which wires
should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that shares similar
electrical characteristics can be bundled together;
Keep input wiring and output wiring separate;
It is advisable to label the wiring to all devices in the system.
51
Appearance
Fig. 39. RS6B front view
Fig. 40. RS6B rear view
LED Indicators
Table 16. LED Indicators
LED Name
LED Color
Power
Green
Power is on and functioning normally
Off
Power is off or a power error exists
Storage
LAN
52
LED Function
Red (on)
Storage is inserted and detected
Red (blinking)
Storage is reading/writing
Off
No activity
Green
100 Mbps Ethernet mode
Yellow
1000 Mbps (Gigabit) Ethernet mode
Off
No activity or 10 Mbps Ethernet mode
Display Connection
RS6B computer has D-SUB 15-pin (female) and DVI-I connectors on the rear panel
to connect VGA and DVI-I displays.
Use VGA output for connection WS to monitor.
Use DVI-I output for connection WS to VDR or to monitor working in extended or
clone mode. If the monitor has no DVI-I input or in case of connection to VDR, DVII/VGA adapter can be used.
It is recommended COM port of monitor to connect to serial port COM3 of RS6B
computer.
Note: If Navi-Radar 4000 application will be used, it is necessary to change video
RAM Total Gfx Mem from 256 MB to 512 MB in BIOS when using D3D
rendering (SOLAS-compliant Overlay mode must be set in the System
Configuration utility on the page Additional settings of the panel
Workstation (see Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph
Workstation Settings, item 5)). RAM 512 MB should be set only on the
Radar computer (Radar application running). These changes are not
recommended for the ECDIS computer, because it reduce total amount of
available memory.
Network Connection
Plug your network cable into the embedded computers Ethernet port. The other end
of the cable should be plugged into your Ethernet network. When the cable is
properly connected, the LEDs on the embedded computers Ethernet port will glow
to indicate a valid connection.
The 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet LAN port uses 8-pin RJ45 connectors.
The LED indicators on the right top and right bottom corners glow a solid green color
when the cable is properly connected to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network. The LED will
flash on and off when Ethernet packets are being transmitted or received.
The LED indicators on the left top and left bottom corners glow a solid yellow color
when the cable is properly connected to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network. The LED
will flash on and off when Ethernet packets are being transmitted or received.
Fig. 41 Network connectors
Note: In order to avoid MFD software freezing, it is necessary to disable the all
unused network adapters in the Device Manager.
53
Serial Device Connection

Use a serial cable to plug your serial device into the embedded computers serial
port. Serial ports 1 and 2 (COM1 and COM2) have male DB9 connectors and can be
configured for RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 communication by software. Meanwhile,
serial port 3 and 4 (COM3 and COM4) run RS-232 serial communication with DB9
connectors. Additionally, 4 NMEA serial ports with Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connectors are also available on the rear panel of the computer.
The location and the pin assignments for the serial ports are shown in the following
figures:
Fig. 42. Serial ports
Fig. 43 Serial connectors
54
Digital Input/Output Channels Connection

The RS6B computer offers four digital input channels and four digital output
channels on the rear panel allowing users to connect to various I/O devices (see
figure above). Use Phoenix 3.81-mm compatible connectors to connect to the
devices.
SATA Storage Installation

The RS6B Marine Computer has one storage slot for installing 2.5-inch SATA II
SSD/HDD. To install the SSD/HDD drive, follow these steps.
1. Remove the two screws, and then pull out the handle to take the cover out
of the slot.
2. Attach the SSD/HDD with two screws on the back of the cover.
3. Place the cover back into the slot, and fasten the screws. Meanwhile,
theres a storage protection lock on the right of the slot. Turn the key
clockwise to lock the slot, and counter-clockwise to unlock the slot.
55
Power Connection
The RS6B computer offers 24 VDC power input with the terminal block. If the power
is supplied properly, the Power LED will light up. To power on the RS6B computer,
connect the terminal block to power jack converter to the RS6B computer's DC
terminal block (located on the rear panel), and then connect the power. Make sure
you have connected to the correct pin. Press the Power switch button on the front
panel to turn on the computer. It takes about 30 seconds for the system to boot up.
Once the system is ready, the Power LED will light up.
Fig. 44. Power connection
Garbage Data Elimination

It may happen so that garbage data is received on NMEA ports if they are not
connected to any data source. This data will cause no harm, but may look strange.
Garbage data is easy to eliminate, even though it does not interfere with our
applications. We suggest to short unused NMEA inputs with a jumper-wire between
RA-RB on the NMEA plug.
Fig. 45. Jumper-wire connection
56
This jumper-wire is installed in all deliveries as shown below.
Fig. 46. Jumper-wire installation
Please be aware to remove it during installation in order to use the NMEA input.
RS6 Computer
Part No.: 18131102.
Specification of RS6 computer and dimensional drawing are presented in Chapter 3
of this document.
Layout of RS6 computer connectors for Workstation is described in drawings
RS6 Computer. Connectors Layout enclosed in Annex Q of this document.
TPC24 Computer Installation

General
Part No.: 18131119.
The TPC24 computer is based on the Intel Celeron P4505 processor.It have 4
serial isolated RS422/485 ports, 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 4 USB hosts, and storage
sockets. The unit has a dual input power supply which will accept both AC and DC
input, ensuring that they are compatible with all power systems on all vessels. If both
inputs are connected, the units will be powered by AC. If AC power is disconnected,
it will automatically switch over to DC without affecting the operation of the unit. It
makes it possible to use AC as primary power and a 24V battery as secondary
power, eliminating the need for expensive UPS systems. It is also fanless with no
moving parts inside which will prolong lifetime and reduce service costs.
The TPC24 computer is the workstation which is used for installation and working of
the Navi-Planner and/or ECDIS PREMIUM MFD software.
DO NOT install NAVI-Radar, NAVI-Conning and Alarm Monitoring Station
applications on TPC24 computer!
Specification and dimensional drawings of the computer is presented
in Chapter 3 of this document.
For various methods of installation or mounting (panel mounting, bracket mounting,
ceiling/wall, console mounting etc.), see the relevant mechanical drawings
presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
Installation and Mounting Requirements
Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the product. The
air inlet and outlet openings must definitely be kept clear; coverings which
restrict ventilation are not permissible.
57
Do not install the unit in a horizontal position (laying down), as this will cause
heat to build up inside the unit which will damage the LCD panel. To prevent this
problem, it is recommended installing the unit in a vertical position (30
degrees) to improve the airflow through the unit.
To further improve the cooling of the unit, it is recommended installing cooling

fans underneath blowing upwards into the unit air inlet. This may be required in
high temperature applications and also when there is reason to expect
temperature problems due to non-optimal way of mounting.
Exposure to extreme direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the

temperature of the unit, and might under certain circumstances lead to
overtemperature. This point should already be taken into consideration when the
bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows,
ventilation, etc.).
Space necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for the operating procedures
and for maintenance, must be provided.
Mounting position must carefully be selected to avoid heavy vibration and

acoustic noise.
The distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard compass or
the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic
protection distance. This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic
system of the compass to the nearest point on the corresponding unit
concerned.
Connections
Use only high quality shielded signal cables.
Fig. 47. Cable entries and connectors
Any cable should generally be kept as short as possible to provide a high quality
input/output. The maximum signal cable length will depend on the signal resolution
and frequency, but also on the quality of the signal output from the computer/radar.
Layout of the connectors is presented in the figure below:
Fig. 48. Connection area of TPC24 computer
COM Module 4 x RS-422/RS-485 ECDIS/NMEA is installed in the expansion area of

the unit. Connect and secure cables to the Phoenix Terminal Block 3.81.
58
Fig. 49. COM module illustration and pinning
To reduce tension of the cables you connect, secure them with a cable tie to the
available chassis hinges located near the connectors as shown in the figure below:
Fig. 50. Cables fixing
Note: The unit is required to be properly grounded to the body of the ship via the
grounding screw located on the unit (see figures above). The wire used
should have a cross sectional area of at least 6 mm2.
230VAC/50Hz or 115VAC/60Hz power cable must be connected to AC IN power
input (Std IEC inlet).
24VDC power cable is connected to 24V DC input via Phoenix 2pin 1927564
MSTB 2,5/2-GF-5,08 THT connector. Required polarization should conform to the
markings on the connector area of the unit. Ignoring the markings on the unit or its
add-on modules might damage the unit and/or external equipment in which end,
warranty will be void
Fig. 51. 24 VDC power connection
Operation
The units are designed by using HATTELAND Glass Display Control (GDC)
touch technology to allow interactivity adjusting brilliance (brightness) and control
power on / off with the use of illuminated symbols. Note that none of the symbols
shown below are visible as they are all backlight illuminated when the unit has
suitable power connected.
59
Fig. 52. User controls overview
Light Sensor:
Used to sense level of ambient light in the surrounding environment in order to
adjust the image brightness automatically for best eye viewing conditions. This
sensor is not visible for the eye or has any illumination behind to indicate its
position. Further, by touching or covering this area will naturally make the
automatic brightness adjustment inoperable after a small delay!
Action Indicators:
HDD - whenever there is a storage device activity (HDD/SDD read or write
operations) this area will illuminate and blink in accordance with the read/write
operations while the unit is powered.
SERVICE - built in functionality to determine when the unit requires service in
order to perform within preset factory standards. This area will illuminate
constantly until the unit is powered off.
Note that by touching these symbols no action will be performed or has been
assigned.
Brightness Adjust:
Brilliance / Brightness adjustment of the displayed image is adjusted by touching
the (-) or (+) illuminated symbols. The entire area of text and symbols are
always visible as long as the unit is powered.
Note that only the (-) and (+) are touch sensitive while the * and BRILLIANCE
symbols are not.
ECDIS Status / Indicator:

For unit that has been factory ECDIS calibrated the text ECDIS will illuminate
in green constantly as long as the unit is powered. The + and - symbols will
illuminate in red when the Brightness/Brillance is adjusted either above or below
ECDIS factory calibration point.
To be able to stay within ECDIS calibrated range, please assure that both the
+ and - are not illuminated and that ECDIS text remains illuminated during
operation. Note that by touching these symbols no action will be performed or
has been assigned.
Power ON/OFF:
This symbol and all text will illuminate in red when suitable power is connected
and the unit is turned off. When the unit is on and operating, this symbol will
change into green color and illuminate constantly.
Power ON: to turn the unit on, verify that the symbol is illuminated in red
(indicates suitable power is connected) and touch the power symbol and hold
until the the symbol changes to green light or a image appears on the screen.
Power OFF: to turn the unit off, touch the power symbol and hold until it either
illuminate/change from green to red or the image on screen disappears.
60
Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball Installation

Keyboard Part No.: 18151701.
Trackball Part No.: 18151702.
Specification of ES6 keyboard with trackball is presented in Chapter 3 of this
document. For connection ES6 keyboard with trackball to RS6B or RS6 computer, see
diagrams enclosed in Annex H Q of this document.
ES6 Keyboard Configuration Switch

ES6 keyboard connected to computer can work in following master modes: ES6, or,
ES3, or ES4. For position of the Configuration switch and connections to the RS6
computer in the different master modes, see table below:
Table 17. ES6 keyboard master modes
Master modes
Configuration switch position
Connection to the computer
Full ES6 mode (default)
USB
Full ES6 mode
PS/2 keyboard;
PS/2 mouse;
COM port RS232
ES3 compatible mode
PS/2 keyboard;
PS/2 mouse;
COM port RS232
ES4 compatible mode
PS/2 keyboard;
PS/2 mouse
Configuration switch settings 16 designates CAN network node addresses when

keyboard is used as an ES6 slave (secondary) keyboard.
ES6 Keyboard Connections

CAN
Both ends of the CAN network must be terminated with 120 ohm resistor.
Node number is selectable 09 by jumpers (configuration switch).
Node number 0 (ES3 mode), or 7 (ES6 mode), or 8 (ES6 mode), or 9 (ES4 mode) is
considered master node, and must be selected for the keyboard connected to PC by
PS/2 or USB. This must be true even if only one node exists.
Information received by the master from the PC is sent out on the CAN-bus, and slave
units will act accordingly (indicators on/off etc.). Information received by the master
from the CAN-bus will be transferred to the PC if there is no risk for misinterpretation
(e.g., if any key is down, no keys on other keyboards may be sent to PC).
Units with node numbers 16 are considered peripheral (slave) units. Each unit must
have a unique number (not two with the same number).
Data from the keyboard is transferred to the CAN-bus. Data from the CAN-bus
(regarding indicators, background light etc.) is received and action is taken.
61
Fig. 53. ES6 keyboard. View of 24 VDC and CAN connectors
For connection ES6 keyboard to trackballs, see ES6 Keyboard with Three Trackballs.
Connection Diagram in Annex Q.
RS232
Data from the PC received by the master will be transferred to the CAN-bus and
also handled locally.
Data regarding function keys and encoders will be sent to the CAN-bus by slaves
and to the RS232 port by the master.
USB
Pointer data from CAN-bus will be transferred to USB port if node number 8 is set
and no PC is connected to PS/2 mouse port.
Keyboard data from CAN-bus and keyboard matrix will be transferred to USB port
if node number 8 is set and no PC is connected to PS/2 keyboard port.
Fig. 54. ES6 keyboard. View of USB, PS/2 and RS232 connectors
62
Fig. 55. ES6 keyboard. View of configuration switch
Note: For correct functioning of the ES6 keyboard connected to RS6 computer,
USB2 Enhanced Host Controller must be disabled in Device Manager.
Before this, ES6 should be disconnected from RS6 computer.
Note: For correct functioning of the ES6 keyboard connected to RS6B computer,
ES6 must be connected to RS6B via USB 1.1 port on the rear panel.
Trackball Connections
The ES6 Trackball can be connected using the CAN Interface to a CAN master
(the ES6 keyboard) or using the USB Interface to connect to a computers USB Host.
Switch 4 on the DIP-Switch is used to set CAN (switch OFF) or USB (switch ON)
interface active.
Switch 13 set CAN node address (must be in range 17):
1=
1 = on
2 = off
3 = off
4 = off
2=
1 = off
2 = on
3 = off
4 = off
3=
1 = on
2 = on
3 = off
4 = off
4=
1 = off
2 = off
3 = on
4 = off
5=
1 = on
2 = off
3 = on
4 = off
6=
1 = off
2 = on
3 = on
4 = off
7=
1 = on
2 = on
3 = on
4 = off
One trackball may be powered from each ES6 other trackballs must have external
5VDC power supplies (or supply from other ES6).
USB uses a USB-B contact to connect to the USB Host and CAN uses a 4-pin
Phoenix contact for CAN-Bus IN (supplied 5 VDC) and a 3-pin Phoenix contact
for CAN-Bus OUT.
It is possible to supply power by USB port even if CAN interface is selected.
Both ends of the CAN network must be terminated with 120 ohm resistor.
Fig. 56. ES6 Trackball. View of CAN, USB connectors and DIP-Switch
63
Radar Integrator Board RIB6

Part No.: 18011201.
Specification of RIB6 is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
ATTENTION!
Check that technical characteristics of the connected equipment match characteristics of
the RIB6 Input\Output signals specified in Chapter 3, section Hardware Technical
Specification, paragraph Radar Integrator Board (RIB6), item Electrical
Characteristics. Check that RIB6 firmware version is not older than v. 6.1.
For connection of RIB6 unit to different types of scanners see Annex F.
ATTENTION!
In the event of connection two or more (up to four) scanners to MFD, set appropriate
IP addresses for each RIB6 as described in item below Checking and Setting
RIB6 IP Addresses. See also Connection Four Scanners to MFD. Block Diagram
in Annex Q.
Cables
Cables are run and installed in accordance with the cabling schedules.
RIB6 is connected with the Ethernet ports of RS6 Computer by means of a standard
category 5 screened cables used in Ethernet 10/100 Mbit networks. The cable
contains 4 twisted pairs within the common screen and has RJ-45 connectors
on both ends. Connection of cable cores with the connector contacts is identical
on both sides.
External lines of Video and Trigger signals to the RIB6 are connected by means
of coaxial cables with BNC connector plug.
External lines of Bearing, Heading, RS 422 Control signals to the RIB6 are
connected by means of screw connectors. Any types of cables with a wire cross
section of up to 1.5 mm2 can be used. In case of considerable length of external
cables, a screened cable is recommended.
Connections
For connection see figure below RIB6. Layout drawing:
24 V nominal supply voltage: use connector X11 (pin 1 is minus, pin 2 is plus);
Ethernet port 1:
Use connector X4 (IP: 10.8.1.209, Netmask: 255.255.255.0,
Gateway: 10.8.1.240);
This port can be used after Linux has booted. It will send out video data and
can receive a TCP connection on port 4172 (Max 1 connection globally for
RIB6).
64
Ethernet port 2:
Use connector X5 (IP: 10.8.2.209, Netmask: 255.255.255.0,
Gateway: 10.8.2.240);
This port must be used for firmware upgrades. (It is possible to use Port 1, but
a few extra commands are needed);
This port can be used after Linux has booted. It will send out video data and
can receive a TCP connection on port 4172 (Max 1 connection globally for
RIB6).
Video:
Connect to J3;
Termination can be selected using SW5. The following combinations are
possible:
50 Ohm
75 Ohm
1,2 kOhm
Trigger pulse:
1: ON 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: OFF;

1: OFF 2: ON 3: OFF 4: OFF;
1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF.
Connect to J2;
possible:
50 Ohm
75 Ohm
1,2 kOhm
Bearing pulse:

1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF;
1: OFF 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: ON.
Connect to X9;
possible:
560 Ohm pull-up

1,2 kOhm
Composite mode
Heading pulse:

Connect to X9;
possible:
560 Ohm pull-up

1,2 kOhm
Composite mode
RS 422 control signal connect to X10.
65
Fig. 57. RIB6. Layout drawing
Signal Input Resistor Selector

General Recommendation
Low resistor (50 Ohm) for Video and Trigger pulse is used in case of direct
transceiver signal connection to RIB6.
High resistor (1.2 kOhm) for Video and Trigger pulse is used in case of original
transceiver signal distributing between Radar Display and RIB6.
If the video signal is too weak for the normal work of the RIB6, it is required to
increase the input resistance, with small deterioration of the pictures quality.
SW2 SW5 DIP-switches are shown in the figure below.
DIP-switches positions on the SW1 SW5 for 10 kW, 12/25 kW SRT X-Band,
30 kW S-Band and BridgeMaster E 10 kW X-Band scanners are shown in the table
below:
Table 18. Status SW1 SW5 switches for 10 kW, 12/25 kW SRT X-Band and 30 kW S-Band
and BridgeMaster E 10 kW X-Band radars
Type of Radar
Signal switch
10 kW X-Band
radar
12 kW X-Band
25 kW X-Band
30 kW S-Band
radars
66
Input
Mode select (SW1)
Master
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video (SW5)
50 Ohm
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
50 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Mode select (SW1)
Master
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video (SW5)
75 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
75 Ohm
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
1.2 kOhm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Type of Radar
Signal switch
Input
Heading Pulse (SW4)
1.2 kOhm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BridgeMaster E
10 kW X-Band
radar
Mode select (SW1)
Master
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Video (SW5)
75 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
High
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
Not used
Heading Pulse (SW4)
Not used
Note: Jumper X15 (Trigger signal termination) must be CLOSE for 10/12.5/25 kW
X-Band and 30 kW S-Band radars, and it must be OPEN for BridgeMaster E
10 kW X-Band radar.
Examples of switches positions for different radars are shown in the table below:
Table 19. Status SW2 SW5 switches for different type of the radars
Type of Radar
Signal switch
Input
Raytheon Pathfinder
Video (SW5)
1,2 kOhm
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
Not connected
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
Not connected
Composite mode
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Heading Pulse (SW4)
Not connected
Composite mode
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Video (SW5)
50 Ohm
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
50 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
JRC JMA 9000 Series
JRC JMA 5300 Series
Sperry Rascar
Furuno FR 21XX,
FR 28XX Series,
Furuno FR 15XX Series
Heading Pulse (SW4)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video (SW5)
50 Ohm
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
50 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video (SW5)
50 Ohm
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
50 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4)
560 Ohm pull-up
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Video (SW5)
50 Ohm
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2)
50 Ohm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3)
1,2 kOhm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4)
1,2 kOhm
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Fig. 58. RIB6. Resistor selectors
67
For connection of RIB6 to some radar types, see diagrams Connection of RIB6 to
Some Radar Types. Connection Diagrams enclosed in Annex Q of this document.
Checking and Setting RIB6 IP Addresses

Checking RIB IP Addresses
In the event of absence of the connection between PC and RIB6, check values RIB6
IP addresses. For this, connect RS232 port of PC to RS232 service COM of RIB6:
1. Start terminal emulation program (i.e. Hyper Terminal) and enter name,
for example RIB6:
2. Select port number of PC:
3. Configure the terminal for 115200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, none
flow control. Press Apply and OK buttons:
68
4. Restart RIB6 by means of small buttons on RIB6 panel:
5. When the words Hit any key to stop autoboot appear, press any key.
If the loading continues, perform the restart by using the Reset button.
6. For printing configuration, type printenv and press <Enter> button:
69
7. Check IP and Netmask values for LAN1 and LAN2 in correspondence to values
given below:
For the first type (factory default), RIB6 values must be following:
Lan1ip Address:10.8.1.209;
Lan1Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Lan2Mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the second type, RIB6 values must be following:
Lan1Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Lan2Mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the third type, RIB6 values must be following:
Lan1Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Lan2Mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the fourth type, RIB6 values must be following:
Lan1Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Lan2Mask: 255.255.255.0.
Setting RIB6 IP Addresses
1. Set the IP addresses by using the following commands (press <Enter> button
after entering each command):
Setenv lan1ip <value>;
Setenv lan1mask <value>;
Setenv lan2ip <value>;
70
Setenv lan2mask <value>;

Saveenv.
2. Wait until new data is recorded.
3. Then switch off/on RIB6 power and check preservation of all settings.
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6

General
Phoenix UPS kit 220VAC/24VDC 3.4AH Part No.: 18160200.
Phoenix UPS kit 220VAC/24VDC 7.2AH Part No.: 18160202.
Phoenix UPS kit 220VAC/24VDC 12AH Part No.: 18160201.
MFD systems may be powered from 24 VDC ships emergency power supply or from
any UPS type approved in accordance with standard IEC 60945 such as UPS6.
This paragraph describes all the procedures required for the correct installation and
performance check of the UPS6.
71
UPS6 installation consists of installation the following units:
EMC Filter ME-MAX/NEF/QUINT20A;
Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20;
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20;
Battery Module 24 V DC, 3.4 Ah QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH (7.2 or 12 AH).
Fig. 59. View of UPS6
Technical specification of UPS6 is given in Chapter 3.

For connection of the units, see also connection diagrams for each scanner
enclosed in Annex H Annex N. See also diagrams for different MFD power
supply configuration presented in Annex O.
Installation of the Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit

QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20
Fig. 60. Structure
72
Table 20. Structure

No.
Comments
AC input: 85...264 V AC input voltage, 45...65 Hz frequency
DC output: 24 V DC output voltage (default), can be set between 18 and 29.5 V DC
Active POWER BOOST switching output
DC OK output active
DC OK output floating
Potentiometer (covered) 18V DC...29.5 V DC
DC OK LED
BOOST LED
Universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107/30
WARNING!
The device contains dangerous live elements and high levels of stored energy.
Never carry out work when the power is turned.
The housing temperature can reach high values depending on the ambient
temperature and the load of the device.
In order to guarantee sufficient convection, we recommend observing the following
minimum distance to other modules: 5 cm in the vertical direction and 0.5 cm in the
horizontal direction. A lateral distance of 5 mm, and in case of active components,
that of 15 mm is necessary for proper functioning of the module.
The power supply unit can be snapped onto all DIN rails in according with EN
60715. They must be horizontal (connecting terminal blocks above and bellow).
Fig. 61. Convection
73
Installation Position
Fig. 62. Mounting position drawing
Slim-style installation:
Fig. 63. View of slim-style position
Assembly:
Position the module with the DIN rail guide on the upper edge of the DIN rail,
and snap it in with a downward motion.
Removal:
Pull the snap lever open with the aid of a screwdriver and slide the module out
at the lower edge of the DIN rail.
Low-profile installation:
Low-profile installation can be achieved by mounting the device at right-angles
to the DIN rail. Mount the DIN rail adapter (UTA 107/30) as described in the
figure below. No additional mounting material is required. Fixing screws: Torx
T10 (torque 0.8...0.9 Nm).
74
Fig. 64. View of low-profile position
Connection
Use a screwdriver with the correct blade width for wiring. The cable cross sections
listed in the table below can be connected.
Note: For reliable and safe-to-touch connections, strip the cable ends according
to the table.
Table 21. Connecting cables
Input
Solid [mm]
Stranded [mm]
AWG
Torque [Nm]
Stripping Length [mm]
0.26
0.24
1810
0.50.6
7 mm
Output
0.26
0.24
1210
0.50.6
7 mm
Signal
0.26
0.24
1810
0.50.6
7 mm
The 100...240 V AC connection is established using the L, N and PE screw connections.

The device can be connected to 1-phase AC networks or to two of the phase conductors
of three-phase systems (TN, TT or iT systems in according with VDE 0100-300/IEC
60364-3) with nominal voltages of 100 V AC...240 V AC.
Fig. 65. Connection to various network forms drawing
Note: For operation on two of the phase conductors of a three-phase system,

an isolating facility for all poles must be provided.
75
Input:
Fig. 66. View of Input
Protecting the primary side:

The device must be installed in according with the regulations as in
EN 60950. It must be possible to disconnect the device using a suitable
isolating facility outside the power supply. The primary side line protection,
for example, is suitable. For device protection, there is an internal fuse.
Additional device protection is not necessary.
Recommended backup fuse for mains protection:
Power circuit breaker 10 A or 16 A, characteristic B (or identical function).
In DC applications, a suitable fuse must be wired in upstream.
Note: If an internal fuse is triggered, there is most probably a malfunction
in the device. In this case, the device must be inspected in the factory!
Output:
Fig. 67. View of Output
76
Connecting the Output:

The connection is established using screw connections on the screw
connection of the DC output:
24 V DC: + and -;
DC OK switching output active: DC OK and -;
DC OK output floating: 13 and 14;
POWER BOOST switching output active: I < IN and -.
At the time of delivery, the output voltage is 24 V DC. The output voltage can
be set on the potentiometer.
Protecting the Secondary Side:
The device is electronically protected against short circuit and idling.
In the event of a malfunction, the output voltage is limited to 35 V DC.
Note: Make sure that all output lines are dimensioned according to the maximum
output current or are separately protected. The cables on the secondary side
must have sufficiently large cross sections in order to keep the voltage drops
on the lines as low as possible.
Signaling:
The active signal output, the floating signal contact and the active POWER
BOOST switching output are provided for function monitoring. The DC OK-LED
and the BOOST-LED also enable the function evaluation of the power supply
unit directly on the operation site (see table below).
Table 22. Signaling

I < In (20A)
I > In (20A)
Uout < 0.9 x Un (24V)
DC OK LED
ON
ON
Flashing
BOOST LED
OFF
ON
ON
Active DC OK switching
output
ON
ON
OFF
Floating DC OK output
Closed
Closed
Open
Active POWER BOOST

switching output
ON
OFF
OFF
Meaning
Normal operation of
the power supply
(Uout > 21.5 V)
POWER BOOST
operation, e.g., to
start loads
Overload mode, e.g.,

consumer short circuit
or overload
Floating contact:
The floating signal contact opens and signalizes a drop in the output voltage
as set of more than 10%. Signals and ohmic loads of up to 30 V and currents
of up to 1 A can be connected. For heavily inductive loads such as a relay,
a suitable protection circuit (e.g., damping diode) is necessary;
Fig. 68. Floating contacts drawing
77
Active signal outputs:

The 24 V DC signal is applied between the DC OK and the - connecting
terminal blocks or between I < IN and - and can carry up to 1 mA. By
switching from active high to low, the DC OK signal output signalizes when
the output voltage is more than 10% below the output voltage. The DC OK
signal is decoupled from the power output. It is thus not possible for parallel
switched devices to provide external supply. The 24 V DC signal can be
directly connected to a logic input for evaluation. The POWER BOOST signal
output signalizes that the nominal current is exceeded;
Fig. 69. Active signal outputs drawing
Signal loop:
Monitoring two devices: use the active signal output of device 1 and loop
in the floating signal output of device 2. In the event of malfunctioning, a
common alarm is output. Any number of devices can be looped in. This signal
combination saves wiring costs and logic inputs.
Fig. 70. Signal loop drawing
Installation of the Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use

QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20
Fig. 71. Structure
78
Table 23. Structure

No.
Comments
Input voltage 24 V DC unbuffered (internal fuse 25 AT)
Output voltage 24 V DC buffered (the device is idling-proof and short-circuit-proof)
24 V battery module connection
Floating PDT (11, 12, 13): Alarm
Floating PDT (21, 22, 23): Battery Mode
Floating PDT (31, 32, 33)
24 V supply voltage, maximum current limit 0.2 A for grouped contacts 11, 21, 31
Remote shutdown (R1, R2)
Universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107
10
Red LED: Alarm
11
Yellow LED: Battery Mode/Battery Charge
12
Green LED: Power In OK
13
Buffer time setting 0.530 minutes
14
Battery module/Service setting selection
CAUTION!
Never carry out work when the power is turned, this is highly dangerous.
Mounting
The uninterruptible power supply unit together with the battery module can be
snapped onto all DIN rails according to EN 60715 and should be mounted
horizontally (input terminal blocks facing downwards).
Note: No minimum spacing to other modules at the sides is required for proper
operation of the device.
Narrow Mounting Position:

The device is supplied ex works for a narrow mounting position.
Fig. 72. Narrow mounting position
Assembly:
Place the module with the DIN rail guide way on the top edge of the DIN rail
and then snap it downwards.
Removal:
Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the module
from the bottom edge of the DIN rail.
79
Flat Mounting Position:

A flat mounting position can be achieved by mounting the module onto the DIN
rail at a 90 angle. To do this, mount the DIN rail adapter (UTA 107) as shown
in the figure below. No additional assembly material is required. Mounting
screws: Torx T10 (torque 0.8...0.9 Nm).
Fig. 73. Flat mounting position
Connections
Fig. 74. Connection diagram
The cable cross sections which can be connected are shown in the table below:
Solid [mm]
Stranded [mm]
AWG
Torque [Nm]
Input
0.516
0.510
206
1.21.5
Output
0.516
0.510
206
1.21.5
Battery
0.516
0.510
206
1.21.5
Signal
0.24
0.22.5
2412
0.50.6
For reliable and safe-to-touch connections: strip 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the input
and output side connector ends and 7 mm (0.28 in.) from the signal connector
ends:
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which are designed for operating
temperatures >75C (167F). To meet GL requirements, unused terminal
compartments should be closed.
80
Input:
The QUINT-DC-UPS is connected to the 24 V DC output of the power supply via
the Input + and Input - terminal blocks. The output is isolated from the input
by the internal diode. The stored power is only supplied to the output.
The device is protected against over current and short circuit by an internal
input fuse. Additional device protection is not required.
Note: If an internal fuse is blown, this is most probably due to a device fault. In this
case, the device should be checked in the factory.
Output:
All devices that must be supplied without interruption in the event of a supply
voltage failure (Buffered Load), are connected to the Output + and Output -
terminal blocks of the DC output. It is recommended that all other loads, which
do not require buffering (Unbuffered Load), are connected to the 24 V DC
output of the power supply. This increases the buffer time, as this time depends
on the output current. The internal diode ensures that the buffered loads
are isolated from the unbuffered loads.
Battery module:
The battery module is connected to the QUINT-DC-UPS via the Battery +
and Battery - terminal blocks. To interrupt the charge/discharge current of
the battery module, the Battery module selection selector switch 14 must be
set to Service (see figure below).
Fig. 75. Battery Module Selection selector
The QUINT-DC-UPS is optimized for use with QUINT-BAT/24DC type battery

modules.
The following battery modules are recommended:
QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH (Order No. 2866349);
QUINT-BAT/24DC/7,2AH (Order No. 2866352);
QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH (Order No. 2866365).
Following successful installation, the capacity of the connected battery module
must be selected using the Battery module selection rotary switch 14.
Note: The fuse on the battery module must be removed when installing or replacing
the battery module.
Signaling outputs:
The signal outputs are connected via terminal blocks 11/12/13 (4), 21/22/23 (5)
or 31/32/33 (6). The contacts are floating contacts. The plug-in bridge provided
can be used to supply +24 V to grouped contacts 11, 21, 31. This means that
N/C contacts 12, 22, 32 and N/O contacts 13, 23, 33 can be evaluated as
switching outputs with 0 V and +24 V voltage levels.
81
Remote Shutdown:
The device has a UPS remote shutdown function for specific shutdown.
Remote shutdown must be deactivated for the device to switch to buffer mode
in the event of a supply voltage failure.
Remote Shutdown Off:
The Remote shutdown R1 and Remote shutdown R2 terminal points
are short circuited (e.g., with a plug-in bridge) OR. The Remote
shutdown R2 terminal point is supplied with a 24 V DC voltage.
The QUINT-DC-UPS switches to buffer mode in the event of a supply
voltage failure.
Remote Shutdown On:
The Remote shutdown R1 and Remote shutdown R2 terminal points
are not connected.
All LEDs are off.
The QUINT-DC-UPS does not switch to buffer mode in the event of a
supply voltage failure, instead the device is shut down. When the supply
voltage is reapplied, the battery module is charged and the device
remains off until remote shutdown is deactivated.
Connected loads are supplied as long as the supply voltage is present.
Fig. 76. Remote shutdown
Setting options on the device
Buffer Time Setting:

Buffer mode can be exited after a predefined time has elapsed or by external
shutdown. If the device is to be shut down after a specific time has elapsed,
the time can be set via the selector switch 13 on the front of the device. When
the supply voltage is reapplied, the device can switch to buffer mode again.
ATTENTION!
The buffer time setting must be set to value not less than 1 minute according
to MFD requirements.
82
Battery Module Setting:

Before startup, the capacity of the battery module used must be set on the
device via the selector switch 14. When replacing the battery, the selector switch
must be set to Service.
Fig. 77. Settings
Method of Operation
In the event of a power failure at the output, the QUINT-DC-UPS supplies all
connected devices with a 24 V DC voltage without interruption at a load current up
to 20 A. When the 24 V supply voltage is applied, the connected battery module is
charged. In the event of a supply voltage failure, the battery module is connected
to the output, and the stored power ensures that all connected devices continue
to operate without interruption. The professional signaling via function LEDs and
floating PDT contacts enables reliable evaluation of all the main operating states.
Output Voltage:
In normal operation, the QUINT-DC-UPS output voltage corresponds to the
usual supply voltage. If the supply voltage drops more than 1 V in the space of
0.1 seconds or falls below the minimum threshold of 22 V, the device switches
to buffer mode. If the output voltage drops below 20.4 V in buffer mode, this is
indicated by the Alarm indicator. If the output voltage drops to 19.2 V because
the battery module is flat, the device is shut down completely. When the supply
voltage is reapplied, the device automatically switches on again. The device is
electronically short circuit- proof and idling-proof.
Signaling:
Three floating PDT contacts and three indicators are provided for function
monitoring.
Table 25. Status Indicators

Key/Indicators
Green
Power IN OK
Yellow
Bat. Mode/Charge
Red
Alarm
Supply voltage OK, battery module

charging
ON
Flashing
OFF

charged (normal operation)
ON
OFF
OFF
Buffer mode
OFF
ON
OFF
Battery module flat
OFF
OFF
ON
Battery module quality test negative;

No battery module;
Service
ON
OFF
ON
Buffer time elapsed;

Remote shutdown activated
OFF
OFF
OFF
83
Table 26. Status Contacts

Key/Output
Bat. Charge
Bat. Mode

charging
3133
2122

charged (normal operation)
3132
2122
Alarm
Buffer mode
3132
2123
Battery module flat
3132
2122
1113
Battery module quality test negative;

No battery module;
Service
3132
2122
1113
2122
1113
Buffer time elapsed;

Remote shutdown activated
where:
xx xx: contact closed;
1x Alarm, 2x Battery Mode, 3x Battery Charge;
x1 group contact, x2 N/C contact, x3 N/O contact.
Temperature Response:
The charging rate of the connected battery module depends on the temperature.
Testing the Battery Module:

A quality test is carried out on the battery module once a week and its presence
is verified every minute. A negative test result is indicated by the Alarm indicator.
Installation of the Battery Modules QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH,

QUINT-BAT/24DC/7.2AH, QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH
QUINT-BAT/24DC are maintenance-free lead gel rechargeable batteries for use
with QUINT-DC-UPS 20A/40A.
Fig. 78. View of Battery modules
84
Safety and Warning Notes

In order to guarantee safe operation of the device, please read these instructions
thoroughly! The operating instructions for the particular QUINT-DCUPS must also be
observed.
The device may only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel.
The corresponding national regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must be observed.
The VDE 0510 regulations regarding storage, installation and operation of
the rechargeable battery module must be observed.
The site in which the rechargeable battery module is located must have sufficient
ventilation. The rechargeable batteries may only be disposed of when fully
discharged and in acc. with the valid regulations.
The fuse must be removed from the rechargeable battery module when work is
being performed!
When replacing rechargeable batteries, please note that only rechargeable batteries
from the same batch may be used together!
Device Connections
The connection to QUINT-DC-UPS is established using the black (-) and red (+)
connecting cables. The fuse is not inserted until installation has been completed:
1 DC fuse.
2 Connection cable, red = +24 V, black = 0 V.
3 DIN rail adapter QUINT-ADAPTER/4 (only QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH).
Installation
In conjunction with adapter QUINT-ADAPTER/4, it is possible to snap the
rechargeable battery module onto all 35 mm DIN rails in acc. with EN 60 715,
or keyhole fixing eyelets can be used for rear wall mounting (drilling diagram
on reverse). Only QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH is supplied with QUINTADAPTER/4.
QUINT-ADAPTER/4 (Order No. 28 66 85 7) can be ordered separately for other
rechargeable battery modules.
The module should be installed horizontally in the coolest part of the control cabinet.
For the device to function in the manner intended, it is not necessary to observe any
minimum spacing to other modules.
Fig. 79. Installation of Battery module
85

Components
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
Device View and Connections
Part No.: 18162309.
Technical specification and description of the module are given in Chapter 3.
For connection QUINT-DIODE/40 to the system, see MFD. Two Workstations.
BNWAS. Connection Diagram No. 2 enclosed in Annex Q.
Fig. 80. Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40 view
Safety Notes and Warning Instructions

Note: To ensure that the device can be operated safely and all functions can be
used, please read these instructions carefully.
Installation and startup must only be carried out by qualified personnel. The relevant
country-specific regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed.
Before startup it is particularly important to ensure that:
All supply lines have sufficient fuse protection and are the correct size:
All output cables are the correct size for the maximum device output current
or have separate fuse protection;
Sufficient convection is ensured;
To protect the device, the input current of 56 A must not be exceeded. This is
ensured if the supply is provided from an automatic current limiting source
(e.g., QUINT POWER) or if a suitable fuse is connected.
To meet directive 94/9/EU (ATEX), the following safety notes must be observed:
86
The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module corresponds to standard EN 50021;
This redundancy module may be installed within a potentially explosive area, in

which Category 3 equipment is required;
When working on the redundancy module, observe the national safety rules and
regulations for the prevention of accidents;
The module must only be installed and operated by qualified personnel;
Installation should be carried out following the instructions given in this

document;
The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module should be installed in the control

cabinet so that IP54 protection according to EN 60 529 or higher is ensured;
If dust is present, the device must be installed in suitable housing. The device
must not be subject to mechanical strain or thermal load, which exceed the
limits described in this document;
To ensure sufficient convection, the following minimum spacing should be

provided between other modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation and 2
cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal installation;
During operation only devices, which are suitable for operation in potentially
explosive areas of zone 2, can be connected to the redundancy module;
The redundancy module does not require maintenance, is closed ex works, and
should not be opened. Repairs can only be carried out by the manufacturer.
Installation
The redundancy module can be snapped onto all DIN rails according to
EN 50 022-35. The module can be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks
facing upwards or downwards) or vertically on the DIN rail.
Note: To ensure sufficient convection, we recommend the following minimum
spacing be used between modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation
2 cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal.
Mounting: place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the top edge of the
DIN rail and then snap it downwards (see figure below).
Removal: release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the
module from the bottom edge of the DIN rail (see figure below).
Fig. 81. Installation of Redundancy Module
Connection Cable: the cable cross sections which can be connected are shown
in the table below:

Input 1, Input 2, Output
Solid [mm]
Flexible [mm]
AWG
Torque [Nm]
0.216
0.510
206
1.21.5
87
For reliable and safe-to-touch connection: strip 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the
connector ends:
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which are designed for operating
temperatures of at least 75C (167F).
Function
Input. The maximum permissible current depends on the cross section

of the connected cables and the ambient temperature (see table below).
Only one redundancy module is required to decouple two power supplies that
are connected in parallel (A and B) with nominal currents up to 20 A.
The individual modules are wired together as shown in the figure below. One
redundancy module per power supply is required to decouple power supplies
with nominal currents from 20 A to 40 A. Both inputs 1 and 2 of the
redundancy module must be connected to the power supply via two cables as
shown in the figure below. This is required as the maximum current carrying
capacity of 30 A per input must not be exceeded. For connecting the
redundancy module to the power supply, we recommend using two cables of the
same length and with identical cross sections.
Output. During operation only devices, which are suitable for operation
in potentially explosive areas of Zone 2, can be connected to the output
of the redundancy module in Zone 2. The plus pole of the device is wired
to the output of the redundancy module as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 82. Redundancy Module connection
88
Temperature Response. In the horizontal mounting position (input terminal

blocks facing upwards or downwards), the redundancy module can lead
maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient
temperatures of up to 40C (104F). The permissible current carrying capacity
reduces according to the ambient temperature as shown in the figure below,
curve (a) for a cable cross section of 10 mm (8 AWG).
At an ambient temperature of 60C (140F), the module can lead maximum
continuous load currents of 2 x 21 A or 1 x 43 A. In the vertical mounting
position, the redundancy module can lead maximum continuous load currents
of 2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient temperatures of up to 30C (86F).
The permissible current carrying capacity reduces according to the ambient
temperature as shown in the figure, curve (b) for a cable cross section of 10
mm (8 AWG). At an ambient temperature of 60C (140F), the module can lead
maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 20 A or 1 x 40 A.
Fig. 83. Redundancy Module temperature response graphic
Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button

Alarm Buzzer - Part No.: 11124210.
Reset Button - Part No.: 11124211.
The Alarm Buzzer is used for alarm triggering on the stages: Backup Officer or Crew
for installation in sufficient areas.
The Reset Button is used for BNWAS down counter, triggered alarm reset and
Emergency Call facility.
Fig. 84. Appearance of Reset Button and Alarm Buzzer
Dimensional drawing of the units is given in Chapter 3.

For detailed connection Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button to the MFD system, see
MFD. Two Workstations. BNWAS. Connection Diagram No.1, and MFD. Two
Workstations. BNWAS. Connection Diagram No.2 enclosed in Annex Q.
89
Fig. 85. Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button connections
Alarm Buzzer Connection

For connection Alarm Buzzer to the MFD, perform the following steps:
Connect terminals A (+) and to 24 VDC Power Supply via Connection

Board and Digital Output (DO) port of the computer or optional WAGO 750-513
module as per diagrams. Status of DO channel contacts should be set to NO
(normal open) in the System Configuration Utility (see Chapter 2, section
BNWAS Setup);
Connect terminal AB of the Alarm Buzzer to AB terminal of the Reset Button

for 6 hours emergency call function.
Reset Button Connection

For connection Reset Button to the MFD, make the next actions:
90
Connect terminals + and - to 24 VDC Power Supply via Connection Board

and Digital Output (DO) port of the computer or optional WAGO 750-513 module
as per diagrams. Status of DO channel contacts should be set to NC (normal
close) in the System Configuration Utility (see Chapter 2, section
BNWAS Setup);
Connect terminal +B to + contact of the UPS Battery or to + contact of the

Emergency Power Supply (via Fuse 200mA) for 6 hours emergency call
function;
Connect terminal +N to + 24 VDC Connection Board for indication normal

power supply as per diagrams;
Connect terminals S to Digital Input (DI) port of the computer or optionally to DI

of the WAGO 750-403 module. Status of DI channel contacts should be set to
NO (normal open) in the System Configuration Utility (see Chapter 2, section
BNWAS Setup);
Terminal AB should be connected to AB terminal of the Alarm Buzzer for 6

hours emergency call function;
Terminals M can be connected to main power failure indicator on the external

alarm panel (if available);
Mi terminal can be used for lighting malfunction lamp from external signal
during normal operation.
Data Collector Unit DCU6

Part No.: 301000.
Technical specification and dimensional drawings of DCU6 are given in Chapter 3.
For proper connection DCU6 to WS, see connection and block diagrams enclosed
in Annex J and in Annex O Annex P depending on system configuration.
Connections
Up to eight DCU6 can be connected to the MFD system: 4 main DCU with
connected to them 64 different sensors and 4 backup DCU with connected to them
the same sensors. Thus it is possible to connect 64 different sensors to the MFD.
DCU6 is connected with the Ethernet ports LAN1 and LAN2 of RS6 Computer by
means of a standard category 5 screened cables used in Ethernet 10/100 Mbit
networks. The cable contains 4 twisted pairs within the common screen and has
RJ-45 connectors on both ends. Connection of cable cores with the connector
contacts is identical on both sides.
Navigational sensors to the DCU6 are connected by means of screw connectors.
In case of considerable length of external cables, a screened cable is recommended.
For the connection of the DCU6 with navigational sensors, use double core screened
cable in the insulating shell, category TP5. The screen is connected to earthing on the
sensor side. Where the level of electromagnetic field is insignificant, twisted pair type
unscreened cable up to 1.5 mm2 cross section may be used. As the electric current in
the cable does not exceed 20 mA the conductors cross section is of no importance.
The maximum length of the cable will depend on the type of interface and is shown
for each specific sensor in the appropriate connection schedule.
Fig. 86. DCU6. Rear view
Fig. 87. DCU6. Front view
DCU6 interfaces and cables fixing are shown in the figures below.
DCU6 ports number 114 are RS 422 bi-directional channels.
DCU6 ports number 1516 are RS 422 bi-directional channels by default and may
be configured by jumpers X16 and X17 accordingly as follows:
Output channels transmit RS 232 signal;
91
Input channels receive RS 422 signal.
Fig. 88. DCU interfaces
Fig. 89. DCU cables fixing
WARNING!
In case of connection DCU to MFD via network, you must have LAN 1 and LAN 2 of
this DCU identical connected. Otherwise, there will be problem with intermittent lost
sensor data.
If LAN 1 and LAN 2 cannot be identical, only LAN 1 or LAN 2 shall be used for DCU.
For proper connection, see the picture below and the diagrams enclosed in Annex J
and in Annex O Annex P depending on the system configuration.
92
Fig. 90. Connection DCU to MFD
Diagnostic Indication
DCU is equipped with the following Diagnostic Indicators, reflecting current
processes of the device:
Indicator of the RS-422 interface activity with use of TX/RX Channels.

The corresponding indicator is lit while transmitting/receiving of
the NMEA message;
DCU modes indicator are sown in the table below:
Table 28. DCU status indicator

Indicator condition
Mode
Green, blinking
DCU data receiving
Yellow, blinking
DCU data transmitting
Checking and Settings DCU IP Addresses

Checking DCU IP Addresses
In the event of absence of the connection between PC and DCU, check values DCU
IP addresses. For this, connect RS232 port of PC to RS232 COM1 of DCU.
1. Start terminal emulation program (i.e. Hyper Terminal) and enter name
for example DCU:
93
2. Select port number of PC:
3. Configure the terminal for 57600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, none
flow control. Press Apply and OK buttons:
4. This screen appears. Otherwise, restart DCU by means of small buttons

on DCU panel:
94
5. Press <Escape> button.

For printing configuration, type 1 and press <Enter> button:
6. Check IP, Netmask, Gateway values for LAN1 in correspondence to values

given below. If necessary, change them by means of Set IP Address option
in DCU Main Menu:
7. For the first type, DCU values must be following:

IP1 Address:10.8.1.200;
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Default Gateway: 10.8.1.240;
8. For the second type, DCU values must be following:
IP1 Address: 10.8.1.201;
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Default Gateway: 10.8.1.240.
For IP addressess of the rest DCU types, see table in section Network below.
95
9. Connect PC RS232 port to DCU RS232 COM2 and perform procedure

described above. Check IP, Netmask, Gateway values for LAN2
in correspondence to values given below:
If necessary, change them by means of Set IP Address option in DCU Main Menu.
10. For the first type, DCU values must be following:
IP2 Address value 10.8.2.200;
Subnet Mask value 255.255.255.0;
Default Gateway 10.8.2.240.
11. For the second type, DCU values must be following:
IP2 Address value 10.8.2.201;
Subnet Mask value 255.255.255.0;
Default Gateway 10.8.2.240.
For IP address of the rest DCU types, see table in section Network below.
Setting DCU IP Addresses
1. In DCU Main Menu, type 4 and press <Enter> button:
96
2. Enter values (IP Address, Mask, Default Route) specified above for LAN1
and for LAN2. Press <Enter> after typing of each value.
Then switch off/on DCU power and check preservation of all settings.
Power Connection
Workstation requires 24 VDC. This power must be provided from 24 VDC ships
distribution board or from optional UPS6 connected with 110/220 VAC ships
distribution board with Main/Emergency Automatic Switch. For details, see diagrams
for different MFD power supply configuration presented in Annex O and connection
diagrams for each scanner enclosed in Annex H Annex N and in Annex P
depending on the system configuration.
RS6B/RS6 Computers Discrete Signal Interface

General
Discrete signal interface for alarms distribution is provided by digital I/O ports
of RS6B (RS6) computer. Four digital output (DO) ports provide issue MFD alarm
signals on Alarm Panel. Four digital input (DI) ports are used for MFD alarms
acknowledgment (silence) from Alarm Panel and for receiving alarm signals from
UPS (for RS6B, see above section Workstation Installation paragraph RS6B
Computer Installation; for RS6 computer, see drawing RS6 Computer.
Connectors Layout enclosed in Annex Q. See also connection diagrams for
different scanners presented in Annex H Annex N of this document).
Digital Input
Digital input ports are designed for dry contact (5VDC@1mA) closure to GND.
DI ports receive control signals from digital field devices (sensors, switches, etc.).
Each pair of the ports terminals shall be used for connection with digital devices.
Each pair of the ports has one ground terminal. The inputs use a Phoenix 3.81 mm
6-pin connector.
Digital Output
DO ports switch the connected load by means of internal, isolated relays.
The relays are capable of the switching 30VDC@1A and 100VAC@300mA for RS6
computer and at least 36 VDC, 100mA for RS6B computer.
Each pair of the ports terminals shall be connected to the certain indication unit
(Alarm Panel optical indicators, etc.). The each port has separate ground.
The outputs use a Phoenix 3.81 mm 8-pin connector.
97
WAGO I/O Modules for Conning

Technical specification of WAGO modules for Conning is given in Chapter 3.
The example of connection diagram of WAGO modules is shown in drawing WAGO
Modules for Conning. Functional Diagram enclosed in Annex Q of this document.
General
Fig. 91. WAGO modules set
WAGO I/O Set of Modules used in MFD System for Conning includes the following parts:
MODBUS Coupler/Controller: the module is intended for communication

of the set of WAGO I/O Modules with the Working Station via RS-232 protocol.
Baud rate value recommended for use in MFD is 9600. Voltage supply
DC 24 V. Power AC/DC Adaptor might be used as a power supply source.
With its I/O functions the coupler/controller forms the logic operation between
the Fieldbus used and the field area. All control tasks necessary for the perfect
operation of the I/O are performed by the coupler/controller;
I/O modules: the input and output of the process data is made at the I/O modules.
I/O modules are available for various tasks in accordance with varying
requirements. Available are digital and analog input and output modules,
I/O modules for angle and path measurement as well as communication modules.
The individual I/O modules used in MFD are described in Chapter 3;
End module: the module completes the internal data circuit and ensures correct
data flow. One is required for each bus-coupler. The node end module is
indispensable. It is always fitted as the last module, to guarantee the internal
node communication. The end module has no I/O function.
All modules forming the above set must be mounted on the DIN rail to provide
the common grounding contact.
List of I/O modules used in MFD

List of I/O modules used in MFD is presented in the table below:
Table 29. List of WAGO modules
98
No.
Module
Ref. No.
MODBUS
750-314
4-Channel Digital Input Module DC 24 V
750-403
2-Channel Analog Input Module 420 mA
750-454
2-Channel Analog Input Module 10 V
750-476
4-Channel Analog Input Module 010 V
750-468
2-Channel Relay Output Module AC 230 V, DC 30 V
750-513
End Module
750-600
Network
Assembling of the WAGO I/O Set Modules

All system components can be snapped directly on a carrier rail (DIN rail) in
accordance with the European standard EN 50022 (TS 35). All modules have
the same shape to minimize the project commitment. The reliable positioning and
connection of the coupler/controllers and the individual I/O modules is made using
a tongue and groove system. Due to the automatic locking the individual
components are securely seated on the rail after installing.
The coupler/controller must be fixed on the carrier rail with the lateral orangecoloured locking disk. To fix the coupler/controller, apply pressure on the upper
groove of the locking disk using a screwdriver.
To remove the coupler/controllers, release the locking disk by pressing on the
bottom groove. It is also possible to release an individual I/O module from the unit by
pulling an unlocking lug.
The following sequence of modules must be observed in the course of assembling:
MODBUS Module;
Digital/Analog Input Modules;
Relay Output Modules;
End Module.
Cabling of the WAGO I/O Modules

The following requirements must be taken into consideration prior to cabling
of the WAGO I/O Modules within the MFD system:
Relay Output Modules: each pair of active contacts of the modules shall be
connected to the certain indication unit (Alarm Panel optical indicators, etc.);
Input Modules: each pair of active contacts on the modules shall be used for
connection with different type of sensors (digital and analog);
MODBUS: 24 V DC input contacts are marked on the module accordingly.

The other contacts of the module are used for the power distribution only.
NETWORK
Network is basement of MFD System for communication between Workstations,
RIB6 and optional DCU6. The network redundancy is provided by double network.
The physical layer is Ethernet; the transport layer is TCP/IP.
Physical Layout
MFD network could be connected in accordance with drawing MFD Two WS. Scanners
SRT X-Band Up Mast and S-Band Down Mast. Network Configuration. Data Flow
Diagram enclosed in Annex J of this document, by means of FTP Cat.5 cables.
In the event of fault of the Ethernet switch, network connections must be reconfigured
according to MFD Two WS. Scanners SRT X-Band Up Mast and S-Band Down Mast.
Standalone Configuration. Data Flow Diagram (see Annex J).
The examples of network connection of five worksations are shown on the diagrams
presented in Annex O.
The example of network connection of two worksations is shown on the diagrams
presented in Annex P.
99
MFD Video Output to VDR
For proper connection DCU to MFD via network, see above section Workstation
Installation, paragraph Data Collector Unit DCU6.
The Ethernet switch type approved 8xRJ45 Type Approved EDS-G308 and 8xRJ45
IE-SW-BL08T-8TX are the multiport high-speed switches which can be used for
building of the high-performance communication.
Technical specification of Ethernet switches is given in Chapter 3.
IP Addresses
IP addresses table is shown below:
Table 30. WSs IP addresses
STATION
LAN 1
IP address
LAN 2
IP address
Subnet mask
Workstation 1 (W01)
10.8.1.101
10.8.2.101
255.255.255.0
Workstation 2 (W02)
10.8.1.102
10.8.2.102
255.255.255.0
Workstation 3 (W03)
10.8.1.103
10.8.2.103
255.255.255.0
Workstation 4 (W04)
10.8.1.104
10.8.2.104
255.255.255.0
Workstation 5 (W05)
10.8.1.105
10.8.2.105
255.255.255.0
DCU I type
10.8.1.200
10.8.2.200
255.255.255.0
DCU II type
10.8.1.201
10.8.2.201
255.255.255.0
DCU III type
10.8.1.202
10.8.2.202
255.255.255.0
DCU IV type
10.8.1.203
10.8.2.203
255.255.255.0
DCU V type
10.8.1.204
10.8.2.204
255.255.255.0
DCU VI type
10.8.1.205
10.8.2.205
255.255.255.0
DCU VII type
10.8.1.206
10.8.2.206
255.255.255.0
DCU VIII type
10.8.1.207
10.8.2.207
255.255.255.0
RIB6 I type
10.8.1.209
10.8.2.209
255.255.255.0
RIB6 II type
10.8.1.210
10.8.2.210
255.255.255.0
RIB6 III type
10.8.1.211
10.8.2.211
255.255.255.0
RIB6 IV type
10.8.1.212
10.8.2.212
255.255.255.0
MFD VIDEO OUTPUT TO VDR

RS6B Computer
The second video output (graphics controller onboard Intel HD) allows the radar
picture image to be sent to VDR.
The RS6B video output VGA must be connected to radar display via standard VGA
cable.
The RS6B video output DVI-I can be connected to Frame grabber board
(VDR component) via standard VGA cable using DVI-I/VGA adapter.
RS6 Computer
The video card 9600M GT used in the MFD allows the radar picture image to be
sent not only to the monitor, but also to the external devices, e.g., VDR.
The RS6 video output VGA1 must be connected to radar display.
The RS6 video output VGA2 can be connected to Frame grabber board
(VDR component) via standard VGA cable.
100
Transas Wave System
Fig. 92. Video output block diagram
TRANSAS WAVE SYSTEM

General
Transas Wave is aimed at Commercial shipping where there is a need or a demand
to monitor and decrease the fuel consumption and/or change to a Green mind set
during planning and monitoring the vessels voyages and maneuvers.
Transas Wave provides online decision support where instantaneous consumption
as well as consumption per sailed distance is presented in clear and easy way.
Basically, this solution can be compared to a cars trip computer.
Transas Wave is installed on the bridge and uses information from the vessels
navigation sensors, flow meter, engine data and emission sensors.
Transas Wave is recorded data enabling online presentation of trends, future
analysis and comparison of voyages and how weather and other conditions affect
consumption and emission. It shall be easy to send data to shore.
Wave Workstation Installation

Equipment
The Wave Workstation consists of the following units:
RS7 or RS6B Computer;
TFT Monitor with screen resolution 12801024 pixels;
ES6 Keyboard with Trackball or Mini Keyboard.
101
Transas Wave System
ATTENTION!
GUI of the Wave application is designed for the display with screen resolution
12801024 pixels!
For installation of RS7 computer, see below Chapter 3, section Hardware
Technical Specification, paragraph Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector.
For installation of RS6B computer, see above section Workstation Installation,
paragraph RS6B Computer Installation.
For installation of TFT monitors, see below Chapter 3, section Hardware
Technical Specification, paragraph Transas Monitors.
For installation of ES6 keyboard, see above section Workstation Installation,
paragraph Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball Installation.
Installation
For Transas Wave system installation, perform the following procedure:
Connect Wave workstation units as shown in the drawing below:
Fig. 93. Transas Wave workstation connection diagram
Install Wave software as described below in Chapter 2, section Software

Installation;
Connect basic sensors GPS, Log, Gyro, Flow Meter (Engine sensors) to the
following COM ports of RS6B (RS7) computer:
GPS COM5 (COM3);
Log COM6 (COM4);
Gyro COM7 (COM5);
MODBUS1 (Engine 1 sensors) COM1;
102
Transas Wave System
MODBUS2 (Engine 2 sensors, if available) COM2.

Note:
In case of network connection Wave WS with MFD workstations, data from

GPS, Log and Gyro sensors are transferred from MFD via network.
Reconfigure COM1 and COM2 (if MODBUS2 sensor is available) from default
RS232 to RS422 (for Emerson Flow Meter: RS485-2W) interface as described
below in Chapter 2, section RS6B Computer Serial Ports Configuration;
Configure sensors GPS, Log, Gyro, MODBUS in the System Configuration utility
as described below in Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph
Sensors Settings;
Specify MODBUS and Wave parameters on the MODBUS and Wave pages
of the panel INS, in the System Configuration utility as described below in
Chapter 2, section Wave Setup, paragraph Wave Configuration;
Set up RPM, Pitch and Rudder indicators in the System Configuration utility (see
Annex B) and in the Wave Screen View Configuration utility (see section
Navi-Conning 4000 Adjustment, paragraph General) as described below in
Chapter 2, section Wave Setup, paragraph Wave Adjustment.
If necessary to add new Wave graph parameter, perform the setup procedure
described below in Chapter 2, section Wave Setup, paragraph Wave
Adjustment.
The Wave user interface is described in document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

(V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 5.
103
CHAPTER 2
System Settings
Extended Mode Settings (only for NS MFD)
EXTENDED MODE SETTINGS (ONLY FOR NS MFD)

RS6B Computer
General
RS6B computer has two video outputs VGA and DVI-I which can be connected with
two displays.
Main applications ECDIS, RADAR, AMS must be displayed only on the primary
monitor connected to VGA output.
In extended mode DVI-I port can be used for the displaying CONNING application
on the secondary monitor. If the monitor has no DVI-I input DVI-I/VGA adapter
should be used.
In this case, the pointer can be moved between the two screens.
Main applications on the primary display are switched by means of using ECDIS,
RADAR, AMS buttons of Applications window of Control Panel or function key
on keyboard.
During the first start, the CONNING application must be activated on the secondary
display by means of hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <M>.
Also hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <M> are used for switching of the displaying
CONNING application with one monitor on another.
Extended Desktop Settings

To set extended mode, perform the following procedure:
1. Click the right mouse/trackball button on the desktop. Select Properties.
2. Open the page Settings and press Advanced button:
Chapter 2. System Settings
107
3. Switch to Intel Graphics and Media Control Panel tab:
4. Press Graphics Properties button:
108
5. In the open window, select Multiple Displays option:
6. Select Extended Desktop mode from the drop-down list Operating Mode:
109
7. Select Monitor (connected to VGA port) from the drop-down list Primary
Display and press Apply button:
8. Choose General Settings option.

Select the appropriate screen resolution for the primary monitor from the dropdown list Resolution and 16 Bit from the drop-down list Color Depth:
Press Apply button.
110
9. To adjust the secondary display select Digital Display (connected to DVI-I port)
from the drop-down list Display:
10. Select the appropriate screen resolution for the secondary display and 16 Bit
from the drop-down list Color Depth. Press Apply button:
111
11. Press OK button:
12. Drag the monitor icons in accordance with physical position of monitors
comparatively each other:
13. Press OK button.
RS6 Computer
General
RS6 computer has two video outputs VGA1 and VGA2 which can be connected with
two displays.
Main applications ECDIS, RADAR, AMS must be displayed only on the primary
monitor connected to VGA1 output (video from NVIDIA 9600M module).
In extended mode VGA2 port can be used for the displaying CONNING application
on the secondary monitor (video from onboard graphic adapter).
In this case, the pointer can be moved between the two screens.
Main applications on the primary display are switched by means of using ECDIS,
RADAR, AMS buttons of Applications window of Control Panel or function key
on keyboard.
During the first start, the CONNING application must be activated on the secondary
display by means of hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <M>.
112
Also hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <M> are used for switching of the displaying
CONNING application with one monitor on another.
Extended Desktop Settings

Note:
Before extended desktop settings, the jumper J6 on PCB of RS6 computer

should be changed to short circuited pins 1-2, and Onchip VGA Control
option must be set in Advanced BIOS Features.
To set extended mode, perform the following procedure:

1. Click the right mouse/trackball button on the desktop. Select Properties.
2. Open the page Settings:
3. Select the monitor icon 1. It should be the secondary monitor connected to

VGA2 video output.
Note:
Do NOT select the monitor icon 3!
Check Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor checkbox:
Press Advanced button.
113
4. Switch to Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile tab:
5. Press Graphics Properties button:
114
6. In the Single Display group, select Monitor radio-button:
7. Press Display Settings button.

Select 16 Bit from the drop-down list Color Quality.
Choose the appropriate screen resolution for the secondary monitor from the
drop-down list Screen Resolution:
Press Apply button.

8. Press OK button.
115
9. Press OK button:
11. Drag the monitor icons in accordance with physical position of monitors
comparatively each other.
12. Press OK button in the Display Properties window.
116
RS6B Computer Serial Ports Configuration
RS6B COMPUTER SERIAL PORTS CONFIGURATION

Serial ports 1 and 2 (COM1 and COM2) can be configured for RS232, RS422, or
RS-485 communication by software. To reconfigure from default RS232 to RS422
interface perform the following procedure:
1. Open Device Manager and double click on Moxa Port 7 (COM1) or Moxa
Port 8 (COM2):
2.
Switch to Port Settings tab and select RS422 from the drop-down list
Interface:
3.
Press OK button.
117
Installation of National Fonts (If Necessary)
INSTALLATION OF NATIONAL FONTS (IF NECESSARY)

If necessary to install national fonts, perform the following settings:
1. Run to START\CONTROL PANEL\REGIONAL AND LANGUAGE OPTIONS.
2. Press Languages tab.

To install fonts for the East Asian languages, set flag in the Install files for East
Asian languages option.
To install fonts for the Arabic, Armenian, Georgian, Hebrew, Indic, Thai and
Vietnamese languages, set flag in the Install files for complex script and
right-to-left languages (including Thai) option.
118
3. Press OK button in the window Install Supplemental Language Support.

The window for East Asian languages:
The window for Arabic, Armenian, Georgian. languages:
Press Apply button in the window Regional and Language Options.
4. Insert Windows XP Professional CD into disc tray and press OK button,

and wait for copying files.
119
5. To restart computer press Yes button.
6. After restarting, run to START\CONTROL PANEL\REGIONAL AND LANGUAGE OPTIONS.

Press Advanced tab in the Regional and Language Options window
and select appropriate language.
Press Apply button.
Press Yes button.
To restart computer, press Yes button.
120
Configuration of Synergy Utility
CONFIGURATION OF SYNERGY UTILITY

To share keyboard and trackball between workstations in the network, perform the
following actions described below.
1. Connect the keyboard with trackball to the workstation W01 via USB port.
2. Connect the external device for switching keyboard between workstations to
RS6 (WAGO) digital input ports.
3. Make the all necessary settings in the System Configuration utility (see below
section MFD Configuration, paragraph Workstation Settings, item 7).
4. Install the Synergy utility at the all workstations in the network as follows:
Run vcredist_x86.exe file and install Microsoft Visual C++2008

Redistributable software;
Install the Synergy utility.
Copy the following below listed files from archive into folder C:\Program files\Synergy
to substitute original version of these files:
launcher.exe;
synergyc.exe;
synergys.exe;
synrgyhk.dll.
5. Start the Synergy utility at the workstation W01. In the open window select
Share this computers keyboard and mouse (server) option and press
Configure button:
121
6. Press + button:
7. Enter the name of the workstation w01. It is necessary to use a small letters.
Press OK button:
8. Enter the all workstations for which the keyboard with trackball will be shared
and press OK button:
122
9. Press Hot Keys button:
10. To add hot key, press + button:
11. Enter hot key (for example: Shift+Ctrl+1) and press OK button:
12. In the right part of the window, add the action using + button:
123
13. In the open window select Switch To Screen option, choose w01 and press
OK button:
14. To add hot key for second workstation, press + button in the left part of the
window:
15. Enter hot key (for example: Shift+Ctrl+2) and press OK button:
16. Select Switch To Screen option and from the drop-down list choose w02.
Press OK button:
124
17. To add hot keys and the corresponding actions for the rest workstations in the
network, make the above described steps and press OK button:
18. Press AutoStart button:
19. In the When Computer Starts field, press Install button:
125
21. Press Close button:
22. The configuration of the server is completed. Press Start button:
24. Check up presence of the Synergy icon in the taskbar.
126
25. Run the Synergy utility at the workstations W02 and W03. In the Other
Computers Host Name field, enter w01 (server station) and press
AutoStart button:
26. In the When Computer Starts field, press Install button:
28. Press Close button:
127
Software Installation
29. The configuration of the client is completed. Press Start button:
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Pre-installation
On a disk C: or D: create the folder C:\MFD or D:\MFD and insert MNS CD with
product to the CD/DVD-drive.
Copy all files from the folder with product on MNS CD disk to C:\MFD.
128
Installation of MFD
ATTENTION!
On the basis of the detected hardware during MFD installation, it is automatically
allowed or prohibited to install certain software components. It is prohibited to install
Navi-Radar, Navi-Conning, and Alarm Monitoring Station applications on TPC24
and RS7 computers. Also the appropriate default settings are made automatically in
the System Configuration utility on the page Additional settings of the panel
Workstation (see below section MFD Configuration, paragraph Workstation
Settings, item 5).
At each workstation, perform the following procedure.
Run Setup.exe file in the folder C:\MFD:
Press Next > button. A window containing the licensing agreement text will be displayed:
Press Yes button. The copyright information window will be displayed:
129
Press Next > button.

At this installation stage, it is necessary to make sure that the computer parameters
and pre-installed software comply with specified requirements. If any critical
non-compliance is identified, the installation will not be continued:
Press Next > button. A window containing system information will be displayed:
Press Next > button. Specify the path to the product license (A:\by default)
in displayed window:
130

The license information will be displayed:
Select components to be installed by the Setup Wizard (on each WS as per

the licensed MFD configuration). To prohibit the installation of selected component,
select option This feature will not be available.
131
WARNING!
Do not install the Chart Assistant
Navi-Planner 4000 will be used.
utility
on
the
workstations
where
For the Wave application installation, select option This feature will be installed on
local hard drive The Navi-Conning must be installed also:
Keep component Integrator Activation not available, it will be activated later:
If you plan joint operation with the Navi-Planner 4000 software on the WS, the Pure
Slave support server component is required to be installed.
132
Press Install button.
The program will perform the product installation. In the displayed window,
press Finish button:
133
Keyless Protection (If Necessary)
Press Yes button to restart PC:
KEYLESS PROTECTION (IF NECESSARY)

General
In the work with keyless protection, the role of a dongle is played by a special set
of binary data stored in the register (virtual key KeyFile). All the information which,
in the ordinary work scenario, is stored in a physical dongle, is contained in
the virtual key.
The virtual key is associated with unique characteristics of a particular user
computer. The virtual key cannot be used on other computers.
Each license sets a restriction on the number of computers which the product
can be installed on. In line with this restriction, the user will not be able to activate
the product more than the fixed number of times. For a network, product activation
on each computer is required.
With the Internet connection available, after the system installation the user should
run a dedicated application which collects information on the computers and sends
it to Transas who send back a KeyFile which is then activated.
If there is no Internet connection, the user e-mails information to
activate@transas.com and receives the KeyFile in much the same way.
ATTENTION!
With the use of the keyless protection, it is
if the computer configuration is changed (e.g.,
re-installed, etc.) the available KeyFile cannot be
to notify Transas (via the distributor) about
the procedure to receive a new KeyFile.
necessary to remember that

faulty parts replaced, software
used any more. It is necessary
the replacement and repeat
Using License Activation Utility

Install the product as described in section Software Installation.
Run the License Activation utility by selecting the appropriate item
in the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\LICENSE ACTIVATION UTILITY).
134
Keyless Protection (If Necessary)
If there is no Internet connection, copy information (as shown in the figure below)
and e-mail it to activate@transas.com.
If there is an Internet connection, press the Get activation key online button.
After a certain time interval, the key will be generated and received by the user
automatically. Upon receipt of the key by an e-mail letter, it should be copied to
a relevant window.
135
MFD Configuration
After receiving the key, press the OK button.
After the activation is completed, press the OK button.

Make the product settings as described below.
MFD CONFIGURATION
Run the System Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item
in the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\SYSTEM CONFIGURATION):
Enter the password:
Press the OK button and go on to the next installation step.

If the NS 4100 is being installed, in the Logon dialogue box, which will appear,
from the User listbox select the root user. Press OK button.
136
MFD Configuration
The screen will display a window showing the automatically generated master
password intended for unlocking the system (the system is locked by default after
three unsuccessful attempts to enter the password).
Save it and store in a safe place to prevent the unauthorised access.

Press the OK button and go on to the next installation step.
General
The System Configuration utility consists of 6 panels; pages divide each panel.
To open the required panels, press the appropriate buttons:
Panel Name
Purpose
INS
Configuration of the entire MFD
Button
Workstation
Configuration of each Workstations separately
Sensors
Sensors settings, configuration of alarms, and warnings
Radar
Configuration of scanners and RIB-equipped Workstations
Security
To create users permitted to edit the NS settings and set

passwords permitting this access.
Commissioning Table
Formation of MFD commissioning table
Sensors Settings
Press Sensors button. The Workstation drop-down list specifies the name of
the workstation which settings will be made for, and ALL line for all WSs.
ATTENTION!
Perform individual settings for each Workstation, selecting them consecutively from
the Workstation droop-down list. All data will be synchronized at all the Workstations
after the settings saving.
137
MFD Configuration
1. Select ALL line from the Workstation drop-down list.

2. Open Sensors page to set the WS connected sensors.
Adjust COM ports for operation with connected sensors. The following actions
shall be done for this purpose:
Select required sensor from the drop-down list in the column Sensor;
In the Alias column, specify the sensor name to enable its identification
for the purpose of the redundancy concept. After the input of an alias,
it becomes possible to connect this sensor to other ports. I.e., should
one COM port fail, data will be received from the next port on other WS
connected to this sensor;
In the column Port, select from drop-down list the required COM port of
the Workstation computer, which this sensor is physically connected to;
In the Check sum column, if required, disable the checksum by selected

OFF from drop-down list.
138
MFD Configuration
Check for the relevant port of this sensor:

If COM-port was selected, specify in the drop-down list the following
COM port exchange parameters, defined in technical description
of connected sensor: Baud rate, Bits, Parity, and Stopbits;
To check the propriety of sensor connection, press the Test button
in the Port test column.
Note: Baud rate 19200 should be selected for ES6 keyboard. For MODBUS
sensors, select baud rate 38400.
Note: The above mentioned checking can be carried out only on the Workstation,
which COM-port the sensor is connected to:
Press Start Monitoring button:
If incorrect data is received, or there is no data, change the COM port

parameters in Port Settings group. COM port parameters:
Baud Rate: 50115200 (by default, 4800);
Data Bits: 7, 8 (by default, 8);
Parity: None, Event, Odd, Space, Mark (by default, None);
Stop Bits: 1, 2 (by default, 1).
All the changes in the communication channel parameters are required
to be made with the data monitoring turned off.
139
MFD Configuration
If data from some sensor is not processed by the MFD but is nonetheless
displayed in the monitoring window, it is necessary to turn off the processing
of data checksum from the device in the System Configuration Utility
(System Configuration Utility\Sensors\Sensors).
Finish testing by pressing Stop Monitoring and Cancel buttons;
Enter as required, the log and gyro reading accuracy in Log Accuracy and
Gyro Accuracy fields;
Use the button Remove Sensor for deletion of unnecessary sensors;
Press Apply button.
3. During the NS 4100 installation, in addition to item 2, to use the functions for
sending AIS bogus data on the own ship and target parameters, it is necessary
to the WS with NS 4100 which the AIS sensor is connected to, in addition
connect any free AIS port Sensor 1, 2 or 3 (see INSTALLATION MANUAL R4
AIS CLASS A TRANSPONDER SYSTEM under Wiring Cable Connections).
Connection should be made via ports with the RS-422 interface. This
functionality is only available with the use of the SAAB R4SW Secure WAIS
Transponder System. For the additional data on the functionality operation, see
NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.330). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section
AIS Targets Simulation.
From the drop-down list in the Sensors column, select BOGUS_OUT, and assign
the necessary COM port to it. By default, the Baudrate is 4800, the value can be
checked or modified by using the AIS MKD (see under Port Rate Config in the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL R4 AIS CLASS A TRANSPONDER SYSTEM);
From the drop-down list in the Sensors column, select GOLD_MSG_OUT,
and assign the necessary COM port to it.
140
MFD Configuration
4. Switch to DCU settings page (if the DCU is available in the equipment set):
In DCU 1-1 group, check Enabled checkbox:

In IP 1 input box, enter 10.8.1.200 IP address;
In IP 2 input box, enter 10.8.2.200 IP address.
In DCU 1-2 group, check Enabled checkbox:
In IP 1 input box, enter 10.8.1.201 IP address;
In IP 2 input box, enter 10.8.2.201 IP address.
If more than two DCU are connected to the MFD, enter IP addresses for the
rest DCU in appropriate fields. For IP addresses of DCU III DCU VIII types
see table in Chapter 1, section Network. The picture below shows settings
for eight DCU:
Main: DCU1-1, DCU2-1, DCU3-1, DCU4-1;
Backup: DCU1-2, DCU2-2, DCU3-2, DCU4-2.
In DCU connection group, press Connect button:
141
MFD Configuration
After the connection of the DCU, press the Launch DCU Test button and in the
DCU Client Simulator utility window select the CONFIG/DCU CONFIG menu item:
142
MFD Configuration
For the devices connected to the DCU ports, specify in the drop-down list
the following COM port exchange parameters, defined in the technical
description of connected sensor: Baud rate, Bits, Parity, and Stop bits:
Press the Flush and Apply buttons and then close the Dialog window;
To check correctness of the sensor connection in the DCU Client Simulator
utility window, select the VIEW/SHOW ALL menu item:
143
MFD Configuration
If the settings are correct, the utility windows will display information supplied
to the DCU ports:
Close DCU Client Simulator utility;

Switch to the Sensors page and in the line of the device connected
to the MFD via the DCU press the Test button in the Port test column.
The Port DCU monitoring window will display information supplied via
the DCU to the MFD.
144
MFD Configuration
5. In the Workstation drop-dawn list, select the name of the workstation, which
settings will be made for.
ATTENTION!
Check the RS6 I/O ports checkbox if you intend to work with the
alarms/warnings via the RS6 computer discrete ports (for the port setup see
items 6 and 7).
6. Switch to Alarm Output Settings page:
145
MFD Configuration
To transfer the alarm from the MFD to the external device via NMEA interface
(Output), check the checkbox in the column NMEA Alarm. Therefore, when
the certain alarm is triggering off in the MFD, the ALR sentence with ID
specified in the column Pub Id, will be outputted;
To transfer the alarm from the MFD to the external device via WAGO Module,
check the checkbox in the column WAGO Alarm. In this case, when the certain
alarm is triggering off in the MFD, the WAGO Module output contact specified
in the column WAGO OUT ALM Status will be close or open, depending on
selected status of the contact in normal state: N/O (normal open), or N/C
(normal closed), or PO (pulse mode: normally open close open), or PC
(pulse mode: normally close open close). This alarm will be confirmed in
the MFD from the outer source by closing/unclosing the WAGO Module input
contact specified in the column WAGO IN Ext. ACK. The outer source alarm
will be confirmed from the MFD by closing/unclosing the WAGO Module
output contact specified in the column WAGO OUT ACK Status:
In the column WAGO IN Ext. ACK, specify the WAGO Module contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified alarm will be acknowledged in
the MFD from the outer source. Select the outer source alarm
acknowledge mode N/C, or N/O;
In the column WAGO OUT ALM Status, specify the WAGO Module contact
by closing/unclosing of which the specified alarm will be transfered to the
external device. Select the alarm status mode N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC;
In the column WAGO OUT ACK Status, specify the WAGO Module contact
by closing/unclosing of which the specified outer source alarm will be
acknowledged from the MFD. Select the mode of outer source alarm
acknowledge N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC.
To transfer the alarm from the MFD to the external device via RS6 output
contacts, check the checkbox in the column RS6 I/O Alarm. In this case, when
the certain alarm is triggering off in the MFD, the RS6 output contact specified
in the column RS6 I/O OUT ALM Status will be closed or opened, depending on
selected status of the contact in normal state: N/O (normal open), or N/C
(normal closed), or PO (pulse mode: normally open close open), or PC
(pulse mode: normally close open close).This alarm will be confirmed in
the MFD from the outer source by closing/unclosing the RS6 input contact
specified in the column RS6 I/O IN Ext. ACK. The outer source alarm will be
confirmed from the MFD by closing/unclosing RS6 output contact specified
in the column RS6 I/O OUT ACK Status:
In the column RS6 I/O IN Ext. ACK, specify the RS6 input contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified alarm will be acknowledged in
the MFD from the outer source. Select the outer source alarm
acknowledge mode N/C, or N/O;
In the column RS6 I/O OUT ALM Status, specify the RS6 output contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified alarm will be transfered to the
external device. Select the alarm status mode N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC;
In the column RS6 I/O OUT ACK Status, specify the RS6 output contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified outer source alarm will be
acknowledged from the MFD. Select the mode of outer source alarm
acknowledge N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC.
146
MFD Configuration
To transfer the alarm from the MFD to the BNWAS, check the checkbox in the
column BNWAS alarm. This column will appear on the Alarm Output Settings
page after BNWAS adjustments will be made (see BNWAS Setup section of
this document);
The following alarms CPA/TCPA (Pub Id 57), Guard zone target (Pub Id 103),
AIS guard zone target (Pub Id 1045) can be transfered to the outer Alarm Panel
via different dry contacts and will be identified from what workstation
they are received;
In the window Alarm Sound (IN) of the group WAGO contacts, specify the number
of WAGO Module input contact intended for silencing the alarm sound signal
came from outer equipment. Closing/unclosing the specified contact performs
the silencing of all the active alarms. Select status of the contact N/O or N/C;
In the window Dead man signal (OUT) of the group WAGO contacts, specify
the number of WAGO Module output contact intended for transferring the
timer reset signal to the outer Alarm Panel. Therefore, the specified contact
will be closed or opened, depending on the selected status of the contact
(N/O, or N/C), by trackball movement with resetting the Dead Man timer on
the outer Alarm Panel. Select status of the contact N/O, or N/C;
In the window Alarm Sound (IN) of the group RS6 I/O contacts, specify the
number of RS6 input contact intended for silencing the alarm sound signal
came from outer equipment. Closing/unclosing the specified contact performs
the silencing of all the active alarms. Select status of the contact N/O, or N/C;
In the window Dead man signal (OUT) of the group RS6 I/O contacts, specify
the number of RS6 output contact intended for transferring the timer reset
signal to the outer Alarm Panel. Therefore, the specified contact will be closed
or opened, depending on the selected status of the contact (N/O, or N/C), by
trackball movement with resetting the Dead Man timer on the outer
Alarm Panel. Select status of the contact N/O, or N/C;
In the Alarm sound contact behaviour group select one of the following settings:
Silent until new alarm (default) the alarm sound signal will be silenced
when new alarm is triggered off;
Silent until timeout the alarm sound signal will be silenced during the
interval specified in the input box (from 5 to 60 sec).
147
MFD Configuration
7. Switch to External Alarm WAGO Settings page:
In WAGO I/O settings group, make settings for work with alarms and warnings via
WAGO modules:
In the column Name, enter the alarm name which is to be displayed in MFD by
closing/unclosing the WAGO Module contacts specified in the column Alarm
State In Contact;
In the column Source, enter the alarm source name (up to 5 characters) which
is to be displayed in the MFD tasks;
In Backup officer column, check if necessary alarm checkbox; if no
acknowledgement is received within a certain time interval, the Backup officer
alarm should be triggered off; set the necessary time interval in seconds;
In the Warning column, check checkbox if this alarm is required to be
a warning which is to be displayed in the MFD Warnings task window;
In the column Alarm State In Contact, specify the alarm mode:
N/C normal closed;
N/O normal open:
Specify the WAGO Module contact by closing/unclosing of which the specified

alarm will be triggered off in MFD;
In the column Alarm Acknowledge In Contact, specify the outer source alarm
acknowledge mode:
N/C normal closed;
N/O normal open.
alarm will be acknowledged in MFD from the outer source;
In the column Alarm Sound In Contact, specify the outer source alarm silencing
mode:
148
MFD Configuration
N/C normal closed;

N/O normal open.
alarm will be silenced in MFD from the outer source;
In the column Alarm Acknowledge Out Contact, specify the mode of outer source
alarm acknowledge from the MFD:
N/C normal closed;
N/O normal open;
P/O (pulse mode: normally open close open);
P/C (pulse mode: normally close open close).
outer source alarm will be acknowledged from the MFD;
In the column Alarm Sound Out Contact, specify the mode of outer source alarm
silencing from the MFD:
N/C normal closed;
N/O normal open;
P/O (pulse mode: normally open close open);
P/C (pulse mode: normally close open close).
outer source alarm will be silenced from the MFD;
Check the checkbox in the BNWAS alarm column for each alarm if it is
necessary to connect this alarm to the BNWAS. This column will appear on
the Alarm Output Settings page after BNWAS adjustments will be made
(see BNWAS Setup section of this document).
In much the same way, make settings in the RS6 I/O settings group for work with
alarms and warnings via RS6B input/output contacts.
8. Switch to External Hot Keys page:
In the Hotkey column, enter the Hotkey combination for performing the
necessary operation, which should correspond to the combination assigned in
the Hotkeys Editor utility (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.2.00.330). UTILITIES, Chapter 13, section Work with HotKeys
Editor);
149
MFD Configuration
In the Repeatable column, check the checkbox if the action is required to be

performed while the external hotkey button is depressed;
In the Type column, select the sets of contacts which the external hotkey
button will be connected to;
In the Contact In column, specify the contact intended for receiving external
hotkey button ON signal.
9. Switch to CCTV page:
In the Sensor column, select the type of the sensor which the camera is
connected to (see document NC4000 VIDEO ADJUSTMENT on MNS CD
(TRANSAS_MNS\DRIVERS\MoxaVPort_351);
In the IP address column enter IP address of this server (see document

NC4000 VIDEO ADJUSTMENT on MNS CD
(TRANSAS_MNS\DRIVERS\MoxaVPort_351);
In the IP port, User and Password columns leave everything unchanged.
MFD Settings
1. Press INS button. Open Network settings page to set the MFD network
parameters (in the case of MFD network configuration). This page is intended
for specifying the Navigation MASTER priority for the tasks on each MFD
Workstation. The priority can only be set for a WS with the Backup role. The
highest priority (0) has a task engaged in primary navigation data processing.
The function of navigation data processing is transferred to the tasks and
Workstations with the lower priority in a queue (1, 2, etc.) in the case of
Navigation MASTER with 0 priority failure. If the Slave role is set
for a workstation, it can never be used as the Navigation MASTER.
150
MFD Configuration
Note: The Electronic Ship Log Book will be accessible only on workstations with
priorities 0, 1 and 2. On workstations with priorities 0 and 1, there is
an opportunity to edit events. On the WS with priority 2, it is possible only
to view events.
In Role column, by default set Backup role for ECDIS task on all WSs;
Use Priority column to set the workstation priority in accordance with
the MFD configuration.
2. Switch to General page:
In the Watches field, set the navigation watches schedule;

In the Navigational data settings group, specify the period of the navigation data
processing (milliseconds) (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, Navigational
Sensors section, paragraph Consistent Common Reference System);
151
MFD Configuration
Check the Double ended vessel checkbox if it is this type of ship which MFD is
installed on. In this case, the radar picture will be turned by 180 degrees
in RADAR task when the appropriate button is pressed;
Check the SOG calculation from STW+drift enabled check box if it is necessary
to have such source for the SOG;
Keep Integrity check enabled checkbox unchecked for non-certified
(DNV, Lloyds Register) installations (it is strictly recommended!).
If the NS 4100 is installed, the General page looks as follows:
In the Navigational data settings group, check Fast POS,COG, SOG, HDG data
checkbox if you expect to use the high-rate own ship data (see document
NAVI-SAILOR 4100 (V.2.00.330). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS,
section Navigation, paragraph High Speed Data Sensors Support);
In the Logbook settings group, in the window Logbook master copy host, select
the workstation in the network where the master ship logbook will be stored;
Check the Manual Heading enabled checkbox if the manual heading input will be
used with the gyro connected;
Check the Use AIS as PS checkbox if the AIS will be used as a position source.
152
MFD Configuration
3. Switch to Ship settings page:
In the Ship Setup field, enter the following own ship identification data to be used in
the AIS transponder work (to enable this, the Use AIS MKD (Own AIS device)
checkbox should be checked on the AIS Settings page, see item 10):
MMSI;
Call Sign;
Name;
IMO No.
In the field Ship Setup, enter the principal dimensions of the own ship:
Beam Overall (in metres);
Length Overall (in metres);
Bridge Elevation (in metres), the value which is used for lights visibility
calculation.
In the field Ship Setup, check Submarine mode checkbox if it is necessary to
show the ship symbol in the form of a submarine on the Depth Viewer page
of the Underwater panel (only for NS 4100, see document NAVI-SAILOR
4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.330). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section Underwater
Features);
Enter the Conning Station coordinates and coordinates of the next connected
sensor antenna units. Configuration of external devices connection to
the MFD ports is performed on the page Sensors of the panel Sensors
(see above). If external device is not connected, the group will be blank:
POS1 (D)GPS1;
POS2 (D)GPS2;
DLOG1 head sensor the head Dual-Axis Bottom Speed sensor, which will
be used for calculations in the MFD (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.2.00.330). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, MFD
Configuration section, MFD Configuration paragraph);
DLOG1 stern sensor the stern Dual-Axis Bottom Speed sensor, which
will be used for calculations in the MFD;
DLOG1 head conning head point, which the calculated transverse vector
will originate from when displayed on the Dual panel of ECDIS task in
Docking Mode (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330).
153
MFD Configuration
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS document, Chapter 1,MFD Configuration

section,MFD Configuration paragraph);
DLOG1 stern conning stern point, which the calculated transverse vector
will originate from when displayed on the Dual panel of ECDIS task
in Docking Mode;
Radar External 1 scanner X-band;
Radar External 2 scanner S-band;
AIS External GPS (D)GPS for the AIS;
AIS Internal GPS DGPS for the SAAB R4 AIS type only.
Note: Input can be made either with the cursor on the ships scheme in the middle
part of the page or by the direct coordinates entering in Station Position (meters)
field. Geographic coordinates of the ship are always referred to the reference
point. See document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, Navigational Sensors section,
Consistent Common Reference System paragraph.
Note: For the Track Control mode, positions of the GPS antenna and Conning
Station should be precisely set. It is advisable to set the Conning Station in
the ship centreline plane (Y = 0).
In the field Height (from keel, meters), specify the heights from the keel for
transducers of each Echosounder ();
In the field Loading depended settings, specify lead distance for empty, halfloaded and loaded ship (see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Sensors section, Consistent Common Reference System paragraph);
In User Ship Contour field, select the User Ship Contour, which is to be
displayed on the ECDIS task screen when the ship size comparable scale is
selected (the licensed option to be ordered in Transas).
If the Draught Information System (DIS) is used, the Ship settings page looks
as follows (for description DIS, see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330).
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS document, Chapter 5):
154
MFD Configuration
Note: Since DIS sounder warning is triggered off by the UKC (under-keel
clearance) value calculated in the sounder position, it is necessary to pay
attention to the correctness of the sounder antenna position settings
(X and Y) and its offset (Height).
In the DIS Settings group, from the Ship model drop-down list, select the ship
type for squat calculations:
To install the New Laker ship model, press the Default State button.
Pressing this button restores the following default settings:
The ship type New Laker;
The Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox is checked (page AIS);
The frequency of tracks recording (page Tracks) 2 sec;
The ship bow/stern draught (DIS WS, UKC Data display) 8.08 m.
From the DIS-Viewer station drop-down list, select the WS on which the DIS
Viewer will be installed:
Note: By default, the DIS Viewer is installed on the workstation with the priority
Backup 1. In case of ECDIS standalone, it will be installed on the WS with
the priority Backup 0.
On the page AIS Settings (see below item 10), make sure that
the Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox in the Advanced Abilities group is
checked (checked by default);
On the page Tracks (see below item 13), check that in the Track of Own Ship
group, from the Primary Position & General Nav.Data, Route Monitoring Data and
Track of Targets drop-down lists, the 2 value is selected (selected by default).
155
MFD Configuration
4. Switch to Chart collections page:
In Chart Collections field, specify chart formats required for work with
the application. All checkboxes are checked by default, i.e. upon installation
of charts of specified formats they will be displayed; if checkbox is not
checked, the charts of this format will not be displayed;
In Databases field, specify databases required for work with the application
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7);
In Tidal databases group, specify databases sources required for work with
the MFD in Databases group. Total tide source can be chosen if Total Tide SW
product had been pre-installed and the appropriate option is opened by
the license. Select NOAA, if required to work with NOAA database source.
5. Switch to Fallback page:
156
MFD Configuration
If an alarm is required to be generated by the loss of the GPS differential mode,

check the Diff. mode lost checkbox.
The rest of the parameters of shifting to the reserve data sources are set
by default and not accessible for editing (MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Sensors section, Navigational Sensors Selection paragraph, under
Automatic Source Selection with Actuation of Fallback Functionality).
6. Switch to NMEA Input filter:
The table provides all the messages from the data sources processed in the MFD:
Press the button with the message name to prohibit its processing (the button
will be displayed in a red color). To permit processing the message, press
once again this button (the button will be displayed in a green color);
Press the ALL button to prohibit the processing of all messages from
the source in question (the all buttons will be displayed in a red color). To
permit processing the all messages, press once again ALL button (the all
buttons will be displayed in a green color);
In Not processed talkers input field, enter talkers of sensors messages from
which will be ignored. If necessary to switch-off the talker filter, uncheck
Talker filter checkbox.
In this case,entered talkers EC and TE will not be processed:
157
MFD Configuration
7. Switch to NMEA Output page:
In the field Sensor, select the NMEAOUT where the NMEA sentences will be
transmitted from MFD. Configuration of NMEAOUT connection to the MFD
ports is performed on the page Sensors of the panel Sensors (see above).
If external device is not connected, the page will be blank;
By default, GLL, GGA, VDR, WPL, RTE, ZDA sentences available for
transmitting to the external devices will be transmitted by the MFD. Check the
corresponding checkboxes to enable the necessary sentences transmitting;
For the GLL, GGA, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL, XTE, APB and RDX sentences
(if they are used), select the required precision (a number of decimals after
the comma) in the Precision column. If necessary, for the GGA, VTG, VHW
and VDR sentences, enable the status value transmitting by checking the
checkbox in the Status/Magnet column;
To disable the NMEA sentences checksum transmitting, uncheck
the checkbox Check Sum in the Append To All field.
With the use of the Track Control mode in the field Sensor, select the TCS
(configuration of TCS sensor is performed on the page Sensors of the panel
Sensors):
158
MFD Configuration
If necessary, check the checkboxes of additional messages used in the

operation with the autopilot;
For the GLL and RDX sentences, select the required precision (a number of
decimals after the comma) in the Precision column;
the checkbox Check Sum in the Append To All field.
Note: It is advisable to use the minimum quantity of additional messages (or
remove them at all for the Autopilot output port in case of TCS connection)
as a large size of transmitted information may result in delays in transmitting
necessary messages and, ultimately, in the autopilot failure.
With the use of the Autopilot NMEA out in the field Sensor, select the
AP_NMEAout (configuration of AP_NMEAout sensor is performed on the page
Sensors of the panel Sensors):
Check the corresponding checkboxes to enable the necessary sentences

transmitting:
159
MFD Configuration
For the GLL, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL, XTE and APB sentences (if they are
used), select the required precision (a number of decimals after the comma)
in the Precision column. If necessary, for the VTG, VHW and VDR sentences,
enable the status value transmitting by checking the checkbox in the
Status/Magnet column;
the checkbox Check Sum in the Append To All field;
In the Additional settings group:
To enable APB message of short format, uncheck the APB message full
format checkbox;
To disable transmitting APB and XTE messages if the route is unloaded,
uncheck the Send APB and XTE messages when route is unloaded checkbox.
8. Switch to ARPA Output page:
In the Sensor field, select the ARPA_OUTPUT where the NMEA sentences
will be transmitted from MFD. Configuration of ARPA_OUTPUT connection to
the MFD ports is performed on the Sensors page of the Sensors panel
(see above). If external device is not connected, the page will be blank;
Check the corresponding checkboxes to enable the necessary sentences
transmitting to the external devices from MFD;
the Check Sum checkbox in the Append To All field.
160
MFD Configuration
9. Switch to NMEA Input page:
For each connected DLOG (Dual-Axis Bottom Tracking Log), uncheck

checkboxes for VBW sentence fields which should not be processed in
the MFD (e.g., due to the absence of relevant sensors). Configuration of
external devices connection to the MFD ports is performed on the page
Sensors of the Sensors panel (see above). If external DLOG sensor is not
connected, the page will be blank.
10. Switch to AIS Settings page:
Use UAIS Model group to select the model of the transponder:

Press AIS (IEC) radio button to operate with any transponder complying
with IEC 61993-2;
Press SAAB R4 radio button to operate with SAAB R4 transponder;
Press T-104 radio button to operate with T-104 transponder;
Press T-603 radio button to operate with T-603 transponder.
161
MFD Configuration
In the Advanced Abilities group:

Check the Use AIS MKD (Own AIS device) checkbox to enable the use of the
ECDIS as an MKD;
Check the Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox to enable the display
of the St.Lawrence Seaway AIS Data Messaging.
Note: If DIS is used, the Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox must be
checked (see above item 3).
If it is necessary to prohibit an opportunity of the data change on the
Voyage and Static data page of the AIS panel, check the Read-Only
AIS Device checkbox (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.2.00.330). USER MANUAL, Chapter 10, section AIS, paragraph
Setting of Voyage Data).
Use Miscellaneous group to set AIS targets display mode:
In Maximum Range input box, enter the radius (up to 100 NM) of an area
within which the AIS targets will be displayed;
Check Always Active target status checkbox for activation displayed AIS
targets (see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 8, section
Display of AIS Targets, paragraph Activated and Non-Activated
AIS Targets).
Use the AIS class settings group to select a class of AIS equipment connected
to the MFD (for class B AIS equipment select the Safety Messaging and/or
Binary Messaging status of messages (Safety and/or Normal) which can be
sent from the MFD);
Use the Bogus targets settings group to set bogus functionality parameters
(for NS 4100 installation only when working with the AIS SAAB R4):
From the Read Port drop-down list select the SAAB R4 transponder port
which the BOGUS_OUT port in the NS 4100 is connected to (see item 3);
In R4 Admin password input box enter SAAB R4 administrator transponder
password (see document Operator's Manual R4 AIS Class A
Transponder System).
Use Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M Settings group for RDF settings (see also
document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section MOB Mode with Use of RDF Rhotheta RT202/RT-500M):
In Angle Correction input box, enter an exact correction between the initial
direction of RDF Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M bearing origin and
the ships centreline plane;
Set the necessary correction polarity Positive or Negative by pressing
the appropriate radio button.
Note:
The correction should be within 180 degrees with a positive (0179 clockwise)
or negative (0179 counter-clockwise) relative to the own ship centreline plane.
Check MOB Alert Alarm checkbox to turn on the MFD alarm upon
reception of bearing from Rhotheta RT-202 or AIS targets (see also
document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section MOB Mode with Use of RDF
Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M). Connection of the external MOB button is
detailed in the relevant paragraph of Annex B
in the Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules section.
162
MFD Configuration
Use Seetrac Tracking group to specify the necessary Seetrac tracking mode:
Channel Mode or Address Mode, by pressing the appropriate radio button.
11. Switch to Track Control page. This page is intended for configuration
Track Control functionality.
Configuration of TCS connection to the NS 4000 ports is performed on

the page Sensors of the panel Sensors (see above). If external device is
not connected, the page will be blank;
In Autopilot type group, select the name of the autopilot used for Track Control
mode:
Autopilot PT500A with the use of PT500 autopilot by Yokogawa for
TCS Class C installation;
NautoPilot 2025 Plus C with the use of NP2025 autopilot by Raytheon
for TCS Class C installation;
Autopilot AP3000 with the use of AP3000 autopilot by Navis for TCS
Class C installation;
EMRI SEM200 with the use of SEM200 autopilot by EMRI for TCS
Class C installation;
None Track Control is switched off.
In Ship limits and Settings group, set the limitations required for the operation
of Track Control mode:
Max speed maximum ship speed (up to 30 knots) (for an empty, halfloaded and loaded ship);
Max ROT maximum rate of turn within the range of 1.0 to 10.0 degrees
per second (for an empty, half-loaded and loaded ship);
Min turn radius minimum radius within the range of 0.1 to 3.0 miles
(for an empty, half-loaded and loaded ship);
Altering gain coefficient of the ownship control accuracy adjustment
within 0.1 to 20.0 (for an empty, half-loaded and loaded ship);
Min manoeuvre speed minimum speed within the range of 1.0 to 10.0 knots;
Max Rudder angle within the range of 25 to 70 degrees;
Initial Pos-Track maximum distance of the ship position from the
monitored route leg for steering to this leg at the time of turning on Track
Control mode. The value is forcedly synchronised with the Max XTD value;
163
MFD Configuration
Max XTD maximum distance from the leg of the monitored route
expected to be used in Track Control mode. It is set within the range
of 1.0 to 5.0 mile;
Initial HDG-Track maximum deviation of the current ship course from the
monitored route leg for steering to this leg with Track Control mode ON.
It is set within the range of 20 to 60 degrees;
Max course deviation maximum possible deviation of the current ship
course from the leg of the monitored route as it is proceeded along in
Track Control mode. It is set within the range of 5 to 30 degrees;
Set the turn arc radius to be used by default when Quick Track mode is
turned on (Default radius), not less than 0.1 mile.
Note: Pay special attention to the accuracy of setting the F-Distance parameter on
the Ship settings page for the Raytheon 2025 and EMRI SEM200
autopilots.
12. Switch to Speed Maneuvering page. This page is intended for configuration
Trial Manoeuvre functionality:
In the Ship loading drop-down list, select the ship loading option;
In the Max. Speed (kt) group, set the ship speed in the conditions of the
selected ship loading option for the following main engine operating modes
(from the Pilot Card):
On Full Ahead;
On Half Ahead;
On Slow Ahead;
On Dead Slow Ahead.
In the Stopping\acceleration (sec) group, set the ship acceleration (stopping)
time in the conditions of the selected loading option for the following modes
(from Pilot Card):
STOP to FULL AHEAD from 0 (Stop engine operating mode)
to the maximum speed (Full Ahead main engine operating mode);
FULL AHEAD to FULL ASTERN maximum speed (Full Ahead main
engine operating mode) to 0 (Full Astern main engine operating mode);
FULL AHEAD to STOP maximum speed (Full Ahead main engine
operating mode) to 0 (Stop main engine operating mode).
164
MFD Configuration
In the Turn parameters (0-360) group, set the ship turning circle parameters
in the conditions of the selected loading option for the Full Ahead main
engine operating mode:
End Speed (rudder 15) steady turn speed at 15 rudder angle;
End Speed (rudder 35) steady turn speed at 35 rudder angle;
Turn Radius (rudder 15) turn radius at 15 rudder angle;
Turn Radius (rudder 35) turn radius at 35 rudder angle.
13. Switch to Tracks page:
In the Track of own ship group, set the time interval for recording the following
data (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, General and Own Ship Track sections):
Primary Position & General Nav. Data for own ship position and its motion
parameters (HDG/STW/COG/SOG): 10 sec only.
Note: If DIS is used, in the Track of Own Ship group from the Primary Position &
General Nav.Data, Route Monitoring Data and Track of Targets drop-down lists, the
2 value must be selected (see above item 3).
Secondary Position for own ship secondary position: 10 sec only;
Route Monitoring Data for the monitored route name, monitored WPT,
XTD, WPT selection mode: 10 or 20 sec;
Depth for depth from echosounder: 10 or 20 sec;
Wind for wind: 10, 20, 30, or 60 sec;
Temperature for temperature: 20, 30, or 60 sec.
In the Tracks of Targets group, set the time interval (10, 20, or 60 sec)
for recording the targets information (identifiers, coordinates and motion
parameters) (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, General and Target Data
sections);
In the Miscellaneous settings group, set the remaining free space on the disk
which actuates an appropriate warning when achieved
(see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 4, Main Alarms and Warnings Generation
Principles section, paragraph Other Alarms).
165
MFD Configuration
Use the Track storage period box to specify the number of days (from 30 to 365)
during which the tracks will be stored (upon the expiry of this period all
the tracks will be deleted);
In the Detailed Track group, use the Storage period box to specify the number of
days (from 5 to 15) during which the own ship detailed track will be recorded
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, Own Ship Track section, paragraph Display of
the Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task);
Note: On the DIS wortkstation detailed track will not be recorded.
In the Radar Overlay group, set the radar picture recording parameters
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, section Radar Overlay):
Recording enabled to turn on (by checking the checkbox) the radar
picture recording function;
Interval to set the recording interval (160 seconds);
Storage period to specify the number of days (from 1 to 10) during which
the radar overlay will be recorded.
14. Switch to the NMEA Custom page. For setting up of the reception of
customised NMEA-like sentences for the CONNING task, see Annex B,
Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section.
15. Switch to the WAGO page. For setting up the reception of analog and discrete
parameters for the CONNING task via the WAGO modules, see Annex B,
Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules section.
16. Switch to NavTex page:
Configuration of NAVTEX receiver connection to the MFD ports is performed

on the Sensors page of the Sensors panel (see above). This page is
available if only NMEA NAVTEX receiver (no ASCII) connected, otherwise
the page will be blank;
In the Device polling timeout field, enter the time interval (from 5 to 60 min)
which the NAVTEX Messages database will be updated at
166
MFD Configuration

DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, NAVTEX Messages section);
By default, RMC sentence available for transmitting to the external devices
will be transmitted by the MFD. Uncheck the checkbox to disable the
sentence transmitting to the external devices from MFD;
Select the required precision (a number of decimals after the comma) in the
Precision column;
the Check Sum checkbox in the Append To All field.
Note: Where messages are required to be transmitted to the NAVTEX receiver,
use the NMEAOUT (see item 7).
17. Switch to Language page and select a suitable language:
18. Switch to Predictor page:
167
MFD Configuration
Check the Enable Adaptive predictor checkbox if you intend to use the adaptive
predictor (MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS document, Chapter 1, MFD Configuration section, MFD
Configuration paragraph);
In the Adaptive predictor settings group, from the Rudder data source drop-down
list select the parameter containing the rudder angle data. Parameter
extraction rules are set on the NMEA Custom and WAGO pages (see
Annex B):
From the RPM data source drop-down list select the parameter containing
the RPM data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the NMEA Custom and
WAGO pages. (see Annex B);
In the Engine related settings group, in RPM, Power and Speed input boxes set
the respective values for the following main engine operating modes
(from the Pilot Card):
Slow Ahead;
Full Ahead.
In the Engine related settings group, use the Displacement and Ships draft input
boxes to set the respective values.
168
MFD Configuration
19. Switch to Advanced predictor page:
From Ship model drop-down list, select the necessary ship model:
In the Propeller and rudder data sources group, from the Propeller/Impeller RPM
drop-down list select the parameter containing the propeller RPM data.
Parameter extraction rules are set on the NMEA Custom and WAGO
pages (see Annex B). Perform this procedure for all the propellers (propellers
are specified from the portside to the starboard):
From the Propeller pitch/Reversing jet deflector drop-down list, select the parameter
containing the propeller pitch data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the
NMEA Custom and WAGO pages (see Annex B). Perform this procedure
for all the propellers (propellers are specified from the portside to the starboard);
From the Rudder/steering bucket angle drop-down list, select the parameter
containing the rudder angle data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the
NMEA Custom and WAGO pages (see Annex B). Perform this procedure
for all the rudders (rudders are specified from the portside to the starboard);
In the Thruster data sources group, from the Tunnel thruster power drop-down list
select the parameter containing the thruster power data. Parameter extraction
rules are set on the NMEA Custom and WAGO pages (see Annex B).
169
MFD Configuration
Perform this procedure for all the thrusters (thrusters are specified
from the portside/forward to the starboard/aft):
From the Tunnel thruster pitch drop-down list, select the parameter containing
the thruster pitch data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the NMEA Custom
and WAGO pages (see Annex B). Perform this procedure for all the thrusters
(thrusters are specified from the portside/forward to the starboard/aft);
From the Tunnel thruster force and pitch combined drop-down list, select the
parameter containing the combined thruster power and pitch data. Parameter
extraction rules are set on the NMEA Custom and WAGO pages
(see Annex B). Perform this procedure for all the thrusters
(thrusters are specified from the portside/forward to the starboard/aft);
In the Interceptor position data sources group, from the Portside and Starboard
drop-down lists select the parameters containing the Interseptor position data
sources. Parameters extraction rules are set on the NMEA Custom and
WAGO pages (see Annex B);
In the Wind gust filter input field, specify if the wind effect is taken onto account
(100% wind is not taken into account, 0% wind is fully taken into account);
If necessary, check the Enable log files writing checkbox.
20. Switch to BNWAS page. For setting up the use of the Bridge Navigational
Watch Alarm System, see below BNWAS Setup section.
21. To configure the Wave system on the pages MODBUS and Wave, see below
Wave System Setup section.
Workstation Settings
Press Workstation button. The drop-down Workstation list specifies the name
of the workstation which settings will be made for.
ATTENTION!
170
MFD Configuration
1. Open Sound page to set the WS sound parameters:
In Sound group, select the device for the reproduction of acoustic alarms:
PC Speaker via the speaker built in PC;
Sound Card via the sound card and external speakers;
Alarm Sound checkbox must be check on.
In Additional sound devices group, select the additional device for the
reproduction of acoustic alarms:
ES Keyboard via the speaker built in ES keyboard;
LCD Display via the speaker built in LCD Display.
Note: With the use of a WS without keyboard for the reproduction of acoustic
alarms, the built-in monitor speaker is used. To this end, the monitor should
be connected to the MFD as a sensor. The LCD_DISPLAY connection to
the MFD ports is configured on the Sensors page of the Sensors panel
Synergy utility). Only five following monitor types can be used for
reproducing the sound signal:
JH19T14MMD-xxx-xxBx;
JH26T11MMD-xxx-xxBx.
171
MFD Configuration
2. Switch to Display page:
In Monitor Type group of Display page, press LCD radio button, and in Model
drop-down list, select the monitor type depending on the display size and WS
PC configuration. It is advisable to use the Autodetect option, and not to
select the monitor type manually unless the RS4, RS4v2 and old monitors of
the 01, 02 series are used. In case of use this option perform the next:
Check AutoDetect checkbox and press Add new model button.
In new window select Com port, which monitor is connected to.
Press Detect and OK once completed. New monitor will be available
in model list.
Select this for all WS in network where same monitor type is used.
In Monitor Size input window, enter the display diagonal size in mm.
3. Switch to Keyboard page:
Check Virtual keyboard enabled checkbox for use the virtual keyboard.
172
MFD Configuration
4. Switch to Collections page.
If necessary to backup routes and maps, specify the folder in the Collection for
mapped folder path input window (C:\TransasMappedFolders, by default);
Check the checkboxes in the Collection for mapping group for:
Route storing routes collection;
Addinfo storing maps collection.
Note: In this case the specified folder will be crteated automatically.
5. Switch to Additional settings page:
Check the Use video acceleration for ICE charts checkbox if the Ice, Geotiff,
JPEG2000 raster satellite charts are to be installed;
In the Overlay settings group, Simplified overlay or SOLAS-compliant setting is
selected automatically during MFD software installation depending on type of
the computer;
173
MFD Configuration
Note: If Navi-Radar 4000 application will be used, SOLAS-compliant should be set

for RS6B computer. It is necessary also to change video RAM Total Gfx
Mem from 256 MB to 512 MB in BIOS when using D3D rendering. 512 MB
should be set only on Radar computer (Radar application running). These
changes are not recommended for ECDIS computer, because it reduce total
amount of available memory.
Check the Stern conning workstation checkbox on the aft bridge WS. In this
case the heading value will always be with the 180 degree correction;
If necessary, use the Application auto-activation group to set up the activation of
application in the absence of the user activity:
From the Application drop-down list, select the application which will be
activated in absence of the user activity during the set timeout:
Use the Timeout input box to set the interval between the latest operator
action and automatic activation of the selected application.
6. Switch to Integrator page:
In the Integrator background group, select the necessary product for setting
the appropriate background for the Transas Integrator.
7.
Switch to External buttons page.

The external buttons connected to workstations via RS6B (WAGO) dry contacts
allow switching of the keyboard and trackball between workstations in the
network using the Synergy utility. This utility must be installed and configured
at these stations as described above in section Configuration of Synergy
Utility.
174
MFD Configuration
In the Station column, select the workstation which the external button will be
connected to;
In the Type column, select the sets of contacts which the external button will
be connected to. If you intend to use RS6 I/O discrete ports, the RS6 I/O ports
checkbox on the Sensors page must be checked (see above paragraph
Sensors Settings, item 5);
In the Contact In column, specify the input contact intended for receiving
external button ON signal;
In the Normal state column, select the state of the contact:

N/O (normal open), or N/C (normal closed).
8.
Switch to Voice Records page (only for NS4100 software):
In the Number of records input box, set the number of voice messages to be
recorded;
In the Maximum record length input box, set the maximum length of the
recorded voice messages.
175
MFD Configuration
Radar Settings
Press Radar button. The Workstation drop-down list specifies the name
of the Workstation which settings will be made for.
ATTENTION!
1. Open General page:
If Radar adjustments were done earlier, the General page looks as follows:
176
MFD Configuration
Leave Simplified Radar processing checkbox blank (it is used only for installation
ECDIS standalone);
The Interswitch button is pressed by default for the control of the RIB6 with the
MFD (it is strictly recommended that it should remain in the depressed state).
2. Switch to Radar settings page and select Radar External 1 from the Radar
mode drop-down list:
3. For Transas Network scanner adjustment, perform the following actions:
In the window Scanner type, select the Transas scanner from drop-down list;
In the Antenna settings group, set the following:
In the Scanner model window, from the drop-down list, select model of the
scanner;
In the Antenna height window, set antenna installation height above the
waterline;
177
MFD Configuration
For Radome 2/4 kW scanners, in the Rotation speed window, choose the
rotation speed of the antenna (standard or high speed).
In the Scanner connection settings field, in the Network window, select the
network connected to the scanner;
Press Apply button.
4. If the scanner is connected to the workstation via RIB6, make the settings
described below:
There may be three configurations in setting up the radar operation:

The scanner is connected to the WS. The signals (video, trigger, heading
marker and bearing marker) is supplied via RIB6, scanner control is provided
by RIB6s COM port;
Connected to the WS is an external radar which only supplies the signals
(video, trigger, heading marker and bearing marker) via RIB6;
DEMO mode (for demo purposes at the exhibitions), the signals is supplied
from the previously recorded *.raf file.
If the scanner is connected to the WS via RIB6:
In the Radar mode,select Radar External;
Select the scanner connected to the WS in the window Scanner type;
Select RIB6 in the window Connection;
If scanner control is provided by RIB6s COM port, the checkbox Master mode
must be checked;
Set the following antenna parameters in the Antenna settings group:
In the box Band, select the range of scanner connected to the WS;
Check the HSC mode checkbox if the High Speed Craft mode is used (for
the Consilium SRT scanner only);
If the scanner in use has a Performance Monitor, check PM enable
checkbox;
Antenna rotation speed rate of revolutions (rpm);
Bearing number per rev. number of bearing sensor pulses per one
revolution;
Antenna beam width beam width;
178
MFD Configuration
Antenna height antenna installation height above the waterline.

Specify IP addresses:
In the IP Primary input box, enter 10.8.1.209;
In the IP Secondary input box, enter 10.8.2.209.
WARNING!
Up to four scanners can be connected to the system simultaneously. Not more than
two scanners are connected to one WS (see also Chapter 1, section Workstation
Installation, paragraph Radar Integrator Board RIB6 and Connection Four
Scanners to MFD System. Block Diagram presented in Annex Q).
If two RIB6 are connected to a single WS, when the RIB6 is selected from
the Connection drop-down list, an additional tab appears where you can select
the second radar:
Make settings in much the same way as for the previous radar,
for the IP addresses specify the following values:
In the IP Primary input box, enter 10.8.1.210;
In the IP Secondary input box, enter 10.8.2.210.
179
MFD Configuration
Demo Mode:
In the Radar mode drop-down list, select Radar External;

Check the Demo mode checkbox;
In the RAF file input field of Video source settings group, specify the path
to the folder with *.raf file;
If necessary, in the Video source settings group, select from drop-down list
the required ports of the Workstation computer, where the NMEA sentences
will be transmitted from the selected file (for connection these ports, see
paragraph Sensors Settings). Specify in the drop-down list the baud rate for
selected ports;
Press Apply button.
5. For Navico scanner adjustment perform the following actions:
In the window Scanner type select the scanner Navico BR24;
180
MFD Configuration
In the window Radar serial number press the button with arrow. Check the
presence of the serial number. In case of absence valid data, check network
connection to the radar;
Press Get from Radar button. In Lock ID window will be displayed the ID code:
Enter the Unlock code received from Navico company in Unlock Key input
window;
Note: The Unlock Key should be saved on the back up storage for further usage.
Press Apply button.
181
MFD Configuration
Security Settings for MFD

Press Security button.
In the User column, enter the name of the user permitted to change NS
settings (alarm settings and etc), and press <Enter>.
Enter the password and the password confirmation and press the OK
button;
Set all the users whom access is granted to.
ATTENTION!
After completion of settings of all the Workstations, press the Apply button to save
all changes done without exiting the System Configuration utility; or press the OK
button to save all settings and exit the System Configuration utility.
After restart PC, run ECDIS and RADAR tasks on all the WSs and check performed
settings.
182
MFD Configuration
Security Settings for NS 4100

1. Press Security button.
2. Switch to Users page.
In the Users column enter the user name for configuring access to protected
functions (the name can include the following characters only: AZ, a
z, 09, ., _);
Enter the password and the password confirmation and press the OK
button;
183
MFD Configuration
In the Level column, select the required access level from the listbox.
The NS 4100 system has three preset user categories and access levels:
Commander (CO access level Commanding Officer);
Navigator (NO access level Navigation Officer);
Watch (WO access level Watch Officer).
By default, the following passwords are used for the three user categories:
User
Password
Commander
TRANSASCO
Navigator
TRANSASNO
Watch
TRANSASWO
For a more detailed description of the NS4100 access protection system configuring,
see NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.330). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section
NS4100 Security Access System.
ATTENTION!
After completion of settings of all the Workstations, press the Apply button to save
all changes done without exiting the System Configuration utility; or press the OK
button to save all settings and exit the System Configuration utility.
After restart PC, run ECDIS on all WS and check performed settings.
184
SPOS Weather Module Adjustment
SPOS WEATHER MODULE ADJUSTMENT

ATTENTION!
The SPOS 6 program setup is only made on the WS, which it is installed in.
This section describes settings of the SPOS program and its integration
with the MFD for work in FILE mode.
Run the SPOS program utility by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\SPOS\SPOS):
In command line, press File. Select System Settings from the fall-off list.
Open the Folders page. In the Update folder field, specify path to the folder SPOS
which was created automatically (C:\Transas\IBS\SPOS).
Open the page Communication:
185
Select method for the messages sending by checking the checkbox 2. Via FILE: store
message in file, send file via e-mail. Specify the path to the folder SPOS as described above
(C:\Transas\IBS\SPOS).
Note: For selection the method Via MAPI, each installation shall be examined
individually, depending on the e-mail client installed on the bridge workstation.
Press OK button to save the performed settings and close System Settings window.
On the Weather page, press the button Weather Subscription. In the opened window,
select the region(s) of the weather forecast coverage and press Add to subscription
button. Several regions are available for selection depending on the sailing area:
Select the frequency of the forecast update. Press the Submit button. The following
dialog box will be displayed:
Press the OK button. The subscription request spossub.txt will be saved in

the folder SPOS in the MFD root directory (C:\Transas\IBS\SPOS\spossub.txt).
To make sure that SPOS settings were carried out properly, run the Data Tool utility
by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL
DISPLAY\DATA TOOL):
186
In Features list select SPOS file group.
The file spossub.txt shall be displayed in the above mentioned group showing
propriety of the SPOS program settings. The file should be copied onto the outer
carrier (e.g., floppy disc) by means of the Data Tool utility and sent to the e-mail
address: Subscription@spos.eu via ships communication workstation. Received
weather forecasts should be copied later to internal SPOS folder.
187
Navi-Conning 4000 Adjustment
NAVI-CONNING 4000 ADJUSTMENT

ATTENTION!
The Navi-Conning 4000 program setup is made separately for each WS, which it is
installed in. For the correct setup it is necessary that the ECDIS or RADAR tasks be
run on this WS. In the ECDIS task, create a route and load it for monitoring
(see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). ECDIS USER MANUAL,
Chapter 4, Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode section).
General
The indicators contained in the CONNING Screen View windows are set up
automatically except for the following indicators:
Weather window:
Air temperature;
Barometric Pressure;
Humidity.
Ship Contour window:

Bow Thruster;
Rudder;
Lights.
Engine window:
Engine Telegraph;
RPM.
These indicators are set up by the service engineer at the installation stage.
ATTENTION!
Parameters for the setup of these indicators will not be available in the program
database unless they were previously created in the System Configuration utility.
If the data is supplied via the WAGO interface, the parameter will have
the WAGO_ADC_parameter_name for a name (see Annex B, Adjustment of MFD
Operation with WAGO Modules section). If the data is supplied via the NMEA
Custom, the parameter will be named NMEA_CUSTOM_parameter_name (see
Annex B, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section). To avoid
the incorrect operation of the NC 4000 program, it is not advisable to connect to the
indicators parameters whose names are different from those listed above.
We will consider the indicator setup procedure using the Air Temperature as
an example.
188
Run the CONNING task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY/NAVI-CONNING):
After the program start, the NC 4000 Screen Views will be displayed.
Press Setup button.
189
In the Screen View Configuration Utility window, select the Screen Views
Configuration/Navigation SV/Weather Window/Temperature Window menu.
In the right-hand part of the Screen View Configuration Utility window,

select the Air temperature value line from the menu and press the button.
190
From the menu which will open up, select the DATA ACCESS/NMEA_CUSTOM_AIR_TEMPERATURE/
VALUE line.
The selected source for the parameter value will be displayed in the right-hand part
of the Screen View Configuration Utility window in the Air temperature value line.
In the right-hand part of the Screen View Configuration Utility window,

select the Air temperature value view data line and press the button.
191
From the menu which will open up, select the DATA ACCESS/NMEA_CUSTOM_AIR_TEMPERATURE/
VIEWDATA line.
If connected correctly, parameters will be shown dynamically on the relevant

indicators, there is not need to restart Navi-Conning 4000.
Press the Save button in the Screen View Configuration Utility window.
WARNING!
For each indicator both characteristics VALUE and VIEWDATA should be adjusted. For
each Screen View the indicator is set up individually. I.e., in the Screen View
Configuration Utility window, it is necessary to repeat the setup procedure for the
NavData Screen View (Screen Views Configuration/NavData SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window).
Indicator Setup Table

Set up the indicators in accordance with the above procedure by using the following table:
Indicator
Window
Screen
Views
Path
Air Temperature
Weather/Temperature
Tab
Navigation
Screen Views Configuration/

Navigation SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window
NavData

NavData SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window
Navigation

Temperature Window
NavData

NavData SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window
Barometric Pressure
192
Weather/Temperature
Tab
Indicator
Window
Screen
Views
Path
Humidity
Weather/Temperature
Tab
Navigation

Temperature Window
NavData

Temperature Window
Docking

Docking SV/Ship Window
Navigation

Navigation SV/Ship Window
Docking

Docking SV/Ship Window
Navigation

Docking

Docking SV /Ship Window
Navigation

Bow Thruster
Rudder Digital
Rudder Graphic
Lights
Engine Telegraph
PORT RPM
(see the next Item)
Ship Contour
Ship Contour
Ship Contour
Ship Contour
Navigation
1 Top Light, Front

2 Anchor Light, Front

3 Top Light, Rear

4 Port Side Light

5 Stb Side Light

Navigation SV/Ship Window/
6 Anchor Light, Rear

7 Stern Light

Navigation SV/Ship Window/
Engine
Engine
Docking

Docking SV/
Engine Telegraph Window
Navigation

Navigation SV/
Chart

Chart SV/Engine Telegraph Window
Docking

Docking SV/Engine Telegraph Window
Navigation

Navigation SV/
193
Indicator
STBD RPM
(see the next Item)
Window
Engine
Screen
Views
Path
Chart

Docking

Docking SV/Engine Telegraph Window
Navigation

Navigation SV/
Chart

Note: Do not forget to set up the same indicators individually for each Screen View
(see the Warning in the previous item).
If there is one engine on the ship, neither the parameter source nor the rules
of displaying the second engine telegraph handle are specified for the Engine
Telegraph indicator.
CCTV Setup
Press Setup button to enter Screen View Configuration utility. Enter the password.
Press Edit button.

Select the necessary Screen View (or any other place) where you would like to add
a window which will display data from the video camera.
Press Edit button.

Press the button in the left side of the Screen View Configuration Utility window.
194
From the menu which will open up, select the READY-TO-USE WINDOWS/MOXA VPORT WINDOWS/
VIDEO VPORT WINDOW line.
The Video VPort Window will be added to the selected Screen View.
Select the Video VPort Window menu.In the right-hand part of the Screen View
Configuration Utility window, double click on the Sensor ID line.
From the drop-down list select the necessary CCTV sensor (it should be set on the
CCTV page of the Sensors panel in the System Configuration utility, see section
MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings).
In the right-hand part of the Screen View Configuration Utility window, double click
on the Camera No line. From the drop-down list select the camera whose data will be
displayed in the Video VPort window.
195
Charts Installation and Chart Assistant Adjustment
Check the checkbox in Connected line.
Press Save button.
CHARTS INSTALLATION AND CHART ASSISTANT

ADJUSTMENT
Run the Chart Assistant utility by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\CHART ASSISTANT):
196
In the opened window select Start Chart Assistant for advanced users and press
OK button:
Charts Installation
Insert the CD with a chart folio into the CD drive. Press Update button.
In the Scan Disk window, which will open up, specify the external storage
containing chart collection:
If necessary, press Browse button and specify the path to the directory, which
contains the chart collection:
Press OK button in the search window.
197
The Chart Assistant will scan the external storage, will automatically identify the
chart format and type of data it contains, and will produce a list of available actions:
Install TX97 charts checkbox is checked by default, in this case all charts, contained
on the disk, which the licenses are available for, will be automatically installed.
Press OK button.
After chart installation, general log is displayed:
Close the log. Chart installation process is completed.

By using the tab in the left top corner, switch to Network panel.
To synchronize the collection at all the workstations, press the Synchronize charts
collection button.
198
Chart Assistant Adjustment

Use the appropriate tab in the top left corner of the screen to switch to Ship Collection
or Catalogue panel:
Press
button and select E-mail page.
On E-mail page, uncheck Use E-mail application for orders transfer checkbox if it is
checked.
199
In Manual files transfer group, fill appropriate fields as follows (e.g., for a USB flash drive):
Inbox folder <Name of Disk>:\CA_Inbox;
Outbox folder <Name of Disk>:\CA_Outbox.
In Reply group it is necessary to input the following:
E-mail the ships e-mail address should be written here;
E-mail message size limit select necessary size of answer request. The answer
request size can be selected from the drop-down list.
Create and send an order to make a subscription for chart corrections (see document
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). UTILITIES, Chapter 2, section User
Manual, paragraph Ordering Data in On-Line Mode). As the result, the order will be
saved on the diskette or memory stick in the CA_Outbox folder.
Take off the diskette or memory stick and send a file from the CA_Outbox folder
(this will be a file with *.cdf extension) as an attachment to chartservice@transas.com.
No special subject or text is necessary. Then delete the *.cdf file from the memory stick
to prevent mixing up with other orders (files which will be saved by CA in the future).
When you receive an e-mail from chartservice@transas.com, save attachment(s)
(these will be *.cdf files) to memory stick in the CA_Inbox folder. Then insert
the memory stick into the computer with the Chart Assistant utility. When the Chart
Assistant detects new data in the memory stick, it offers to install updates. Press OK
and apply chart corrections.
Open ENC options page.
On this page, all the checkboxes are checked by default. Uncheck the relevant
checkboxes for performing the following operations when handling S-57 format charts:
200
Confirm charts deletion to delete charts without additional warning;
Confirm installing older chart issues to install new charts automatically on the
charts already installed;
Radar Adjustment
ATTENTION!
By default, the next checkboxes Manual accepting of S57 updates and Do not accept last
update are unchecked, and in this case updating of ENC charts will be accepted
automatically.
Manual accepting of S57 updates to install the successive updating automatically,

without prompt for accepting previous updating;
Do not accept last update to accept automatically the latest updating (if the
checkbox is checked, the latest updating should be accepted on ENC page
of Ship Collection panel);
Use catalogue for install file with chart catalogue (CATALOG.031) will not be used
during the chart installation;
Use catalogue for update file with chart catalogue (CATALOG.031) will not be used
during the chart updating;
Confirm deleting update to confirm automatically the deleting updating.
RADAR ADJUSTMENT
Transas Network 12/25 kW X-Band Scanners Adjustment
Run RADAR task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\NAVI-RADAR):
Receiver Adjustment
To switch the scanner to the transmission mode, press the mode button
in the top right corner of the Display Panel and select TX.
201
Radar Adjustment
Set the 24 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down list
in the top right corner of the Display Panel.
Switch pulse width to LP and wait for scanner to warm up for 10-15 minute.
Switch off the Auto mode (AUTO button depressed). Use the
Tune parameter to value 500.
and
buttons to set
In the Control Panels GAIN/RAIN/SEA window, position the cursor on the controls
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level. In the same way set
GAIN value to maximum level.
Open Settings panel by selecting the appropriate menu line in the Control Panels
Multipanel window:
Use the tab in the top part of Settings panel which will open up, to switch
to the Radar-Scanner page.
Enter the password on Settings panel.
Note: These settings should be set up and changed only by certificated engineer.
Uncontrollable changing of any settings may lead to serious deterioration of
the system work.
Press the enabled Radar Settings button.
202
Radar Adjustment
Set the Reg parameter to value 96 (if differs from this value).
Using the Coarce adjustment on the Radar-Scanner page, find the value
corresponding to most bright image (Tune level cannot be used for this purpose).
Probably, GAIN settings on the indicator panel would be required in the course
of adjustment.
Video Indication Adjustment

In the Reg field, press A button:
Adjustment is carried out automatically approximately within 2-3 minute. Upon

completion of adjustment, the button A will be released and the best value will be
displayed in the Reg field (approx. 50-130).
If the Reg value is approx. 200, changing Reg, find the value corresponding to
maximum tune level (should be around 230-240). See the picture below:
After making all the settings, turn on the Auto mode and check that the mode
operates on all the scales and with all the pulse lengths.
203
Radar Adjustment
If the Tune Level is 100%, change the Reg setting on the Radar-Scanner page:
Check that after this the Auto mode operates steadily and that the radar picture
quality is good.
For interference rejection, use the Stagger adjustment to set the change of the outgoing
pulse repetition rate in % of the average value. Recommended values for stagger are 2,
8, 15 (see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 8, Video Signal Processing Principles
section, Clutter Suppression Facilities paragraph).
Blank Sector Setting
ATTENTION!
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep over it does not transmit radar.
This is commonly used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ships
superstructure or funnel to prevent radar reflections.
Multipanel window:
Enter the password on Radar-Scanner page.
Uncontrollable changing of any settings may lead to serious deterioration
of the system work.
204
Radar Adjustment
In the Start window specify the beginning of blank sector; the end of blank sector
should be specified in the End window. Press the Apply button.
Press ON button. Established blank sector will be displayed on the PPI.
205
Radar Adjustment
30 kW S-Band Scanner Adjustment

Radar Setup
in the top right corner of the Display Panel and select TX. Leave the radar
in the transmission mode for 2030 minutes.
Set the 24 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down

list in the top right corner of the Display Panel.
to set Tune parameter in the middle position.
and
buttons
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level. In the same way, set
The noise marks should be clearly discernable on the screen. With the signal too
weak or too strong, adjust the RIB6 gain.
206
Radar Adjustment
Multipanel window.
of the system work.
By varying the value in the Tune Offset input field, obtain the brightest display
of target marks. It is desirable to select the most remote marks for checking.
The correctly and incorrectly set-up radar displays are shown for comparison.
207
Radar Adjustment
Correct setup
Incorrect setup
Switch on the Auto mode (press the AUTO button). Check the tune LEVEL indicator in
the top right corner of the Display Panel, the recommended level should be at 50%
of the maximum. If the level is too low, increase the value in the Video level input field
on the Radar-Scanner page. Check the Auto mode stability by switching the radar
scales.
The sensitivity time control adjustment is intended for preventing the receiver
saturation with echoes from the close-by zone. The adjustment is made by using
the Amp. and Slope input fields. The first control sets the signal suppression level, the
second control sets the range.
Set the 0.5 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down
Set values in the Amp. and Slope input fields so as to ensure, on the one hand, the
clear view of targets at short distances, close to the own ship, and on
the other hand, to prevent crowding in the radars reception channel. The latter is
checked by the tune LEVEL indicator in the top right corner of the Display Panel:
the value should not exceed 80%.
Press Back button.
208
Radar Adjustment
On Radar-Scanner page, press Diagnostics button.
By using this table you can check the radar visual setup accuracy. The recommended
values are: Main Bang Amplitude 128, Power level 160180. These values can be
changed on the Radar-Scanner page after pressing the Radar Settings button.
The former: by changing the value in the Amp. input field, the latter: in Video level input
field.
After completing the setup, it is advisable to check the Auto mode stability (the mode
should not get turned off spontaneously on different radar scales and with different
outgoing pulse length. As this is done, the tune LEVEL indicator is also checked in
the top right corner of the Display Panel.
Performance Monitor Setup

Note:
This functionality is available is the radar is fitted out with the optional 304316A1
device. It is also necessary to check that during the system configuration the PM
control option was selected (see section MFD Configuration, paragraph Radar
Settings).
The performance monitor (PM) is used for simplifying the process of adjusting the
radar transceiver and checking the device service status in the course of operation.
Multipanel window.
209
Radar Adjustment
of the system work.
Press the enabled PM button.
The PM signal is displayed in the form of a noise ring. To make the ring clearly
discernable, set the GAIN value to the maximum level.
On the Radar-Scanner page press PM Settings button.
210
Radar Adjustment
By varying the value in the PM amplitude input field, set the distance of the PM close
border at 20 miles.
Keep varying the value in the PM Open input field until the break in the ring is 4050
degrees.
The ring width should be 2 miles. This can be attained by varying the values
in the Video level input field on Radar-Scanner page after pressing the Radar Settings
button.
PM-Aided Radar Diagnostics

The PM is used for checking the radar transceiver status.
The reduced noise ring range indicates reduction of the radar magnetron power:
if the ring is at a distance of 12 miles rather than the required 20 miles, the radiated
power has decreased by 10 dB, and the magnetron should be replaced.
The size of break in the ring corresponds to the power radiated by the antenna into
the space. If the break becomes less than 30 degrees, the antenna maintenance
is required.
211
Radar Adjustment
The amplitude level (discernability on the screen) is used for checking the receiver
state: if the wing is not visible on the screen, the sensitivity has dropped by more
than 10 dB, and the transceiver maintenance is required.
After scanner adjustment make fine tuning RIB6 (see below paragraph Signal Gain
Level Setup by RIB6).
Blank Sectors Setting
ATTENTION!
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep, over it does not transmit
radar. This is commonly used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ships
Multipanel window.
of the system work.
212
Radar Adjustment
should be specified in the End window. Press the Apply button. To establish second
blank sector, select Sector 2 from the fall-off list and specify limits of the one.
Note: If sectors are overlapped, the single united sector should be displayed on the PPI.
Press ON button. Established blank sectors will be displayed on the PPI.
Distance and Bearing Offset

Introduction
Adjustment of the RIB in azimuth, i.e. an offset to the fixed azimuth errors of the
radar antenna. The magnitude of the offset is determined as the difference between
the bearing value of a clearly observed and uniquely identified stationary radar
object measured on the chart or by using other measurement method, and a mean
value of several bearing measurements made for the same object by using the RIB.
The offset corresponds to the value of an angle, which the picture should be turned
to in the clockwise direction for it to match the actual situation. The offset is entered
with an accuracy of up to one tenth of a degree.
Adjustment of the RIB in range, i.e. an offset to the delays in the radar and RIB
circuits. The magnitude of the offset is determined by comparing the results of range
measurements made for clearly observed and uniquely identified stationary radar
213
Radar Adjustment
objects by using the RIB radar picture, and measurements made on the chart or
by using other methods. The offset is entered with an accuracy of up to 1 m.
Distance and Bearing Offset Setting

To switch the scanner to the transmission mode press the mode button
Set the 1.5 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down list
On the radar picture, find an echo from even coastline: a pier,
building, etc. Check that there is no curvature of the coastline
and\or there is no bright/dark noise at the scan origin.
Use VRM1 to measure the distance to the electronic chart object used
for the adjustment purposes. Use VRM2 to measure the distance to the echo
of the object used for the adjustment purposes.
214
Radar Adjustment
Calculate the Distance Offset value as the difference between the VRM1 and VRM2
readouts.
Find a point radar mark of a navigational object, e.g., a buoy, lighthouse, etc.
Use EBL1 to measure the bearing to the electronic chart object used for the adjustment
purposes. Use EBL2 to measure the bearing to the echo of the object used for
the adjustment purposes.
215
Radar Adjustment
Calculate the Bearing Offset value as the difference between the EBL1 and EBL2
readouts.
Multipanel window.
Press the enabled BRG/DIST OFFSET button.
216
Radar Adjustment
Press Change button. Enter Bearing Offset value in Bearing input field and Distance
Offset value in Distance input field.
Press Apply button.

Make several iterations as required, achieving the maximum possible alignment of
the radar picture and chart information. Where there is no chart collection, or there
are no clearly expressed point marks, tuning can be performed by bringing the AIS
marks into coincidence with a radar echo.
To return the display of standard Radar-Scanner page, press Back button.
ATTENTION!
In making the adjustment, use the differential positioning mode in order to obtain
the required accuracy.
The adjustment is made by using the radar observed conspicuous features whose polar
coordinates are known with accuracy not inferior to 0.1 in azimuth and 2 m in range.
Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6

217
Radar Adjustment
At this stage, parameters of the radar processor analog-digital converter are set up
to ensure the best signal processing quality.
Multipanel window.
to the RIB6 page.
Enter the password on RIB6 page.
218
Radar Adjustment
of the system work.
Press Oscillograph button. Provides below are oscillograms showing different

adjustments:
Signal in the closest zone limited, incorrect amplification (AMP);
Correct amplification (AMP) and offset (SFT) settings;
Noise suppression, incorrect offset (SFT).
Keep varying the parameter value in the AMP input field until the signal level does
not exceed 80% of the maximum. Check that there is no signal limitation. Check
the level on different scales.
219
Settings in Autopilot
ATTENTION!
The larger the value in the AMP input field, the lower is the signal level, and
the other way round.
Check that there are noises in the far-off zone and no compact noises. Make the
adjustments as required by using the Shift input field. The reduction of the value
results in the larger noise level.
SETTINGS IN AUTOPILOT
General
The autopilots should be adjusted in the Heading Control mode. This setting is
normally made by the autopilot manufacturer representatives.
The Heading Control mode setting should generally be made so as to ensure:
Fast picking up of the set rate of turn;
Stable maintaining of the set rate of turn without considerable deviations;
Turning in to a new course without overshooting and without lengthy bringing to

the course;
Keeping steady on the course during the sailing along the straight line.
The mandatory parts of Track Control System:
NS 4000 ECDIS including UPS unit;
Heading Control System build-in function of the autopilot;
Sensors:
2 satellite navigation systems (PS1 and PS2);
Gyrocompass;
Independent heading data source Log (data on speed through the water).
220
Alarm panel.
Raytheon Heading Control System NP 2025 (NP 2025 Plus)

HW Settings
Sensors connection as per service manual and Autopilot Raytheon NP2025 PLUS.
Connection Diagram presented in ANNEX Q;
NS serial data connection (Autopilot port) as described below:
For more detailed description of the autopilots installation procedure and HW settings,
see autopilots INSTALLATION MANUAL document. This document is supplied as part
of the equipment delivery set.
Software Settings
Service part parameter mode (provided by service engineer):
DV Bus No;
ECDIS Yes;
Turn Type HTR;
XTD nautical miles;
TrScal (05, depends on ship maneuverability (for NP2025+ only). Gain

setting of track controller to increase (bigger values) or reduce accuracy and
activity (0 by default).
Typical settings for TrScal:

Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
+2
+2
+2
EcdisSRoTW Set Y. Set ROT is calculated using ships speed through water
in NS (for NP2025+ only);
TPosfilt 50 by default, 0-200 depends on ship maneuverability (for NP2025+ only).

Determines drift estimation and time constant. If set 0 drift estimation off.
Typical settings for TPosfilt:

Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
150
50
50
Time out 10-30 (10 sec by default);
Speed VHW;
HSC off.
221
Other data is ships type depending and/or ships model tuning characteristics.
User part Ship and environment conditions.
Parameter Y/R/C correct settings shall be provided before track control settings.
For the different type of vessel should be used different values, as a default next
settings can be applied, note that this parameters can be changed depend on
environment.
Typical Settings for Yawing:
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Typical Settings for Rudder:

Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Typical Settings for Counter Rudder:

Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Navis Heading Control System AP 3000

HW Settings
Sensors connection as per service manual and Autopilot NAVIS AP3000 Units.
Typical Connection Diagram presented in ANNEX Q;
For more detailed description of the autopilots installation procedure and

HW settings, see autopilots INSTALLATION MANUAL document. This document
is supplied as part of the equipment delivery set.
222
Software Settings
Service part:
INSTALLATION main menu (provided by service engineer only);
DOCKTRIAL menu:
TrackMode: ExtHTC;
ECDIS presents: Yes.
INTERFACE menu:
* IN (submenu):
COMP1: GYRO1;
COMP2: GYRO2 (if available);
LOG: LOG;
ECDIS: ECDIS.
* ECDIS OUT (submenu): Yes:
Baud: 9600;
Freq: 1;
HTD: Yes;
RSA: Yes.
* COMP1: GYRO1;
* COMP2: GYRO2 (if available).
Press NMEA test button in the Main Installation menu to identify all connected
sensors:
PARAMETERS menu:
Vessel Length: actual vessel length in meters;
Vmax: actual maximum speed in knots;
Vmin: minimal manoeuvring speed in knots;
Wmax: maximum Rate of Turn, deg/per minute.
Make AP Turning procedure as described in AP 3000 Installation Guide.

Press Master Reset button.
Press Menu button in operating mode:
SET DEVICES menu:

Set compass: GYRO1 or GYRO2 (if available);
Set position: ECDIS;
Speed: LOG;
Heading Monitor: (ON/OFF) in case if GYRO2/MAGN is connected).
PARAMETERS menu:
Turn Rate: operating Rate of Turn value (deg. per minute);
Rudder Limit: operating manoeuvring Rudder limit;
Sensitivity: Set up actual sensitivity value (depending on ship type and
weather conditions);
Heading Alarm: 20 degrees.
223
Typical Settings for AP 3000 after AP Turning procedure:

Parameter/Vessel type
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
PARAM1
1.15
1.08
1.40
PARAM2
2.34
0.44
0.48
PARAM3
5.00
5.00
5.00
Rudder
Speed
20
19
10
Unstab
01
00
00
Vmax
30
36
10
Vmin
Wmax
300 deg per min
110 deg per min
60 deg per min
Lenght
64
250
350
ATTENTION!
Autopilot settings should match the ship characteristics. Otherwise, frequent
deviations from the course and, as a consequence, frequent use of the steering gear
will be inevitable.
Yokogawa Heading Control System PT500A

HW Settings
Dip SW setting on AUTO CPU of Auto steering unit:

No.1: ON;
No.2: OFF;
No.3: OFF (ON: for initialisation);
No.4: OFF (ON: for initialisation);
No.5 to No.8: OFF.
Jumper setting on AUTO CPU of Auto steering unit:

E1: OPEN;
E2: CLOSE;
E3 to E5 are not used.
Jumper setting on I/O (1) of Auto steering unit:

E1: 2-3 (Digital RC out: not used);
E2: 1-2 (INS/GPS out);
E3: 1-2 (Digital RC in: not used);
E4: 2-3 (INS/GPS in);
E5: 1-2 (Aux. compass in: not used);
E6: 2-3 (Gyrocompass in).
224
The kind of speed signal became selectable.
The ships speed signal type (NMEA or Pulse) can be selected by No.5 of SW1
(Dip switch) on AUTO CPU board:
ON: NMEA input (VBW message) from No.15 (RDA) and No.16 (RDB) of TB5
on TERMINAL UNIT;
OFF: 200p/nm input from No.10 (LOG) and No.11 (GND) of TB5 on
TERMINAL UNIT.
Sensors connection as per service manual and Autopilot Yokogawa PT500A.

Connection Diagram presented in ANNEX Q;
For more detailed description of the autopilots installation procedure and HW

settings, see autopilots INSTALLATION MANUAL document. This document
SW Settings
Service part parameter mode (provided by service engineer):
Maintenance mode. Re-enter ships parameter settings by key operation with

following data:
I/F setup parameters:
Gyro input NMEA 0183 HDT;
INS/GPS input set course INS-4;
XTE NMEA;
INS/GPS output INS-4.
Control function:
Rudder state By pass;

C-Rud Limit Max;
Other data is ships type depending and/or ships model tuning
characteristics.
User part Ship and environment conditions can be selected by user:
Operation mode precision 2 recommended;
Parameter set as per ship condition shall be provided by service engineer

to ship;
User Settings. Make settings as per the User Manual for the autopilot used
for Track Control mode.
225
EMRI Heading Control System SEM200

ATTENTION!
Installation of equipment, NS 4000 ECDIS and connection of the external devices
should be done by the service engineer in accordance with MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). INSTALLATION GUIDE document.
Sailing accuracy in the Track Control mode is divided into two parts:
Sailing along the straight line the autopilot receives all the necessary route
data and controls the ship on its own. The ECDIS does not send any orders;
Sailing along the curved line (turning) the ECDIS sends all the necessary
route data and additional orders to alter the course. The setup of the additional
order is made in the ECDIS (section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD
Settings, item 11).
HW Settings
Sensors connection as per service manual and Autopilot EMRI SEM200

AEU511 Unit. Connection Diagram presented in ANNEX Q;
For more detailed description of the autopilots installation procedure and HW settings,
see autopilots INSTALLATION MANUAL document. This document is supplied as part
Typical Settings for the AP:
Sensor/Parameter
Port/Setting
Comment
Primary Heading source
CHB
$xxHDT or $xxTHS
Secondary Heading
source
226
See SW settings for the Heading Monitor

adjust
LOG
CHA
Steering Gear system
Order signal = X4.9 Signal

ground = X4.10
Mode Selector
Digital Ground = X4.22;

AP In Control = X4.24
Autopilot failure OUT via

dry contact
X4/37 to 39 opens
$xxVHW or $xxVBW
To the ECDIS (External Alarm), to stearing

gear, to EMRI SSF10 box Freeze rudder
Sensor/Parameter
Port/Setting
Comment
Ships Alarm System via

dry contact
ECDIS
Additional connection, does not required for

the minimum configuration
TXD1+ = X5.2; TXD1- =
X5.3; RXD1- = X5.4;
RXD1+ = X5.5
Software Settings
Table below contain recommended setting for three types of vessels:
Fast Ferry: Lpp=60, W=16, SPD=35;
Container Ship: Lpp=250, W=28, SPD=25;
Tanker: Lpp=350, W=40, SPD=10.
Table content main settings which influent on Track Control:

Parameter
Comment
Fast Ferry
Container
Tanker
F dist
0.11
0.09
0.07
RotDriftKoef
0.25
0.18
0.20
ECDIS settings
AP settings
SW1
PDGain=1.0
SW2
SW3
Kp
Deg/Meter
1, 3, 7
1, 3, 5
1, 3, 5
20
30
Klci
Deg/Meter*Second
0.0271
0.0271
Sleng
Length
60
250
350
U_norm
Max. cruising speed
30
25
10
URMIN
0.50.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
XTEMax
9.9200
30
99
99
FIRW
0.50.1
0.05
0.05
0.05
FPDGN
12, rudder blade dimensions

and efficiency dependence
FLCIM
0.20.4 Approach angle

(drift compensation)
0.2
0.4
0.4
FLCPMax
0.4
0.2
0.4
0.4
GyroErrorLimit
Value in Radian, set value:

GYRO-GYRO: 0.1
GYRO-MAG: 0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
E2KDamp
Kalman filter (?)
0.3
0.3
0.3
ATTENTION!
Autopilot settings should match the ship characteristics. Otherwise, frequent
deviations from the course and, as a consequence, frequent use of the steering gear
will be inevitable.
227
Procedure of TCS Control Setup Algorithms
PROCEDURE OF TCS CONTROL SETUP ALGORITHMS

Essentials
TCS algorithm settings are stored in nm.cfg, tcs.cfg, tcsfull.cfg and
tcshalf.cfg files.
To adjust control algorithms for a particular ship, use the following procedure:
1. Adjust Track control section in the System Configuration utility as per settings
specified for the given ship type.
2. Open tcs.cfg, tcsfull.cfg and tcshalf.cfg files is stored in
C:\Transas\IBS\win32 directory.
3. Change the settings as required by using the fine adjustment procedure
described below, and save the files.
Fine Adjustment
The fine adjustment procedure is intended for improving accuracy of steering
the ship along the route and should be made, as required, by a system engineer
only, and checked in the process of sea trials. It is necessary to take into account
the fact that the TCS system adjustment is maid for ship+autopilot combination
on the whole, so considerable changes in the autopilot settings may require
the re-adjustment of the control system parameters as well.
Fine adjustment consists primarily in the selection of correct temporal ship
characteristics. Such characteristics are set separately for a loaded
(tcsfull.cfg file), half loaded (tcshalf.cfg) and empty (tcs.cfg) ship
condition. tcsNNNN.cfg files are expected to be edited with the aid of NotePad
editor included in Windows OS.
Passing-of-Turn Settings
1. PivotX. Average shift of the ships pivot point forward relative to the ships
geometric centre, in metres. If set incorrectly, the ship may tend to go inside
(to correct this, it is necessary to increase PivotX) or outside (reduce the PivotX)
relative to the set turn trajectory. PivotY is normally 0.
2. TurnRelaxROTChange. Characteristic time of the ship ROT change in
milliseconds. The larger TurnRelaxROTChange corresponds to smaller ship
manoeuvrability relative to the present configuration, and the other way round.
Typical Parameters:
Ship Type
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Parameter in milliseconds
5000
4000
8000
3. ROTDriftKoeff Characteristic of the ship ROT change. The approximate value

can be calculated as a constant ship drift angle during the turn/ROT grad/min.
If set incorrectly, the ship always goes inside (to correct this, it is necessary to
increase value) or outside (reduce the value) relative to the set turn trajectory.
Note: Pay special attention to the accuracy of setting the ROTDriftKoeff parameter
from the EMRI SEM200 autopilot.
Typical Parameters:
Ship Type
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Parameter (value)
0.26
0.14
0.115
Note:
228
In the case of excessive value reduction which is not commensurate with

the actual manoeuvring characteristics, there may be the ship track oscillation.
Motion-Along-Straight-Line Settings
For Raytheon (Anshutz) NP 2025 (NP2025+) autopilot, this values are of no importance.
1. TimeOnLeg characteristic time of the ships HTS change in milliseconds.
The larger TimeOnLeg corresponds to a smaller ship manoeuvrability relative
to the ready configuration, and the other way round.
Typical Parameters:
Ship Type
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Parameter in milliseconds
12 000
50 000
30 000
2. XTEs; XTE_Ks values which determine width of ranges and their corresponding
course correction in the direction which will bring back to the route leg. The change
of values is required in the case of incorrect ship behaviour as it moves along the
straight line under constant environmental conditions (motion along a pronounced
sinusoid or motion at a large distance off the route leg). If the ship moves along
a sinusoid around the route leg, the course correction coefficient should be
decreased within the observed amplitude. If the ships mean position is off the route
leg, the coefficient is required to be increased, or a new band should be set. In any
case, it is advisable to leave a band with zero coefficient (deadband). The table
provides initial range value and their corresponding correction coefficients.
XTEs (Width of Range, NM)
XTE_Ks (Course correction, deg)
Value (example)
0.000
0.01
0.0101
0.04
0.04001
0.10
0.10001
0.5
0.50001
0.75
1.00
0.0
0.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
8.0
Deadband
2 deg
4 deg
6 deg
8 deg
Plausibility Check Adjustments

1. MaxHDGJump threshold value of course change in degrees. As the course
changes by a value larger than the setting within the period of one second,
the Track Control mode will be stopped. On ships with a high rate of turn (Fast
Ferry), it is necessary to set the appropriate value in order to avoid unfounded stops.
Typical Parameters:
Ship Type
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Parameter in degrees
~ 1520
~ 1520
~ 1015
2. MaxLogJump threshold value of speed change in knots. As the speed changes by

a value larger than the setting within the period of one second, the Track Control
mode will be stopped. On ships with high acceleration/stopping value(Fast Ferry),
it is necessary to set the appropriate value in order to avoid unfounded stops.
Typical Parameters:
Ship Type
Fast Ferry
Container Ship
Tanker
Parameter in knots
~ 1520
~ 510
~5
229
Sample of tcsNNNN.cfg File (Editable strings are highlighted).

[DeltaHTS_XTE]
LinesCount=10
MaxDTW=0.1
XTEs=0.000,0.01,0.0101,0.04,0.04001,0.10,0.10001,0.5,0.50001,
0.75,1.00
XTE_Ks=0.0,0.00,2.0000,2.00,4.00000,4.00,6.00000,6.0,6.00000,
8.00,8.00
FixedXTE=ON
Test=ON
[DriftCalc]
DriftAddPeriod=2000
DriftMaxROT=4
DriftAvgPeriod=10000
UseSmartWay=OFF
Test=ON
IgnoreDriftTest=OFF
UseDeltaDrift=ON
[COG_Evaluator]
PivotX=60
PivotY=0
Test=ON
[TurnManager]
EndOutrun=0.07
EndOfTurnTime=5
StopTurnAsCurve=OFF
DriftPredictDist=0.3
Tau=60000
QTrackXTE=0.15
XTEReduceTime=300000
TurnDeltaHTS_K=1.0
[COGCalc]
MaxROT_Min=0.5
TimeOnLeg=90000
LargeDeltaCOG=99
TurnPercChangeROT=0.000001
TurnRelaxROTChange=10000
NoDriftROT=6.0
DecreaseDriftLock=OFF
ROTDriftKoeff=0.571
[ConstantError]
Use=ON
TotalPeriod=600000
KoefAvgError=0.0
[DriftUpload]
Use=ON
DriftUploadTime=000000
Dgr2XTE=-5
[JumpDetector]
MaxHDGJump=5
MaxLogJump=5
230
BNWAS Setup
BNWAS SETUP
1. Run the System Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item
2. Press the INS button.

3. Switch to the BNWAS page.
Note: The BNWAS Station drop-down list specifies the name of the Workstation
which the settings will be made for. Select the WS which the BNWAS
elements will be physically connected to:
In the Alarm Settings group, make settings connected with the alarm relay
to the BNWAS:
In the Backup Officer group, make settings for the transfer to the second stage
remote audible alarm:
In the Name column, specify all the possible external locations which the
Back-up officer alarm will be relayed to;
In the Type column, select the set of contacts which the lines to these
locations will be connected to;
231
BNWAS Setup
In the Contact OUT column, specify the contact intended for transferring
the alarm to the external locations;
In the Normal state column, specify the alarm transferring mode (N/C
normal closed, N/O normal opened);
In the Default column, check the checkbox for those external locations of
the Back-up officer which the alarms will be relayed to at the third stage
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330).
UTILITIES, Chapter 11, section BNWAS Operation Algorithm,
paragraph Operator Activity).
In the Crew group make settings for the transfer to the third stage remote
audible alarm:
In the Name column, specify all the possible external locations which the
alarm will be relayed to;
In the Type column, select the set of contacts which the lines to these
locations will be connected to;
In the Contact OUT column, specify the contact intended for transferring
the alarm to the external locations;
In the column Normal state, specify the alarm transferring mode (N/C
normal closed, N/O normal opened).
In the Timeout input box, set the delay between the second and third
stage alarms within 90 180 sec;
Check the Close Crew contacts in Backup Officer stage checkbox if the
second and third stage alarms are required to be generated
simultaneously.
In the Sound Settings group, make the loudspeaker sound settings for the
BNWAS alarm generation:
In the Signal frequency input box, specify the loudspeaker sound
frequency;
In the Signal duration input box, the alarm signal duration, the interval
between the alarm signals will always be equal to 1 sec.
In the Alarm transferring group, use the Timeout input box set the delay (from 1
to 180 sec) between the internal MFD alarm generation and its relay for the
simultaneous triggering off of the second stage of the BNWAS alarms. To this
end, the internal alarm line should be connected to the BNWAS (see below
item 6).
In the Auto Mode group, make settings connected with the BNWAS automatic
operation mode (if the settings are not made, the AUTO button on the BNWAS in
the AMS task is disabled):
In the Name column, specify all the possible devices whose activation will
automatically turn on the BNWAS;
In the Type column, select the sets of contacts which the lines to these
devices will be connected to;
In the Contact IN column, specify the contact intended for receiving the device
ON signal;
In the Normal state column, specify the signal receiving mode (N/C normal
closed, N/O normal opened).
In the Reset/Emergency Call group, make settings connected with the BNWAS
alarms reset and Emergency Call:
In the Name column, specify all the possible Reset buttons and devices (e.g.,
ARPA) which the BNWAS alarms can be rest and Emergency Call be sent
from;
232
BNWAS Setup
In the Type column, select the set of contacts which the lines to these buttons
and devices will be connected to;
In the Contact IN column, specify the contact intended for receiving BNWAS
alarms reset or Emergency call;
In the Normal state column, specify the reset/Emergency Call receiving mode
(N/C normal closed, N/O normal opened);
In the Emergency column, check the checkbox if this contact serves
simultaneously for the reception of both, the BNWAS alarms reset and
the Emergency Call (depends on the button holding time).Otherwise,
the reception of a signal will only mean the BNWAS alarms reset.
In the Flashing Indicators group, make settings for the Reset buttons backlighting:
In the Name column, specify all the possible Reset buttons;
In the Type column, select the set of contacts which the button backlighting
lines will be connected to;
In the Contact OUT column, specify the contact intended for backlighting the
Reset buttons;
In the Normal state column, specify the backlighting turn-on mode: N/C
normal/closed only (the buttons are lighted, whereas when the BNWAS
warnings or alarms are generated, the backlighting starts flashing).
To change the password of the BNWAS application, press the Change password
button, and in the appropriate fields of the window, enter old and new passwords:
After configuring all the groups, press the Apply button.

4. Press the Sensors button.
5. Switch to the Sensors page.
233
BNWAS Setup
For the reception of EVE sentences which reset the BNWAS alarms from
different devices (e.g., ARPA), select the DEADMAN sensor from the dropdown list in the Sensor column. Set the necessary number of such devices
(DEADMAN1, DEADMAN2, etc.);
Switch to the Alarm Output Settings page:
Find the Main Power Failure alarm in the table:
Check the checkbox in the column WAGO Alarm or RS6 I/O Alarm column. In
the column WAGO IN Ext. ACK or RS6 I/O IN Ext. ACK, specify the contact and its
normal state (N/O, or N/C) intended for receiving signal from BNWAS Power
Unit;
For each alarm, check the checkbox in the BNWAS alarm column, if it is
necessary to connect this alarm to the BNWAS. When such alarm is triggered
off, after the timeout set in the Alarm transferring group on the BNWAS page,
it will be relayed to the BNWAS (see above item 3);
234
Wave System Setup
To relay BNWAS alarms (Main Power Failure, No Activity and External alarm) to an
external source, check the relevant checkboxes in the NMEA Alarm and/or
WAGO Alarm columns.
6. Switch to the External Alarm I/O Settings page:
In the WAGO I/O settings or/and RS6 I/O settings group, for each alarm check the
checkbox in the BNWAS alarm column, if it is necessary to connect this alarm
to the BNWAS. When such alarm is triggered off, after the timeout set in the
Alarm transferring group on the BNWAS page, it will be relayed to the
BNWAS (see above item 3).
WAVE SYSTEM SETUP

Wave Configuration
The Wave user interface is described in document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 5.
1. Run the System Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item
235
Wave System Setup
2. Enter the password. Press OK button and go on to the next installation step:
3. Press the Sensors button and open Sensors page.

4. Select MODBUS sensors from the drop-down list in the column Sensor:
In the column Port, from the drop-down list, select the required COM port
of the Workstation computer, which this sensor is physically connected to;
Specify in the drop-down list the following COM port parameters:
Baud Rate: 38400;
Data Bits: 8;
Parity: None;
Stop Bits: 1.
Press Apply button.
236
Wave System Setup
5. Press INS button and switch to MODBUS page:
In the field Sensor, select the MODBUS sensor connected to the workstation
port. If the external device is not connected, the page will be blank;
Note: For information on the parameters Float data type byte order, DWord data type
byte order, Data type, Input type, Start register, Slave Id, see documentation of the
external device.
In the Device settings group, specify the following parameters depending on
external device:
Float data type byte order;
DWord data type byte order;
Polling timeout, ms - the time interval of waiting answer from slave device;
Minimum writing timeout, ms parameter is not used in this version.
In the Parameter name column, double click and enter name of the parameter
(for example E1_Flow);
In the Data type column, double click and from the drop-down list which will
appear, select type of the data which is used in the connected device:
Integer (integral) or,
Boolean (logical) or,
Float (real-valued) or,
DWord (binary).
In the Input type column, double click and from the drop-down list, select the
following data depending on type of the external device:
For Integer, Float, DWord data type:
Input Register 16 bit data access only read;
Holding Register 16 bit data access read/write.
For Boolen data type:
Discrete Input 1 bit data access only read;
Coil 1 bit data access read/write.
237
Wave System Setup
In the Start register column, specify the number of the start register;
In the Slave Id column, enter address of the external device;
Use the button Remove parameter for deletion of unnecessary parameters;
The buttons Export and Import are used for backup and restoring of the
parameters configuration accordingly;
Press Apply button.
The example of sensors configuration via MODBUS1 (Engine 1sensors) is shown on
the picture below:
The example of sensors configuration via MODBUS2 (Engine 2 sensors) is shown

on the picture below:
238
Wave System Setup
The standard MODBUS configuration for Emerson Flow Meter is shown in the table
and on the picture below:
Parameter name
Data type
Input type
Start register
Slave Id
ME_Flow
Float
Holding Register
246
ME_Dens
Float
Holding Register
248
ME_Temp
Float
Holding Register
250
ME_Total
Float
Holding Register
258
Float data type byte order: BE_34_12 (by default).
6.
Switch to Wave page:
If necessary to add the new parameter, double click in the Parameter name
column and enter the name of the parameter, for example Depth;
239
Wave System Setup
In the Type column, from the drop-down list, select the appropriate parameter
type:
Raw parameter available in the system from sensors;
Manual data entered manually;
Script parameter processed by script Lua;
Expression parameter processed by simplified script.
Note: For Cargo data stream, only Manual type is allowed. Each time this value is
changed in the Change trip parameters Wave dialog box (see the picture
below, Cargo window).
Note: If Raw, or Expression, or Script parameter is selected for MDO cons or
HFO cons table, it is used as a source of consumption information for
EEOI (see the picture below, MDO consumed field).
If Manual type is selected for HFO cons or MDO cons, MANUAL INPUT
sign is shown instead of used sensor (see the picture below, HFO consumed
field).
240
Wave System Setup
In the Source column, from the drop-down menu, select DEPTH/DEPTH line.
In this case, source is the Echosounder sensor:
Note: Configuration of Sounder sensor connection to the workstation port is

performed on the page Sensors of the panel Sensors (see above section
MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings).
The example of the use of the Cons_Total parameter calculation by means
of a script is shown on the picture below:
Note: Special features of a script: the function name should be calc. The return
value should be a real number. For access to other parameters, the
get_param function with the parameter name should be used.
In the Acc. column, check the checkbox, if it is necessary to accumulate the
values of the data;
241
Wave System Setup
In the Alias column, specify the parameter name to enable its identification if
necessary;
The Comment column is used for any comments;
In the Base table column, from the drop-down list, select the appropriate base
table parameter:
Use the button Remove parameter for deletion of unnecessary parameters;

In the FVO column, check the checkbox, if it is required to transmit this
parameter to FVO system;
The Increase priority and Decrease priority buttons are used for change of the
parameter priority;
For sending the all selected parameters in the FVO column, check the FVO
checkbox;
Enter ships IMO number in the Ship ID window;
In the Sample rate window, specify the interval of the data sampling;
In the Send rate window, specify the interval of the data sending to FVO;
Press Apply button.
242
Wave System Setup
Wave Adjustment
The following indicators contained in the Wave Screen View windows must be set
up by the service engineer at the installation stage:
RPM;
Pitch;
Rudder.
ATTENTION!
Parameters for the setup of these indicators will not be available in the program
database unless they were previously created in the System Configuration utility.
If the data is supplied via the WAGO interface, the parameter will have
the WAGO_ADC_parameter_name for a name (see Annex B, Adjustment of MFD
Operation with WAGO Modules section). If the data is supplied via the NMEA
Custom, the parameter will be named NMEA_CUSTOM_parameter_name (see
Annex B, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section). To avoid
the incorrect operation of the Wave program, it is not advisable to connect to the
indicators parameters whose names are different from those listed above.
For adjustment RPM, Pitch and Rudder indicators, see above section Navi-Conning
4000 Adjustment, paragraph General.
To add the new parameter, run the Wave task by selecting the Navi-Conning item in
the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY/NAVI-CONNING):
243
Wave System Setup
After the program start, the Wave Screen Views will be displayed.
Press Ctrl+Alt+D keys simultaneously. In the open Screen View Configuration
Utility window, in the field Password, enter the password:
We will consider the graph parameter setup procedure using the Depth parameter
as an example. It is possible to add up to 10 parameters.
This parameter must be set in the System Configuration utility on the page Wave
as described in the paragraph Wave Configuration above.
In the Screen View Configuration Utility window, select the SCREEN VIEWS
CONFIGURATION/E4-SG3/STDB ME PARAMETERS PAGE/FD1/PARAMETER 7 menu. In the right-hand
part of the window, perform the following settings:
In the param_name line, type parameter name. for example Depth;
In the visible line, check the checkbox;
In the color line, click on the line field and from appeared drop-down list,
select the suitable colour for text on the button;
In the value_max line, set the depth maximum value;
In the auto_scale_min and auto_scale_max lines, check the checkboxes if
necessary.
244
Wave System Setup
For creation the new button Depth, it is necessary to delete existing six buttons
and create anew. For this, perform the actions described below.
Select SCREEN VIEWS CONFIGURATION/E4-SG3 menu and press Edit button:
Select FEMSDIAGRAMBUTTON1 item and press the Delete Selection button:
In the same way, delete the rest five FEMSDIAGRAMBUTTOn parameters.

To create the panel with new buttons, press the Create Object(s) button:
Select WAVE/WAVE DIAGRAM LEGEND menu:
245
Wave System Setup
A panel with a new Depth button will appear. Click the cursor on a point in the
centre of the panel which has appeared and move the panel to the empty right
bottom window of the Wave program screen.
To change position and size of the buttons, select WaveDiagramButton1 parameter in

the left-hand part of the Screen View Configuration Utility window. In the right-hand
part of this window, make the following settings:
In the pos line, change the first value to 85%;
In the size line, change the first value to 14%.
In the same way, change position and size for the rest six buttons.
246
Wave System Setup
Now it is necessary to delete the empty three buttons.

Select WaveDiagramButton8 and press the Delete Selection button:
In the same way, delete the rest two empty buttons.

Press the Save button in the Screen View Configuration Utility window.
The process of the new parameter setup is completed.
247
Autorun Configuration
AUTORUN CONFIGURATION
ATTENTION!
This procedure is performed for each WS.
Run the Autorun Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item in
the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\AUTORUN CONFIGURATION):
After the program loading, the AutoRun window will be displayed.
248
Activation of Transas Integrator
Check the checkboxes of the names of the tasks which will be run automatically
during the WS start.
In the General Settings group, check the Enable Autorun checkbox.

In the Initial delay text box enter the delay time after the end of the Windows OS
loading and before the first task start (at least 20 sec is advisable).
Press the OK button.
ACTIVATION OF TRANSAS INTEGRATOR

ATTENTION!
This procedure is performed for each WS.
Activate the Transas Integrator by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\ACTIVATE INTEGRATOR):
249
Commissioning Table Creation and System Configuration Back Up
Upon computer restart, the Transas Integrator window will be opened, and default
task will be run:
Run all the tasks on the all the WSs and check their correct operation.
COMMISSIONING TABLE CREATION AND SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION BACK UP
Restart all the WSs.
Press button for run the System Configuration utility.
250
Commissioning Table Creation

Press Commissioning Table icon:
In Filename input field specify the path to Commissioning Table file (by default,
C:\Transas\IBS). Press Save button.
When the Commissioning Table is created, this should be done at each WS.
Also, after each change of configuration (e.g., if a new GPS is connected),
the Commissioning Table should be made anew at each WS.
MFD Configuration Back Up
Press Backup button in the left bottom corner of the window.
251
Press Yes button.
Specify the path where backup the file will be stored, and press OK button.
Press OK button.
Press OK button.
Note: The Navi-Conning configuration in the new product version is saved
simultaneously with the MFD configuration backup.
252
MFD Registry
Press button for run the First Aid utility.
Switch to Registry page:
Fill in all the lines and press the Make Registry button and wait for collecting system
information:
253
Software Upgrade
In the open window, press Copy to button and select the USB memory stick to
save the system information files:
Press OK button.
Press OK button.
To register MFD system, send the system information files to Transas support
service.
See also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). UTILITIES,
Chapter 7.
SOFTWARE UPGRADE
Upgrade All Product MFD
Deactivate the Transas Integrator on each WS. To do this, press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+
<Shift>+<F8> keys.
Enter password and press OK button: PC will be restarted.
254
Software Upgrade
Run to START\CONTROL PANEL. Click Add or Remove Programs icon:
Select Multifunctional Display:
Press Remove button.
Press Yes button.

After program deinstallation, restart PC.
Install new version of MFD (see section Software Installation, paragraph
Installation of MFD).
255
Software Upgrade
Run the First Aid utility by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\FIRST AID):
On Product page in Name drop-down list, press

(if necessary).
button and select MFD product
Press Navigation program would not start or has hung up at the start button:
Press Restore button.
256
Software Upgrade
Press Yes button.
Specify the path to back up file and press Open.
The configuration will be restored. Press OK button and close the First Aid utility.
Activate the Transas Integrator (see section Activation of Transas Integrator).
Upgrade of Most Recent MFD Versions

Starting from NS4000 MFD (v. 2.00.010) and later, the upgrade is made as follows.
Copy the installation folder from the CD to the HDD as describes in section Software
Installation, paragraph Pre-installation.
On each workstation, perform the following procedure.
257
Software Upgrade
Run the Setup.exe file in the C:\MFD folder:
Press the Next> button.
Check Transfer the old configuration data checkbox, and press Next> button (this
checkbox must be checked only at the first workstation which is being upgraded).
Press OK button.
258
Software Upgrade
Press the Custom button.
Select components to be installed by the Setup Wizard (on each WS as

per the licensed MFD configuration). To prohibit installation of the selected
component, select the This feature will not be available option.
WARNING!
Do not install the Chart Assistant
Navi-Planner 4000 will be used.
utility
on
the
workstations
where
Select the Transas Integrator component and set the This feature will be installed
on local hard drive option.
259
Software Upgrade
Keep the Integrator Activation feature unavailable, it will be activated later:
Press the Next > button.
Press the Install button.
The program will perform the product installation.
260
Software Upgrade
Press the Yes button and restart the PC:
After the PC restart, wait for a minute to complete the product installation:
In the window which will open up, press the Finish button:
Press the Yes button and restart the PC:
After the PC restart, the Configuration update wizard window will open up:
261
Software Upgrade
At this step, on the WS where configuration was not saved, it is necessary to

continue the procedure. On the WS where the configuration was saved (the Transfer
the old configuration data checkbox was checked (see above)), it is necessary to wait
until the wizard completes its operation on the other WS and then to continue the
procedure.
Press the Next > button.
Press the Finish button:
After the end of the wizard operation, a source configuration will be created on all
the WSs.
262
Software Upgrade
Upgrade Navi-Conning 4000

To start the Data Tool utility, press the button.
After the utility is run, the screen displays a control window. In Feature list select
Conning file group.
In External group press call button to the right of the window and specify
the path to the folder with new configuration file CONNING.dat.
263
Software Upgrade
Press Copy button in the utility toolbar.
To replace old file CONNING.dat, press OK button.
To exit from the Data Tool utility, press Yes button.
Restart Navi-Conning 4000.
264
Radar Diagnostics and Typical Faults
RADAR DIAGNOSTICS AND TYPICAL FAULTS

Radar Diagnostics
The regular diagnostics is performed for the timely troubleshooting. The equipment
should be installed as per the wiring diagram.
It is necessary to set up the software: select the correct radar model, set the RIB6
parameters and perform the RIB6 input calibration procedure. The radar should be
adjusted as per the manual.
Diagnostics should be performed regularly: every 1-2 days.
After the application start, check the magnetron operation time. The magnetron service
life should not be exceeded. The service life is determined by the radar manufacturer.
Press the mode button in the top right corner of the Display Panel
and select TX to switch the scanner to the transmission mode.
If possible, check that the radar antenna is rotating.
Check that there is radar scan on the radar screen.
265
Having increased the gain to the maximum, check the availability of
noises at a range of more than 6 miles.
If there is not scan and alarms appear, check the RIB6 settings and quality of connections.
Set the initial gain level and check that targets are displayed at a distance of more
than 6 miles.
Check the TUNE indicator level, and if the level is low, adjust the radar as per the set
procedure.
Press AUTO button.
266
Switch the scales and the radar pulse lengths. Check that the mode is not turned
off spontaneously. If it is, adjust the radar as per the set procedure.
Multipanel window.
On Radar-Scanner page press Diagnostics button.
Check the radar diagnostic parameters.
267
Open Settings panel by selecting the appropriate menu line in
the Control Panels Multipanel window.

Check the availability of the PM signal. Check the test signal parameters as per
the set procedure.
Set the 0.25 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down
Check the main bang level. If there is bright ring, check the quality
of the high frequency connection.
268
Typical Troubleshooting
Fault
After the Navi-Radar start, the
screen displays Network radar
disconnected
Cause and cure

RIB6 not energised check the unit power supply
No network connection check connection of the RJ-45 cables.
Restart the radar processor
Check the radar processor IP address
Faulty radar processor the unit should be replaced
The radar warm-up process is

not shown, no Stand By mode
indication
No data exchange in the radar control channel. Check connection

of the radar processor and radar serial port
Faulty radar controller the unit should be repaired
Impossible to turn on the radar

transmit mode after a press on
the TX button the Stand By status
sets in
Faulty radar controller the unit should be repaired
After the transmit mode has been

turned on, the Radar Video
failed message appears
Check visually the radar antenna rotation. If the antenna is not

rotating, check the safety switch. Check the position of the Stop
Motor control on the Radar-Scanner page of the Settings panel
after Radar Settings button is pressed (if option is available). If all
the settings are correct, the radar should be repaired
The Heading Failure alarm is

generated
Check connection of the connector

Open RIB6 page of the Settings panel. Keep varying the
threshold voltage value until the antenna revolution period is
correctly determined. The indicator should be green
If the indicator remains red, use the oscillograph to check if there
are pulses on the RIB6 connector. The absence of pulses means
the damaged cable or faulty radar. The availability of pulses
means faulty RIB6
The Bearing Failure alarm

is generated
Check connection of the connector

Open RIB6 page of the Settings panel. Keep varying the
threshold voltage value until the antenna rate of revolutions is
determined correctly. The Hp and Bp indicators should be green
are pulses on the RIB6 connector. The absence of pulses means
the damaged cable or faulty radar. The availability of pulses
means faulty RIB6
The Trigger Failure alarm

is generated
Check connection of the Trigger high frequency connector

Open RIB6 page of the Settings panel. Keep varying
the threshold voltage value until the radar sweep period is
determined correctly. The indicator should be green
are pulses on the RIB6 connector (use the T-connector).
The absence of pulses means the damaged cable or faulty radar.
The availability of pulses means faulty RIB6
The Radar Low video alarm

is generated
Check connection of the Video high frequency connector

Set the maximum radar gain by using the GAIN control. Open
RIB6 page of the Settings panel. Turn on the display of an
oscillogram. Keep varying the amplification level, signal polarity
and offset until the signal appears
are pulses on the RIB6 connector (use the T-connector).
The absence of pulses means the damaged cable or faulty radar.
The availability of pulses means faulty RIB6
With the GAIN control at the

maximum, some noises are
discernable on the screen whereas
the targets and coasts are
discernable at short distances only
(not more than 5 miles)
Check the radar adjustment as per the set procedure, check the
TUNE LEVEL indicator in the top right corner of the Display Panel
level and the radar diagnostic parameters. Check the magnetron
operation time. Adjust the radar. If the detection range has not
increased, the radar should be repaired
269
270
Fault
Cause and cure
There is a large number of

reflections on the radar screen,
the use of the suppression
controls has failed to provide a
high quality picture
Open RIB6 page of the Settings panel. Turn on the display

of an oscillogram. By varying the amplification level, reduce
the signal amplitude down to an acceptable level: 85%
of the maximum
If Navico scanner is used

sometimes its not possible to
establish connection with
scanner from MFD WS.
Its caused by different settings of
the Ethernet controllers: Navico
uses automatic IP detection,
MFD WS fixed.
Usually it happens during first
connection to the scanner
(unlocking procedure) or during
scanner embedded SW upgrade.
Its strongly recommended during first usage of the radar connect

it to the first WS Ethernet controller directly.
Change WS controller setting from fixed IP address to Automatic
detection and make hardware scanner restart (switch off/on
power).
Wait 1-2 minutes and try to get connection again.
After unlocking of the radar and preliminary testing, IP address of
the WS may be restored to proper value.
If Navico scanner is used

sometimes it is unstable
operation of the radar.
It was detected very slow
response of the scanner to
changing the scales. It took more
than 10 seconds. Sometimes
switching to StandBy from
Transmit state was observed.
Cold restart of the radar resolves the situation power

connector from the radar shall be disconnected and connected
again after 5 -10 seconds.
For Navico scanner bad quality

of the radar overlay due to
reflection from external obstacles
or radar interference.
See recommendations of the scanners installation described in

section Installation of Navico BR24 Broadband
Scanner item Location of the Scanner.
CHAPTER 3
Technical Specification
General
GENERAL
The MFD (v.2.00.330) equipment fully complies with the IEC 62388 standard.
According to this standard, ship radars are classified for fitting out ships of three
categories as per the table below:
Table 31. Performance requirements for categories of ship/craft for SOLAS V
Category of ship/craft
CAT 3
CAT 2
CAT 1
Size of ship/craft
<500 gt
500 gt to <10 000 gt

and HSC<10 000 gt
All ships/craft 10 000

gt
Minimum operational
display area diameter
180 mm
250 mm
320 mm
Minimum display
area
195195 mm
270270 mm
340340 mm
Auto acquisition
of targets
N/A
N/A
Yes
Minimum acquired
radar target capacity
20
30
40
Minimum activated
AIS target capacity
20
30
40
Minimum sleeping
AIS target capacity
100
150
200
Trial manoeuvre
N/A
N/A
Yes
Depending on the configuration, the MFD (v.2.00.330) equipment can be installed

on the following ship categories:
If with the 23 monitors (PPI diameter of 340 mm) CAT 1;
If with the 19 monitors (PPI diameter of 265 mm) CAT 2.
SOFTWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Radar
Video Signal Processing
Reception of a video signal and its digital processing;
Clutter filtering;
Reception of synchronizing pulses, information on the antenna turn angle

in the form of succession of pulses, as well as in the form of synchro or resolver
voltage. Reception of the bearing pulse, video signal and start pulses
in the form of a composite signal is provided.
Display of Radar Information
Set of ranges: 0.25; 0.5; 0.75; 1.5; 3; 6; 12; 24; 48 nautical miles;
Display of radar information in the following orientation modes:

North-up display;
Course stabilised display;
Head-up display.
Display of radar information in the true and relative motion modes. Display
of the targets. True and relative vectors are provided;
Chapter 3. Technical Specification
273
Software Technical Specification
Display of radar information with the center shifted to up to 2/3 of the screen radius.
Display of Auxiliary Information
For the range measurements, the radar screen displays stationary range rings
and a range marker;
Display of two electronic range and bearing lines;
Display of the electronic azimuth scale along the edge of the effective screen
area.
Control of the Radar Operation

The control of the radar operation is via RS422 channel:
Control of operation mode;
Control of the outgoing pulse length;
Control of the receiver tuning.
Radar Maps
To enable the generation and display of information not connected with official chart
correction data, the MFD features a capability to make up a separate layer of objects
which is called a radar map. It is advisable to use this functionality for the chart
preparation, storage of notes and service chart related information.
After the loading and turning on of the display, the radar map is presented. On the
MFD screen it is shown as a transparent layer with radar map objects plotted on it.
ARPA
Fulfilment of ARPA Tasks:
Performance of ARPA functions in compliance with IMO resolution A.823 (19);
Target extraction, acquisition and tracking;
Facility for the automatic and manual selection of targets for the display;
Facility for the automatic numbering of tracked targets;
Facility for a trial collision avoidance manoeuvre with the set course and speed
parameters.
Chart Related Features

Chart Formats
Vector TX-97 Chart Format.

TX-97 vector data (TX-97 format charts) is produced according to Transas Marine
standard. The production of TX-97 data is organised according to ISO 9001 product
quality management standard.
TX-97 data is produced with the use of two technologies: vectorising (digitising
based on the paper charts) and converting procedure enabling the official
ENC data to be converted to TX-97 format.
Vector ENC (TX-97 Presentation) Chart Format and update.

The Chart Manager utility allows official ENC data to be converted to vector
TX-97 data by using the built-in converter. During the conversion, all the
information required for ensuring safety of navigation is fully converted.
The following data display in the MFD is in accordance with TX-97 standard.
274
The SENC data is updated as the correction file is loaded by using the Chart
Manager utility facilities.
Vector ENC (S-57 standard presentation) and update.

The format of the vector form data produced under S-57 standard is determined
by ISO/IEC 8211 standard and is the sole official format of vector charts designed
for use in the ECDIS.
The chart producers are National Hydrographic Offices.
At the set regular intervals, the ENC producing national HO issues a carrier
with correction data. Like the ENCs themselves, this data is distributed via
the producers distributor network.
The SENC data is updated as the correction file is loaded by using Chart Manager
utility facilities.
Charts Update
Basic maintenance service for TX-97.

The base chart updating implies the quarterly renewal of the ship chart folio,
the changes made in the World Chart Folio CD taken into account. Supplied
together with the collection is the license for its use over a calendar year.
The base updating process consists in the replacement of a license and installation
of charts from the newly received WF CD.
World Chart Folio CD is issued 4 times a year and is supplied to the user in a way
specified in an agreement.
Professional maintenance service for TX-97.

The professional updating includes base updating (see above) and Notices
to Mariners Correction Service implying the possibility of a bi-weekly addition
of updating information to the charts from the ship folio. The updating information
is accumulated during a calendar year. Therefore, the charts installed from
the last WF CD of the preceding year and the last updating file of the current
year will correspond to the updating level of the last WF CD in the current year.
The license for the use of this option is supplied for one year.
The updating information is prepared every two weeks and uploaded on the
company web site. The delivery option is settled with the user at the time when
the agreement is signed: via Internet or on the electronic data carriers via shore
agencies representing the user interests.
Transas SENC Correction Service.

The updating service implies weekly uploading of SENC data for the SENC
Base CD (updating) on the company site (http://www.transas.com/support.asp).
SENC updating data consists of:
Update includes all the incremental updating files in S-57 received since
the time of SENC CD issue (Issue<NN>_WF<NN>). It should be noted that
available for installation is only the updating for charts purchased by the
customer;
New Charts includes all the new charts in Transas SENC format received
since the time of SENC CD issue;
New Edition includes all the new edition charts in Transas SENC format
not included in SENC CD.
275
The updating information is stored in the form of self-unpacking archives

(e.g., Update47_WF21.exe). For Transas format SENC, the following updating
can be used:
Open S-57 updating;
S-57 updating encoded in accordance with S-63 standard
(if valid permits are available);
Transas encoded S-57 updating;
Binary updating (received with e-mail from the Transas chart server).
Chart Orientation
Charts may have the following orientation on the MFD screen (according
to the radar orientation mode):
North UP;
Head Up;
Course Up.
INFO
General Chart Information display of information on the issue number and date,
coordinates offset, latest correction date and source.
Chart Control
Layers control.
MFD implements a capability to select the display of different chart object
categories:
DPTH Value digital values of depths (for ENC format charts only);
TSS traffic separation schemes;
SAF CON to turn on display of depth contours;
Abovewater to turn on display of surface objects;
Coast to turn on display of coastline;
Underwater to turn on display of submerged objects;
Route;
All Layers simultaneously;
Standard Display.
Autoload.
Chart autoloading is a special MFD function which allows automatic display of
the largest scale chart optimum from the viewpoint of its position, and defines it as
the current chart.
Autoscale.
The chart scale corresponds to the set radar scale.
276
Color Palettes.
For easy perception of information displayed on the MFD screen, the MFD
implements a capability to select the following color palettes:
Color;
Gray;
Color transparency;
Gray transparency.
Navigation Tools
Alarms and Warnings
RIB/Scanner.
This group of alarms in intended for checking the operating availability
of the Radar Integrated Board and the scanner in use.
AIS.
This group of alarms is used in the operation with UAIS (IEC 61993-2 standard)
transponders.
Chart/Antigrounding.
Safety monitoring during the sailing in the areas with a danger depth.
The monitoring is based on Safety contour set by the user.
Monitoring of agreement between the set scale and the scale of the chart under
the whip position with generation of an appropriate warning (Not recommended
scale and Dangerous scale).
Sensors.
Alarm alerting about the availability of incorrect data from external sensors or
about the absence of this data (for active sensors only).
Targets.
Alarm and warnings alerting about events connected with targets.
Ship Motion Data

Ship motion parameters are its course and speed.
The MFD uses the following parameter types:
Ship course over the ground COG;
Speed over the ground SOG;
Heading from gyrocompass HDG;
Ship course over the water (only if DLOG is selected for the source of speed
through the water in SEA STAB mode) CTW;
Ship speed through the water STW.
True/Relative Motion
There are two modes of displaying the ship motion on the PPI:
True motion;
Relative motion.
277
Sensors (Input/Output)
Operation according to the IEC 61162-1 or NMEA 0183.
Maximum 20 available Com ports for the external sensors connection.
Positioning
GGA, GLL, RMC, DTM, VTG, ZDA, sentences are processed:
Positioning.
Capability to use positioning from the sensor (in GGA\GLLNMEA sentence
format) of one of the following positioning systems: GPS (DGPS), GLONASS,
GNSS, LORAN-C.
Time.
As a time sensor the positioning system receiver is commonly used
(GPS, GLONASS, etc.) or other equipment, which transmits this data type.
The ZDA sentence received on this channel can be processed by the MFD.
To receive time from an external source run System Configuration Utility/Sensors/
Sensors/UTC for indicating the port to which this source is connected. If the time
source is not connected in the System Configuration utility, the computer time
is used.
ATTENTION!
The computer date and time may be different from Greenwich date and time. This error
will not be taken into account in the MFD operation.
In order to avoid such situation, the transmission of data on Greenwich time and
date from an external source (e.g., GPS or transponder) should be ensured.
If no information on time and date, or only the information on time arrives,
it is necessary, before the system is run for the first time, to use Start/Control
Panel/Date/Time for setting the computer time and date as equal to Greenwich time
and date (in the case of time the accuracy of up to one hour would be sufficient).
This conformity should be checked at least once a month.
AIS Transponder Interface

AIS (Automatic Identification System) is used for the automatic transmission and
exchange of information with ships and different coastal objects fitted out with this
system receivers via the VHF channel.
AIS transponder interface is implemented in accordance with IEC/PAS 60936-5
Edition 1.0 2003-09 and IEC 61993-2 international standards, and takes into account
IALA Technical Clarifications on Recommendation ITU-R M.1371-1 (Edition 1.3).
Interfacing of this device with the MFD produces the following capabilities:
278
To receive and display data on other targets (Class A and Class B only) using
the AIS (coordinates, name, MMSI, Call Sign, COG, SOG, Heading, Rate of
turn, Status);
To transmit information on targets displayed by the MFD via the output channel
to the connected external devices;
To turn off the display of AIS target data on MFD screen and to fully turn off the
entire AIS interface;
To dead reckon AIS targets by the user set parameters;
To associate ARPA targets with AIS targets. This functionality allows the ARPA
target and its corresponding AIS target to be displayed as a single target
(the association parameters are set by the user). There is a capability to select
the priority of displaying an AIS or ARPA target on the PPI;
To display the contour of an AIS target on the scales commensurate with the
ship dimensions.
Gyrocompass
HDT, VHW sentences are processed.
Reception of information from Gyrocompasses in the form of NMEA sentences.
Some other equipment (e.g., ARPA, GPS) connected to the gyrocompass can
re-transmit the course data. MFD can be interfaced with the sensors supplying
the course data in IEC 61162-1 or NMEA 0183 standards.
Speed Log
VHW, VBW sentences are processed.
Reception of own ship speed values (LOG) from the connected log.
Some other equipment (e.g., ARPA, GPS) connected to the Speed log can
retransmit the log data. MFD can be interfaced with the sensors supplying the log
data in IEC 61162-1 or NMEA 0183 standards.
Filtering Incoming Sentences

Incoming NMEA sentences can be filtered by talkers and sentence names.
Output
Navigational data OSD sentence is processed.

Transmission of information on the own ship motion parameters to any external
device connected to the MFD.
Radar data TTM, RSD sentences are processed.

Transmission of the following radar data to any external device connected
to the MFD:
Information on the radar display settings;
Data associated with a tracked target relative to own ship position.
Transmission of data on AIS targets relative to the own ship position

(TTM sentences) is provided.
GUI Capabilities
User Configurable GUI
Selection of one of offered MFD user interface displayed layouts skin.
Screen Resolution
19201200 pixels;
16001200 pixels;
12801024 pixels;
1024x768 pixels.
279
Hardware Technical Specification
Screen resolution is determined by the size of the installed monitor.
Legibility of Alphanumeric Data, Information and Text

Distance between the top and bottom edges of the smallest capital letter used
on the screen is 11 pixels.
The nominal viewing distance for the display equipment is 1 meter.

Advanced Software and Hardware Application for Automatic Integration with
Transas Electronic Navigation Products.
Software Module:
Analogue/digital conversion of video signal;
Formation of a radar picture;
Capability to be interfaced with various types of navigational radars.
HARDWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Scanners
Transas Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast
Technical Data
Table 32. Scanner units 12 kW (SU70-14E/S), 25 kW (SU70-25E/S) and 4 kW (SU78-14E/S)
technical specification
Scanner Units
Peak power (normal)
12 kW (SU70-14E/S);
25 kW (SU70-25E/S);
4 kW (SU78-14/ES)
Radiation frequency
9410 30 MHz
Transmission pulse width and

repetition frequency (P.R.F.) for
transceiver 12 kW
Range, nm
Pulse Width, s
Pulse Repetition
Frequency, Hz
(Jitter P.R.F. 20%
typical)
SP Short Pulse;
MP Medium Pulse;
LP Long Pulse;
EP Extra Long Pulse
0.25
0.08 (SP)
3200
0.5
0.08 (SP)
3200
0.75
0.08 (SP)
3200
1.5
3
6
12
24
48
280
0.2 (MP)
1600
0.08 (SP)
3200
0.2 (MP)
1600
0.2 (MP)
1600
0.4 (LP)
800
0.2 (MP)
1600
0.4 (LP)
800
0.4 (LP)
800
0.8 (EP)
500
0.4 (LP)
800
0.8 (EP)
500
0.8 (EP)
500

transceiver 25 kW
SP Short Pulse;
MP Medium Pulse;
LP Long Pulse;
EP Extra Long Pulse
0.25
0.08 (SP)
2000
0.5
0.08 (SP)
2000
0.75
0.08 (SP)
2000
0.2 (MP)
1000
1.5
0.08 (SP)
2000
0.2 (MP)
1000
0.2 (MP)
1000
0.4 (LP)
750
0.2 (MP)
1000
0.4 (LP)
750
6
12
24

transceiver 4 kW non-TA
0.4 (LP)
750
0.8 (EP)
500
0.8 (EP)
500
0.25
0.05 (SP)
3200
0.5
0.05 (SP)
3200
0.05 (SP)
3200
0.2 (MP)
1600
1.5
0.05 (SP)
3200
0.2 (MP)
1600
0.2 (MP)
1600
0.4 (LP)
800
0.4 (LP)
800
6
12
Modulator
750
500
48
0.75
SP Short Pulse;
MP Medium Pulse;
LP Long Pulse;
EP Extra Long Pulse
0.4 (LP)
0.8 (EP)
0.4 (LP)
800
0.8 (EP)
500
24
0.8 (EP)
500
48
0.8 (EP)
500
solid state
Receiver type
solid state, logarithmic
Dynamic rage
> 100 dB
Intermediate Frequency (I.F.)
60 MHz 2 MHz
I.F. bandwidth
20 MHz short and medium pulses;

4 MHz with long and extra long pulses
Front End
microwave integrated circuit
Noise figure
< 3.5 dB
Duplexer
ferrite circulator with solid state limiter diode
Antenna rotation rate
22 2 r.p.m.
Power supply
+24 VDC
EMI
Fully compliant with CEI 80-3 (IEC-945)
Operative temperature
from -25C to +55C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +35C
Weight
14.5 kg
Dimensions
See drawing in CHAPTER 1, section Installation of
Transas Network Scanners 12/25 kW X-Band Up

Mast, paragraph Mechanical Installation
281
Table 33. Scanner antennas specification

Array Model
AU11-04N (non-TA)
AU11-06N
AU11-07N
Length
4 feet
6 feet
7.5 feet
Type
Slotted wave guide
Frequency band
X-band, I = 3.2 cm, frequency range 9410 50 MHz
Polarization
Horizontal
Horizontal beam width (-3dB)
1.8 0.1
1.2 0.1
Vertical beam width (-3dB)
25 2
Side lobe level within

10 from main lobe
< -26dB
Side lobe level outside

10 from main lobe
< -30dB
1.1 0.1
Gain
27dBi 0.5 dB
29dBi 0.5 dB
30dBi 0.5 dB
Weight
3.8 kg
5.8 kg
11 kg
Antenna length
1400 mm
1940 mm
2210 mm
Antenna clearance
1800 mm
2340 mm
2610 mm
Bearing Configuration Reference Table

Table 34. Transas Network scanners bearing configuration reference table
Transas Part
Number
Type
Power
RPM
ACP
SU 82-01/S
Radome
2 kW
Variable
4096
SU 82-12/S
Radome
4 kW
Variable
4096
SU 78-14E/S
Open
4 kW
24
2048
SU 70-14E/S
Open
12 kW
24
2048
SU 70-25E/S
Open
25 kW
24
2048
SU 78-14E/B/S
Open
4 kW
38
4096
SU 70-14E/B/S
Open
12 kW
38
4096
Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast

Table 35. Transceiver unit specification
Dimensions and Weights
Length
959 mm
Width
481 mm
Height
1000 mm
Weight (RTM with Pedestal)
165 kg
Required Power
Alternatives
220/380 VAC, 3, 50 Hz or
Power consumption
4200 VA
Rotating Speed
>20 Antenna RPM
255/440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
Environmental Data
Operating temperature
-25C/+55C
Storage temperature
-25C/+70C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +40
Water resistance, Salt spray, Vibrations etc.
As per IEC 60945
Wind resistance, relative wind
100 knots
Characteristics
282
Modulator
Solid state (MOSFET)
Nominal Peak Power
30 kW
Frequency range
30403060 MHz
Nominal pulse lengths
60/250/800 ns
Pulse repetition frequency
3000/1500/750 Hz
IF amplifier
Logarithmic
IF centre frequency
50 MHz
IF- Bandwidth
1620/45/1.52 MHz
Overall noise figure
3.5 dB
Table 36. Pedestal type 03R-039 specification

Length
665 mm
Width
410 mm
Height
1000 mm
Weight
130 kg
Swing circle
3700 mm
Table 37. 12 feet S-Band Antenna specification

Parameter
Data
Array Type
End Fed Slotted Waveguide
Frequency
30403060 MHz
Polarization
Vertical
Horizontal Beam-Width At -3 dB
Vertical Beam-Width At -3 dB
22
Horizontal Side Lobes:10 better than

Outside 10 better than
26 dB
30 dB
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Rain Proof
Wind Speed
-25C though to +55C

-25C though to +70C
Up to 95% at 40C
According to IEC 945 Chapter 8, paragraph 8
100 knots
Dimensions (LWH)
Weight
Swing circle
3662550340 mm
90 kg
3700 mm
Table 38. External S-Band Power Supply Unit 16PS-003 specification

Depth
140 mm
Width
380 mm
Height
410 mm
Weight
12 Kg
Required Power
Alternatives
220/380 VAC, 3, 50 Hz or
255/440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
Power consumption
4200 VA
Environmental Data
-15C/+55C
Storage temperature
-25C/+70C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +40
Water resistance, Salt spray, Vibrations, etc.
As per IEC 60945
283
Installation Set
Protection Key (Dongle)
Dongle is a MFD protection key. A protection key is a special device that determines
the right of authorized use of Transas Marine navigation systems.
The dongle is designed to be transparent for the data transfer onto the printer and
does not interfere with the computers operation in the ordinary modes. The dongle
should be all the time be connected to the computer when the navigation system
operates.
The MFD systems are supplied with Rainbow Sentinel SuperPro dongles
(LPT or USB).
Fig. below presents dongle options now in use:
Fig. 94 View of dongles produced by Rainbow Sentinel
License
The license is a floppy disk which contains license files for protection of the MFD
system, and text files describing the license and delivery set:
SETUP.ID;
ITEMS.LST;
ITEMS.DAT;
LICENSE.DAT;
LISENCE.TXT;
PACKING.TXT.
RS6B Computer
Technical Specifications
Table 39. Specifications
CPU
Intel Core i5 520E (BGA CPU package), 2.4 GHz,

3 MB cache
OS
Windows XP Professional
System Chipset
Intel QM57 Express Chipset
DRAM
2 GB DDR3 SDRAM
USB
USB 2.0 host x 2, USB 1.1 host x 4
Storage
Storage Support
1 internal SATA storage for SSD/HDD;

1 removable SATA storage slot for storage
expansion
Other Peripherals
284
DVD-R/W
1 internal DVD Writer/Reader
Audio
MIC-in/Line-out interface
Display
Graphics Controller
Onboard Intel HD graphic
VGA Interface
15-pin D-Sub connector x 1(female), with

resolution up to 1920 x 1080
DVI-I Interface
25-pin DVI-I connector x 1 (female)
Ethernet Interface
LAN
2 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 Mbps ports (RJ45)
Magnetic Isolation Protection
1.5 KV built-in
Serial Interface
Serial Standards
2 RS-232/422/485 ports, software-selectable

(DB9 male);
2 RS-232 ports (DB9);
4 NMEA ports (Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connector)
Serial Communication Parameters

Data Bits
5, 6, 7, 8
Stop Bits
1, 1.5, 2
Parity
None, Even, Odd, Space, Mark
Flow Control
RTS/CTS, XON/XOFF, ADDC (automatic data

direction control) for RS-485
Baudrate
50 bps to 921.6 Kbps (supports non-standard

baudrates)
Serial Signals
RS-232
TxD, RxD, DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS, DCD, GND
RS-422
TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
RS-485-4w
TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
RS-485-2w
Data+, Data-, GND
Digital Input
Four (4) general purpose inputs/outputs in the
back that accept closing switch input;
The inputs: ESD protected;
The inputs: Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connector;
The inputs do not have to be isolated. TTL
levels will be detected;
Up to two (2) inputs are allowed to share one (1)
ground terminal; 6-pin connector
Digital Output
Four (4) general purpose outputs in the back
must be provided by means of internal,
isolated relays;
The relays must be capable of switching at
least 36 VDC and 100 mA. The outputs must
be Normally-open (N.O.) dry relay contacts;
8-pin connector
LEDs
System
Power, Storage
LAN
LAN: 10M/Link x 2, 100M/Link x 2 (on connector)
Physical Characteristics
Housing
Aluminum, sheet metal
Weight
6.85 kg
Dimensions
300 x 221 x 150 mm (11.81 x 8.70 x 5.91 in)
Mounting
Wall
Environmental Limits
-15 to 55C (5 to 131F)
Operating Humidity
5 to 95% RH
Storage Temperature
-20 to 60C (-4 to 140F)
285
Anti-vibration
0.7 @ DNV 2.4 (Class A), sine wave, 2-100

Hz, 1 Oct./min., 1.5 hr per axis;
1 grms @ DNV 2.4, random wave, 3-100 Hz,
2.5 hr per axis;
2.1 g @ DNV 2.4 (Class C), sine wave, 2-50
Hz, 1 Oct./min., 1.5 hr per axis
Anti-shock
50 g @ IEC 60068-2-27, half sine wave, 11 ms
Power Requirements
Input Voltage
24 VDC (2-pin terminal block) with tolerance from

-10% to +30%
Power Consumption
Less than 100 W

2.5 A @ 24 VDC
Regulatory Approvals
EMC
CE (EN 55022 Class A, EN 55024, EN 610003-2, EN 61000-3-3);

FCC (Part 15 Subpart B, Class A)
Safety
DNV, IEC 60945 (4th), IACS-E10
Dimensions
Fig. 95. RS6B dimensions
286
RS6 Computer
Dimensions and View of RS6 Computer
Fig. 96. RS6 computer dimensions
Fig. 97. View of RS6 front side
Fig. 98. View of RS6 rear side
RS6 Housing
RS6 mountable chassis (shown on figures above);
Cooling unit: Cooltek 808025mm 16 CFM fan;
Indicators: LEDs for power and HDD activity;
Buttons: system reset;
Dimensions: 220150300 mm (WHL);
Power Supply: 24V DC -10/+30%.
287
RS6 Computer Based on ICES200 Intel Socket, Core TM Duo/Celeron

M Processor COM Express Module
Fig. 99. View of ICES200 Module
The ICES 200 is a Type 2 COM Express Module featuring Intel 945GME and
ICH7M chipset, switch supports Intel Core 2 Duo and Intel Core 2 Duo LV
processors with 533/667 MHz FSB and one DDR2 memory socket up to 2 GB.
The ICES 200 integrated with Intel Graphics Media Accelerator (GMA950).
RS6 Technical Specifications
CPU:
CPU1 Intel Core2 CPU T7400 2.16GHz;
CPU2 Intel Core2 CPU T7400 2.16GHz.
Main Memory: 1DDR2 SO-DIMM 2 GB.
Chipset:
Intel 945GME;
ICH7M I/O Controller Hub.
BIOS:
Award System BIOS;
Plug & Play support;
4M bits Flash ROM.
LAN: 2RJ45 (Gbit);
Graphics:
NVIDIA GeForce 9600M GT (512 MB);
Resolution up to 20481536 @ 60Hz, 16001200 @ 85Hz.
Audio:
Line In;
Line Out.
Interfaces:
1VGA1 (module 9600M GT);
1VGA2 (module 9600M GT);
2USB 2.0 (front side);
288
2USB 2.0 (rear side);

2PS/2 (Keyboard/Mouse);
1LPT;
4RS232;
4RS422/NMEA Input (Opto isolated);
4Digital In (Opto isolated);
4Digital Out (Opto isolated).
Storage:
HDD Fujitsu MHV2080BH 80GB G2;
Device with removable storage Optiarc CD-RW CRX880A.
Environment conditions:
Operating temperatures: -15C to +55C;
Storage temperatures: -20C to 70C;
Relative humidity: Operating 1095%, non-condensing.
TPC24 Computer
Technical Data
Table 40. TPC24 technical description
TFT Characteristics
TFT Technology
High Quality TFT with LED Backlight;

24.0 inch viewable image size, Widescreen, Aspect ratio
16:9;
TFT active-matrix liquid crystal panel;
MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment) LCD Technology
Native Resolution
1920 x 1080 (FHD)
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
0.276 (H) x 0.276 (V) mm
Response Time
25 ms (typical), black to white
Contrast Ratio
3000:1 (typical)
Light Intensity
250 cd/m (typical)
Viewable Angle
+/- 89 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
Active Display Area
531.36 (H) x 298.89 (V) mm
Max Colors
16.7 millions (RGB 8-bit)
Computer Specifications
OS
Windows XP Pro Eng SP2, 32bit
Storage
2 x 2.5" removable HDD (SATA);

Default configuration: 1 x 250GB HDD;
Raid: 0,1
CPU
Intel Celeron P4505 (2M Cache, 1.86 GHz);

Front Side Bus (FSB) 800MHz
Installed Memory
1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz SO-DIMM
System Chipset
Intel BD82QM57
Graphics Chipset
Intel Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0
Ethernet LAN 1
Intel 82577LM Gigabit LAN10/100/1000Mbps
Ethernet LAN 2
Realtek RTL8111C Gigabit LAN10/100/1000Mbps
Audio Chipset
Realtek ALC888-GR (+ 2W Amplifier)
BIOS
UEFI AMIBIOS
Speaker / Buzzer
No speaker / 3500 Hz Buzzer
289
Watchdog Timer
256 Segments, 0, 1, 2...255 sec/min
Power Manager
ACPI S3/S4
Monitoring
Temperature and voltages status
Other Features
GPIO, LAN Wakeup, USB Boot and Wakeup
DVI-I OUT Resolution
From 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
RGB OUT Resolution
From 640 x 480 to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz
Power Specifications
Multi-power Supply
115&230VAC - 50/60Hz + 24 VDC.

Note: You may connect either AC power or DC power or both. In
case both sources are connected, power will be sourced from
the AC input. If AC input is lost, there will be a uninterrupted
switch-over to DC input
Power Consumption
Operating AC/DC: 125 W (max);

TBD (typ) at max backlight+high CPU load
Physical Considerations
Dimensions
593.00 (W) x 348.00 (H) x 76.40 (D) mm

23.35" (W) x 15.12" (H) x 3.01" (D);
4 x M6 for VESA mounting, Max 12mm deep
Weight
11.2 kg / 24.6 lbs
User Controls
Behind front bezel - Glass Display
Control (GDC) IP66
Power On/Off, Brightness Control (-/+), Hotkeys (left/right);

Power LED, HDD/SSD LED, Mode Status Indicators (ECDIS,
Service);
Buzzer (not visible), Light Sensor (not visible)
Environmental Considerations
Operating
Temperature -15 to +55C

Humidity up to 95 %
Storage

Humidity up to 95 %
IP Rating
Protection IP66 front IP22 rear (EN60529)
Safety Considerations
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a
maximum operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation
of all electronic components should, if possible, take place at
ambient temperatures of only 25C. This is a necessary
prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Input/Output Connectors
290
COM ports
1 x DB9M RS-232 non-isolated;

1 x DB9M RS-422/485 non-isolated;
4 x COM isolated RS422/RS485, ECDIS/NMEA Compliant
(Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible connector). For more
detailed information see below COM Module specification.
Ethernet GBLAN
2 x RJ-45
Keyboard and Mouse
2 x PS/2 (keyboard - purple, mouse green)
USB
USB 1.1 (>10m) 1 x USB Type A;

USB 2.0 (<10m) 3 x USB Type A.
2 x Pin Header (=4 USB)
LPT/Parallel
1 x Pin Header
DVI or RGB OUT
1 x 29p DVI-I or as RGB with adapter
RGB OUT
1 x 15p HD D-SUB
AC Power
1 x Std IEC inlet
DC Power
1 x Phoenix 2pin 1927564 MSTB 2,5/ 2-GF-5,08 THT
Line Out
1 x 3.5mm mini jack (Lime)
Speaker L/F
1 x mini-DIN 5pin
Mic In
1 x 3.5mm mini jack (Pink)
COM Module RS-422/RS-485 (PCA100293-1) Specification

Absolute Max voltage applied to
outputs
-8V to +13V
Data Rate / Technical Data Output
Outputs 230kbps (theoretically 400kbps);

15kV using the Human Body Model on all RS-485 signals;
Isolation rating = 2000VRMS, not intended for connection to
live power nets
Transmitter enable mode
Standard mode is automatic;

Standard mode will accept send by RTS, but will in fact
ignore RTS;
Each channel have a overide jumper which can be used to
force the transmitter to always be active
Approvals and Certificates

th
IEC60945 4 (EN 60945: 2002)

GL - Germanischer Lloyd
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
LRS - Lloyds Register of Shipping
BV - Bureau Veritas
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
CCS - China Classification Society
IACS E10
Dimensions
Fig. 100. TPC24 dimensions
291
Fig. 101. TPC24 desktop brackets
Fig. 102. TPC24 portrait mode mounting plate
292
Fig. 103. TPC24 flush mounting
Fig. 104. Panel cutout for TPC24, flush mounting
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6

General
This Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is designed to prevent blackouts,
brownouts, sags and surges from reaching computer with MFD. This UPS also filters
out small utility line fluctuations and isolates equipment from large disturbances by
internally disconnecting from the utility line, while supplying power from its internal
batteries until the utility line returns to safe level.
293
UPS6 consists of following Phoenix modules:
EMC Filter ME-MAX/NEF/QUINT20A;
Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20;
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20;
Battery Module 24 V DC, 3.4 Ah QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH (7.2 or 12 AH).
QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 Primary-Switched Power Supply

with SFB technology, 1 AC, output current 20 A
Description
QUINT POWER power supply units highest system availability due
to SFB technology.
Compact power supply units of the new QUINT POWER generation maximize the
availability of your system. Even the standard power circuit-breakers can be tripped
reliably and quickly with the SFB technology (Selective Fuse breaking Technology)
and six times the nominal current for 12 ms. Defective current paths are is
connected selectively, the defect is limited and the important system parts remain in
operation. A comprehensive diagnostics is carried out by continuously monitoring
the output voltage and current. This preventive function monitoring visualizes the
critical operating modes and reports them to the control unit before an error occurs.
Features
Quick tripping of standard power circuit breakers with dynamic SFB technology
power reserve;
Reliable starting of difficult loads with static POWER BOOST power reserve;
Preventive function monitoring;
High degree of operational safety due to high MTBF >500,000 h, long mains
buffering times >20 ms, high dielectric strength up to 300 V AC.
Ordering Data
Product: Primary-switched power supply with SFB technology, 1 AC, output current 20 A.
Type: QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20.
Order No: 28668776.
Technical Data
Input data:
Nominal input voltage range: 100...240 V AC;
Input voltage range: 85...264 V AC, 90...350 V DC;
Short-term input voltage: 300 V AC;
Frequency range: 45...65 Hz (0 Hz at DC input);
Current consumption: approx. 5.1 A (120 V AC) and 2.3 A (230 V AC);
Inrush current limitation <20 A (typical);
Power failure bypass: >20 ms (for 120 V AC) and >20 ms (for 230 V AC);
Typical response time: <0.5 s;
Protective circuit: transient surge protection varistor;
Input fuse, integrated: 12 A (slow-blow, internal);
294
Recommended backup fuse: circuit breaker 10 A or 16 A (characteristic B);

Discharge current to PE: <3.5 mA;
Stripping length: 7 mm.
Output data:
Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC 1%;
Setting range for the output voltage: 18...29.5 V DC (>24 V constant capacity);
Output current: 20 A (-25...+70C), 26 A (with POWER BOOST,
<40C permanent), 120 A (with SFB technology, 12 ms);
Derating: from +60C 2.5% per Kelvin;
Control deviation: <1 % (change in load, static 10%...90%), <2% (change
in load, dynamic 10%...90%), <0.1% (change in input voltage 10%);
Power loss nominal load max: 46 W;
Maximum power dissipation idling: 10 W;
Efficiency: >93% (for 230 V AC and nominal values);
Ascent time: <0.5 ms;
Residual ripple: <80 mVpp (with nominal values);
Connection in parallel: yes, for redundancy and increased capacity;
Connection in series: yes;
Surge protection against internal surge voltages: yes, limited
to approx. 35 V DC;
Resistance to reverse feed: max. 35 V DC;
Stripping length: 7 mm.
Signal output DC OK active:

Output description: Uout >0.9Un: high signal;
Voltage: +24 V DC;
Current: 1 A (short circuit resistant);
Status display: DC OK LED green/Uout <0.9Un: LED flashing.
Signal output DC OK floating:

Output description: relay contact, Uout >0.9Un: contact closed;
Voltage: 30 V AC/DC;
Current: 1 A;
Status display: DC OK LED green/Uout <0.9Un: LED flashing.
Signal output POWER BOOST active:

Output description: Iout < In: high signal;
Voltage: +24 V DC;
Current: 1 A (short circuit resistant);
Status display: LED BOOST, yellow/Iout > In: LED on.
General Data:
Insulation voltage input/output: 4 kV AC (type test)/
2 kV AC (routine test);
295
Insulation voltage input/PE: 3.5 kV AC (type test)/2 kV AC (routine test);

Insulation voltage output/PE: 500 V DC (routine test);
Mounting position: on horizontal NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 60715.
Degree of protection: IP20;
Protection class: , with PE connection;
MTBF: >500,000 h according to IEC 61709 (SN 29500);
Housing version: steel sheet, zinc-plated;
Weight: 1.7 kg;
Dimensions (width height depth) state of delivery: 90130125 mm;
Dimensions (widthheightdepth) 90 tuned: 12213093 mm.
Ambient conditions:
Ambient temperature (operation): -25C... 70C (>60C derating);
Ambient temperature (storage/transport): -40C... 85C;
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation): 95% (at 25C,
no condensation).
Dimensions
Fig. 105. Power Supply unit QUINT PS/1AC/24DC/20 dimensional drawing
296
Fig. 106. EMC Filter ME-MAX/NEF/QUINT20A dimensional drawing
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use

Description
Uninterruptible Power Supply Units for Buffering Long-Term Power

Interruptions:
Saves space thanks to the compact, uniform design;
Integrated diode saves money through isolation of loads;
Maximum system availability through optimum battery management and reliable

signaling;
Minimum installation time due to ready-to-use plug-in bridges and integrated

timeout.
QUINT-DC-UPS uninterruptible power supply units with long-life lead-acid batteries

provide long buffer times at high currents. Even in the event of a longer supply
voltage failure, the units ensure that all connected devices continue to operate
without interruption.
The devices have a narrow and uniform design, which makes them ideal for use on
the DIN rail where space is limited. In addition, short wiring paths ensure order and
clarity in the control cabinet.
The high level of availability and the particularly long service life of the battery
modules are achieved through professional battery management. An automatic
presence check (every minute), automatic quality test (once a week), temperaturedetermined charging, and electronic over current protection ensure the battery
modules are ready to operate at all times. Power is therefore available in the event
of an error and the service life of the battery module is maximized.
The actual state must be determined quickly so that the right decision can be made
in an emergency. Optimum signaling is thus required for maximum system
297
availability. Three floating PDT contacts and three LEDs are provided for function
monitoring, which indicate all the operating states clearly.
So that relay signaling is more reliable and more durable than before, an additional
positive supply output has been provided. The contact, which is current-limited
and resistant to continued short circuits, is located next to the relay connections
and enables easy bridging. In the event of wiring errors, the shortcircuit protection
prevents any welding of the relay contacts. This ensures that the user can rely on
an OK signal. Even in the event of connection errors, currents remain below
100 mA, which prevents damage to the relay contacts.
A system is switched off after a specific time that can be set on the device or by
an external signal.
No additional installation is required for shutdown. In addition, ready-to-use plug-in
bridges minimize the installation time.
The connected devices can be divided into buffered and unbuffered loads using the
isolated input. This extends the buffer time, which depends on the output current.
If only critical devices are protected using fuses, smaller battery modules can be
used that save money and space in the control cabinet. In addition, the isolated
input protects the connected devices against errors in the internal network.
Ordering Data
Product: Uninterruptible power supply unit.
Type: QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20.
Order No: 2866239.
Technical Data
Input data:
Nominal input voltage: 24 V DC;
Input voltage range: 22.530 V DC;
Current consumption (no load/charging/maximum): 0.1 A/2.0 A/22.0 A;
Switching threshold: Ua <22 V; dynamic Uin -1 V/0.1s;
Buffer time (can be configured): 0.5; 1; 2; 3; 5; 10; 15; 20; 30; continuous;
Input fuse: internal, 25 A;
Maximum power dissipation (ready/buffer mode): 15 W/20 W.
Output data:
Can be connected in parallel (battery module): yes, to increase the buffer time.
Output data in normal operation:

Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC;
Output current: 20 A;
Current limit: None;
Overload fuse: Internal, 25 A.
Output data in buffer mode:

Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC;
Output voltage (maximum): 27.9 V DC;
Output current: 20 A;
298
Current limit: 27 A;
Overload fuse: electronic;
Level of efficiency (typical): 95%;
Remote shutdown: yes.
Charging:
Charge characteristic curve: I/U characteristic curve;
End-of-charge voltage: temperature compensated;
Charge current: <2.5 A;
Battery presence check/time interval: 60 seconds;
Battery quality test/time interval: 180 hours.
Memory medium: external:

Nominal voltage: 24 V DC;
Nominal capacity: 3.4 Ah, 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah;
Charge current: <2.5 A.
Signaling:
Power In OK: green LED;
Alarm: red LED, floating PDT, 30 V AC/DC, maximum; 1 A, maximum;
Battery mode: yellow LED, floating PDT, 30 V AC/DC, maximum; 1 A,
maximum;
Battery charge: yellow LED, flashing, floating PDT, 30 V AC/DC, maximum;
1 A, maximum.
General data:
Insulation voltage (Input/output to housing): 1 kV AC type test/1 kV AC routine
test;
Mounting position: on a horizontal 35 mm (1.378 in.) DIN rail EN 60715;
Class and degree of protection: II, IP20;
MTBF According to IEC 1709 (SN 29 500): >500,000 h;
Housing version: AluNox (AlMg1), closed;
Dimensions (WHD) default upon delivery: 66130125 mm;
Dimensions (WHD) rotated 90: 12213069 mm;
Weight (approximately): 0.8 kg.
Ambient conditions:
Ambient temperature (operation): -25C... 70C (>60C derating);
Ambient temperature (storage/transport): -40C...85C;
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation): 95% (at 25C, no cond.).
299
Dimensions
Fig. 107. UPS unit QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 dimensional drawing
Battery Modules 24 V DC
Technical Data
Technical data of Battery modules presented in the table below:
Table 41. Battery modules technical specification
Technical data/Type
300
QUINTBAT/24DC/3.4AH
QUINTBAT/24DC/7.2AH
QUINTBAT/24DC/12AH
Order No.
28 66 34 9
28 66 35 2
28 66 36 5
Nominal voltage
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Nominal capacity
3.4 Ah
7.2 Ah
12Ah
Max. charging current
0.8 A
1.8 A
3.0 A
End-of-charge voltage (at 20C)
27.6 V
27.6 V
27.6 V
Buffer period
20 A/4,5 min.
25 A/3 min
20 A/10 min.
40 A/4,5 min
20 A/22.5 min.
40 A/9 min
Nominal output current, max.
25 A
50 A
50 A
Output fuse, internal
25 A
225 A
225 A
Connection in parallel,
to increase the buffer time
Yes
Degree of protection/
Protection class
IP20/III
Service life (years)
6 (20C)
Housing
Galvanized sheet steel
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
112145123
164156123
231156123
Weight approx
3.54 kg
6 kg
9 kg
Rechargeable battery type
Panasonic
UP-RW1220P1
Panasonic
LC-R127R2PG
Panasonic
LC-RA1212PG
Dimensions
Fig. 108. QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH battery dimensional drawing
Fig. 109. QUINT-BAT/24DC/7.2AH battery dimensional drawing
Fig. 110. QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH battery dimensional drawing
301
Fig. 111. Battery modules mounting brackets dimensional drawing

Components
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
General
QUINT DIODE provides:
100% decoupling of power supplies connected in parallel;
Can be installed in potentially explosive areas;
Load currents up to 60 A supported;
Easy assembly by snapping onto the DIN rail.
Fig. 112. Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
302
Description
The redundancy module can be used to 100% decouple two power supplies of the
same type, which are connected in parallel on the output side to increase power or
provide redundancy.
The reliability of a power supply determines the availability of individual components
in a system and whether complex systems can function safely.
Redundant connections are designed for supplying systems, which place particularly
high requirements on operational safety. The redundant configuration of the power
supply ensures continuous system availability.
The power supply of a system can be configured redundantly through
the connection of at least two power supply units in parallel. Together they then
supply the connected devices. The connected power supplies must be large enough
that the total current requirements of all devices can be fully met by one power
supply. In the event of an internal fault on one device or a mains voltage supply
failure on the primary side, the other device automatically takes over the complete
power supply without interruption, and vice versa.
Ordering Data
Product: Redundancy module.
Type: QUINT-DIODE/40.
Order No: 29 38 96 3.
Technical Data
Input data:
Input voltage, Un/Umax: 24 V DC/< 30 V DC;
Input current, In: 2x20 A, 1x40 A;
Transient surge voltage protection using Transil diode: Yes;
Protection against polarity reversal with diode: Yes, < 60 V;
Input/output voltage drop: 0.5 V, approximately;
Maximum power dissipation with nominal load: 20 W, approximately.
General data:
Insulation voltage (Input, output/housing): 1 kV;
Mounting position: S 35 DIN rail according to EN 50 022;
Can be mounted with spacing: vertical 5 cm (1.969 in.), horizontal 2 cm
(0.787 in.);
Class and degree of protection: II, IP20;
Efficiency: > 97%;
Housing version: AIMg (enclosure), GD-ZnAICu (heatsink);
Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail: 62x84x102 mm [2.441x3.307x4.016 in.];
Weight: 0.7 kg, approximately.
Climatic data:
Ambient temperature operation: -25C to +70C (-13F to +158F);
Ambient temperature storage: -40C to +85C (-40F to +185F);
Humidity: > 95%.
303
Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button Dimensions

The Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button dimensional drawings are presented below:
Fig. 113. Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button housing box cut-out dimensions
Fig. 114. Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button housing box dimensional drawing
304
Fig. 115. Reset Button and Alarm Buzzer front panel dimensional drawing
Fig. 116. Reset Button and Alarm Buzzer mounting brackets dimensional drawing
Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball

General
ES6 keyboard with Trackball (the ES6 in what follows) is a control unit inside
the Transas systems;
The ES6 consists of:

The PC compatible keyboard unit with two fields (QWERTY- and functionkeys);
Separate trackball unit with trackball, two left buttons (one on each side of
the Trackball), one right button and an optional scroll wheel.
Power supply 24VDC (-10/+30% according to IEC 60945);
USB or PS2 connection to computer;
Up to 7 devices ES6 keyboard or ES6 trackball can be connected via the inbuilt
CAN-bus interface (with connection speed 250 kb) to the same computer;
USB port on top, connected to computers USB interface, for connection of

external data storage media;
RS232 interface.
305
Keyboard Unit Overview

The keyboard unit is made up of basically four parts:
Plastic front part with holes for keys, indicators and rotational controls,
e.g., Rain, Gain, Dimmer;
Silicon rubber keypad with contact pads for the QWERTY-keys;
Printed circuit board with LEDs for background light and indicators, tactile
switches for function keys, rotary encoders, control electronics and connectors;
Plastic back cover.
Keyboard QWERTY-Field
The keys are designed (looks and feel) and placed in a way to resemble a standard
English-American laptop keyboard.
All keys are backlit with orange/yellow LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The keys
are printed with a hiding-effect, i.e. the key legends are normally invisible when
not lit. The QWERTY-field is normally not lit, when a key is pressed the backlight
is switched on and this first key press is not sent to the PC. When no key
of the QWERTY-field is pressed for more than 30 seconds, the backlight
will be switched off.
Keyboard Function Field

All function keys have a tactile switch on the PCB to give a distinct click feeling.
The tracking keys are printed with a hiding-effect, i.e. the key legends are normally
invisible when not lit. They are lit only when the tracking function is active.
Fig. 117. View of ES6 keyboard
Functional Keys
Table 42. ES6 Functional Keys
306
N/N
ES6 key/control
Function
ECDIS
To turn on the ECDIS task
RADAR
To turn on the RADAR task
CONNING
To turn on the CONNING task
AUX
Not used
Comment
N/N
ES6 key/control
Function
Comment
TX/STBY
To switch on/off TX and STBY

mode
SHOW RADAR
To backlight the radar picture

on the screen
For RADAR task as you press this

button and keep it depressed:
Display of ARPA and AIS targets
is turned off;
Turns off CHARTS and MAPS.
Display of chart information is
switched to Gray transparency
colour palette;
Display of Radar Rings is turned off.
For ECDIS task as you press this
To turn on the overlay;
Transparency value 0;
Chart Base display.
As the button is released, the system
returns to the initial display mode
SHOW CHART
To backlight chart information

on the screen
For RADAR task as you press this

button and keep it depressed, contours
of chart objects are backlighted.
For ECDIS task as you press this
Transparency value 3;
No targets are displayed;
No tides or currents are displayed;
No Add Info objects are displayed.
As the button is released, the system
returns to the initial display mode
ALL LAYERS
To turn on display of all the

possible chart information layers
OVERLAY
To turn on/off the Overlay mode
10
DAY/NT
To switch successively colour

palettes in the MFD
11
AHEAD
To turn on the Navigation mode
12
TGT
To turn on/off display of ARPA

and AIS targets on MFD screen
13
MOB
To turn on the Man Overboard

alarm mode
14
EVENT
To make an instant position

recording in the electronic log
15
ST. DISP
To turn on presentation of the

Primary Chart Information Set
16
N/H/C UP
To switch successively the

display orientation modes
17
TM/RM
To switch between True Motion

and Relative Motion modes
18
EBL 1 2
To control EBL1 and EBL2.
Daylight;
Twilight;
Dusk;
Night;
Dusk inverted;
Night inverted
For RADAR task also:
Ahead function in the Relative
Motion mode, with Course Up
display orientation, is used for
switching to a new stabilisation
course value;
In True Motion the own ship symbol
will shift to the side opposite to the
direction of its motion to a
distance of 2/3 scan radius from
the Plan Position Indicator centre
North Up;
Head Up;
Course Up
For ECDIS task:
307
N/N
ES6 key/control
Function
Comment
A press on this switches the

control between EBL1 and EBL2
EBL 1 is shown on the Chart panel

as a dashed lines.
EBL 2 is shown on the Chart panel
as a dashed lines with another length of
the dash.
By default, the direction of EBL is set
at 0
For RADAR task:
EBL1 is displayed on the PPI in the
form of a solid light blue coloured line
originating from the centre of the own
ship mark.
EBL2 is displayed on the PPI as
dashed light blue coloured line.
By default, the direction of EBL
is set at 0
19
EBL ON/OFF
To turn on/off EBL
20
VRM 1 2
To control VRM1 and VRM 2.

A press on this switches the
control between VRM1 and
VRM2
21
VRM ON/OFF
To turn on/off VRM1 and VRM2
22
TRACK
To turn on the Track Control

mode
23
Qtrack
To turn on the mode for creating

a temporary route (Quick Track)
24
STOP
To turn off the Track Control

mode
25
ZOOM OUT
To reduce the chart display

scale in the ECDIS task.
To reduce the radar picture
scale by one value with a single
press in the RADAR task
26
ZOOM IN
To increase the chart display

scale in the ECDIS task.
To increase the radar picture
scale by one value with a single
press in the RADAR task
27
ALARM
To display and acknowledge

MFD alarms
For ECDIS task:

VRM 1 is shown on the Chart panel
as a dashed lines.
VRM 2 is shown on the Chart panel
as a dashed lines with another length
of the dash.
By default, VRM1 radius is set to
0.25 mile
For RADAR task:
VRM1 is displayed on the PPI in the
form of a solid light blue coloured ring
with centred on the own ship mark
centre. VRM2 is displayed on the PPI
as dashed light blue coloured ring.
By default, VRM1 radius is set to
0.25 mile
Each press on the button

acknowledges successively active
alarms in MFD system.
The indicator can assume the following
values depending on the alarm status:
The button is highlighted in red,
flashing red indicator active
unacknowledged alarm;
The button is highlighted in red
active acknowledged alarm;
The button is not highlighted in red
no active alarms
28
308
DIM
To control the keyboardss
The illumination intensity is controlled
N/N
ES6 key/control
Function
Comment
29
GAIN
backlighting
To adjust the video signal gain
level
by using Dimmer
30
SEA
To adjust the sea clutter

suppressions
31
RAIN
To adjust the rain clutter

suppressions
Dimensions
Fig. 118. ES6 keyboard and trackball dimensional drawing
Fig. 119. ES6 keyboard and trackball desktop housing dimensional drawing
309
Fig. 120 ES6 trackball dimensional drawing
Fig. 121 ES6 trackball desktop housing dimensional drawing
310
Transas Monitors
LCD Maritime Multi Displays (MMD)
General
As a dedicated part of MFD system, Transas MIP Ltd. uses Industrial Colour
Monitors manufactured for Transas MIP Ltd. by Jakob Hatteland Display AS. The
following types of monitors are used:
19 TFT Hatteland JH 19T14 MMD Series 1, ref. No: JH 19T14 TRD-DAE-AABA

and JH 19T14 TRD-AAE-AAAA;
23 TFT Hatteland JH 23T14 MMD, Series 1 ref. No: JH 23T14 TRD-MAEAABA;
26 TFT Hatteland JH 26T11 MMD, Series 1 ref. No: JH26T11 TRD-MAE;
27 TFT Hatteland JH 27T11 MMD, Series 1 ref. No: JH 27T11 MMD-AAE and
JH27T11 TRD-MAE.
The monitors JH 19T14 TRD-xxx-xxBx, JH 23T14 TRD-xxx-xxBx, JH 27T11 MMD-xxxxxBx and JH 26T11 TRD-xxx-xxBx have a buzzer for the reproduction of acoustic
alarms.
Features
Hatteland Displays marine monitors are based on high quality and state-of-art
components with the highest specifications, and meet all requirements for harsh
maritime use. These color displays are industrialized versions of a high quality
Sharp and Fujitsu TFT based display with MVA Premium technology. The MMD
allows you to display professional applications with clarity and enhanced color and
image quality, VGA STD input, Video input and PIP (Picture in Picture) functions.
The display provides you with automatic compatibility with multiple upgrading
platforms and a vast array of graphic standards allowing resolution upgrades without
upgrading the display.
The key features for the Maritime Multi Display Series 2 range are optically bonded,
modular backpacks, slimmest design possible, PIP functionality, easy operation with
either the IP22 1-button user controls + USB connector in front.
Products JH19T14 and JH23T14 Specification
Table 43. Jakob Hatteland LCD Maritime Multi Displays JH19T14, JH23T14 characteristics
19 TFT Hatteland JH19T14
Technical Description
TFT Characteristics
TFT Technology
Color Active Matrix LCD Module;

MVA Premium Technology (TFT);
Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
TFT size
19 inch viewable image size
Pixel number
12801024
Pixel pitch (RGB)
23.1 inch viewable image size

16001200
0.294 (H)0.294 (V) mm
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
1000:1 (typical)
600:1 (typical)
Light Intensity
300 cd/m (typical)
Viewable Angle
Active Display
Area
Max Colors
89 deg. (typical)
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
376.32 (H)301.056 (V) mm
400 cd/m (typical)

85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
470.4 (H)352.8 (V) mm
16.7 millions
311
Synchronization
Sync Signal
Digital separate synchronization;

Composite synchronization;
Synchronization on green;
Interlaced and non interlaced;
Video signal: Analog RGB 0.7 Vp-p. Input Impedance 75 ohm
Auto detect VGA -> WUXGA
Synchronization Range
Horizontal
15.0 kHz to 91.1 kHz
Vertical
60 Hz* to 85 Hz (*Recommended for optimum picture quality)
Supported Signal Inputs

Resolutions
VGA
640480 (including 640350)
SVGA
800600 (including 720400)
XGA
1024768
SXGA
12801024*
*Recommended for optimum picture
quality (60 Hz only)
1280x1024
UXGA
16001200
16001200*
*Recommended for optimum picture
quality (60 Hz only)
WUXGA
Video Signals:
1920x1200
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video;
Composite video
Power Supply
option
Power
Consumption
115 & 230VAC 50/60 Hz + 24 VDC

Operating: 100 W (max)
95 W (typ) 125 W (max)
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
Physical
Dimensions
483 (W)444 (H)82 (D) mm
584 (W)534 (H)85 (D) mm
Weight
11.5 kg (approx w/bracket)
20 kg (approx w/bracket)
Signal Terminals
DVI-I Signal In
129p DVI Female (or as RGB IN with adapter)
RGB Signal In
1x15p HD-SUB (female)
RGB Signal
Out
1x15p HD-SUB (female) Clone of RGB IN
HATTELAND I/O
1160p D-SUB (female)
USB IN/OUT
1TYPE B Connector (female). Reserved for future use
AC power IN
1Std IEC Inlet
AC power OUT
DC power IN
1Std IEC Outlet

12p D-SUB Connector (male) Amphenol FCC17 only for JH23T14
Available Options/Accessories
Bracket
Rotary Bracket
JH MMDBR STD-A1
JH 23TBR T01-A1
JH MMDRO STD-A1
User Controls
On front bezel
Power On/Off and On Screen Display Menu (push button)

Brightness control (up/down push buttons)
Hotkeys (left/right push buttons)
Mode status Red/Green Illuminated LED-Ring Indicator
Speaker/Buzzer
312
Operating
Temperature -15C to +55C.

Humidity 30% to 90 % (non condensing)
Storage
Temperature -20C to +60C.

Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)
Compass Safe
Distance
Std: 1.6 m;
Steereng: 1.05 m
Safety
Considerations
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operating
temperature of 55 C, continuous operation of all electronic components should,
if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only 25C. This is a necessary
prerequisite for a long life and low service costs
JH19T14 and JH23T14 Dimensions
Fig. 122. 19 TFT Hatteland JH19T14. Standard view
313
Fig. 123. 19 TFT Hatteland JH19T14. Bracket view
Fig. 124. 19/23 TFT Hatteland JH19T14/JH23T14. Rotary Bracket view
314
315
Products JH26T11 and JH27T11 Specification

Table 44. Jakob Hatteland LCD Maritime Multi Displays JH26T11, JH27T11 characteristics
Technical Description
TFT Characteristics
TFT Technology
High Quality TFT;

Optical Bonding Technology;
25.54 inch viewable image size Widescreen, Aspect Ratio 16:10;
S-MVA, Active Matrix, Thin Film
Transistor (TFT);
RGB Vertical Stripe
Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
27 inch viewable image size

Widescreen;
Color Active Matrix, a-SI (amorphous
silicon) Thin Film Transistor (TFT);
S-PVA (super patterned Vertical
Alignment mode
19201200
0.2865 (H) x 0.2865 (V) mm
0.303 (H)0.303 (V) mm
Response Time
8 ms (typical), G to G
6 ms (typical), G to G
Contrast Ratio
1500:1 (typical)
1000:1 (typical)
Light Intensity
350 cd/m (typical)
500 cd/m (typical)
Viewable Angle
88 deg. (typical)
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
89 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
Active Display
Area
550.08 (H) x 343.8 (V) mm
581.76 (H)363.6 (V) mm
Max Colors
16.7 (depending on graphic card)
Synchronization
Sync Signal
Digital separate synchronization;

Composite synchronization;
Synchronization on green;
Auto detect signals, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
Analog RGB 0.7 Vp-p. Input Impedance 75 ohm
Synchronization Range
Horizontal
15.0 kHz to 91.1 kHz
Vertical
60 Hz* to 85 Hz (*Recommended for optimum picture quality)
Supported Signal Inputs

Resolutions
VGA
640480 (including 640350)
SVGA
800600 (including 720400)
XGA
1024768
SXGA
12801024
UXGA
16001200
WUXGA
Video Signals:
19201200* (*Recommended for optimum picture quality)

Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video;
Composite video.
Power Supply
option
115VAC & 230VAC

50Hz/60Hz+24VDC
115VAC & 230VAC 50Hz/60Hz
Power
Consumption
Operating: 185 W (max)
200 W (max)
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
Physical
Dimensions
635 (W) x 499 (H) x 101.5 (D) mm
660 (W)481 (H)101.5 (D) mm
Weight
15 kg (approx)
16 kg (approx w/no bracket)
Signal Terminals
DVI-I Signal In
316
129p DVI Female (or as RGB IN with adapter)

RGB Signal In
15p HD D-SUB (female)
RGB Signal Out
15p HD D-SUB (female) Clone of RGB IN
Multifunction
1160p D-SUB (female)
USB I/O
1USB TYPE B Con. (female). Reserved for future use
AC power IN
1Std IEC Inlet
AC power OUT
DC power IN
1Std IEC Outlet (5A max)

1 x 2p D-SUB Connector (male) Amphenol FCC17
Available Options/Accessories
Cables/connectors
Custom Multifunction cable to support more signals
Brackets
JH 26TBR STD-A1
JH 27BRD STD-A1;
JH MMDROSTD-A1 - Rotary Bracket
User Controls
On front bezel
Power On/Off and On Screen Display Menu (push button)

Brightness control (rotary control)
Hotkeys (left/right push buttons)
Speaker/Buzzer
Operating
Temperature -15C to +55C

Humidity up to 95%
Storage
Temperature -20C to +60C

Humidity up to 95%
IP Rating
EN60529 (IP66) front, IP20 rear
EN60529 (IP66) (Applies for flush

mounting)
Safety
Considerations
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic components
should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only 25C. This is a
necessary prerequisite for a long life and low service costs
JH26T11 and JH27T11 Dimensions
317
Fig. 128. 26 TFT Hatteland JH26T11. Mounting Bracket view
318
Approvals
Approved by the following classification societies for compliance with IEC60945 3rd ed.
E10, CE:
DNV (Det Norske Veritas);
LLOYDs (Lloyds Register of Shipping);
BSH (Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie);
GL (Germanischer Lloyd);
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping).

General Description
The Radar Integrator Board (whats follow RIB6) is designed for the reception
of analog video signals from the radar and their digitizing, pre-processing and relay
of the radar signal to the dual network as per network protocols for the Transas
navigational products.
The RIB6 is intended as means to connect radars from different manufacturers
to a personal computer executing the Transas Navi-Radar and Navi-Sailor software.
The signal processing is performed in the following order.
At a Trigger signal, the digitizing of the input signal is performed in a pulse sweep
whose size is calculated from the set number of output samples and decimation
coefficients.
After the IFA band matched filters the random pulse interference rejection algorithm
and pulse matched filter is implemented. The resulting sector presented at stage A
in the figure below.
319
Stage B in the figure below presents the result after the azimuth integration
algorithm. The resulting sector shall correspond to the center of all sectors used
in the integration which is presented in stage C in the figure below.
The incoming data flow, regardless of the trigger repetition rate and antenna rpm,
is reduced to the set number of sectors per an antenna revolution. So before
sending the determined outgoing sector, RIB6 has to perform range compression
and sector interpolation of the 16-bits samples related to stage D in the figure below.
Concurrently with the operation of the data reception and processing algorithm, data
is transmitted and received via the RS422 serial port.
Fig. 131. Radar signal processing
Electrical Characteristics
Control Signal:
Electrical format: RS422;
Signal type: binary or alpha numeric (NMEA);
Information:
TX ON/OFF;
Rotation ON/OFF;
Pulse length;
Trigger PRF;
Magnetron current
Heating;
Tuning indicator;
BIT;
PM control.
Generic radar video signal:
Maximum voltage: 25 V;
Input Impedance: 1.2 kohm, 75 ohm, 50 ohm (manually selectable by
jumper);
Signal type: analog;
320
Singled ended and differential input for generic radar (manually selectable by
jumper);
The video and the combined video signal shall use the same connector.
Trigger:
Input Impedance: 1.2 kohm, 75 ohm, 50 ohm (manually selectable by
jumper);
Signal type: square pulse;
Singled ended and differential input (manually selectable by jumper);
Pulse length of not less than 100 ns. Protection from pulse interference
of less than 50 ns. Implemented by means of a low pass filter;
Electronic adjustment of the operation threshold within 10 V.
Azimuth:
Input Impedance: 1.2 kohm, or a pull up resistor of 560 ohm to 12V power
supply for connection to open collector driver (manually selectable by
jumper);
Signal type: square pulse;
Rejection of pulse interference not less than 1 us. Valid pulse assumed to be
at least 2 us;
Heading:
Input Impedance: 1.2 kohm, or a pull up resistor of 560 ohm to 12V power
supply for connection to open collector driver (manually selectable by
jumper);
Rejection of pulse interference of less than 1 us. Valid pulse assumed to be at
least 2 us;
Output: 2100 Mbit LAN;
Power supply: 24 VDC.
Environmental Requirements
RIB6 is for Protected category of IEC 60945 standard (temperature range:

from -15C to +55C);
Weight: 1.275 kg.
321
Dimensions
Fig. 132. RIB6. Dimensional drawing
Data Collecting Unit DCU6

General
Data Collecting Unit (whats follow DCU), this device through which is realized
connection of navigational data sources (such as GPS, GYRO, LOG, AIS, etc.)
using NMEA standard (IEC 61162) to Transas Workstations.
DCU power supply is performed with the cable connected to the external 24 VDC
power supply.
The purpose of Data Collecting Unit (DCU) is:
To convert data from RS 422 to Ethernet and visa versa;
To share resources (data) between multiple clients.
DCU6 maximum dimensions are shown in the figure below.
General Technical Characteristics

Table 45. Technical characteristics
322
Input voltage
24 V DC
Power consumption, max
25 W
Humidity (relative, operating and storage)
095%, without condensation
EMC
IEC 60945 edition 4
Working temperature
-15C+55C
Storage temperature
-25C+70C
Dimensions
430(+40)20044 mm
Weight
2 kg
Interfaces Description
Table 46. Input/Output channels
Description
Notes
Quantity
16RS 422 bi-directional

channels (default
configuration)
114 ports are RS 422 bi-directional channels.

15 and 16 ports are RS 422 bi-directional channels
by default and may be configured by jumpers X16
and X17 accordingly as follows:
Output channels transmit RS 232 signal;
Input channels receive RS 422 signal
Data format
IEC 61162 ed. 1/2

(NMEA 0183)
Any type of binary data
Parity
None
Even
Odd
Baud rate
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Limitations:
In case if all 16 RS ports will be loaded by bidirectional data transferring with baud rate
between 1200 and 38400 then no more than 25
Transas Workstations could work with same
DCU;
Baud rate 57600 then no more than 15 Transas
Workstations could work with same DCU;
Baud rate 115200 then no more than 10 Transas
Workstations could work with same DCU
Data transfer
delay
30 to 255 msec
Adjusted by operator
Ethernet
2 (two) LAN 10/100 Mbits/sec

adapters
Dimensions
Fig. 133. DCU6. Dimensional drawing
323
WAGO I/O Modules

MODBUS Fieldbus Coupler (750-314)
Part No.: 750-314.
This buscoupler allows connection of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM as a slave to
the MODBUS fieldbus. The buscoupler is capable of supporting all bus modules.
The bus coupler automatically configures, creating a local process image which
may include analog, digital or specialty modules. Analog and specialty module data
is sent via words and/or bytes, digital data is sent bit by bit.
MODBUS allows the storing of the process image in the corresponding Master
control (PLC, PC or NC).
The data of the analog modules is stored in the process image which is created
automatically according to the order in which the modules are connected to the
buscoupler. The bits of the digital modules are sent byte by byte and added to
the analog data (registers). If the amount of digital information exceeds 8 bits,
the buscoupler automatically starts with a new byte.
Fig. 134. WAGO MODBUS Fieldbus Coupler
324
Table 47. WAGO MODBUS specification

Description
MODBUS/RS 232/15019200 Bd
750-314
General specifications
Dimensions from upper edge of DIN 35 rail
WHL
5165100 mm
Weight
200 g
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP
0.08 mm 2.5 mm ; AWG 28 14,

8 9 mm/0.33 in stripped length
System data
No. of nodes
99 with repeater
No. of I/O points
ca 6000 (depends on master)
Transmission medium
shielded Cu cable 2 (4)0.25 mm /AWG 23
Max. length of fieldbus segment
1200 m (depends on baud rate/on the cable)
Baud rate
(1200) 150 baud... (115200) 19200 baud
Buscoupler connection
1D-SUB 9, socket
Technical data
Max. no. of I/O modules
64
Fieldbus Input/Output process image
max. 512 bytes
Configuration
DIP switch and 2 decimal Coder or via PC or PLC
Voltage supply
DC 24 V (-25%...+30%)
Input current (max.)
500 mA at 24V
Efficiency of the power supply
87%
Internal current consumption
350 mA at 5V
Total current for I/O modules
1650 mA at 5V
Isolation
500 V system/supply
Voltage via power jumper contacts
DC 24 V (-25%...+30%)
Current via power jumper contacts (max.)
DC 10 A
4-Channel Digital Input Module DC 24 V (750-403)

Part No.: 750-403.
2- to 3-conductor connection; high-side switching.
The digital input modules receive control signals from digital field devices (sensors,
etc.). Each input module has a noise-rejection filter. This filter is available with
different time constants. An optocoupler is used for electrical isolation between
the bus and the field side.
Fig. 135. 4-Channel Digital Input Module DC 24 V
325
Table 48. 4-Channel Digital Input modules DC 24 V specification

Description
4DI 24V DC 0.2 ms
750-403
Dimensions from upper edge of DIN 35 rail WHL
1264100 mm
Weight
50 g
0.082.5 mm ; AWG 28 14,

Technical data
No. of inputs
Current consumption (internal)
7.5 mA
Voltage via power jumper contacts
DC 24 V (-25%...+30%)
Signal voltage (0)
DC -3 V...+5 V
Signal voltage (1)
DC 15 V...30 V
Current supply (typ.)
4.5mA
Isolation
500 V system/supply
Internal bit width
4 bits
2-Channel Analog Input Module 4 20mA (750-454)

Part No.: 750-454.
The analog input module receives signals with standardized values of 020 mA
and 4-20 mA. The input signal is electrically isolated and will be transmitted with
a resolution of 12 bits. The internal system supply (via the data bus contacts) is used
for the power supply of the module. The input channels are differential inputs.
The shield (screen) is directly connected to the DIN rail.
Fig. 136. 2-Channel Analog Input Module 420 mA
326
Table 49. 2-Channel Analog Input modules 420 mA specification

Description
2AI 420 mA Different Inputs
750-454
1264100 mm
Weight
55 g
0.082.5 mm ; AWG 28 14,

Technical data
No. of inputs
Voltage supply
Via system voltage DC/DC
Current consumption typ. (internal)
70 mA
Common mode voltage (max.)
35 V
Signal current
0 mA 20 mA (750-452)
4 mA 20 mA (750-454)
Input resistance
< 220 ohm at 20 mA
Resolution
12 bits
Conversion time (typ.)
2 ms
Measuring error (25C)
<0.2% of the full scale value
Temperature coefficient
<0.01%/K of the full scale value
Isolation
500V system/supply
Bit width
216 bits data and 28 bits control/status

(option)
2-Channel Analog Input Module 10 V (750-476)

Part No.: 750-476.
The analog input module receives signals with the standard-ized values 10 V.
The input signal is electrically isolated and will be transmitted with a resolution
of 16 bits. The internal system supply is used for the power supply of the module.
The input channels of a module have one common reference potential. The 24 V
supply is derived from the power jumper contacts. The shield (screen) is directly
connected to the DIN rail.
Fig. 137. 2-Channel Analog Input Module 10 V
327

Table 50. 2-Channel Analog Input modules 10 V specification
Description
2AI 10 V DC 16 Bit single-ended.
750-476
1264100 mm
Weight
55 g
0.08 mm 2.5 mm ; AWG 28 14,

Technical data
No. of inputs
Voltage supply
75 mA
24 V
Signal voltage
10 V (750-476)
010 V (750-478)
Internal resistance (typ.)
130 kohm + sign bit
Resolution
15 bits
80 ms
Isolation
500V system/supply
Bit width

(option)
Input filter
50 Hz
Noise rejection at sampling frequency
<-100 dB
Noise rejection above sampling frequency
<-40 dB
4-Channel Analog Input Module 0-10 V (750-468)

Part No.: 750-468.
The analog input module receives signals with the standardized values of 0-10 V.
The input signal is electrically isolated and will be transmitted with a resolution
of 12 bits. The internal system supply is used for the power supply of the module.
The input channels of a module have one common ground potential.
The shield (screen) is directly connected to the DIN rail.
Fig. 138. 4-Channel Analog Input Module 010 V
328
Table 51. 4-Channel Analog Input module 010 V specification

Description
4AI 0 10 V DC single-ended
750-468
1264100 mm
Weight
55 g
0.08 mm 2.5 mm ; AWG 28 14,

Technical data
No. of inputs
Voltage supply
60 mA
35 V
Signal voltage
010 V
Internal resistance (typ.)
133 kohm
Resolution
12 bits
4 ms
Isolation
500V system/supply
Bit width

(option)
2-Channel Relay Output Module AC 230 V, DC 30 V (750-513)

Part No.: 750-513.
The connected load is switched via the digital output (relay contacts) from
the control system. The internal system voltage is used to trigger the relay.
The NO contacts are electrically isolated. The switched status of the relay is shown
by a LED. The module is a 2-channel, 4-conductor device and actuators with
a ground (earth) wire may be directly connected to the module.
Fig. 139. 2-Channel Relay Output Module AC 230 V, DC 30 V
329
Table 52. 2-Channel Relay Output module AC 230 V, DC 30 V specification

Description
2DO 230 VAC 2.0 A/Relay 2NO/Potential Free
750-513
1264100 mm
Weight
55 g
0.08 mm 2.5 mm ; AWG 28 14,

Technical data
No. of outputs
2 make contacts
100 mA
Switching voltage
AC 250 V/DC 30 V
Switching power
500 VA/60W
cos jmax = 0.4; L/Rmax = 7ms
Switching current (max.)
AC/DC 2A
Switching current (min.)
10 mA at 5V DC
Switching rate (max.)
30/min (at nominal load)
Pull-in time (max.)
10 ms
Bounce time (typ.)
1.2 ms
Drop out time (max.)
10 ms
Contact material
Silver alloy
Mechanical life (min.)
2107 switching operations
Electrical life (min.)
3105 switching operations (AC 2A/250 V) or

(DC 2A/30 V)
Isolation
1.5 KV eff. (field/system)**

** 2.5 kV Rated surge voltage
Overvoltage category III
Internal bit width
2 bits
End Module (750-600)

Part No.: 750-600.
After the fieldbus node is assembled with the correct buscoupler and selected I/O
modules, the end module is snapped onto the assembly. It completes the internal
data circuit and ensures correct data flow. One is required for each buscoupler.
Fig. 140. End Module
330
WAGO-I/O-System 750 Dimensions
Fig. 141. WAGO I/O modules dimensional drawing
Ethernet Switches
Network Switch 8xRJ45 EDS-G308
Part No.: 10001511.
Fig. 142. Appearance of Network switch EDS-G308
The EDS-G308 switch is equipped with 8 Gigabit Ethernet ports, making it ideal for
applications that demand high bandwidth. The built-in relay warning function alerts
network engineers when power failures or port breaks occur. The EDS-G308 series
can be easily installed with DIN-Rail mounting as well as distribution boxes.
331
Features
High Performance Network Switching Technology:

10/100/1000BaseT(X) (RJ45), auto negotiation speed, F/H duplex mode, and
auto MDI/MDI-X connection, 100/1000 BaseSFP slot;
IEEE 802.3/802.3u/802.3ab/802.3z/802.3x;
Store and Forward switching process type, 1024 address entries.
Industrial Grade Reliablity:

Power failure, port break alarm by relay output;
Redundant dual AC/DC power inputs.
Rugged Design:
Extended operating temperature of -40 to 75C for (-T) models;
IP30, rugged high-strength case;
Redundant dual 12/24/48 VDC, or 18 to 30 VAC at 47 to 63Hz Power inputs.
Specification
Technology:
Standards: IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT, 802.3u for 100BaseT(X), 802.3ab for
1000BaseT, 802.3z for 1000BaseSX/LX/LHX/ZX;
Flow control: EEE 802.3x flow control, back pressure flow control.
Interface:
RJ45 ports: 10/100/1000BaseT(X) auto negotiation speed;
LED indicators: PWR1, PWR2, FAULT, 10/100M/1000M;
DIP switch: Port/power break alarm, broadcast storm protection;
Alarm contact: One relay output with current carrying capacity
of 1A @ 24 VDC.
Power Requirements:
Input voltage: 12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60 VDC), or 18 to 30 VAC (47 to 63 Hz),
redundant dual inputs;
Input current (@ 24 VDC): 0.35A;
Overload Current and Reverse polarity Protection: Present;
Connection: One removable 6-pin terminal block;
Physical Characteristics:
Housing: IP30 protection, metal case;
Dimensions (WHD): 53.6135105 mm (2.115.314.13 in.);
Weight: 850 g;
Installation: DIN-Rail, wall mounting (optional kit).
Environmental Limits:
Operating temperature: -40C to 75C (-40F to 167F) (T models);
Storage temperature: -40C to 85C (-40F to 185F);
Ambient relative humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing).
332
MTBF: 307116 hrs (25C).
Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 143. EDS-G308 dimensional drawing
Network Switch 8xRJ45 IE-SW-BL08T-8TX

Part No.: 10001510.
Fig. 144. Appearance of Network switch IE-SW-BL08T-8TX
Features
10/100BaseT(X) (RJ45 connector), 100BaseFX (multi/single-mode, SC or ST

connector);
Redundant dual 12/24/48 V DC, 18 to 30 V AC power inputs;
IP30 aluminum housing;
Rugged hardware design well suited for hazardous locations (Class I Div. 2
/ATEX) and maritime environments (DNV/GL);
-40 to 75 C operating temperature range.
333
Specification
Technology:
Standards: IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT, 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) and
EEE 802.3x for Flow Control;
Processong Type: Store and Forward;
Flow control: EEE 802.3x flow control, back pressure flow control.
Interface:
RJ45 ports: 10/100BaseT(X) auto negotiation speed, Full-/half-duplex mode,
Auto MDI/MDI-X port;
LED indicators: Power, 10/100M (TP-Port);
DIP switch: Broadcast storm protection enable/disable.
Power Requirements:
Input voltage: 12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60 VDC), 18 to 30 VAC (47 to 63 Hz),
redundant dual inputs;
Input current (@ 24 VDC): 0.13A;
Overload Current protection: 1.1 A
Reverse polarity Protection: Present;
Connection: One removable 4-pin terminal block.
MTBF: 425000 h.
Physical Characteristics:
Housing: IP30 protection, aluminium case;
Dimensions (WHD): 5011570 mm (1.96 x 4.52 x 2.76 in);
Weight: 275 g;
Type of mounting: mounting rail.
Environmental Limits:
Operating temperature: -40C to 75C (-40F to 167F);
Operating temperature: -40C to 85C (-40F to 185F);
Ambient relative humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing).
Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 145. Network switch IE-SW-BL08T-8TX dimensional drawing
334
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector

General
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector (further TFAP) is intended for performing
automatic chart updating and for downloading data directly from Transas Chart server.
TFAP is required to be installed between Transas MFD and communication
equipment on-board of vessel providing firewall and antivirus protection.
TFAP is based on RS7 or I330 computers.
Internal Ethernet port is connected to MFD and External Ethernet port is connected
to communication equipment.
Computers were successfully tested according IEC60945 and type approved by
DNV (certificate A-11024).
For connection TFAP to workstations and communication equipment, see
Connection TFAP to ECDIS MFD WS. Block Diagram enclosed in Annex Q.
RS7 Computer Technical Data

Part No.: 18131116.
The RS7 computer is based on the Intel Celeron P4505 processor and has two
Gigabit Ethernet ports to maintain Internal and External networks connection. The
unit has a dual input power supply which will accept both AC and DC input, ensuring
that they are compatible with all power systems on all vessels. If both inputs are
connected, the units will be powered by AC. If AC power is disconnected, it will
automatically switch over to DC without affecting the operation of the unit. It makes it
possible to use AC as primary power and a 24V battery as secondary power,
eliminating the need for expensive UPS systems when it is approved by Flag and
Class. It is also fan-less with no moving parts inside which will prolong lifetime and
reduce service costs.
Fig. 146. RS7 computer front view
Fig. 147. RS7 computer rear view
335
Table 53. RS7 computer description

OS
Windows XP Pro Eng SP2, 32bit
Storage
2 x 2.5" removable HDD (SATA);

Default confi guration: 1 x 250GB HDD;
Raid: 0,1
CPU
Intel Celeron P4505 (2M Cache, 1.86 GHz);

Front Side Bus (FSB) 800MHz
Installed Memory
1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz SO-DIMM
System Chipset
Intel BD82QM57
Graphics Chipset
Intel Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0
Ethernet LAN 1
Intel 82577LM Gigabit LAN10/100/1000Mbps
Ethernet LAN 2
Realtek RTL8111C Gigabit LAN10/100/1000Mbps
Audio Chipset
Realtek ALC888-GR (+ 2W Amplifier)
BIOS
AMIBIOS
Power Manager
ACPI S3/S4
DVI-I OUT Resolution
From 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
RGB OUT Resolution
From 640 x 480 to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz
Multi-power Supply
115&230VAC - 50/60Hz + 24 VDC

Note: You may connect either AC power or DC
power or both. In case both sources are
connected, power will be sourced from the AC
input. If AC input is lost, there will be a
uninterrupted switch-over to DC input
Power Consumption
Operating AC/DC: TBD W (max)
Dimensions
221 (W) x 90 (H) x 300 (D) mm
Weight
TBD kg (approx)
Operating

Humidity up to 95 %
Storage

Humidity up to 95 %
Input/Output Connectors
336
COM ports
1 x DB9M RS-422/485 non-isolated;

1 x DB9M RS-232 non-isolated;
4 x COM isolated RS422/RS485, ECDIS/NMEA
Compliant (Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connector)
Ethernet
2 x RJ-45
Keyboard and Mouse
2 x PS/2
USB
USB host x 6 Type A
LPT1
1 x Pin Header
DVI OUT
1 x 29p DVI-I
RGB OUT
1 x 15p HD D-SUB
AC Power
1 x Std IEC inlet
DC Power
1 x Phoenix 2pin 1927564 MSTB 2,5/ 2-GF-5,08

THT
Line Out
1 x 3.5mm mini jack (Lime)
Speaker L/F
1 x mini-DIN 5pin
Mic In
1 x 3.5mm mini jack (Pink)
RS7 Computer Dimension
Fig. 148. RS7 computer view dimensions
Fig. 149. RS7 computer front view dimensions
337
Fig. 150. RS7 computer side view dimensions
Fig. 151. RS7 computer top view dimensions
338
I330 Computer Technical Data

Part No.: I330EAC-201-1 (18131109).
Table 54. I330 computer specification
Component
Type
CPU
Intel Atom N270 1.6 GHz
System Chipset
Intel 945 GSE
System Memory
1xSODIMM 1 Gb DDR2 667
Storage
80 GB
LAN
2 x LAN (1 Gbit/sec)
INT. LAN2 Internal Interface
EXT. LAN1 External Interface
Digital I/O
4 x DO/4 x DI
Serial ports
4 x RS422/RS485/ISOLATION
USB
2 x USB 2.0
VGA
1 x VGA
PS/2
1 x PS/2
Power ON/OFF button

(Internet Breaker)
Yes
Reset button
Yes
Power
+24V DC In with 1500VDC Isolation

Resistance (+9~36V DC Input Acceptable)
Power consumption
60 W
Environment considerations
Operating temperature: -10 to 55C.

Operating humidity: 5% to 95% (non condencing)
Dimensions (L x W x H)
296 x 169 x 66 (mm)
The view, connectors layout and dimensions of the TFAP are presented in the figures below:
Fig. 152. Front and back views of I330 computer
339
Fig. 153. I330 computer connectors layout
Fig. 154. I330 computer dimensional drawing
In the event if location of the TFAP in the console, then the label with warning
Attention! Internet Breaker inside must be present at top left on front consoles
cover as shown in the figure below:
Fig. 155. TFAP location
340
Video Splitters and Servers

Video Splitters 3x1, 4x1, 5x1
General
Part No.: VP-3xl, VP-4xl, VP-5xl.
The VP-3xl, VP-4xl, & VP-5xl are high performance distribution amplifiers for
computer graphics video signals with resolutions ranging from VGA through UXGA
and higher. It takes one input, provides correct buffering and isolation, and
distributes the signal to three, four, or five identical outputs.
Kramer Splitter-amplifier can be used when it is required to connect Display placed
up to 40 meters from PC. Solution is VGA Cable 20m - VP-Nxl - VGA Cable 20m.
Fig. 156. Video splitters VP-3xl, VP-4xl, VP-5xl view
Features and Benefits
High Bandwidth - 375MHz (- 3dB);
HDTV Compatible;
EQ (Peaking) Control;
ID Bit Control;
Desktop Size - Compact size. Two units can be rack mounted side-by-side in a
1U rack space with the optional RK-80 adapter.
Technical Data
Inputs: 1 VGA/UXGA input on an HD15F connector;
Outputs: 3 (VP-3xl), 4 (VP-4xl), 5 (VP-5xl) VGA/UXGA on HD15F connectors;
Max. output level: 1.9Vpp;
Bandwidth(- 3dB): 400MHz;
Diff. gain: 0.12%;
Diff. phase: 0.28 Deg;
K-factor: < 0.05%;
S/N ratio: 73.7dB;
Controls: Cable EQ. control;
Coupling: DC;
Power source: 100-240VAC, 50/60Hz, 4.3VA;
Dimensions: 22cm x 18cm x 4.5cm (8.7" x 7" x 1.7"), W, D, H, (half 19", 1U);
341
Weight: 1.2kg (2.64lbs);
Accessories: Power cable;
Options: RK-80 19" Rack-adapter.
VGA Splitter LOOP BACK

General
Part No.: VP-22.
The VP-22 is a high-performance computer graphics video processor, line, and
distribution amplifier for computer graphics video signals with resolutions up to and
exceeding UXGA. It takes one input, provides correct buffering and isolation, and
distributes the signal to one 15-pin HD and one set of five BNC outputs.
Fig. 157. Video splitter VP-22 view
High Bandwidth - 350MHz (-3dB);
BNC Output Selection - RGsB, RGBS, or RGBHV Formats;
H&V Sync Delay Controls;
Grouped Level (Gain) and EQ (Peaking) Controls;
Looping Input;
Selectable Input Signal Termination;
Standard 19 Rack Mount Size - 1U.
Technical Data
342
Input: 1 VGA/XGA looping on a 15-pin HD (F) connector with termination switch;
Output: 1 VGA/XGA on a 15-pin HD (F) connector; analog red, green (with or

without sync), blue signals, 0.7Vpp/75, H (or composite) sync & V sync, TTL
level on BNC connectors;
Video Bandwidth (-3dB):350MHz;
Diff. Gain: 0.05 %;
Diff. Phase: 0.05 deg;
K-Factor: 0.05 % (EQ. Off);
S/N Ratio: 76 dB;
Control: Cable equalization up to +8 dB for each output set, level control up to

+6 dB for each output set, horizontal and vertical delay control, H+V syncs and
sync on green front panel switches;
Dimensions: 19" x 7" x 1U W, D, H, rack mountable;
Weight: 2.4kg (5.3lbs) approx.;
MOXA 351 Video Server (VPORT351)

General
Part No.: 800500.
The VPort 351 is a full motion, 1-channel Industrial Video Encoder that uses the
standard MJPEG/MPEG4 algorithm. The VPort 351 is intended for digitizing of
analog video and distribution these digital images over an IP.
Note: VPortSDKPLUS_ActiveX.exe - additional driver for video indication in
Navi-Conning 4000 (MNSx/Drivers folder). Driver and settings instructions
are available on MNS discs starting from MNS27.
Fig. 158. VPORT351 view
Technical Data
Work with NTSC/PAL analog video cameras;
Supports MPEG4 (ISO/IEC 14496-2)/MJPEG (Pending) video compression

technology;
1 BNC video input with 75-ohm resistance;
1 BNS video output, loop-through BNC connector;
1 audio input and 1 audio output for 2-way voice communication;
Full D1, 4CIF, VGA, CIF, and QVGA video resolution supported;
Video stream up to 30 frames/sec;
Two 12/24 VDC and 24 VAC power inputs with redundancy;
Operates reliably in 0 to 60C critical environments;
Dimensions: 52,98 x 135 x 105 mm (2,09 x 5,31 x 4,13 in);
Weight: 960 g;
IP rating: IP30.
Fig. 159. VPORT351 dimensions
343
MOXA 354 Video Server (VPORT354)

General
Part No.: 18021502
The VPort 354 is a full motion, 4-channel Industrial Video Encoder that uses the
standard MJPEG/MPEG4 algorithm. The VPort 354 is intended for digitizing of
analog video and distribution these digital images over an IP. To prevent video loss
when the network is down, the VPort 354 can automatically record video on an SD
card, and once the network is back up, the recorded video can be downloaded via
FTP access.
Fig. 160. VPORT354 view
Technical Data
Work with NTSC/PAL analog video cameras;
Supports MPEG4 (ISO/IEC 14496-2)/MJPEG (Pending) video compression

technology;
4 BNC video input with 75-ohm resistance;
Video output via Ethernet port;
1 audio input and 1 audio output for 2-way voice communication;
4CIF, 2CIF, CIF and QCIF video resolution supported;
Video stream up to 30 frames / sec;
Two 12/24 VDC and 24 VAC power inputs with redundancy;
Operates reliably in 0 to 60C critical environments;
Dimensions: 80,2 x 135 x 105 mm (3,16 x 5,31 x 4,13 in);
Weight: 1200 g;
IP rating: IP30.
Fig. 161. VPORT354 dimensions
344
Serial Splitters, Converters and Interfaces

UPC 3002 Serial Line Splitter
General
Part No.: 18071520.
UPC3002-SLS is a serial line splitter with two separate inputs and six outputs. Dual
power input with auto switch. The two inputs A and B are separated with A as the
primary input. If there is data on both A and B inputs, input A is used. Input B is used
only if input A is idle. The power supply and both inputs are galvanic isolated from
the outputs.
Fig. 162. UPC-3002 splitter view
Technical Data
Power supply main: 15-30Vdc 2W;
Power supply sec: 15-30Vdc 2W;
Input A, B: 1-20V, 0,5mA min, speed 1Mbps;
Outputs 1-6: RS-422, 50mA max;
Short Circuit Protected;
Module-box with DIN-rail mounting;
Dimensions in mm: L-130 x H-50 x W-80.
345
Fig. 163. UPC-3002 splitter dimensions
UPC 3005 Serial Line Splitter

General
Part No.: 18071521.
UPC3005-SLS is a serial line splitter with eight outputs: 5 of RS-422 and 3 of RS232. The power supply and input are galvanic isolated from the outputs.
Fig. 164. UPC-3005 splitter view
Technical Data
346
Input A 1-20V, 0,5mA min, speed 1Mbps;
Outputs: 5 off RS-422, 50mA max, 3 off RS-232;
All outputs are Short Circuit Protected;
Dimensions in mm: L-130 x H-50 x W-80.
Fig. 165. UPC-3005 splitter dimensions
UPC-5000P Serial Line Splitter

General
Part No.: 18071522.
UPC 5000P is a serial line splitter with two separate inputs and fifteen outputs. Dual
power input with auto switch. The two inputs A and B are separated with A as the
primary input. If there is data on both A and B inputs, input A is used. Input B is
used only if input A is idle. The power supply and both signal inputs are galvanic
isolated from the outputs.
Fig. 166. UPC-5000P splitter view
Technical Data
347
Input A: 1-20V, 0,5mA min, max. 2Mbps;
Input B: 1-20V, 0,5mA min, max. 2Mbps;
Outputs: 10 off RS-422, 50mA max, 5 off RS-232;
For Current Loop input. 100 ohm parallel;
All outputs are Short Circuit Protected;
Dimensions in mm: L-128 x H-50 x W-128;
Fig. 167. UPC-5000P splitter dimensions
NMEA Buffer NM-251A

General
Part No.: 18071500.
The NM-251A is a two channel NMEA-0183 input / four or five channels NMEA-0183
output multiplier. It enables data distribution from two NM-0183 sources (primary
and secondary with priority encoding) to all NMEA-0183 instruments through four or
five talker ports and PC connection through RS-232. Data from PCs charting
system can be delivered back to the autopilot from the same RS-232 port which acts
bidirectional (talker and listener).
Fig. 168. NMEA Buffer NM-251 view
348
Fig. 169. NMEA Buffer NM-251 connection drawing
Technical Data
Table 55. NMEA Buffer NM-251A specification
Supply Voltage
9 to 35 VDC
Power Supply
Protection
PTC Resetable Fuse;

Vmax: 60V, Imax: 40A, Ihold: 0,25A (23C);
Itrip:0,5A (23C), Max time to trip (23C): 2,2sec for 1,25A;
50mA in idle state/ 150mA in full output mode
Current
Consumption
Inputs
2 x NMEA-0183, optically isolated;

Common Mode Rejection: 10kV/usec, Isolation: 480 Vrms
Input Resistance
1,5 KOhm
Outputs
4 x buffered RS-422/TTL (general purpose);

1 x RS-232;
1 x RS-422 signal conversion from RS-232 RXD channel or as fifth output
Output protection
Output protection Buffered for all RS-422 outputs
Speed for NMEA

inputs
4.800/8/N/1 when input priority encoding mode is selected;

Same as listeners connected to output ports when Ina to Out1/2 and Inb to
Out3/4 mode is selected
Speed for NMEA

outputs
4.800/8/N/1 when input priority encoding mode is selected;

Same as listeners connected to output ports when Ina to Out 1/2 and Inb to Out
3/4 mode is selected;
4.800/8/N/1 for RS-232 or baud rate free user selectable
Indicators
Most Significant Input (Ina);

Less Significant Input (Inb);
Data transmission from output ports 1 and 2 (Out 1/2 LED);
Data transmission from output ports 3 and 4 (Out 3/4 LED);
Data reception from RS-232 interface or output 5 port (Out 5 LED)
Dimensions
Width = 110mm/134,80 mm;

Depth = 82 mm;
Housing
Height = 43 mm
Styrene
349
S2N Gyro Converter

General
Part No.: 9028C.
The Synchro/Stepper NMEA converter S2N is intended to be used for interfacing
gyros to AIS, VDR, S-VDR, ECDIS etc as well as acting as a gyro repeater. It is
compliant not only with IEC 60945 and IEC 61162-1/-2 but also with all relevant IMO
gyro standards, including the need for 40 Hz update rate and 20 /second tracking
rate as required by IMO for High Speed Craft.
Fig. 170. S2N Gyro converter standard version view
Mechanical Dimensions, Standard Version

The standard version has two mounting flanges that allows the unit to be mounted in
a panel from front or rear or, if the flanges are reversed, on a bulkhead. Cable intake
glands are located under the box.
Fig. 171. . S2N Gyro converter standard version dimensions
350
Box (without mounting flanges and cable glands) 140 x 82 x 36 mm, flanges
adds 15 mm on each side and can be mounted for panel mount (shown) or for
bulkhead mount.
Front panel mounting in 145 x 82 mm panel opening.
Mounting holes dia 6 mm (suggested bolt dia 5 mm), spaced 158 x 52 mm

(w x h), centered and aligned with front panel.
Mechanical Dimensions, Trunnion Mounting Kit

As an accessory for deckhead mount or for mounting on a flat surface, a trunnion
mounting kit can be supplied.
The kit is supplied with an extra rear plate with mounting holes for cable glands as
well as a set of three extra blind glands for non-used holes. This makes it possible to
bring cables out from the rear of the unit.
Fig. 172. S2N Gyro converter with trunnion mounting kit
Units can also be delivered with both flange and trunnion mounting options. In these
cases, the blind glands are mounted on the lower surface of the box and the cable
glands in the rear panel, which however is mounted inside out to save space during
shipping. Please refer to drawing below for bracket mounting details.
Fig. 173. . S2N Gyro converter bracket mounting dimensions
351
Technical Characteristics
Table 56. S2N Gyro converter specification
Dimensions
140 x 82 x 40 mm, not including mounting flanges
Material
Stainless steel, mounting flanges black-anodized aluminum. Compass

safe distance 0.4 m
Accuracy
Better than 0.1
Update rate
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 or 40 Hz
Message
HDT or HDM. ROT conversion at 1 Hz settable
Synchro input
R1/R2 ref input, up to 120 V S1/S2/S3, any voltage up to nominal

115/90 V, any frequency up to 2 kHz, including DC
Stepper input
DC or rectified AC, voltage levels 5 120 V
Gear ratio
1: 360, 180, 90, 45, 36 (also 1: 1 in synchro mode)
Output
NMEA/IEC 61162-1/-2 output, using RS485-compliant driver
Alignment
Using + and - keys or via NMEA input
Set-up
Push-buttons/display or using NMEA input
Display
5 7-segment LED displays, dimmable
Inputs
Fully isolated from DC power and output
Connectors
Spring-loaded terminal blocks
Power
18 - 36 V DC, less than 1 W, typically 60 mA
Baboon 4RS 200PNM7 NMEA RS422

General
Part No.: BAB-4RS.
Baboon4 is a speed converter which converts speed pulses to NMEA 0183 speed
data. It has an input with opto isolation for speed pulses and a RS422 NMEA output.
Fig. 174. Baboon 4RS connection drawing
Technical Data
Table 57. Baboon 4RS specification
Power supply
352
10 - 33 VDC
Current consumption
< 100 mA
Temp. range
-20C - 70C
Case
150 x 64 x 34 mm Metal box
Software
Bab41 Ver 4.0 Default
Pcb
HT-005-5
Input signal
200 Pulses/n.m. Opto, 5-24V pulses
Output signal
IIVHW RS422, speed in knots
Rabbit6 RS232C Interface

General
Part No.: RAB6.
Rabbit 6 is an interface that converts the logical levels of NMEA 0183 to RS232C
and vice versa. The computer side has a galvanic isolated dual bi-directional
RS232C port. The NMEA side consists of two optocoupled inputs and two galvanic
isolated RS422 outputs. Rabbit 6 makes it possible for a computer based
chartprogram with high information streams, as GPS, ARPA and autopilot, to use
two com ports on the computer.
Fig. 175. Rabbit6 connection drawing
Technical Data
Table 58. Rabbit6 specification
Power supply
10 - 32 VDC 10%
Current consumption
< 150 mA
Temp. range
-20C - 70C
Case
120 x 100 x 35 mm Metal box
Computer side
Input/Output RS232C x 2 Galvanic isolated
NMEA side
Input: NMEA x 2 Optocouppler;

Output: RS422 x 2 Galvanic isolated
Industrial Gigabit Ethernet to Fiber Converter IMC-101G

Introduction
The IMC-101G industrial Gigabit media converters are designed to provide reliable
and stable 10/100/1000BaseT(X) to 1000BaseSX/LX/LHX/ZX media conversion in
harsh industrial environments. The IMC-101G converter comes with a relay output
warning alarm to help prevent damage and loss.
Fig. 176. Appearance of IMC-101G-T converter
353
10/100/1000BaseT(X) and 1000BaseSX/LX/LHX/ZX supported;
Link Fault Pass-Through (LFP) (media converters should work as a pair);
Power failure, port break alarm by relay output;
Redundant power input;
-40 to 75C operating temperature range;
Designed for hazardous locations
Specification
Technology
Standards:
IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT;
IEEE 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX;
IEEE 802.3ab for 1000BaseT(X);
IEEE 802.3z for 1000BaseSX/LX/LHX/ZX.
Interface
RJ45 ports: 10/100/1000BaseT(X);
Fiber Ports: 1000BaseSFP slot;
LED Indicators: PWR1, PWR2, FAULT, 10/100M (TP port), 1000M (TP and
Fiber port);
DIP Switches: Port break alarm mask, Link Fault Pass-Through, SFP
Auto/Force;
Alarm contact: One relay output with current carrying capacity of 1A @ 24 VDC.
Optical Fiber
Multi-mode Transmission Distance:
1000BaseSX:
0 to 500 m, 850 nm (50/125 m, 400 MHz*km);
0 to 275 m, 850 nm (62.5/125 m, 200 MHz*km).
1000BaseLX:
0 to 1100 m, 1310 nm (50/125 m, 800 MHz*km);
0 to 550 m, 1310 nm (62.5/125 m, 500 MHz*km).
Single-mode Transmission Distance:
1000BaseLX: 0 to 10 km, 1310 nm (9/125 m, 3.5 PS/(nm*km));
1000BaseLHX: 0 to 40 km, 1310 nm (9/125 m, 3.5 PS/(nm*km));
1000BaseZX: 0 to 80 km, 1550 nm (9/125 m, 19 PS/(nm*km)).
Physical Characteristics
354
Housing: Metal, IP30 protection;
Dimensions: 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm (2.11 x 5.31 x 4.13 in);
Weight: 630 g;
Installation: DIN-Rail mounting, wall mounting (with optional kit).
Environmental Limits
Operating Temperature: -40 to 75C (-40 to 167F);
Storage Temperature: -40 to 85C (-40 to 185F);
Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing).
Power Requirements
Input Voltage: 24 VDC (12 to 45 VDC), redundant inputs;
Input Current: 110 mA @ 24 VDC;
Connection: Removable terminal block;
Overload Current Protection: 2.5 A;
Reverse Polarity Protection: Present.
MTBF (mean time between failures)
Time: 500,540 hrs;
Database: Telcordia (Bellcore), GB.
Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 177. IMC-101G-T converter dimensional drawing
355
Autopilots
AUTOPILOTS
Autopilot Yokogawa PT5000A
General
The PT500A autopilot confirms to the technical requirements for the performance standard
determined by IMO Resolution A342 and also meets type approval issued by JG.
Features
Steering stand design is suitable for standing/sitting position because of basing

ergonomic principles (Height: 1200 mm);
A separate unit is used for each function, making for excellent functional
expandability and operability. Though, they can thus be easily incorporated
in a panel and cockpit type bridge consol, etc. (Outline of the unit: about 80%
compare with current model);
In addition to independence of follow-up circuit, also the control system of

the automatic and hand steering units are independent of each other;
The course steer has a dial (25 degree/rotation), and set course indicator uses
a readily visible red LED. The function keys use easy-to-understand pictorial
characters in other to minimize the possibility of a miss operation;
As there are two heading input circuit, by inputting a heading signal from
magnetic compass, etc. You can back-up the automatic steering signal from
the gyro compass. (Input signal: NMEA0183);
We can freely generate a heading signal from a heading sensor, such as a gyro
compass or magnetic compass, as well as a set course signal from GPS or INS
etc. according to the particular format;
As the course altering control of automatic steering, there are 3 mode controls:
PD control;
Rate constant control;
Fixed radius course altering control.
356
Autopilots
System Block Diagram
Fig. 178. PT500A autopilot system block-diagram
Engineering Specification
Power:
Main Power: 220/380/440 V AC 20%, 5060 Hz 5%;
Power consumption: If differs for every steerind gear;
Power annunciator: 24 V DC.
Input signal:
Speed signal: PT500A-> foradaptive control:
Pulse signal: 200 pulses/nm;
Output circuit on the log signal: Open collector;
Impressed voltage: 5 V DC;
Current value: 2 mA (at ON).
357
Autopilots
Gyrocompass heading signal:

Serial signal: IEC 61162-1 (Input signal format is able to generate by
auto steering unit);
Transmission: Asynchronous serial data signal;
Header character: 5 ASCII letter;
Position of heading data: Set data based on the location of compass.
Steering repeater compass signal:
Serial signal: IEC61162-1 HE_HDT format;
Transmission: Asynchronous serial data signal.
External heading signal (for back-up at auto steering):
Serial signal: IEC61162-1 (Input signal format is able to generate by auto
steering unit);
Device to be connected: GPS, Magnetic compass (In inputting external
heading device, it is possible detect heading monitor alarm by its signal);
External set course signal (for route tracking control):
Serial signal: IEC61162-1;

Output signal:
Serial signal:
Device to be connected: INS (ECIDS);
Analog rudder angle signal:
Device to be connected: Course recorder;
Signal level: 0 V to 5 V DC.
Analog course deviation signal. Signal level: 0 V to 5 V DC;
Buzzer stop contact signal. Contact signal: when buzzer stopped, contact
close;
No-voltage alarm contact signal. Contact signal: when power is No-voltage,
contact close. Contact rating: 125 V AC, 1 A;
System failure alarm contact signal. Contact signal: when the system is
failure, contact is close. Contact rating: 125 V AC, 1 A.
Performance Specification:
Accuracy of course keeping: 1 deg or less than 1 deg (sea state: Calm,
Wave height: 0 m to 0.1 m);
Overshoot at the automatic course altering: 2 deg (at course altering for 20
deg);
Withstanding voltage: 1500 V AC for 1 min (excluding electronic circuit);
Insulation resistance: at last 10 using a 500 V mugger (excluding electronic
circuit);
Current value at starting: at last 5 A (at inputting 100 V AC).
Environmental Conditions (normal use):

Power fluctuation;
Voltage: 10%;
Frequency: 5%;
Ships battery: 20 V to 30 V DC;
358
Autopilots
Temperature: 0 C to 55 C;
Humidity: 0% to 95%;
Vibration: 2.0 Hz to 13.2 Hz amplitude 2 mm 13.2 to 100.0 Hz acceleration
0.7 G;
Shock: 6 direction, 20 G, 10 ms;
Inclination: at last 22.5 deg;
Swaying: at last 22.5 deg/10 s;
Withstanding water: IP 55 (front cover is water tight).
Autopilot Raytheon NP 2025

General
NautoPilot 2025 is Raytheon professional autopilot series for all commercial ships of 100 m
length and above. It is characterized by the most advanced steering algorithms that
ensure accurate steering with fewest rudder actions to keep the ship on a preset heading.
Fig. 179. NP 2025 dimensions
Features
NautoPilot 2025 offers excellent steering properties and can easily be adjusted to all
ship types, even to High Speed Craft (HSC). The Quick Tune function allows for the
individual definition of 6 parameter sets to quickly adapt to the current environmental
or ship condition. Turns are radius or rate-of-turn controlled. The adaptive autopilot
can be used in Precision or Economy mode depending on the sea area. In Economy
mode, the number of rudder actions are noticeably reduced with a positive effect on
ships fuel consumption. The NautoPilot 2025 series can be seamlessly integrated
into a navigational system. Various in- and output interfaces come standard. In
combination with ECDIS, the autopilot becomes an approved track control system.
Algorithms and Adaptivity

In general, an autopilot is a controller that keeps a ship on a preset heading. The
quality of this process is determined by the hardware and the software algorithms
that control it.
359
Autopilots
Both, hardware and software algorithms determine the accuracy of the heading
control system. The number of rudder actions and the rudder angle used to keep
the ship on preset heading are reduced to a minimum with Raytheon.
Adaptivity means an automatic adaptation of the autopilot to the current sea-state
and weather. Frequent Rudder actions that will not compensate the heading
deviation due to the environmental conditions will be eliminated automatically by
the autopilot. Therefore, the autopilot adapts continuously to the current sea-state
and weather without a manual change of autopilot parameters.
Both, steering algorithms and adaptivity are the basis for accuracy, reduce fuel
consumption and wear and tear on the steering gear.
The operator unit provides clear information about heading, set course, alarms and
warnings. A new course is set by dialing and pushing a rotary knob.
Fig. 180. NP2025 autopilot system block-diagram
Technical Data
Supply Voltage 24 V DC (18-36 V DC);
Power Consumption Approx. 25 W;
Signal Inputs:
Gyro compass/satellite compass course bus or NMEA telegrams HEHDT,
GPHDT Synchro (50/20 V) 6 steps per degree;
Magnetic compass/Fluxgate:
NMEA telegrams HCHDT, IIHDM;
With magnetic compass sonde 108-010.
Speed log NMEA sentences VTG, VHW 200 pulses/nm;
ECDIS (for track control) according to IEC 62065, NMEA telegrams APB,
XTE Remote control with NMEA telegrams HSC, HTR, HRA.
Signal Outputs:
Outputs to steering gear 2 switching outputs (110 V DC 0.5 A;
24 V DC 2.0 A) 2 analog outputs (10 V DC max. 5 mA);
360
Autopilots
Status/alarm outputs:
Off-heading;
Heading monitor;
System failure;
Power failure;
Track control active;
Magnetic compass selected;
Tiller active;
Bi-directional central alarm reset (optional);
Override ON;
Back-up navigator alarm (in track control).
In accordance with:
ISO/IEC 11674;
NMEA according to EN/IEC 61162-1;
EN/IEC 60945;
ISO 16329;
A.342(IX), A.694(17), MSC.64(67) Annex 3, A.822(19).
Type of enclosure acc. to IEC/EN 60529:

Operator Unit: IP 23;
Control Unit: IP 22.
Permissible ambient temperature:

Operation: -15C to +55C;
Storage: -25C to +70C.
Autopilot EMRI SEM200

Autopilot System Parts
AEU511: Autopilot Electronic Unit;
MIP31-100: Autopilot Control Panel. 1 or 2 panels installed;
CABLES: MIP31 to AEU511 connections. Factory supplied one each control

panel;
Optional SFF10: Steering Failure Alarm Rudder Order Freeze Unit

(for some steering systems where the rudder freeze function is not possible);
Autopilot SW version: SEM200 Version Aeu2_3;
Panel SW version: MIP2 Version Mip2.
Autopilot control system overview shown on the picture below:
361
Autopilots
Fig. 181. Autopilot control system
Autopilot Interface Parts
Gyro:
One or two gyros. Two heading sources necessary to provide independent
course monitoring (compass compare alarm);
Serial NMEA XXHDT, XXTHS sentences with update rate 10 times per
sec, RS422/NMEA.
Speed Log:
One or two sources (main speed source & back-up speed source);
Either contact signal, 200 pulses/nm. Galvanically isolated contact
(contact loading 5 mA, 15 V DC);
Or serial NMEA XXVBW, XXVHW, RS422/NMEA.
24 V DC supply:
Main supply: 24 V DC;
Alarm system supply: 24 V DC.
Navigation Computer: Serial interface, NMEA sentences, RS422/NMEA;
Alarms:
Compass comparison alarm, NMEA;
Power supply failure alarm, dry contact;
Autopilot failure alarm, including hardware supervision detected failures and
software detected failures including Off course alarm, NMEA;
Autopilot alive contact for rudder freeze in case of fail, dry contact
(option ordered separately);
All opening contacts in case of alarm. Max. 50 mA/50 V DC.
362
Rudder order: 0.25 V/deg neg./stbd (parameter set-up). Max. 10 V DC,

5 mA max. load.
Autopilots
Serial Interface
The AEU has four bi-directional serial channels: A, B, C and D and two input
channels: F and G.
Normal set up:
Two RS422 serial channels A and B. These to be used for interface to: Serial
Log, Gyro, Navigation computer. If installed, the Navigation computer must be
connected to channel A. VDR/Alarm system NMEA sentences are transmitted
on channel B;
Two RS422 serial channels C and D. Channel C is used as interface to MIP

panels, if there are two panels installed, D is also used as panel serial interface
channel, else it is used for as Log or Gyro input;
Two RS422 as extra serial inputs channel F and G for Log or Gyro signals.
System Power Supply

Mains supply: 24 V DC priority supply, +30%/-25%, switchboard fuse min. 6 A.
Panels are supplied through the AEU unit.
Power supply requirements:
AEU consumption: max. 1 A;
Panel consumption: max. 1.2 A (at lamp test);
Mains fuse placed in AEU left terminal strip, TS1. Fuse: 5 A.
Alarm supply: 24 V DC priority supply, +30%/-25%, switchboard fuse min. 2 A:
Alarm system consumption: max. 100 mA (Fuse in AEU 1 A);
Fuse 1 A, mounted on left side of AMC board in AEU box.
AEU Alarms via Dry Contact

Alarm Systems are built in both in the AEU and in the MIP panels.
The alarm supervision covers:
Detection of power supply failures on all internal power supplies;
Detection of other hardware failures by a watch-dog circuit;
List of software detected malfunctions.
Alarms must be acknowledged to silence the buzzer. This can be done, either from
the MIP-panel front or by an external, galvanic free closing contact. The Autopilot
can also send a galvanic free contact to an external alarm system.
Autopilot power supply failure alarm displayed in ECDIS via dry contact 3739 of
X4 terminal and dry contact 36 of J11 terminal.
Watch dog alarm (software execution stopped or low voltage on CPU supply)
displayed in ECDIS via dry contact 36 of J11 terminal.
For connection these contact to DI of RS6B (RS6) computer, see Autopilot EMRI
SEM200. Connection Diagram presented in ANNEX Q.
363
Autopilots
Steering Failure Alarm Rudder Order Freeze Unit SFF10

General
The SFF10 unit is designed to freeze a rudder order signal to the actual rudder
angle in case of an autopilot failure.
As long as the autopilot processor unit is working, this will be taken care of by
the autopilot itself.
If the autopilot is NOT ALIVE, then the rudder freeze function is normally implemented
by changing to NFU steering mode as a simple response to an autopilot NOT ALIVE
contact signal. This is a simple feature included in most normal designed steering
control systems.
The SFF10 Unit is designed to complete the missing functionality in some steering
systems where this automatic change over to NFU is not possible. These missing
features then calls for arrangement of an extra observation of the actual rudder
position, and use of this information in a separate freezing of the rudder order.
The AEU shall be of a type with ALIVE Relay built in.
Inputs to SFF10 Unit
24 V DC supply from ships switch board;
Alive contact from the autopilot (open contact = NOT ALIVE);
Rudder order signal from the autopilot;
Mode information from the autopilot or directly from the mode control system;
Actual rudder angle from a rudder feedback unit;
24 V DC from the autopilot to supply isolation amplifiers for rudder order signals.
Outputs from SFF10 Unit
Rudder orders to the independent steering gear systems;
SFF10 OK contact to the bridge alarm system: Power OK & SFF10 Function
OK;
Alarm contact to the bridge alarm system: Steering failure in autopilot mode;
Relay contact (both with NC and NO states) presenting the freeze state to
bridge alarm system;
Serial NMEA string to VDR holding SFF10 status information.
The Rudder Freeze Function

The SFF10 supplies a rudder feedback potentiometer with 10 V DC and the built in
processor module MPF11 tracks the actual rudder angle feedback.
In case of an autopilot failure (autopilot NOT ALIVE) the MPF11 freezes the actual
rudder angle, the rudder order from the autopilot is now replaced by this frozen
actual value.
364
Autopilots
Fig. 182. SFF10 rudder freeze function
The freeze function is only carried out if the autopilot is in control. If the autopilot is
NOT ALIVE when not being in control, then the SFF10 output just follows the failing
output from the autopilot.
The SFF10 unit will always fall back to transmitting the autopilot rudder order signal
in case of a power supply failure. The power supply to the SFF10 must be monitored
by the bridge Navigation Alarm system.
For more detailed information, see USER MANUAL FOR SFF10 supplied with SFF10.
Autopilot NAVIS AP3000

AP3000 structure depends on the ordered AP3000 configuration for the single/linked
or independent rudders.
For detailed information see NAVIS AP3000 INSTALLATION GUIDE and
NAVIS AP3000 HEADING CONTROL SYSTEM DRAWINGS LIST supplied as a part
Autopilot Basic Elements
Control Panel 1 APH3000 Control Panel, 1 pcs is supplied with the system by
default (up to five operator units can be supplied optionally in case of network
configuration);
Control Unit CU-M Main autopilot control unit. Contains Central Control
Module, APM3000 PCB inside. All navigational sensors and other AP modules
connected to the Central Control Module APM3000;
Control Unit CU-MPP/MRR is needed for connection to the Steering System or

to the Steering Gear. Second Control Unit CU-MPP/MRR can be supplied
optionally in case of the ship configuration with independent rudders or two ZDrives;
Mode Selector (SMS-B Type 1 or 2) is supplied optionally with AP3000 Heading

Control System. Selector has two or three positions (AUTO OFF AUTO ON
or NFU FFU AUTO) depending on availability of the FFU control mode
in AP3000. Customized or existed steering mode selector on the Navigational
Bridge may be used instead of SMS-B Type 1 or 2 by customer request.
Autopilot Heading Control System overview shown on the picture below:
365
Autopilots
Fig. 183. NAVIS AP3000 autopilot heading control system. Structure diagram
Operating and Storage Conditions

Operating Conditions
Temperature: -15+55C;
Humidity:
Up to 95% at 25C;
Up to 75% at 45C.
Storage Conditions
Temperature: -30+70C;
Humidity:
Up to 98% at 25C;
Up to 75% at 45C.
Other parameters comply with IEC60945 Ed. 4 standard.
366
CHAPTER 4
Interface Capabilities
General
GENERAL
In order to operate adequately in conjunction with navigational sensors, the MFD
should receive certain data from them. This data is required to be transmitted in
accordance with Standard IEC 61162-1 Maritime navigation and radio
communication equipment and systems. Digital interfaces. Part 1: Single talker and
multiple listeners or in NMEA-0183 format. In addition, there is also a range of
navigation equipment using specific data exchange protocols. MFD allows operation
with several types of such equipment.
Note: Non-compliance of the sentence Talker ID with the specified standards does
not affect its processing in the MFD. This has been done for ensuring the MFD
compatibility with devices operating according to earlier versions of standards.
ATTENTION!
It is necessary to verify that GPS transmits geographical coordinates referred
to WGS-84 Datum. If it does not, use GPS settings to select WGS-84.
Primary/Secondary Not WGS 84 alarm status does not change when invalid DTM
sentence is received.
In the processing of all NMEA sentences by the MFD, the maximum admissible
reception interval between them, whereby no alarm is triggered off, is accepted to be
equal to 5 seconds. The exceptions are provided by DTM (35 seconds).
The MFD has provision for a serial interface for a SDME according
to IEC 61162-1. An interface for pulsed/contact signals may also be provided.
When used jointly with the NR, MFDs should meet the following requirements:
Gyro equipment or equivalent shall update rate that is adequate for the ships
rate of turn;
The connected own ship speed sensors (SDME) should comply with
the IMO requirements;
The connected own ship position sensors (EPFS) should be approved in

accordance with requirements of the IMO Resolution MSC.112(73);
The connected own ship speed sensors (SDME) should comply with
the IMO Resolution MSC.96(72);
The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm

to IMO Resolution MSC.96(72);
The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).
Chapter 4. Interface Capabilities
369
Format of Data Exchange Used in Accordance with IEC61162-1 Standard
FORMAT OF DATA EXCHANGE USED IN ACCORDANCE

WITH IEC61162-1 STANDARD
Input
Summary Table
The summary table shows the principles of operation with each navigation sensor.
Table 59. Summary Table of Data Exchange Messages
370
Sensor
Data type transmitted

by sensor
Sentences
carrying this data
MFD channel which

the sensor
is connected to
GPS (GLONASS,
DECCA, LORAN)
Position
(Lat. and Lon.)
GGA
GLL
RMC
POS 1
(POS 2)
COG and SOG
RMC
VTG
POS 1
(POS 2)
Satellite information
GGA
POS 1
(POS 2)
Datum Reference
DTM
POS 1
(POS 2)
GPS RAIM Indicator
GBS
POS 1
(POS 2)
UTC time
ZDA
UTC
UTC date
ZDA
UTC
SOUNDER
Depth under the

sounder transducer
DBT
DPT
SOUNDER 1
(SOUNDER 2...)
COMPASS
Heading
HDT
VHW
THS
GYRO 1 (GYRO 2)
MAGNETIC
COMPASS
Heading
HDG
MAGN 1 (MAGN 2)
RATE OF TURN
INDICATOR
Direction and rate-ofturn
ROT
ROT
SPEED LOG
Speed through
the water
VHW
VBW
LOG 1 (LOG 2)
DUAL AXIS LOG
Dual Axis Speed
VBW
DLOG 1 (DLOG 2)
AIS
AIS targets information
AIQ, ALR
AIQ, SSD
AIQ, TXT
AIQ, VSD
ABK
ABM
ALR
BBM
SSD
TXT
VDM
VDO
VSD
For SAAB R4 also
proprietary format
used
AIS
DIGITAL
ANEMOMETER
Wind direction and

speed
MWD
MWV
VWR
WIND
DIGITAL THERMOMETER
Water temperature
MTW
TEMP
YEOMAN
DIGITIZER
WPT position
(Lat. and Lon.)
WPL
YEOMAN 1
(YEOMAN 2)
ALARM STATION
Alarm state and

acknowledgement
ALR
ACK
ALARM STATION 1
(ALARM STATION 2)
Sensor
Data type transmitted

by sensor
Sentences
carrying this data
MFD channel which

the sensor
is connected to
NMEA NAVTEX
NAVTEX Messages
CRQ
NRX
NRM
NAVTEX
ASCII NAVTEX
NAVTEX Messages
ASCII format
ASCIINAVTEX
RDF Rhotheta
RT202
Direction finder value
ASCII format
RHOTHETA
SEETRAC
Seetrac targets
information
Proprietary format
SEETRAC
Format of Input Data

This paragraph describes format of all the sentences of IEC 61162-1 or/and
NMEA 0183 standards, received from different types of navigational sensors.
Format of the sentences consists of the following parts.
$--AAA,x.x,a,c---c,*hh <CR><LF>.
N
Field
Description
Start of sentence
--
Talker ID
AAA
Mnemonic code of data type identification
Data field delimiter
x.x,a,c---c...
Data
*hh
Checksum field
<CR><LF>
End of sentence
ACK Acknowledge Alarm

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--ACK, xxx1*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
xxx
Local alarm identifier
Alarm number
Comments
ALR Set Alarm State

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss1,xxx2,A3,A4,c--c5*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
hhmmss.ss
Time of alarm
condition change
Hours, minutes, seconds (UTC)
xxx
Alarm number
Alarm condition
(A = threshold exceeded,
V = not exceeded)
Alarms acknowledge
state
A = acknowledged,
V = unacknowledged
c--c
Alarms description text
Comments
371
DBT Depth Below Transducer

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--DBT, x.x1, f2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, F6*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Depth
Depth value
Measurement unit
f feet
x.x
Depth
Depth value
Measurement unit
M metres
x.x
Depth
Depth value
Measurement unit
F fathoms
Comments
DPT (Depth) Depth

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000 IMO Resolution A.224 (VII).
Contains values of depth measured from the sounder vibrator and the vibrator
position correction.
$--DPT, x.x1, x.x2, x.x3*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
x.x
Depth (in meters)
Value
Comments
x.x
Correction (in meters)
Not processed
x.x
Maximum range scale

in use
Not processed
DTM Datum Reference

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains information on the reference ellipsoid which the received coordinates are
referred to.
$--DTM, ccc1, a2, x.x3, a4, x.x5, a6, x.x7, ccc8*hh<CR><LF>.
372
Field
Name
Value
Comments
ccc
Local datum
W72 WGS 72
W84 WGS 84
IHO IHO terminology
reference ellipsoid
999 user determined
reference ellipsoid
S85 SGS85
P90 PE90
W84 value is
processed only
Local datum subdivision code
x.x
Lat. offset, min
Hemisphere
x.x
Lon. offset, min
Hemisphere
x.x
Altitude offset, m
ccc
Reference datum
Not processed
Not processed
N North
S South
Not processed
E East
W West
Not processed
W84 WGS84
W72 WGS72
S85 SGS85
P90 PE90
Not processed
Not processed
Not processed
GBS GPS Satellite Fault Detection

Standard: NMEA 0183 v.3.00, 2000.
This message is used to support Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM).
Given that a GNSS receiver is tracking enough satellites to perform integrity checks
of the positioning quality of the position solution a message is needed to report
the output of this process to other systems to advice the system user.
$--GBS,hhmmss.ss,x.x,x.x,x.x,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x* hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
hhmmss.ss
UTC time of the GGA

or GNS fix associated
with this sentence
Hours, minutes, seconds
Comments
x.x
Expected error in
latitude
Meters due to bias,

with noise = 0
x.x
Expected error in longitude
Metres due to bias,

with noise = 0
x.x
Expected error in
altitude
Metres due to bias,

with noise = 0
Xx
ID number of most
likely failed satellite
Not processed
x.x
Probability of missed
detection for most
likely failed satellite
Not processed
x.x
Estimate of bias on
most likely failed
satellite
x.x
Standard deviation of
bias estimate
Not processed
Metres
Not processed
Not processed
GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains time, position, and fix related data for a GPS receiver.
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, x6, xx7, x.x8, x.x9, M10, x.x11, M12, x.x13,
xxxx14*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
hhmmss.ss
UTC time of position fix
Not processed
llll.ll
WPT latitude
Degrees, minutes, tenths of

minutes
Hemisphere
N North
S South
yyyyy.yy
WPT longitude

minutes
Hemisphere
E East
W West
GPS positioning quality

indicator
0 = Fix not available or invalid,

1 = GPS SPS Mode, fix valid,
2 = Differential GPS, SPS
Mode, fix valid,
3 = GPS PPS Mode, fix valid,
4 = RTK Mode, fix valid,
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system
used in RTK mode, floating
integers,
6 = Estimated (DR) mode,
7 = Manual Input mode,
8 = Simulator mode
xx
Number of satellites in use
From 0 to 12
Values from 4
through 8 are
not processed
373
Field
Name
Value
Comments
x.x
Horizontal dilution of
precision
x.x
Antenna altitude above

mean-sea-level
10
Measurement units
M metres
Not processed
11
x.x
Geoidal separation
Vertical difference between

the WGS-84 earth ellipsoid and
mean-sea-level (geoid), - =
mean-sea-level below ellipsoid
Not processed
12
Measurement units
M metres
Not processed
13
x.x
Differential GPS data age

(in seconds)
14
xxxx
Differential GPS station

code
Not processed
From 0000 to 1023
GLL Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: coordinates of the current vessel position, time of position fix, and data status.
$--GLL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, hhmmss.ss5, A6, a7*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
llll.ll
WPT latitude

minutes
Hemisphere
N North
S South
yyyyy.yy
WPT longitude

minutes
Hemisphere
E East
W West
hhmmss.ss
Position fix UTC time
Status of data received

from the sensor
A Data valid
V Data not valid
Positioning system
Mode indicator
A Autonomous
D Differential
E Estimated
(dead reckoning)
M Manual input
S Simulator
N Data not valid
Comments
Not processed
Not processed
HDG Heading, Deviation, and Variation

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000 IMO Resolution A.382 (X).
$--HDG, x.x1, x.x2, a3, x.x4, a5*hh<CR><LF>.
374
Field
Name
x.x
Magnetic Sensor
Heading (degrees)
x.x
Magnetic Deviation
(degrees)
Deviation hemisphere
x.x
Magnetic Variation
(degrees)
Variation hemisphere
Value
Comments
E/W
Not processed
E/W
Not processed
HDT Heading, True

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000 IMO Resolution A.424 and A.821.
$--HDT, x.x1, T2*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
x.x
Heading (degrees)
Heading type
Value
Comments
T True
MTW Water Temperature

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--MTW, x.x1, C2*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
x.x
Temperature
Measurement units
Value
Comments
C degrees, C
MWD Wind Direction and Speed

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: wind speed and direction, data status.
$--MWD, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, M8*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Wind direction
In degrees (from 0 to 359)
Wind type
T true
x.x
Wind direction
Wind type
M magnetic
x.x
Wind speed
Measurement units
x.x
Wind speed
Measurement units
Comments
N knots
M metres/second
MWV Wind Speed and Angle

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: wind speed and direction, data status.
$--MWV, x.x1, a2, x.x3, a4, A5*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Wind direction
Wind type
R relative
T theoretical, calculated
actual wind
x.x
Wind speed
Measurement units
K km per hour
M metres/second
N knots
Status
A Data valid
V Data not valid
Comments
375
RMC Recommended Minimum Specific GPS Data

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GPS receiver.
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss1, A2, llll.ll3, a4, yyyyy.yy5, a6, x.x7, x.x8, xxxxxx9, x.x10, a11,
a12*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
hhmmss.ss
Position fix UTC time
Data status
A = Data valid
V = Data invalid
llll.ll
Latitude

minutes
Hemisphere
N North
S South
yyyyy.yy
Longitude

minutes
Hemisphere
E East
W West
x.x
Speed over ground

(knots)
x.x
Course over ground,

degrees true
xxxxxx
Date (ddmmyy)
10
x.x
Magnetic variation
11
Hemisphere
E East
W West
12
Positioning system
Mode indicator
A Autonomous mode
D Differential mode
E Estimated (dead
reckoning) mode
M Manual input mode
S Simulator mode
N Data not valid
Comments
Not processed
Not processed
ROT Rate of Turn

Contains: rate of turn and direction of turn.
$--ROT,x.x1,A2*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
x.x
Rate of turn
Degrees, minute
- = Bow turns to
port
Status
A = Data valid
B = Data invalid
THS True Heading and Status

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--THS,x.x1,a2*hh<CR><LF>.
376
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Heading
Degrees true
Indicator mode
A Autonomous
E Estimated (dead reckoning)
M Manual input
S Simulator mode
V Data not valid (including
standby)
Comments
VBW DUAL Ground/Water Speed

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: X and Y components of speed through the water and over the ground.
$--VBW, x.x1, x.x2, A3, x.x4, x.x5, A6, x.x7,A8, x.x9, A10*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
x.x
Longitudinal component of speed through

the water, knots
Value
Negative aftward
x.x
Transverse component
of speed through the
water, knots
Negative to
the portside
Data status
x.x
Longitudinal component of speed over

the ground, knots
Negative aftward
x.x
Transverse component
of speed over
the ground, knots
Negative to
the portside
Data status
x.x
Stern transverse water

speed (knots)
Data status
x.x
Stern transverse
ground speed (knots)
10
Data status
A reliable data
V unreliable data
A reliable data
V unreliable data
Comments
Shall not be null
Shall not be null

Negative to
the portside
A reliable data
V unreliable data
Shall not be null

Negative to
the portside
A valid data
V invalid data
Shall not be null
VDR Set and Drift

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$ -- VDR,x.x1,T2,x.x3,M4,x.x5,N6*hh<CR><LF>
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
x.x
Direction, degrees
Orientation
T True
Not process
Process
x.x
Magnetic compass
direction, degrees
Range: [0.0 to 359.9]

degrees
Not process
Source
M Magnetic compass
Not process
x.x
Set speed
N Knots
Process
Process
377
VHW Water Speed and Heading

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--VHW, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, K8*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
x.x
Heading (degrees)
2
3
Type
x.x
Heading (degrees)
Type
x.x
Speed
Measurement units
x.x
Speed
Speed units
Value
Comments
Not processed
T True
Not processed
Not processed
M Magnetic
Not processed
N Knots
Processed if
field 5 is
transmitted empty
K Km/hr
Processed if
field 5 is
transmitted empty
VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--VTG, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, K8, A9*hh<CR><LF>.
378
Field
Name
Value
Comments
x.x
Course over ground

(degrees)
Type
x.x
Magnetic course
(degrees)
Type
x.x
Speed
Measurement units
x.x
Speed
Measurement units
K Km/hr
Processed if field 5
is transmitted empty
Positioning system
mode indicator
A Autonomous mode
D Differential mode
E Estimated (dead
reckoning) mode
M Manual input mode
S Simulator mode
N Data not valid
Not processed
T True
Not processed
M Magnetic
Not processed
N Knots
Processed if field 5
is transmitted empty
VWR Relative (Apparent) Wind Speed and Angle

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--VWR, x.x1, a2, x.x3, N4, x.x5, M6, x.x7, K8 *hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Measured wind angle

relative to the vessel
Left/right of the vessel

heading
L left
R right
x.x
Measured wind speed
Measurement units
x.x
Wind speed
Measurement units
x.x
Wind speed
Measurement units
Comments
N knots
M metres/second
K Km/hr
WPL Waypoint Location

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: WPT latitude and longitude.
$--WPL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, cc5*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
llll.ll
WPT latitude
Hemisphere
yyyyy.yy
WPT longitude
Hemisphere
cc
WPT number
Value
Comments
N North
S South
E East
W West
Not processed
ZDA Time & Date

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
Contains: UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone.
$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss1, xx2, xx3, xxxx4, xx5, xx6*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
hhmmss.ss
UTC time
xx
Day (UTC)
0131
xx
Month (UTC)
0112
xxxx
Year (UTC)
xx
Local zone, hours
00 h to 13 h
Not processed
xx
Local zone, minutes
Time zone minutes
Not processed
379
Output
The MFD system has a strictly fixed data transmission frequency (on a certain data
channel) for each group of data in use:
Data channel in
the System Configuration
utility
Sentence transmitted
NMEA output
APB, BOD, BWC, DTM, DPT, GBS, GGA, GLL, HDT, OSD, RTE,
ROT, TTM, VBW, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL, XTE, ZDA
Autopilot output
APB, BOD, BWC, GLL, HDT, OSD, RTE, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL,
XTE, ZDA
YEOMAN
GLL
Group of transmitted data
Data channel in the System

Configuration utility
Sentence transmission
rate
NAV DATA
(ALR, ACK, DTM; GLL;
HDT; ZDA; OSD; DPT)
NMEA output
Every second
NAV DATA
AUTOPILOT
Every second
Ownship position (GLL)
YEOMAN
Once every 3 seconds
Device
Channel for the sensor connection

via the System Configuration utility
Type of transmitted data
Any navigation equipment

which requires reception of
the ownship motion data
NMEA output
NAV DATA
Autopilot
Autopilot
NAV DATA
YEOMAN digitizer
YEOMAN
Ownship position
Format of Output Data

This paragraph describes formats of all the output sentences of IEC 61162-1 or/and
NMEA 0183 standards output onto the navigational sensors connected
to the MFD system.
ATTENTION!
The sentences are transmitted to the output in the following order:
for positioning system sentences transmitted from the source selected as

Primary Positioning System;
for the rest of data sentences transmitted from the sources selected in
Navigation panel of the ECDIS task.
380
Sentence format consists of the following parts:

N
Field
Description
Start of sentence
--
Talker ID
AAA
Mnemonic code of identifying the data type
x.x,a,c---c...
Data
*hh
Checksum field
<CR><LF>
End of sentence
ATTENTION!
System data and other data checked for integrity modified or generated by MFD, are
always transmitted with the Talker ID IN.
ACK Acknowledge Alarm

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--ACK, xxx1*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
xxx
Alarm number
Comments
ALR Set Alarm State

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2000.
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss1,xxx2,A3,A4,c--c5*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
hhmmss.ss
Time of alarm condition

change
Hours, minutes, seconds (UTC)
xxx
Alarm number
Alarm condition
A = threshold exceeded,
V = not exceeded
Alarms acknowledge
state
A = acknowledged,
V = unacknowledged
c--c
Comments
381
APB Heading/Track Controller (Autopilot) Sentence B

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--APB, A1, A2, x.x3, a4, N5, A6, A7, x.x8, a9, c--c10, x.x11, a12, x.x13, a14, a15*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Status
A = Data valid,
V = LORAN-C blink or SNR
warning,
V = general warning flag for other
navigation systems when
a reliable fix is not available
Status
A = OK or not used,
V = LORAN-C cycle lock warning
flag
x.x
Magnitude of XTE
Direction to steer
L/R
XTE units
Nautical miles
Status
A = arrival circle entered,

V = arrival circle not passed
Status
A = perpendicular passed at
waypoint,
V = perpendicular not entered
x.x
Bearing origin to
destination
10
c--c
Destination waypoint ID
11
x.x
Bearing, present
position to destination
12
13
x.x
14
15
Comments
M/T
Magnetic or true
Heading to steer to
destination waypoint
Magnetic or true
Mode indicator
A = Autonomous mode;
D = Differential mode;
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
mode;
M = Manual input mode;
S = Simulator mode;
N = Data not valid
Values E, M,
S are processed
as N
BOD Bearing Origin to Destination

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--BOD, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, c--c5, c--c6*hh<CR><LF>.
382
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Bearing
Degrees
True
x.x
Bearing
Magnetic
c--c
Destination waypoint
ID
c--c
Origin waypoint ID
Degrees
Comments
BWC Bearing and Distance to Waypoint Great Circle

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--BWC, hhmmss.ss1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, x.x6, T7, x.x8, M9, x.x10, N11, c--c12,
a13*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
hhmmss.ss
UTC of observation
llll.ll
Waypoint latitude
yyyyy.yy
Value
Comments
N/S
Waypoint longitude
E/W
x.x
Bearing
True
Degrees
x.x
Bearing
Magnetic
10
x.x
Distance
Nautical miles
11
Units
Nautical miles
12
c--c
Waypoint ID
13
Mode indicator
Degrees
A = Autonomous mode,
D = Differential mode,
mode,
M = Manual input mode,
S = Simulator mode,
N = Data not valid
Values E, M,
S are
processed as N
DTM Datum Reference

See Format of Input Data paragraph of this section.
DPT Depth
GBS GPS Satellite Fault Detection

GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data

GLL Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude

HDT Heading, True

383
OSD Own Ship Data

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--OSD, x.x1, A2, x.x3, a4, x.x5, a6, x.x7, x.x8, a9*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Heading, true
Degrees
Heading status
A = data valid,
V = data invalid
x.x
Vessel course, true
Degrees
Course reference
B = bottom tracking log,

M = manually entered,
W = water referenced,
R = radar tracking (of fixed target),
P = positioning system ground
reference
x.x
Vessel speed
Speed reference
B = bottom tracking log,

M = manually entered,
W = water referenced,
R = radar tracking (of fixed target),
P = positioning system ground
reference
x.x
Vessel set, true
Degrees
x.x
Vessel drift (speed)
Speed units
Comments
Manually entered
Manually entered
K = km/h,
N = knots,
S = statute miles/h
RMB Recommended Minimum Navigation Information

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--RMB, A1, x.x2, a3, c--c4, c--c5, llll.ll, a6, yyyyy.yy,a7,x.x8, x.x9, x.x10, A11, a12
*hh<CR><LF>
384
Field
Name
Value
Status
The positioning system mode

indicator field supplements the
status field (field No. 1) which
should be set to V = invalid for all
values of Mode indicator except for
A = Autonomous and D =
Differential. The positioning system
mode indicator and status fields
should not be null fields
x.x
Cross track error
nautical miles
If cross track error exceeds 9,99
nautical miles, display 9,99
L/R
Direction to steer
c--c
Origin waypoint ID
c--c
Destination waypoint ID
llll.ll, a
latitude, N/S
yyyyy.yy,a
longitude, E/W
x.x
Range to destination,
nautical miles
x.x
Bearing to destination
degrees
10
x.x
Destination closing
velocity
knots
11
Arrival status
Comments
Field
Name
Value
12
Mode indicator
mode,
S = Simulator mode,
N = Data not valid
Comments
ROT Rate of Turn

RTE Routes
Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--RTE, x.x1, x.x2, a3, c--c4, c--c5, 6, c--cn*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
x.x
Total number of
sentences being
transmitted
x.x
Sentence number
Message mode
c--c
Route identifier
c--c
Waypoint identifier
c--c
Additional waypoint
identifiers
c--c
Waypoint n identifier
Value
Comments
c = complete route, all waypoints,

w = working route, first listed
waypoint is FROM, second is TO
and remaining are rest of route
TTM Tracked Target Message

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--TTM, xx1, x.x2, x.x3, a4, x.x5, x.x6, a7, x.x8, x.x9, a10, c--c11, a12, a13, hhmmss.ss14,
a15 *hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
xx
Target number
00 to 99
x.x
Target distance from

own ship
x.x
Bearing from own ship
x.x
Target speed
x.x
Target course
x.x
Distance of closestpoint-of-approach
x.x
Time to CPA
min
K/N/S
Comments
Degrees
T True,
R Relative
Degrees
T True,
R Relative
10
Speed/distance units
11
c--c
Target name
12
Target status
- Increasing
L = Lost, tracked target has been

lost,
Q = Query, target in the process
of acquisition,
T = Tracking
385
Field
Name
Value
13
Reference target
R reference target
Null field otherwise
14
hhmmss.ss
Time of data (UTC)
15
Type of acquisition
Comments
A = Automatic,
M = manual,
R = reported
VBW DUAL Ground/Water Speed

VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed

VHW Water Speed and Heading

VDR Set and Drift

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--VDR, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
x.x
Direction, true
Degrees
True
x.x
Direction, magnetic
Magnetic
x.x
Current speed
Knots
Comments
Degrees
Knots
WPL Waypoint Location

XTE Cross-Track Error, Measured

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2007.
$--XTE, A1, A2, x.x3, a4, N5, a6*hh<CR><LF.
N
Field
Name
Value
Status
A = data valid,
V = LORAN-C blink or SNR warning
Status
A = data valid,
V = Loran-C cycle lock warning flag
x.x
Magnitude of crosstrack error
Direction to steer
L/R
Units
Nautical miles
Mode indicator
E = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
S = Simulator mode,
N = Data not valid
ZDA Time & Date

386
Comments
Values E, M,
S are
processed as N
Universal AIS Transponder Interface
UNIVERSAL AIS TRANSPONDER INTERFACE

Description of Universal AIS Transponder Interface
General
This section describes functionality associated with the data reception/transmission
with the Universal AIS Transponder connected to the MFD.
Universal AIS Transponder is an interface developed strictly in accordance with
the following standards:
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication

equipment and systems Class A Shipborne installation of the Universal
Shipborne automatic identification system (AIS) using VHF TDMA techniques;
IEC 61162-1, 2001-07 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment

and systems digital interfaces;
ITU-R M.1371, 2000 Technical characteristics for a universal shipborne

automatic identification system using time division multiple access in
the VHF maritime mobile band;
IALA Technical Clarification on Recommendation ITY-R M.1371-1 Edition 1.3.
Reception of current own ship identifiers (IMO number, MMSI number) from
the transponder is by VDO sentence (VHF Data-link Own-vessel message).
Data on UAIS targets is received by using VDM sentence (VHF Data-link message).
Reception and transmission of different information between the transponders
are strictly on definite channels (A and B).
Level 3
Data processing is implemented to a full extent according to the descriptions
provided below in paragraphs:
IALA Technical Clarifications on Recommendation ITU-R M.1371 Edition

1.3 Standard Sentences;
Sentences Transmitted by the MFD via AIS Channel in the Operation

with a Transponder.
Table 60. Summary Table of UAIS Data Exchange Messages

Message
MFD channel
Direction
Transmission Interval
AIQ, ALR
AIS
Transmission
At the MFD start;

At the transponder
restart
AIQ,
SSD
AIS
Transmission
At the MFD start;

As change occurs;
At the transponder
restart
AIQ, TXT
AIS
Transmission
At the MFD start;

At the transponder
restart
AIQ,
VSD
AIS
Transmission
At the MFD start;

As change occurs;
At the transponder
restart;
Once in 10 minutes
Standard
ABK
AIS
Reception
As event occurs
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
ABM
AIS
Transmission
As event occurs
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
387
Message
MFD channel
Direction
Transmission Interval
ACK
ALR
Standard
AIS
Transmission
Alarm acknowlegment
AIS
Reception and
Transmission
As event occurs
IEC 61162-1, 2001-07
BBM
AIS
Transmission
As event occurs
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
SSD
AIS
Reception and
Transmission
As event occurs
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
TXT
AIS
Reception
As event occurs
IEC 61162-1, 2001-07
VDM
AIS
Reception
AIS Data
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
VDO
AIS
Reception
Own ship data
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
VSD
AIS
Reception and
Transmission
As change occurs
IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
Data Exchange Format

Format of the sentences consists of the following parts:
N
Field
Description
$ or !
Start of sentence
--
Talker ID
AAA
Mnemonic code of identifying the data type
x.x,a,c---c...
Data
*hh
Checksum field
<CR><LF>
End of sentence
As MFD system receives a sentence with a field containing an ignored value,

no processing of information in this field is performed.
IALA Technical Clarifications on Recommendation ITU-R M.1371

Edition 1.3 Standard Sentences
VDO VHF Data-Link Own-Vessel Message
The MFD for the reception uses this sentence only. It contains information on the
own ship set in the ship UAIS station.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
!--VDO, x1, x2, x3, a4, s--s5, x6*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Total number of sentences needed to transfer

the message
1 to 9
Sentence number
1 to 9
Sequential message
identifier
0 to 9
AIS channel
A or B
ss
Encapsulated ITU-R
M.1371 radio message
Number of fill-bits
Comments
See Note
0 to 5
Note: Sentences 1, 2, 3, 5, 18 of ITU-R M.1371 standard are processed.
388
VDM VHF Data-Link Message

The MFD for the reception uses this sentence only. It contains target information
received by the MFD from the ship UAIS station.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
!--VDM, x1, x2, x3, A4, s--s5, x6*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Total number of sentences needed to

transfer the message
1 to 9
Sentence number
1 to 9
Sequential message
identifier
0 to 9
AIS channel
A or B
s--s
Encapsulated ITU-R
M.1371 radio message
Number of fill-bits
Comments
See Note
0 to 5
Note: Sentences 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22 of ITU-R M.1371
standard are processed.
1, 2, 3 Position Report (in VDO and VDM Sentences)
The MFD for the reception uses this sentence only.
Standard: ITU-R M.1371, 2000.
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Message ID
Identifier for message 1, 2, or 3
Repeat Indicator
User ID
30
MMSI number
Navigational
status
0 = Underway using engine

1 = At anchor
2 = Not under command
3 = Restricted manoeuvrability
4 = Constrained by her draught
5= Moored
6 = Aground
7 = Engaged in Fishing
8 = Underway sailing
9 = HSC (High Speed Craft)
10 = WIG (Wing In Ground)
1114 = Reserved for future use
15 = Not defined = default
Rate of turn
ROTAIS
0...+126 = turning right at up to 708 degrees per

minute or higher.
0...-126 = turning left at up to 708 degrees per
minute or higher.
Values between 0 and 708 degrees/min coded
by ROTAIS = 4.733 SQRT(ROTsensor) degrees/min
where ROTsensor is the Rate of Turn as input by
an external Rate of Turn Indicator. ROTAIS is
rounded to the nearest integer value.
+ 127 = turning right at more than 5/30s
(No TI available).
-127 = turning left at more than 5/30s
(No TI available).
-128 (80 hex) indicates no turn information
available (default).
ROT data should not be derived from COG
information
Not processed
by the MFD
389
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
SOG
10
Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps

(0102.2 knots).
1023 = not available;
1022 = 102.2 knots or higher
Position accuracy
1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of,

e.g., DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of,
e. g. GNSS receiver or of other Electronic
Position Fixing Device); default = 0
Longitude
28
Longitude in 1/10 000 min.

(180 degrees, East = positive (as 2s
complement), West = negative (as 2s
complement).
181 degrees (6791AC0 hex) = not available =
default)
Latitude
27
Latitude in 1/10 000 min.

(90 degrees, North = positive
(as 2s complement), South = negative
(as 2s complement),
91 degrees (3412140 hex) = not available =
default)
COG
12
Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (03599).

3600 (E10 hex)= not available = default;
36014095 should not be used
True Heading
Degrees (0359)
(511 indicates not available = default)
Time stamp
Not processed
by the MFD
Reserved for regional applications
Not processed
by the MFD
Spare
Not processed
by the MFD
RAIM-Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Communication
State
19
Not processed
by the MFD
Total number of
bits
168
4 Base Station Report (VDM)

390
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Message ID
Identifier for message 4

4 = UTC and position report from base station
Repeat Indicator
User ID
30
UTC year
14
Not processed
by the MFD
UTC month
Not processed
by the MFD
UTC day
Not processed
by the MFD
UTC hour
Not processed
by the MFD
UTC minute
Not processed
by the MFD
Not processed
by the MFD
MMSI number
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
UTC second
Position accuracy
1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of

0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of e.g.,
GNSS receiver, or of another Electronic Position
Fixing Device), default = 0
Longitude
28
Longitude in 1/10 000 minute (180 degrees,

East = positive (as 2s complement),
West = negative (as 2s complement)).
default
Latitude
27
Latitude in 1/10 000 minute (90 degree, North =

positive (as 2s complement), South = negative
(as 2s complement)).
default
Type of Electronic
Position Fixing
Device
Use of differential corrections is defined by field

position accuracy above:
0 = Undefined (default);
1 = GPS
2 = GLONASS
3 = Combined GPS/GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
6 = Integrated Navigation System
7 = Surveyed
815 = Not used
Spare
10
Not processed
by the MFD
RAIM-Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Communication
State
19
Not processed
by the MFD
Total number of
bits
168
Not processed
by the MFD
5 Static and Voyage Related Data (In Sentences VDO and VDM)
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
User ID
30
AIS Version
Indicator
Comments
Not
processed by
the MFD
MMSI number
Not
processed by
the MFD
IMO number
30
1999999999; 0 = not available = default
Call sign
42
7 x 6 bit ASCII characters, @@@@@ @@ = not

available = default
Name
120
Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII, @@@@

@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ = not available = default
Type of ship and

cargo type
0 = not available or no ship = default

199 = as defined in Table Type of ship (see above)
100199 = reserved, for regional use
200255 = reserved, for future use
391
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Overall
Dimension/Reference for Position
30
Reference point (VDM 1, 2, 3) for reported position.

Indicates the dimension of ship in metres (see SSD
message)
Type of Electronic
Position Fixing
Device
0 = Undefined (default)
1 = GPS
2 = GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
7 = surveyed
815 = not used
ETA
20
Estimated Time of Arrival; MMDDHHMM UTC

Bits 1916: month 112
0 = not available = default
Bits 1511: day 131
Bits 106: hour 023
Bits 50: minute 059
Maximum Present
Static Draught
in 1/10 m
255 = draught 25.5 m or greater
in accordance with IMO Resolution A.851
Destination
120
Maximum 20 characters using 6-bit ASCII;

@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ =
not available
DTE
Not
processed by
the MFD
Spare
Not
processed by
the MFD
Number of bits
424
Maximum
permissible
draft in the
MFD is 25.5
m
6 Addressed Binary Message (In VDM)

392
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
Source ID
30
MMSI number of source station
Sequence
Number
03
Comments
Not processed
by the MFD
Destination ID
30
MMSI number of destination station
Retransmit Flag
Retransmit Flag should be set upon

retransmission:
0 = no retransmission = default; 1 = retransmitted
Spare
Not processed
by the MFD
Not processed
by the MFD
Not processed
by the MFD
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Binary Data
Max 936
Application Identifier always contains:

DAC (Designated Area Code) = 001
(IAI International Application Identifier);
FI (Function Identifier) = 00 (text telegram using
6-bit ASCII, general FI Group) 16 bit
Application Data 920 bit maximum
Maximum
Number of bits
Max
1008
Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length

of subfield Message Content
Comments
8 Binary Broadcast Message (In VDM)

Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
Source ID
30
Spare
Binary Data
Max 968
Application Identifier always contains: DAC

(Designated Area Code) = 001 (IAI International
Application Identifier);
FI (Function Identifier) = 00 (text telegram using
6-bit ASCII, general FI Group) 16 bit
Application Data 952 bit maximum
Maximum
Number of bits
Max
1008
Occupies 1 to 5 slots
Not processed
by the MFD
MMSI number of source station
Not processed
by the MFD
9 Standard SAR Aircraft Position Report (In VDM)

Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Message ID
Identifier for message 9; always 9
Repeat Indicator
Comments
Not processed
by the MFD
User ID
30
MMSI number
Altitude (GNSS)
12
Altitude (derived from GNSS) expressed in metres

(0 4094 metres).
4094 = 4094 metres or higher
SOG
10
Speed over ground in knot steps (01022 knots)

1022 = 1022 knots or higher
Position
accuracy

0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of
e. g. GNSS receiver or of other Electronic Position
Fixing Device); default = 0
Longitude
28
Longitude in 1/10 000 min

( 180 degrees, East = positive (as per 2s
complement), West = negative (as per 2s
complement).
default)
393
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Latitude
27
Latitude in 1/10 000 min

( 90 degrees, North = positive (as per 2s
complement), South = negative (as per 2s
complement).
default)
COG
12
Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (03599).

Time stamp
Not processed
by the MFD
Reserved for
regional
applications
Not processed
by the MFD
DTE
Spare
Not processed
by the MFD
RAIM-Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Communication
State
19
Not processed
by the MFD
Total number of
bits
168
Data terminal ready (0 = available 1 = not

available = default)
12 Addressed Safety Related Message (In VDM)

394
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Message ID
Identifier for Message 12; always 12
Repeat Indicator
Source ID
30
Sequence
Number
Destination ID
30
Retransmit Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Spare
Not processed
by the MFD
Safety related text
Max 936
6-bit ASCII
Total Maximum
Number of bits
Max
1008
Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length of text
Not processed
by the MFD
MMSI number of station which is the source
of the message
Not processed
by the MFD
MMSI number of station which is the destination
of the message
14 Safety Related Broadcast Message (In VDM)

Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
Source ID
30
Spare
Safety related
Text
Max 968
6-bit ASCII
Total Number of
bits
Max
1008
Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length of text
Not processed
by the MFD
MMSI number of source station of message
Not processed
by the MFD
18 Standard Class B Equipment Position Report (In VDO and VDM)

Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
Comments
Not processed
by the MFD
User ID
30
Reserved for
regional or local
applications
MMSI number
SOG
10
Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps

(0102.2 knots):
Position
accuracy
1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of e.g.,

DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of e.g.,
GNSS receiver or of other Electronic Position
Longitude
28

(180 degrees, East = positive (as per 2s
complement).
default)
Latitude
27

(90 degrees, North = positive (as per 2s
complement);
default)
COG
12
Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (03599):

True Heading
Degrees (0359)
Time stamp
Not processed
by the MFD
Reserved for
regional
applications
Not processed
by the MFD
Not processed
by the MFD
395
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Spare
Not processed
by the MFD
RAIM-Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Communication
State Selector
Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Communication
State
19
Not processed
by the MFD
Total number of
bits
168
19 Extended Class B Equipment Position Report (In VDM)

396
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
Comments
Not processed
by the MFD
User ID
30
Reserved for regional or local

applications
MMSI number
SOG
10
Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps (0102.2

kn):
Position accuracy
1 = high (> 10 m; Differential Mode of e.g.,

DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (< 10 m; Autonomous Mode of e.g.,
GNSS receiver or of other Electronic Position
Longitude
28

(180 degrees, East = positive (as per 2s
complement).
default)
Latitude
27

(90 degrees, North = positive (as per 2s
complement);
default)
COG
12
Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (03599):

True Heading
Degrees (0359).
Time stamp
Not processed
by the MFD
Reserved for regional applications
Not processed
by the MFD
Name
120
Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII, @@@@@

@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ = not available = default
Type of ship and

cargo type
0 = not available or no ship = default

199 = as defined in Table Type of ship
(see above)
Not processed
by the MFD
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
100199 = reserved, for regional use

200255 = reserved, for future use
Dimension of
Ship/Reference
for Position
30
Reference point for reported position;

Also indicates the dimension of ship in metres
(see SSD message)
Type of Electronic Position

Fixing Device
1 = GPS
2 = GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
7 = surveyed
815 = not used
RAIM-Flag
DTE
Assigned Mode
Flag
Not processed
by the MFD
Spare
Not processed
by the MFD
Total number of
bits
312
Not processed
by the MFD
Not processed
by the MFD
Data terminal ready (0 = available 1 = not
available = default)
21 Aids-to-Navigation Report
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Message ID
Repeat Indicator
Comments
Not processed
by the MFD
ID
30
MMSI number
Type of Aids-toNavigation
See table below
Name of Aids-toNavigation
120
Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII,

@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ =
not available = default.
The name of the Aid-to-Navigation may be
extended by the parameter Name of
Aid-to-Navigation Extension below
Position
accuracy

0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of
e.g., GNSSW receiver or of other Electronic
Position Fixing Device). Default = 0
Longitude
28
Longitude in 1/10 000 min of position of

an Aid-to-Navigation.
(180 degrees, East = positive, West = negative.
default)
Latitude
27
Latitude in 1/10 000 min of position of

an Aid-to-Navigation.
(90 degrees, North = positive, South = negative,
default)
397
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Dimension/Reference for Position
30
Reference point for reported position; also

indicates the dimension of Aids-to-Navigation in
1
metres
Type of Electronic Position

Fixing Device
1 = GPS
2 = GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
7 = surveyed. For fixed A-to-Ns and
virtual/pseudo A-to-Ns, the surveyed position
should be used. The accurate position enhances
its function as a radar reference target
815 = not used
Time Stamp
UTC second when the report was generated by

the EFPS (059, or 60 if time stamp is not
available, which should also be the default value,
or 61 if positioning system is in manual input
mode, or 62 if Electronic Position Fixing System
operates in estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
or 63 if the position system is inoperative)
Off-Position
Indicator
For floating Aids-to-Navigation only:

0 = on position;
1 = off position.
Note: This flag should only be considered valid by
receiving station, if the Aid-to-Navigation is
a floating aid, and if Time Stamp is equal to or
below 59. For floating A-to-N, the guard zone
parameters should be set on installation
Reserved for
regional or local
application
Reserved for definition by a competent regional or

local authority. Should be set to zero, if not used
for any regional or local application. Regional
application should not use zero
RAIM-Flag
Virtual/pseudo
A-to-N Flag
Assigned Mode
Flag
Comments
Not processed
by the MFD
Not processed
by the MFD
0 = default = real A-to-N at indicated position;
1 = virtual/pseudo A-to-N, does not physically
exist, may only be transmitted from an AIS station
nearby under the direction of a competent
2
authority
Not processed
by the MFD
the following should be observed:
for fixed Aids-to-Navigation, virtual and pseudo A-to-Ns, and for off-shore structures,
the orientation established by the dimension A should point to true north;
for floating aids larger than 22 m, the dimensions of the Aids to Navigation should
always be given approximated to a square, i.e. the dimensions should always be
as follows A=B=C=D0. (This is due to the fact, that the orientation of the floating
Aid to Navigation is not transmitted. The reference point for reported position is
in the center of the square.);
A=B=C=D=1 should indicate objects (fixed or floating) smaller than or equal to 22 m.

(The reference point for reported position is in the center of the square.)
when transmitting virtual/pseudo Aids to Navigation information, i.e. the virtual/pseudo

Aids to Navigation Target Flag is set to one (1), the dimensions should be set to A=B=C=D=0
(default). This should also be the case, when transmitting reference point information
(see table below).
398
Parameter
Number
of bits
Description
Comments
Spare
Spare. Not used. Should be set to zero
Name of Aid-toNavigation
Extension
0, 6, 12,
18, 24,
30, 36,...
84
This parameter of up to 14 additional 6-bit-ASCII

characters for a 2-slot message may be combined
with the parameter Name of Aid-to-Navigation
at the end of that parameter, when more than
20 characters are needed for the Name of the
Aid-to-Navigation. This parameter should be
omitted when no more than 20 characters for the
name of the A-to-N are needed in total. Only the
required number of characters should be
transmitted, i.e. no @-character should be used
Spare
0, 2, 4,
or 6
Spare. Used only when parameter Name of

Aid-to-Navigation Extension is used. Should be
set to zero. The number of spare bits should be
adjusted in order to observe byte boundaries
Number of bits
272360
Occupies two slots
Note: The competent international body for Aids-to-Navigation, IALA, defines

an Aid-to-Navigation as: a device or system external to vessels designed
and operated to enhance safe and efficient navigation of vessels and/or
vessel traffic (IALA Navguide, Edition 1997, Chapter 7).
The IALA Navguide stipulates: A floating aid to navigation, which is out of
position, adrift or during the night is unlighted, may itself become a danger
to navigation. When a floating aid is out of position or malfunctioning,
navigational warnings must be given. Therefore, a station, which transmits
Message 21, could also transmit Safety Related Broadcast Message
(Message 14) upon detecting that the floating Aid-to-Navigation has gone
out of position or is malfunctioning, at the competent authoritys discretion.
Table Type of Aids to Navigation
The nature and type of A-to-N can be indicated with 32 different codes, as shown below:
Code
Fixed A-to-N
Floating A-to-N
Definition
Default, Type of A-to-N not specified
Reference point
RACON
Structure off shore, such as oil platforms, wind farms, rigs.

(Note: This code should identify an obstruction that is fitted with an Aidto-Navigation AIS station.)
Spare
Light, without sectors
Light, with sectors
Leading Light Front
Leading Light Rear
Beacon, Cardinal N
10
Beacon, Cardinal E
11
Beacon, Cardinal S
12
Beacon, Cardinal W
13
Beacon, Port hand
14
Beacon, Starboard hand
15
Beacon, Preferred Channel port hand
16
Beacon, Preferred Channel starboard hand
17
Beacon, Isolated danger
18
Beacon, Safe water
19
Beacon, Special mark
20
Cardinal Mark N
21
Cardinal Mark E
399
Code
Definition
22
Cardinal Mark S
23
Cardinal Mark W
24
Port hand Mark
25
Starboard hand Mark
26
Preferred Channel Port hand
27
Preferred Channel Starboard hand
28
Isolated danger
29
Safe Water
30
Special Mark
31
Light Vessel/LANBY
Note: The types of Aids to Navigation listed above are based on the IALA Maritime
Buoyage System, where applicable.
There is potential for confusion when deciding whether an aid is lighted or
unlighted. Competent authorities may wish to use the regional/local section
of the message to indicate this.
Sentences Transmitted by the MFD via AIS Channel in the Operation

with a Transponder
AIQ, ALR Monitoring of Set Alarm State
This sentence is transmitted by the MFD in following cases:
at the MFD start;
at the transponder restart.
$xxAIQ, ALR1*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Comments
ALR
Request for set alarm

state information
In response to this request, the MFD receives

the sentence from the SAAB R4 transponder
AIQ, SSD Monitoring of Static Ship Data

at the MFD start;
as change occurs;
$xxAIQ, SSD1*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Comments
SSD
Request for static ship

data

AIQ, TXT Monitoring of Text Transmission

at the MFD start;
$xxAIQ, TXT1*hh<CR><LF>.
400
Field
Name
Comments
TXT
Request for static ship

data

AIQ, VSD Monitoring of Voyage Information

at the MFD start;
as change occurs;
at the transponder restart;
once in 10 minutes.
$xxAIQ, VSD1*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Comments
VSD
Request for voyage

information
In response to this request, the MFD receives the sentence from the SAAB R4 transponder
ABK Addressed Binary And Safety Related Message

This sentence is used by the MFD for the reception only via AIS channel in MFD.
The ABK-sentence is generated when a transaction, initiated by reception
of an ABM, AIR, or BBM sentence, is completed or terminated.
This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested
ABM broadcast of either ITU-R M.1371 messages 6 or 12. The ABK process utilizes
the information received in ITU-R M.1371 messages 7 and 13. Upon reception
of either a VHF Data-link message 7 or 13, or the failure of messages 6 or 12,
the AIS unit delivers the ABK sentence to the external application.
This sentence is also used to report to the external application the AIS units
handling of the AIR (ITU-R M.1371 message 15) and BBM (ITU-R M.1371
messages 8 and 14) sentences. The external application initiates an interrogation
through the use of the AIR-sentence, or a broadcast through the use of
the BBM sentence. The AIS unit generates an ABK sentence to report the outcome
of the AIR or BBM broadcast process.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
$--ABK, xxxxxxxxx1, a2, x.x3, x4, x5*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
xxxxxxxxx
MMSI of
the addressed
destination AIS unit
Identifies the distant addressed AIS unit

involved with the acknowledgement. If
more than one MMSI are being addressed
(ITU-R M.1371 message 15), the MMSI of
the first distant AIS unit, identified in
the message, is the MMSI reported here.
When the Message ID is a general
broadcast (ITU-R M.1371 messages 8
or 14), this field is null
AIS channel of
reception
x.x
ITU-R M.1371
message ID
Message Sequence
Number
See note 1
Type of acknowledgement
See note 2
Not
processed
by the MFD
This indicates to the external application
the type of ITU-R M.1371 message that
this ABK sentence is addressing. Also see
the message IDs listed in Note 1
401
Note: The message sequence number, together with the ITU-R M.1371 message
ID and MMSI of the addressed AIS unit, uniquely identifies a previously
received ABM, AIR, or BBM sentence.
Generation of an ABK sentence makes a sequential message identifier available
for reuse. The ITU-R M.1371 Message ID is used to determine the origin of the
message sequence identifier number. The following table lists the origins by
message ID:
ITU-R M.1371
Message ID
Message Sequence Number source
Sequential message identifier from ABM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
Addressed AIS units message 7, sequence number, ITU-R M.1371
Sequential message identifier from BBM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
12
Sequential message identifier from ABM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
13
Addressed AIS units message 13, sequence number, ITU-R M.1371
14
Sequential message identifier from BBM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
15
No source, field shall be null
Note: Acknowledgements provided are:

0 = message (6 or 12) successfully received by the addressed AIS unit;
1 = message (6 or 12) was broadcast, but no acknowledgement by
the distant addressed AIS unit;
2 = message could not be broadcast;
3 = requested broadcast of message (8, 14, or 15) has been successfully
completed;
4 = late reception of a message 7 or 13 acknowledgement addressed
to ownship MMSI identified by; destination MMSI, acknowledgement
source MMSI, message sequence identifier, and message type. Late
reception means that the AIS unit did not have an acknowledgement
process active for the acknowledgement that was received.
ABM Addressed Binary And Safety Related Message
This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission only via AIS channel in MFD.
This sentence supports ITU-R M.1371 messages 6 and 12. It provides an external
application with a means to exchange data using AIS. The message data is defined
by the application only not the AIS. This message offers great flexibility for
implementing system functions that use the AIS like a communications device.
After receiving this sentence, the AIS initiates a radio broadcast on the VHF Data
Link (VDL) of either message 6 or 12. The AIS will make up to four broadcasts of
the message. The actual number will depend on the reception of an acknowledgement
from the addressed destination AIS. The default time between retries is 4 sec.
Retries will not be attempted more frequently than 4 sec. Retries stop when
the appropriate acknowledgement (see ITU-R M.1371 messages 7 and 13) is
received. The AIS will make up to 4 broadcasts, original broadcast plus three retires.
This process could take 32 sec to complete.
The success or failure of the reception of this broadcast by the intended AIS
unit is confirmed through the use of the Addressed and binary Broadcast
Acknowledgement (ABK) sentence formatter, and the processes that support
the generation of an ABK-sentence. The AIS is also limited in the amount
of encapsulated data that can be sent in each slot and frame. If the length of
the message would exceed five slots, or the AIS broadcast would exceed the limit
of 20 RATDMA slot transmissions for the current frame, the AIS will return an
ABK-sentence with an acknowledgement of 2 message could not be broadcast.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
402
!--ABM, x1, x2, x3, xxxxxxxxx4, x5, x.x6, s--s7, x8*hh<CR><LF>.

N
Field
Name
Value

1 to 9
Sentence number
1 to 9
Sequential message
identifier
0 to 3
xxxxxxxxx
The MMSI of destination

AIS unit for the ITU-R
M.1371 message
AIS channel for broadcast of the radio

message
x.x
ITU-R M.1371
message
6 or 12
s--s
Encapsulated data
156 characters if field 6 = 12

Number of fill-bits
0 to 5
Comments
6 normal text
12 safety text
ALR Set Alarm State

This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission and reception via
AIS channel in MFD.
Local alarm condition and status. This sentence is used to report an alarm condition
on a device and its current state of acknowledgment.
Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2001-07.
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss1, xxx2, A3, A4, cc5*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
hhmmss.ss
Time of alarm
condition change, UTC
Value
xxx
ID number of the alarm

source
Alarm condition
A = threshold exceeded
V = not exceeded
Alarms acknowledge
state
A = acknowledged
V = unacknowledged
c--c
Comments
BBM Broadcast Binary Message

This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission only via AIS channel in MFD.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
!--BBM, x1, x2, x3, x4, x.x5, s--s6, x7*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value

1 to 9
Sentence number
1 to 9
Sequential message
identifier
0 to 9
AIS channel for broadcast of the radio

message
x.x
ITU-R M.1371
message
8 or 14
Comments
8 normal text
14 safety text
403
Field
Name
Value
s--s
Encapsulated data

Number of fill-bits
0 to 5
Comments
Note: Transmission of a target from the MFD is made in ABM, BBM safety related
sentences in the form of text information containing the target identifier,
coordinates, COG, SOG as of the moment of the target acquisition by
the MFD operator.
SSD SHIP STATIC Data
This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission and reception via
AIS channel in MFD.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
$--SSD, c--c1, c--c2, xxx3, xxx4, xx5, xx6, c7, aa8*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
c--c
Ships call sign
1 to 7
Set in the System

c--c
Ships name
1 to 20
Set in the System

xxx
Pos. ref. Point distance

A, from bow
0 to 511 (metres)
See Note
xxx
Pos. ref., B, from

stern
0 to 511 (metres)
See Note
xx
Pos. ref., C, from port

beam
0 to 63 (metres)
See Note
xx
Pos. ref., D, from

starboard beam
0 to 63 (metres)
See Note
DTE indicator flag
Transmitted by
the with value = 0
aa
Source identifier
Not transmitted by
the MFD
Note: Coefficients A, B, C, D depend on LOA, BOA, X/Y Conning Station or External

GPS parameters set in the System Configuration utility. MFD transmits to
SAAB R4 transponder parameters (A, B, C, D) of the internal and external
GPS receiver antenna units, by using the internal data exchange protocol.
In this case, fields 36 in SSD sentence are transmitted empty.
Fig. 184. Dimensions of the vessel
404
TXT Text Transmission

This sentence is used by the MFD for the reception only via AIS channel in MFD.
For the transmission of short text messages. Longer text messages may be
transmitted by using multiple sentences.
Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2001-07.
$--TXT, xx1, xx2, xx3, cc4*hh<CR><LF>
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
x.x
Total number of
messages
01 to 99
Not processed by
the MFD
x.x
Message number
01 to 99
Not processed by
the MFD
x.x
Text identifier
The text identifier is a number,

01 to 99, used to identify
different text messages
c--c
Text message
ASCII characters, and code

delimiters if needed, up to
the maximum permitted
sentence length (i.e. up to 61
characters including any code
delimiters)
VSD Voyage Static Data

This sentence is used by the MFD for the reception and transmission via
AIS channel in MFD.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
$--VSD, x.x1, x.x2, x.x3, c--c4, hhmmss.ss5, xx6, xx7, x.x8, x.x9*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Comments
x.x
Type of ship and cargo

category
0 to 255
See the table below
x.x
Maximum current static

draught
0 to 25.5 (metre)
x.x
Persons on board
0 to 8191
c--c
Destination
1 to 20 characters
hhmmss.ss
Est. UTC time of arrival

at destination
Hours, minutes, and seconds
xx
Est. day of arrival at

destination
00 to 31 (UTC)
xx
Est. month of arrival at

destination
00 to 12 (UTC)
x.x
Navigational status
0 = Underway using engine

1 = At anchor
2 = Not under command
3 = Restricted manoeuvrability
4 = Constrained by draught
5 = Moored
6 = Aground
7 = Engaged in fishing
8 = Under way sailing
9 = High Speed Craft (HSC)
10 = Wing In Ground (WIG)
x.x
Regional application
flags
0 to 15
Only hours and

minutes are
processed in MFD
Transmitted by
the MFD with
value = 0
405
Ship and Cargo Type
406
Ships/Cargo type
VSD message
identifier
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A)
21
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B)
22
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
23
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
24
WIG (no additional information)
29
Fishing vessel
30
Towing vessel
31
Towing vessel (length of the tow exceeds 200 m, breadth exceeds 25 m)
32
Vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations
33
Vessel engaged in diving operations
34
Vessel engaged in military operations
35
Sailing vessel
36
Pleasure craft
37
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A)
41
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B)
42
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
43
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D)
44
HSC (no additional information)
49
Pilot vessel
50
Search and rescue vessel
51
Tug
52
Port tender
53
Vessel with antipollution facilities
54
Law enforcement vessel
55
Medical transport (as defined in the 1949 Geneva Conventions)
58
Ship according to Resolution No 18 (Mob 83)
59
Passenger ship. All ships of this type
60
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A)
61
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B)
62
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
63
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D)
64
Passenger ship (no additional information)
69
Cargo ship. All ships of this type
70
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A)
71
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B)
72
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
73
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D)
74
Cargo ship (no additional information)
79
Tanker. All ships of this type
80
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A)
81
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B)
82
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
83
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D)
84
Tanker (no additional information)
89
Other type. All ships of this type
90
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A)
91
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B)
92
Ships/Cargo type
VSD message
identifier
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C)
93
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D)
94
Other type (no additional information) (its default)
99
Additional Information
Position Sensors Fallback Conditions
Priority
Position Sensor status
Position
(Latitude/Longitude)
External DGNSS in use (differential corrected)
Lat/Lon (external)
Internal DGNSS in use (differential corrected)
Lat/Lon (internal)
Internal DGNSS in use (differential corrected, beacon).

Applicable only if (optional) an internal beacon receiver
is provided
Lat/Lon (internal)
External Positioning Fixing System in use (differential

uncorrected)
Lat/Lon (external)
Internal GNSS in use (differential uncorrected)
Lat/Lon (internal)
Manual position input
Lat/Lon (manual)
Dead reckoning position
Lat/Lon (dead reckoning)
No position
Not available
The AIS automatically selects the position source with the highest priority available.
If data availability changes, the AIS automatically switches to the position source
with the highest priority available after 5 sec when switching downwards, or 30 sec
when switching upwards. During this period, the latest valid position is used
for reporting.
Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment Reporting Intervals
Type of Ship
Reporting interval
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots
3 min
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots
10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 014 knots
10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 014 knots and changing course
3 1/3 sec
Ship with a speed of between 1423 knots
6 sec
Ship with a speed of between 1423 knots and changing course
2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots
2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots and changing course
2 sec
Note: The reporting rate shall increase to once per 2 sec in accordance with
Recommendation ITU-R M.1371-1, Annex 1, Chapter 4.2.1, Footnote (1),
when the station determines that it is the semaphore.
If the autonomous mode requires a higher rate than the assigned mode,
the AIS shall use the autonomous mode.
407
Reporting Intervals For Equipment Other Than Class A Shipborne Mobile

Equipment
Platforms Condition
Nominal Reporting Interval
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment not moving faster than 2 knots
3 min
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 214 knots
30 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 1423 knots
15 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving >23 knots
5 sec
Search and Rescue aircraft (airborne mobile equipment)
10 sec
Aids to Navigation
3 min
AIS base station
10 sec
ROT Sensor Fallback Conditions

The AIS automatically select the ROT source with the highest priority available as
given in table below:
Priority
Position Sensor
status
Contents of ROT field

Affected data in messages 1, 2, 3 (ITU-R M.1371, 2000)
Rate of Turn Indicator

4
in use
0+126 = turning right at up to 708 degrees per minute or

higher;
0-126 = turning left at up to 708 degrees per minute or higher.
Values between 0 and 708 degrees/min shall be coded by
ROTAIS = 4.733 SQRT (ROTsensor) degrees/min
ROTsensor is the Rate of Turn as input by the external Rate of
Turn Indicator (TI).
Values of 709 degrees per minute and above shall be cut
to 708 degrees per minute
Other ROT source

5
in use
+127 = turning right at more than 5/30s (No TI is available);

-127 = turning left at more than 5/30s (No TI is available)
No valid ROT
information available
-128 (80 hex) indicates no turn information available (default)
the base station rate should increase to once per 31/3 seconds after the station detects
that one or more stations are synchronizing to the base station.
408
rate of turn indicator according to IMO A.526 (13); determined by Talker ID.
i.e., based on compass information.
NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange Format
NAVTEX SENSOR DATA EXCHANGE FORMAT

NMEA Format
NRX NAVTEX Received Message
The NRX sentence is used to transfer the contents of a received NAVTEX message
from the NAVTEX receiver to another device. As the length of a single NAVTEX
message may exceed the number of characters permitted in a single sentence,
many NRX sentences may be required to transfer a single NAVTEX message.
$--NRX,xxx1,xxx2,xx3,aaxx4,x5,hhmmss.ss6,xx7,xx8,xxxx9,x.x10,x.x11,A12,
c--c13*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
xxx
Number of sentences
001999
xxx
Sentence number
001999
xx
Sequential message
ID
0099
aaxx
NAVTEX message
code
The first character identifies

the transmitter coverage area,
and the second character
identifies the type of message.
The remaining two characters are
restricted to numerals with
a range of 00 to 99 and represent
a serial number for each type of
message
Frequency table
index 09
The frequency indicator identifies

the frequency that the NAVTEX
message was received on:
0 = not received over air (e.g.,
test messages);
1 = 490 kHz;
2 = 518 kHz;
3 = 4209.5 kHz
hhmmss.ss
UTC of receipt of
message
xx
Day
131
xx
Month
112
xxxx
Year
10
x.x
Total number of
characters in this
series of NRX
sentences
11
x.x
Total number of bad

characters
12
Status indication
13
c--c
Message body
Comments
The total number of characters

indicates the expected size
of the message body sent in this
sequence of NRX sentences
A = correct message reception,

V = incorrect message reception
409
NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange Format
NRM NAVTEX Receiver Mask

This command is used to manipulate the configuration masks that control which
messages are stored, printed, and sent to the MFD port of the NAVTEX receiver.
$--NRM,x1,x2,hhhhhhhh3,hhhhhhhh4*hh<CR><LF>.
N
Field
Name
Value
Function code
The function code is used to further

identify the purpose of the sentence.
The meaning of the function code is as
follows:
0 request messages for the given
mask;
1 set/report the storage mask;
2 set/report the printer mask;
3 set/report the MFD mask
Frequency table index
The frequency indicator identifies

the frequency that the NAVTEX
message was received on:
1 = 490 kHz;
2 = 518 kHz;
3 = 4209.5 kHz
hhhhhhhh
Transmitter coverage
area mask
The transmitter coverage area mask is

defined as a 32 bit hex field where
the least significant bit represents
transmitter coverage area A, the next
bit is B and so on up to bit 25 which
is Z
hhhhhhhh
Message type mask
The message type mask is defined as

a 32 bit hex field where the least
significant bit represents message type
A, the next bit is B and so on up to bit
25 which is Z
Comments
When another device wishes to determine the current values of the bit masks,
it sends a query sentence to the NAVTEX receiver as follows:
$--CRQ,NRM*hh<CR><LF>.
ASCII Format
NAVTEX messages have the following format (the message shown in the drawing
serves as an example):
Fig. 185. NAVTEX message
410
ZCZC message start identifier;
S transmitting station identifier (S Nitone);
A message type identifier (A navigational warnings);
43 message number (43);
Error rate message reception error transmitted by the NAVTEX receiver;
WZ 250 warning type identifier and its current number: text of the message;
CANCEL WZ 247 (SA41) indicates cancellation of WZ 247 warning sent

in message SA41. It is highlighted with the red colour;
NNNN message end identifier.
Description of the MFD and Rhotheta RT-202 RDF Interface
DESCRIPTION OF THE MFD AND RHOTHETA RT-202

RDF INTERFACE
The MFD is processing a constant data flow supplied by Rhotheta RT-202 radio
direction finder according to certain rules. No messages are transmitted from
the MFD to RT-202. The message format is described in detail in RHOTHETA RT202. OPERATING INSTRUCTION. This document specifies the rules of processing
messages from RT202:
Data output protocol.

Each message starts with a header-sign (ASCII-sign for identifying the type of
message). Following headers are possible: S = hex53, P = hex50, V = hex56,
A = hex41, L = hex4C, N = 0x4E. Then follows the proper information,
consisting of three ASCII decimals: 0 to 9 = hex30 to hex39. As end mark two
ASCII final marks are used: CR = hex0D (CarriageReturn) and LF = hex0A
(LineFeed).
Header
Content
Specification
XXX
= 0xx
= 2xx
Status output:
no received signal (no bearing);
received signal but active frequency storage; no bearing/error caused by
exceeding frequency deviation of transmitted signal (> 6 kHz);
receiving signal (bearing active)
= 1xx
XXX
= 000099
Level of received signal/field intensity in %
XXX
= 050280
Display of supplied voltage, e.g., 132 corresponds to 13.2 V
XXX
= 000255
Low audio-frequency (averaged about 100 ms) in 10 Hz,

e.g., 124 corresponds to 1240 Hz
XXX
= 000353
Averaged DF value in degrees (average-value, resolution 2 degrees)
XXX
= 000359
Unvaried DF value in degrees (momentary value, resolution 1 degree)
Remarks.
The unaveraged DF value shows a certain spread, depending on the received
signal. It can be used, if required, as indicator of the DF value quality. When working
with the direction finder only, the displayed averaged value should be used:
Field S is the first to be processed. The message is further ignored if S
field contains 0xx or 2xx parameters. And, vice versa, it is processed if
the message contains 1xx parameter meaning that a bearing signal has
been received;
The second step is to analyse P field. Field P contains information
(in per cent) on the intensity level of the received MOB bearing signal
(transmitter of 121.5 MHz signal). Accordingly, the lower the level, the weaker
signal has been received. It should be noted that the signal processing level
is set direct from RT-202 sensor (for a detailed description, see RHOTHETA
RT202. OPERATING INSTRUCTION). The optimum condition would be
to make an identical setting of the processed signal level in RT-202 sensor
and in on SAR page of Tasks panel of ECDIS task. The signal is analysed
by comparing a parameter from P field and data entered by the operator
in Use the signal with the level of intensity more than XX % input window
on SAR page of Tasks panel of ECDIS task. If P parameter is lower than
the signal processing level set by the operator, the message is ignored.
Otherwise, the message is accepted for further processing;
411
Description of the MFD and Rhotheta RT-202 RDF Interface
If the two above conditions are fulfilled, the MFD processes field A
containing information on the MOB object bearing. It should be noted that this
is a relative bearing, whereas to be plotted in the ECDIS task or transmitted
to other ships via the AIS, the bearing should be corrected to true.
ATTENTION!
For the MFD MAN OVERBOARD functionality to operate with the radio direction
finder and AIS, the MFD is required to receive a valid compass heading value.
Otherwise, it will be impossible to plot a true MOB object bearing on the electronic
chart, or to transmit it to other targets via AIS facilities.
412
ANNEX A
Additional Information
on Ports Interfaces
COM-Ports Interface
COM-PORTS INTERFACE
MFD system is equipped with NMEA ports, which are completely corresponding to
IEC 61162-1,2 Standard requirements.
The following terms are used in this Annex:
Talker NMEA port Output, which transmits data to other devices;
Listener NMEA port Input, which receives data from another device.
Fig. 186. COM-Ports interface diagram
All signal line A connections are connected in parallel with all device A connections,
and all signal line B connections are connected in parallel with all device
B connections. The shields of all Listener cables should be connected to the talker
chassis only and should not be connected at each listener.
The idle, marking, logical 1, OFF or stop bit states are defined by a negative voltage
on line A with respect to line B.
The active, spacing, logical 0, ON or start bit states are defined by a positive voltage
on line A with respect to line B.
To meet the demand of high reliability in industrial environment and to prevent the
boards from damage caused by lighting or high potential voltage, an optical isolation
(2 kV DC) is implemented in the Listeners receive circuit.
The Listeners receive circuit is designed for the operation with a minimum
differential input voltage of 2.0 V and shall not take more than 2.0 mA from
the line at that voltage.
The drawing below shows the connection corresponding to the Talker/Listener
Interface.
Fig. 187. Talker/Listener interface diagram
Annex A. Additional Information on Sensor Connection
415
DCU6 RS422 Ports Schematic
DCU6 RS422 PORTS SCHEMATIC

Optocoupler Fairchild H11L1 input-output isolation voltage 7500 V minimum
Fig. 188. DCU6.RS422 ports isolation
RS6 COMPUTER RS422 AND ETHERNET PORTS

ISOLATION SCHEMATICS
RS6 RS422 EBK RS6-IO Schematic
Fig. 189. RS6. RS422 ports isolation drawing
RS6 Ethernet Ports LAN1 and LAN2 Schematic
Fig. 190. RS6. Ethernet ports isolation drawing
416
ANNEX B
Additional Settings
for Navi-Conning 4000
Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules
ADJUSTMENT OF MFD OPERATION

WITH WAGO MODULES
General
Press INS button and switch to WAGO page. This page is intended for creating
and editing the database of parameters supplied to the MFD via WAGO modules.
Configuration of WAGO modules connection to the MFD ports is performed on the
page Sensors of the panel Sensors (see chapter Chapter 2, section MFD
Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings). If WAGO modules
are not connected, the page will be blank.
Annex B. Additional Settings for Navi-Conning 4000
419
In WAGO modules group, press New button. Position the cursor on a cell in Type column
and double click the left trackball/mouse button:
In the drop-down list, which will open up, select the device included in WAGO module.
ATTENTION!
The first unit to be adjusted is the one, which is located next to 750-314 Main Module
on the DIN rail.
In WAGO module parameters group, press New button to adjust parameters supplied by
the installed unit:
420
Use the Name column to enter the parameter name:
If necessary, in Backup officer column check alarm checkbox; if no acknowledgement

is received within a certain time interval, the Backup officer alarm should be triggered
off; set the necessary time interval in seconds.
In the Alarm if no input column, after the input of the parameter name, the screen
displays automatically the name of the alarm (warning) which will be shown in the
MFD in the absence of a signal at the WAGO module input. Edit the alarm (warning)
name as required.
From the drop-dawn list in Alm type column, select the type of an alarm generated by
the absence of a signal at the WAGO module input:
None no alarm;
ALM an alarm is triggered off;
WRN a warning is triggered off.
421
From drop-dawn list in Chan. column, select the channel of the WAGO unit,
which the parameter is supplied by:
In Unit column, set translation coefficient (1 by default).

In Min Phys. column, set the minimum, and in Max Phys. column, set the maximum
physical value (of current, voltage, etc.), which is supplied to the ADC and
corresponds to the maximum and minimum parameter value.
ATTENTION!
In Min Phys. and Max Phys. columns, the voltage value is required to be set in
millivolts (10 V are specified as 10000), whereas the current value should be
specified in microamperes (for 4 mA 4000 is specified).
422
In Min Val. column, set the minimum, and in Max Val. column, set the maximum value
of the associated parameter:
Another parameter can be set for other ADC channel. By using New button
in WAGO module parameters window, specify all the parameters, which received
via this WAGO module.
423
By using New button in WAGO modules window, specify all the units, which WAGO
Conning Box consists of.
ATTENTION!
Adjustment of WAGO units should be performed in the order of their positions
on the DIN rail from 750-314 Main Module.
Press OK button to save the settings you have made, and exit from the System
Configuration utility.
Connection of External MOB Button

Press the Sensors button. The drop-down Workstation list specifies the name
of the workstation which the external MOB button will be connected to.
Open Sensors page.
Select WAGO_ADC sensor from the drop-down list in the column Sensor:
In the column Port, select from the drop-down list the required COM port
of the Workstation computer, which this sensor is physically connected to.
Specify in the drop-down list the following COM port parameters:
Baud Rate: 9600;
Data Bits: 8;
Parity: None;
Stop Bits: 1.
Press Apply button.

Press INS button. Switch to WAGO page.
424
In WAGO modules group, press New button. Position the cursor on a cell in Type column
and double click the left trackball/mouse button. Select 750-403 Digital Inputs Module:
In the WAGO module parameters group, press the New button. Use the Name column
to enter the parameter name. It is exactly the following MOB_ON_CONTACT
name which should be entered:
425
Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom
From the drop-down list in the Channel column, select the channel of
the WAGO unit which the external MOB button is connected to:
Press OK button to save the settings you have made, and exit from the System
Configuration utility.
ADJUSTMENT OF MFD OPERATION WITH NMEA CUSTOM

Press INS button and switch to NMEA Custom page. This page is intended for
creating and editing the database of user sentences supplied to the MFD input.
Configuration of NMEA Custom sensor connection to the MFD ports is performed on
the page Sensors of the panel Sensors (see chapter System Settings, section
MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings).
If NMEA Custom sensor is not connected, the page will be blank.
426
General
Sentence Structure
A special Sentence Editor is used for the aforementioned purposes. The Editor
contains the database of like NMEA sentences, which are processed by the MFD.
When creating or editing sentences, the user specifies to the MFD the rules which
this sentence will be processed by.
The first step in the setting of parameter extraction rules is the determining
of the structure of a sentence containing parameters. Press New button:
427
While creating the sentence structure, the user sets the criterion for checking
the correctness of the sentence, which is being received. If at least one of
the characteristics of a newly created sentence does not correspond to
the characteristics of the sentence, which is being received, it will be ignored.
The sentence has the following characteristics:
Start Symbol sentence start symbol;
Talker information source identifier. If the identifier is specified, only those

sentences, which have the set identifier, will be processed. The rest of
the sentences, even if they have the same structure, will be ignored. If a
identifier isnt specified, all the sentences which have this structure, will be
processed regardless of the information source identifier;
Name sentence identifier. If the identifiers of the sentence which is being

received and which is being created do no match, they will be ignored;
Number of fields number of fields in the sentence. Where the number of fields in
a received sentence does not correspond to the value set by the user, the sentence
will be ignored;
Checksum a mandatory validity check performed on the data contained

in the sentences, calculated by the external device, appended to the message,
then re-calculated by the MFD for comparison to determine if the message
was received correctly. If these checksums do no match, the sentence
will be ignored.
Set several fields and press the Next > button. An example of creating a custom
NMEA will be provided in the next paragraph:
The next step is to determine the structure of sentence fields. Each field in a sentence
can contain the following characteristics:
428
Value parameter value;
Unit parameter measurement units;
Status parameter status;
Reference parameter reference;
Empty field.
By default, fields in the sentence structure are empty, which corresponds

to the pressed Empty button.
To determine which parameter characteristics the selected field contains (value,
measurement units, status or reference), position the cursor on the necessary field
and press the appropriate button.
Parameter Value
Parameters may have digital and symbol values, which may be of constant or variable
length; this is why it is necessary to determine the format of the field containing
the parameter value. These settings are made at the fields structure formation stage.
Field formats are provided in the table below:

Format type
Format
Notation in the sentence

structure
Field description
Normal
Free-type
Format
x.x
Fields of variable length containing

integers or numbers with floating point
Normal
Strong
Format
Fixed length field containing the number

of digits as determined by the user
String
Text
c c
Variable length field containing

any permitted characters
Empty field
429
Parameter Measurement Units

The parameter has the measurement units determined by the measurement unit
identifier, which arrives in a separate field of the same sentence as the parameter
itself. It is necessary to specify all the possible identifier values, which may arrive
in this field. Appropriate measurement units will be selected according to this identifier.
These settings are made at the field structure formation stage.
Factors for re-calculating all the measurement units to the system which
the MFD operates with are specified separately in MultiUnit column.
Parameter Status
The parameter may have a status, which determines its reliability. The status always
has two values: Valid/Invalid. The user determines characters, which may arrive
in Status field, at the field structure formation stage.
430
Parameter Reference
The parameter may have an additional characteristic: a reference, which may be
of two types:
Parametric, which differs the parameter from other parameters, whose value
arrives in the same sentence field. E.g., in MWV sentence, the reference
indicates theoretical or relative wind is specified in the given sentence;
Sign, which allows a positive or negative value to be assigned to the parameter

and then taken into account in the further processing. This reference always has
two values only. E.g., it is used in GLL for the ship coordinates (+ North,
- South) or XTD to specify the direction (+ starboard, - port).
Characters, which may arrive in Reference field, are determined by the user
at the field structure formation stage.
431
Empty Fields
An empty field (Empty button is pressed) is not processed by MFD.
Creating New Sentences Structure

As an example, we will consider an algorithm for retrieving parameters from
the NMEA MWV sentence, which can be used in much the same way for retrieving
parameters from any customised NMEA like sentence.
In NMEA Custom page press New button:
In Sentence header and structure window, which will open up, in Start symbol group
set the necessary start symbol by choosing the appropriate option button.
E.g., for MWV sentence, select $:
In Talker box, set the identifier of the device, which the sentence is supplied by;
to do this, enter it in block letters in Manual input box. The number of entered
identifier characters should be two. E.g., for MWV sentence which is supplied
by the wind sensor imitator, the identifier will be TE. Use Name text box to enter
the sentence identifier. The number of entered sentence identifier characters
should be three:
432
Use Number of Fields text box to enter the number of fields in the sentence, which is
being created. E.g., for MWV sentence, it is 5. If necessary, check Check Sum
checkbox for checksums comparison:
The formed sentence structure will be displayed in the information line in the top part
of Sentence header and structure window:

Specify the fields, which will contain parameter characteristics. E.g., for MWV
sentence, position the cursor on the first field containing the parameter value,
and press Value button:
433
Specify the format type for the field describing the parameter value. To do this,
select the required value from the drop-down list. E.g., Normal for the given value
of a MWV sentence parameter:
For Normal field type, set the format by selecting the appropriate option button
in Normal field group. E.g., for Wind Angle parameter of MWV sentence,
set Free-type format. This will be a variable length field containing integers
or numbers with floating point. If Strong format is set, the field will have a fixed value
and contain numbers with a set number of digits:
Use a similar procedure to specify fields containing values of other parameters,

e.g., the third field for MWV sentence.
Position the cursor on the field containing the parameter measurement units
(e.g., wind speed measurement units in MWV sentence) and press Unit button:
Press Add button. Position the cursor on a cell in Symbol column and double click
the left trackball/mouse button. Enter the measurement unit symbol and press <Enter>.
In MultiUnit column, enter the coefficients for re-calculating the measurement units
to the system which the MFD operates corresponding to the unit symbol, and
press <Enter>.
434
Use Add button to enter all the possible measurement units for the given parameter:
Position the cursor on the field containing the parameter status, and press Status button:
Set the symbols corresponding to reliable and unreliable data in Symbol column.
As the set symbols are received, the MFD as valid or invalid will assess the edited
parameter.
435
Position the cursor on the field containing the parameter reference (e.g., the second
field in MWV sentence) and press Reference button:
In Type line, select the reference type (for MWV sentence Parameter).
Press Add button. Position the cursor on Symbol column cell and double click
the left trackball/mouse button. Enter the reference symbol and press <Enter> key.
Use Add button to enter all the possible reference symbols for the given sentence:
Formation of the sentence structure is completed. Press OK button.
436
In Messages and parameters group the entered sentence will be added in the top part
in Sentence column:
It is then necessary to set rules for the extraction of parameters from the sentence
which you are editing.
Defining Parameter Extraction Rules

To define rules for extracting parameters from the sentence, press Parameters button:
437
Addition of New Parameters
ATTENTION!
The previously set sentence structure is displayed in Parameters list window and
cannot be edited at this stage.
To add a parameter, which the extraction-from-sentence rules should be defined for,
press Add button of Parameters list window:
In Name field, enter the parameter name.

Note: There should be no spaces in the parameter name; it is advisable to replace
them with underlines. The parameter name cannot be the same as that
of indicators on the Navi-Conning 4000.
438
Position the cursor on the field of the sentence containing the value
of the necessary parameter, and press the right trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter value, select SET AS VALUE line from the pop-up menu.
E.g., for MWV sentence, the first field should contain the value of the wind angle.
The field, which you are editing, will be colored in red.
Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter status, and press the right
trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter status, select SET AS STATUS line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in khaki.
439
Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter reference, and press
the right trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter reference, select SET AS REFERENCE line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in dark blue.
Use Reference Value input box of Reference group to select a reference from
the drop-down list corresponding to the parameter, which is being set
(see paragraphs Parameter Reference and Creating of New Sentences).
E.g., for Wind angle, 0 to 359 degrees, Relative parameter in MWV sentence,
this will be R.
440
If necessary, check Backup officer alarm checkbox; if no acknowledgement is

received within a certain time interval, the Backup officer alarm should be triggered
off; set the necessary time interval in seconds.
If necessary, in the No data scheme group use the Type drop-down list to select
the type of the alarm generated by the absence of the parameter:
None no alarm;
In the Name text box, after the input of the parameter name, the screen displays
automatically the name of the alarm (warning) which will be generated in
the MFD by the absence of this parameter. Edit the alarm (warning) as required.
If necessary, in the Out of range scheme group use the Type drop-dawn list to select
the type of an alarm generated by the parameter exceeding the set values:
None no alarm;
In the Name text box, after the input of the parameter name, the screen displays
automatically the name of the alarm (warning), which will be generated in
the MFD if the parameter exceeds the set values. Edit the alarm (warning)
as required.
441
In the Min and Max input boxes, set the minimum and maximum parameter values.
When these are exceeded, an alarm will be generated.
For parameters such as for example Rudder_Angle, check the Value recalculation
checkbox and set necessary values in the appropriate input boxes (see above
section Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules).
Press OK button.
442
Parameters list window will open up. Input of rule for the extraction of a sentence
parameter is completed. The parameter is added to the table.
Enter the rules of retrieving the next sentence parameter, e.g., Wind Speed Relative,
which contains measurement units. To do this, press Add button:
In Name field, enter the parameter name.

Note: There should be no spaces in the parameter name, it is advisable to replace
them with underlines. The parameter name cannot be the same as that of
indicators on the Navi-Conning 4000.
443
Position the cursor on the field of the sentence containing the value
of the necessary parameter, and press the right trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter value, select SET AS VALUE line from the pop-up menu.
E.g., for MWV sentence, the third field should contain the value of the wind speed.
The field, which you are editing, will be colored in red.
444
Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter units, and press the right
To set the parameter measurement units, select SET AS UNITS line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in green.
Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter status, and press the right
To set the parameter status, select SET AS STATUS line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in khaki.
445
If necessary, in the No data scheme and Out of range scheme groups set the type and
name of alarms for the parameter in question (see above).
Press OK button.
Press OK button.
446
The entered sentence with set parameters is displayed in the table. Input of new
sentence and its parameters in the databases is completed.
Press OK button to save the entered parameters and the sentence in
the appropriate databases, and exit from the System Configuration utility.
Editing of Parameters
In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence whose parameter is required
to be edited, and press Parameters button:
Use the table to select the parameter required to be edited.
447
Press Edit button. Edit the parameter characteristics:
ATTENTION!
In the editing mode, it is possible to change parameter characteristics within
the framework of the existing sentence structure. For the editing of the sentence
structure, see the next paragraph.
Press OK button:
Press OK button.
448
Press OK button to save the entered parameters and the sentence in the appropriate
databases and exit from the System Configuration utility.
Parameters Deletion
In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence whose parameter is required to be
edited, and press Parameters button:
Use the table to select the parameter required to be edited.
449
Press Delete button:
The parameter will be deleted from the table.

Press OK button.
450
Editing Sentence Structure

In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence whose structure is required to be
edited. Press Edit button:
In Sentence header and structure window, you can change start symbol, talker,
sentence name, number of fields and leave or remove checksum. Press Next button:
In Sentence fields description window, you can change the order of sentence fields
and edit their structure by using Value, Unit, Status, or Reference buttons. You may
leave the field empty as required by pressing Empty button.
Press OK button.
451
Set the parameters anew in the edited sentence structure (see the previous paragraph).
Sentences Deletion
In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence, which is required to delete:
452
Check of Settings and Connection of Parameters to Navi-Conning
Press Delete button. The sentence will be deleted from the database:
Press OK button to save the entered parameters and the sentence in the appropriate
databases, and exit from the System Configuration utility.
CHECK OF SETTINGS AND CONNECTION

OF PARAMETERS TO NAVI-CONNING
ATTENTION!
For the parameters (supplied via the WAGO modules or extracted from custom
NMEA sentences), set and saved in the System Configuration utility, to be
processed in the MFD, it is necessary to run the ECDIS task.
Run ECDIS task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\NAVI-SAILOR):
453
Open Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST menu in the tabs
zone of the ECDIS task screen.
Use the tab in the top part of Config panel, which will open up, to switch
to COM trace page:
To display the traffic between the MFD and NMEA Custom external device, press
the button in the Connected sensors column:
The data flow will be shown in the Trace window. If the data is not displayed, it may
not be arriving in the MFD. This can only be checked on the WS which the NMEA
Custom external device is physically connected to. Press the Record COM trace
button:
454
In the COM Trace window which will open up, in Ports list column press the button
with name of port, which NMEA Custom external device connected to:
If the data is supplied to the port but is not processed by the MFD, this means that
the NMEA Custom sentence or extracted parameters set in the System
Configuration utility do not correspond to the received sentence. Check the settings
described in the previous chapter. Also check parameters which are supplied via
the WAGO modules.
455
ANNEX C
Commissioning Table
Product Information
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Product name
Version
Build
License expiration date
Copy registration number
Dongle number
NETWORK CONFIGURATION
Location: System Configuration\INS\Network Settings
Workstations name
Application
Role
Priority
W01
W02
W03
W04
W05
SHIPS SETTINGS
1. Ship setup (System Configuration\INS\Ship Settings)
Parameter
Value
MMSI
Call sign
Name
IMO No
Beam Overall
Length Overall
Bridge Elevation
2. Loading depended ship settings (System Configuration\INS\Ship Settings)

Parameter
In Ballast
Half-loaded
Loaded
F Distance, nm
0.00
0.00
0.00
3. Equipment layout (System Configuration\INS\Ship Settings)

X
Conning station
PS1
PS2
DLOG1 head sensor
DLOG1 stern sensor
DLOG1 head conning
DLOG1 stern conning
External AIS GPS
AIS Internal GPS
Radar External 1
Pivot point
Annex C. Commissioning Table
459
Workstations Settings
4. Equipment height from keel (System Configuration\INS\Ship Settings)

Equipment height from keel
Sounder 1
Sounder 2
WORKSTATIONS SETTINGS
Location: System Configuration\Workstation\Sound, Display and Keyboard
Workstations
name
Alarm sound
Sound
source
Display type
Display model
Display
size, mm
W01
W02
W03
W04
W05
Location: System Configuration\Workstation\Additional settings

Workstations name
Use video accel. for ICE

charts
D3D video accel.
W01
W02
W03
W04
W05
Hardware information
Hardware \ Workstation
Network adapters:
Operating system:
Platform:
Ports (COM & LPT):
Processors:
RAM:
Video_controller:
baseboard:
bios:
diskdrive:
CHARTS SETTINGS
1. Chart Collections (System Configuration\INS\Chart Collections)
Chart Collection
Used
Transas
ENC
ARCS
460
Double ended
vessel stern
conning
NMEA Output
2. Databases (System Configuration\INS\Chart Collections)

Database
Used
Tidal
Tidal currents
Surface currents
NMEA OUTPUT
Location: System Configuration\INS\NMEA output
Sensor
GLL Prec. GGA
Prec. Status
VTG
Prec.
Status
RTE
ZDA
Check
sum
NMEAOUT1
NMEA INPUT
1. NMEA Input (System Configuration\INS\NMEA input)
DLOG1
Transverse water speed
Stern transverse water speed
Stern transverse ground speed
2. NMEA Input Filter (System Configuration\INS\NMEA input filter)

Sensor
Alias
Messages
POS1
DTM=ON
GGA=ON
GLL=ON
RMC=ON
VTG=ON
GBS=ON
POS2
DTM=ON
GGA=ON
GLL=ON
RMC=ON
VTG=ON
GBS=ON
LOG1
VBW=ON
VHW=ON
LOG2
VBW=ON
VHW=ON
GYRO1
HDT= N
VHW=ON
GYRO2
HDT=ON
VHW=ON
SOUNDER1
DBT=ON
DPT=ON
SOUNDER2
DBT=ON
DPT=ON
3. NMEA Input miscelanious (System Configuration\INS\NMEA input filter)

Talker filter
Not processed talkers
SENSORS
Location: System Configuration\Sensors\Sensors
1. COM ports
Sensor
Alias
Workstation
Port
Baud rate
Check sum
461
AIS Settings
2. VIRT ports
Sensor
Alias
Workstation
Port
Check sum
Alias
Workstation
Port
Check sum
3. DCU ports
Sensor
4. TCP ports
Sensor
Alias
Port
AIS SETTINGS
Location: System Configuration\INS\AIS Settings
AIS Settings
UAIS model
Maximum range, nm
Always activated
DR for ais targets
Minimal SOG to activate DR mode for ais targets, kt
Rhotheta RT-202 Settings
Angle correction
MOB Alert Alarm
Seetrack Settings
Seetrack Tracking mode
Advanced abilities
Use AIS MKD (Own AIS device)
Use Advanced Inland Protocol
Use St.-Lawrence Seaway Protocol
Read-Only AIS Device
AIS class settings
Class
Safety Messaging
Binary Messaging
DCU SETTINGS
Location: System Configuration\Sensors\DCU settings
DCU 1-1
nIP 1: 10.8.1.200
nIP 2: 10.8.2.200
DCU 1-2
nIP 1: 10.8.1.201
nIP 2: 10.8.2.201
462
Check sum
Fallback
FALLBACK
Location: System Configuration\INS\Fallback
Fallback
modes
Position
ON
Position
time, sec
Heading
ON
Heading
time, sec
Speed ON
Speed time,
sec
Integrity
check
Sensor
failure
Diff mode
lost
10
Automatic
restore
10
10
10
ALARM OUTPUT SETTINGS

Location: System Configuration\Sensors\Alarm Output Settings
Work
station
Alarm
name
Alarm
host
NMEA
alarm
WAGO
alarm
WAGO
IN Ext.
ACK
Workstation
Signal name
W01
Alarm sound (IN)
W01
Dead man signal (OUT)
WAGO
OUT
ALM
Status
WAGO
OUT
ACK
Status
RS6
I/O
alarm
RS6
I/O
IN
Ext.
ACK
RS6
I/O
OUT
ALM
Status
WAGO contact
Workstation
Alarm sound contact behavior
W01
Silent until new alarm
RS6
I/O
OUT
ACK
Status
BNWAS
alarm
RS6 I/O contact
Timeout, sec.
EXTERNAL ALARM I/O SETTINGS

Location: System Configuration\Sensors\External Alarm I/O settings
WAGO alarm settings
Workstation
Alarm
name
Source
Backup
officer
timeout,
sec
Warning
Alarm
state
IN
contact
Alarm
ack. IN
contact
Alarm
sound
IN
contact
Alarm
ack.
OUT
contact
Alarm
sound
OUT
contact
BNWAS
alarm
Backup
officer
timeout,
sec
Warning
Alarm
state
IN
contact
Alarm
ack. IN
contact
Alarm
sound
IN
contact
Alarm
ack.
OUT
contact
Alarm
sound
OUT
contact
BNWAS
alarm
RS6 I/O alarm settings

Workstation
Alarm
name
Source
463
Track Control Settings
TRACK CONTROL SETTINGS

1. Autopilot type: AP3000 Navis
2. Autopilot is connected to the Workstation, port COM6
3. Ship limits and settings (System Configuration\INS\TrackControl)
Parameter
In Ballast
Half-loaded
Max Speed
Max ROT
Min turn radius
Altering gain
Min maneuver speed
Max rudder angle
Initial Pos-Track
Max XTD
Initial HDG-Track
Max Course deviation
Default radius
SPEED MANEUVERING SETTINGS

1. Full ship loading (System Configuration\INS\Speed maneuvering\Ship loading full)
Basic parameters
Parameter
Value
Max. Speed on FSA, kt

Max. Speed on FA, kt
Max. Speed on MA, kt
Max. Speed on SA, kt
Time 0 Max. Speed on FSA, sec
Time Max. Speed 0 on FSBW, sec
Time Max. Speed 0 on STOP, sec
Stable Turn Speed 15, kt
Conf. Turn Radius 15, nm
Advanced parameters
Annuniciator state
Acceleration
Slowdown
FSBW
FBW
MBW
SBW
STOP
SA
MA
FA
FSA
464
Max. Speed
(kt)
Turn. Speed
15 (kt)
Turn. Speed
35 (kt)
Radar Settings
2. Empty ship loading (System Configuration\INS\Speed maneuvering\Ship loading
empty)
Basic parameters
Parameter
Value
Max. Speed on FSA, kt

Max. Speed on FA, kt
Max. Speed on MA, kt
Max. Speed on SA, kt
Time 0 Max. Speed on FSA, sec
Time Max. Speed 0 on FSBW, sec
Time Max. Speed 0 on STOP, sec
Advanced parameters
Annuniciator state
Acceleration
Slowdown
Max.
Speed (kt)
Turn. Speed
15 (kt)
Turn. Speed
35 (kt)
FSBW
FBW
MBW
SBW
STOP
SA
MA
FA
FSA
RADAR SETTINGS
1. Radar settings adjusted by System Configuration
Location: System Configuration\Radar
Parameter
Scanner Tx1
Scanner Tx2
Workstation connected to scanner

Scanner type
Band
Video polarity
Trigger polarity
Heading polarity
Antenna rotation speed
Bearing number per revolution
Antenna beam width
PM (enable/disable)
Magnetron workout, hrs
RIB6 Primary IP
RIB6 Secondary IP
465
NMEA Custom
2. Radar settings adjusted by NR 4000 utility.

Parameter
Scanner Tx1
Scanner Tx2
Radar-Scanner/BRG-DST offset:
Bearing offset
Distance offset, m
Radar-Scanner/Radar settings:
STC amplitude
STC slope
Tune offset
Video level
Blank sectors/Sector1/Start-End
Blank sectors/Sector2/Start-End
Radar-Scanner/PM settings:
PM open
PM amplitude
Radar-Scanner/Diagnostic:
Magnetron current
NMEA CUSTOM
Sensor NMEA_CUSTOM1
Sensor NMEA_CUSTOM2
ADAPTIVE PREDICTOR
Parameter
Value
Enabled
Rudder data source
RPM data source
Diplacement, t
Ships draft, m
Engine related settings
RPM
Power, KW
Speed, kt
466
Slow ahead
Full ahead
Advanced Predictor
ADVANCED PREDICTOR
Propeller and rudder sources
Parameter/Name
Propeller
/Impeller
RPM
Rudder/
steering
bucket
angle
Propeller
pitch/
Reversing
jet
deflector
Tunnel
thruster
power
Tunnel
thruster
pitch
Tunnel
thruster
force and
pitch
combined
Interceptor
position
data
sources
Parameter 1
(Portside/Forward)
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
(Starboard/Aft)
Model settings
Parameter
Value
Ship model Transas

Ship model SSPA
Wind gust filter:
Enable log files writing
BNWAS
Parameter
Value
Master station
Signal frequency, Hertz
Signal duration, msec
Close "Crew" contacts on "Backup Officer" stage
imeout between "Backup Officer" and "Crew", sec
Alarm transfering timeout, sec
Backup Officer
Crew
Auto Mode
Reset/Emergency Call
Flashing Indicators
467
ANNEX D
Transas Firewall and
Antivirus Protector
Adjustment
WORKSTATIONS SETTINGS
ATTENTION!
Workstation settings should be done only for workstations connected to Transas
Firewall & Antivirus Protector (TFAP)!
Network Settings
Go to SETTINGS/CONTROL PANEL/NETWORK CONNECTIONS/NETWORK 1 PROPERTIES/INTERNET PROTOCOL
(TCP/IP) PROPERTIES and enter the following values for each WS connected to TFAP:
IP address for workstation W01: 10.8.1.101 (for workstation W02: 10.8.1.102;

for workstation W03: 10.8.1.103, and etc.);
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0;
Default gateway (Firewalls internal IP address): 10.8.1.100.
Press OK button.
Press Close button in the window Network 1 Properties.
Annex D. Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector Adjustment
471
Chart Assistant Settings

Run Chart Assistant.
Select Start Chart Assistant for advanced users and press OK button:
Switch to the Catalogue panel:
Click on the Hammer and screw key tool to open up the Display Configuration
dialog:
Go to FTP page and make the following settings:
Enter IP address of Transas FTP server 82.140.75.132;
Enter login;
Enter password;
Checkbox Use FTP for orders transfer must be checked
Press Ok button.
472
Onboard Firewall Settings
Chart Assistant settings should be done on each WS connected to TFAP.
ONBOARD FIREWALL SETTINGS

Startup Procedure
For connection, see TFAPs technical specification enclosed in Chapter 3.
There are two main setup options: Network setup and Local setup.
Network Setup
Connect TFAP power and Internal LAN port to WS LAN1 directly or via
Ethernet switch;
Startup TFAP on main switch Internet Breaker;
Wait for 5 minutes for computer loading;
Use any workstation and start Internet Explorer;
In address field type http://10.8.1.100 and continue network settings as

described in paragraph Network Settings below.
Local Setup
Connect keyboard, mouse and display to TFAP;
Startup TFAP on main switch Internet Breaker;
Wait for TFAP to load;
Click Launch Client icon in lower left corner;
Continue network settings as described in paragraph Network Settings below.
473
Network Settings
Login
In the open window, enter login and password:
In the field Username, type username;
In the field Password, enter password;
Press Login button.
Configuration
In the open window, perform the following steps:
474
Press Config tab below Transas logo;
Below Config tab press Networking button.
Click on edit External Interface:
Depending on what type of information you have received from vessels

IT department choose either dynamic or static from Config Type drop-down
list.
475
Dynamic Setting
Configuration
476
Connect External LAN cable to communication equipment;
Select dynamic from Config Type drop-down list;
Check Is WAN Interface checkbox;
Press Renew Lease button and wait for new settings:
Check in the Current status field that you have received IP address, Netmask,
Gateway and DNS:
Leave Internal interface settings unchanged.
Troubleshooting
If you have not received any data, please verify in the Interfaces page that you
are connected:
It will state connected and the circle will be green instead of grey.
Click on edit External Interface to go to Configure Interface page and try

again with Renew Lease.
If you have not received any data, wait for 15 minutes and check Current
Status.
Unplug and plugin network cable, and make sure that it is green circle on
external interface.
Check with vessels IT department that DHCP server is working.
477
Static Settings
Select static option from Config Type drop-down list and enter values that
you have received from vessels IT department:
Configuration
You must have received IP address, Gateway and DNS number;
In the field Primary IP Address and Netmask, enter IP address and Netmask
received from vessels IT department;
In field Default Gateway, enter Gateway IP address;
In the field Primary DNS Server enter DNS address, if not specified
use 8.8.8.8;
In the field Secondary DNS Server enter DNS address, if not specified
use 4.2.2.2;
Leave Internal Interface settings unchanged.
Troubleshooting
Please verify in Interfaces page that you are connected;
It will state connected and the circle will be green instead of grey;
For complete test/verification see paragraph Troubleshooting and Test
Connection below.
478
Troubleshooting and Test Connection

Internet Connectivity Test
Press Troubleshooting tab and perform the following steps:
Click on Connectivity Test:
Click on Run Test:
If Test Successful! appears you have Internet connection:
479
Press Close button in the window Run Test. TFAP is ready for use;
If test fails, try Ping Test below.
Ping Test
480
Click on Ping Test:
Enter Default Gateway IP in address field (for Default Gateway IP, see
Configure Interface page) and click on Run Test:
If ping to gateway address fail, there are problems with IP settings or

Network cable;
If ping to gateway are successful ping any external IP address, ex 8.8.8.8;
If ping to ex. 8.8.8.8 is ok, there are problems with DNS but hopefully system will
be OK. DNS is not needed for TFAP or MFD.
Transas Chart Server Test

Click on Connection Test;
481
482
In the field IP address enter 82.140.75.17;
In the field Port enter 9000 and Click Run Test:
If test successful both TFAP and Chart Server is working correct.
ANNEX E
Upgrade RS3/RS4
to RS6B/RS6 Computers
RS6B/RS6 Computer with DRSE-00-0017 Extension Board (Additional Serial Ports)
RS6B/RS6 COMPUTER WITH DRSE-00-0017 EXTENSION

BOARD (ADDITIONAL SERIAL PORTS)
General
RS6 computer with additional extension serial board is delivered for upgrade of RS3
and RS4 computers.
The serial extension board has three Dsub connectors (see figure below):
J3 Dsub-37 connector 2 x NMEA0183, 2 x configured as NMEA0183

or RS232;
J4 Dsub-37 connector 2 x NMEA0183, 2 x configured as NMEA0183

or RS232;
J5 Dsub-62 connector 8 x RS232.
Fig. 191. RS6 computer. Extension boards connectors layout
The board is connected inside the RS6 to the motherboard with a 26 pin ribbon cable.
If the ribbon cable is connected to the header J1 marked 168-mode, the J5 is active.
If the ribbon cable is connected to the header J2 marked 114-mode, the J3 and J4
are active.
Annex E. Upgrade RS3/RS4

to RS6B/RS6 Computers
485
RS6B/RS6 Computer with DRSE-00-0017 Extension Board (Additional Serial Ports)
Ports Configuration
Each configurable port has 4 jumpers to move to change from NMEA0183 to RS232.
Fig. 192. RS6 computer. Ports RS232/RS422

configuration jumpers
The jumpers to select NMEA0183 or RS232 are placed between the J1 and J2
headers inside the RS6.
Fig. 193. RS6 computer. Jumpers position
486
ANNEX F
Transas Scanners
Installation and Adjustment
Installation of Scanners 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast
INSTALLATION OF SCANNERS 10/25 KW X-BAND UP MAST

Introduction
performance check of SU70-10N/S and SU70-25H scanner units. The diagrams of
connection between the scanner and MFD console are provided in Annex H.
For installation PM 30-02 units, see Chapter 1, section Installation of Transas
Network Scanners 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast, paragraph Performance Monitor
PM 30-02 Installation.
Technical Data
Table 61. Scanner unit technical specification
Peak power (normal)
10 kW (SU70-10N/S);
25 kW (SU70-25H)
Radiation frequency
9410 30 MHz
Pulses
Range, nm
Pulse Width, ns
Pulse Repetition
Frequency, Hz
0.25
80(SP)
3200
0.5
80(SP)
3200
0.75
80(SP)
3200
1.5
80(SP)
3200
300(MP)
1600
3.0
300(MP)
1600
6.0
300(MP)
1600
600(LP)
800
600(MP)
800
1200(LP)
500
24.0
1200(LP)
500
48.0
1200(LP)
500
12.0
Modulator
solid state
Receiver type
solid state, logarithmic
Dynamic rage
> 100 dB
Intermediate Frequency (I.F.)
60 MHz
I.F. bandwidth
20 MHz with short pulse and medium;

4 MHz with long and extra long pulses (with 10% tolerance)
Front End
microwave integrated circuit
Noise figure
4 dB
Duplexer
ferrite circulator with solid state limiter diode
Operative temperature
from -25C to +55C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +35C
Weight
14.5 kg
Annex F. Transas Scanners Installation and Adjustment
489
Table 62. Scanner antennas specification

Array Model
AU11-04N
AU11-06N
AU11-07N
Length
4 feet
6 feet
7.5 feet
Type
Slotted wave guide
Frequency band
X-band, I = 3.2 cm, frequency range 9410 50 MHz
Polarization
Horizontal beam width
to -3dB
Horizontal
1.8 0.1
1.25 0.1
Vertical beam width

to -3dB
1.05 0.1
25 10%
Side lobes within 10
<-24dB
<-26dB
<-26dB
Side lobes outside 10
<-28dB
<-30dB
<-30dB
Gain
>27dBi
>29dBi
>30dBi
Weight
3.8 kg
5.8 kg
8.2 kg
The mechanical installation of SU70-10N/S and SU70-25H scanner units consists of
fitting and fixing the unit.
The installation area should not be subject to high temperatures or excessive vibrations.
Fixing should be carried out so as to allow easy access to the unit for assuring
the easiest performance of maintenance operations.
Dimensions and weight are specified in the figure below.
Fig. 194. Scanner unit dimensions
For the scanner unit installation, it would be helpful to have a boring template.
Fig. 195. Platform for scanner unit
Fix scanner unit after boring fixing bump contact. The installation procedure with all
the mechanical accessories is outlined in following picture.
490
Fig. 196. Scanner unit installation scheme
Check that the scanner unit seal is well lubricated with silicone grease.
Pull down the scanner cover; tighten with care the cover fixing bolts. Be sure
to avoid water infiltration.
The following procedure should be used to install the antenna unit:
Remove the protective cover both from the antenna waveguide and from
the waveguide transition located in the scanner;
Lubricate with grease the supporting base of the mast and the antenna mounting
surface;
Insert the antenna in order to match the waveguide with the waveguide transition;
Mount the radome assembly using four M8x30 screws with a plain washer
and a spring washer.
Antenna unit should be installed:
As high as possible;
As far as possible from the obstacles which could cause shadow sectors on
the radar picture;
The minimum distance between the Mast and X-band array is (6 feet)/2+200 mm.
Fig. 197. Distance between the mast and scanner unit
491
Fig. 198. 4 feet antenna AU11-04N/S dimensional drawing
Fig. 199. 6 feet antenna AU11-06N/S dimensional drawing
Fig. 200. 7.5 feet antenna AU11-07N/S dimensional drawing
The mechanical installation of Power supply unit ASU40000 and optional RU40-24
Rectifier unit consists in fitting and fixing the unit. Dimensions are specified in the figures
below.
492
Fig. 201. Power supply unit ASU40000 dimensions
Fig. 202. Rectifier unit RU40-24 dimensions
493
Electrical installation consists of:
Internal connection MFD;
Preparing and connecting CB20 (CB15) cable between SU70-10N/S (SU7025H) scanner unit and ASU40000 Power supply unit;
Preparing and connecting power supply of ASU40000 unit;
Preparing and connecting the interconnecting cable between ASU40000

and MFD.
Connect the MFD components to each other by using the appropriate cables
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex H and
Annex Q):
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Block diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Connection diagram;
RS6 Computer. Connectors Layout (for connection RS6B, see

Chapter 1, section Workstation Installation, paragraph RS6B Computer
Installation).
Connect power supply cables to Monitor, Computer, Keyboard, RIB6, ASU40000

(to optional RU 40-24 unit or 24 VDC PSU Sailor, UPS6, DCU6, WAGO set of
modules) via X1 Connection Board mounted in the console as shown in the
following diagrams (see Annex H):
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Power Supply Distribution.

Connection Diagram.

Scanner connection with ASU40000 Power supply unit is made with CB20 or CB15
cable for SU70-10N/S scanner unit and CB15 cable for SU70-25H scanner unit.
CB20 (CB15) cable is connected via an organic connector which it is supplied with,
to J2 connector of ASU40000 unit.
Fig. 203. Power supply unit ASU40000 appearance
On the side of SU70-10N/S scanner unit, the cable is prepared as per the directions
(see Annex G) and is connected to scanner unit as per the tables below and
Scanner 10 kW X-Band Up Mast Units. Connection Diagram presented
in Annex H.
494
Table 63. CB20 cable connection of scanner unit SU70-10N/S J8 terminal board
SU70-10N/S
J8Terminal board
1
2
Function
Conductor conductor
section (sq. mm)
ASU40000 J2 SIDE
HRS 24 p. f. p.
P.MOT
BLACK/BROWN 0.5
P.MOT
BLACK/RED 0.5
N.MOT
BLACK/ORANGE 0.5
N.MOT
BLACK/YELLOW 0.5
GND
BLACK/GREEN 0.5
GND
BLACK/BLUE 0.5
+24V
BLACK/VIOLET 0.5
+12V
BLACK/GREY 0.5
-12V
BLACK/WHITE 0.5
SU70-10N/S
J9Terminal board
Function
Conductor conductor
section (sq. mm)
ASU40000 J2 SIDE
HRS 24 p. f. p.
ACP
BROWN 0.082
11
HL
RED 0.082
12
TX+ >
BLUE 0.082
16
10
TX- >
VIOLET 0.082
17
12
RX+ <
YELLOW 0.082
14
13
RX- <
GREEN 0.082
15
TRG-GND
BRAID CABLE 2
23
TRG
COAX 2
24
GND_VD
BRAID CABLE 3
22
VD
COAX 3
21
SU70-10N/S
J8Terminal board
Function
Conductor conductor
section (sq. mm)
ASU40000 J2 SIDE
HRS 24 p. f. p.
P.MOT
RED (AWG14)
2
3
P.MOT
ORANGE (AWG16)
N.MOT
WHITE (AWG14)
N.MOT
GREY (AWG16)
GND
BLACK (AWG14)
GND
BLACK8 (AWG24)
+24V
GREEN (AWG14)
+12V
BROWN (AWG14)
-12V
YELLOW (AWG16)
Note: The wires connected to pins 1, 2 must before be soldered together

and then connected to pin 1. The wires connected to pins 3, 4 must before
be soldered together and then connected to pin 3.
495
SU70-10N/S
J9Terminal board
Function
Conductor conductor
section (sq. mm)
ASU40000 J2 SIDE
HRS 24 p. f. p.
ACP
BLACK1 (AWG24)
11
HL
BLACK2 (AWG24)
12
TX+ >
BLACK6 (AWG24)
16
10
TX- >
BLACK7 (AWG24)
17
12
RX+ <
BLACK4 (AWG24)
14
13
RX- <
BLACK5 (AWG24)
15
TRG-GND
BRAID CABLE 2
23
TRG
COAX 2
24
GND_VD
BRAID CABLE 3
22
VD
COAX 3
21
On the side of SU 70-25H scanner unit, the cable is prepared as per the directions
(see Annex G) and is connected to SU70-25H scanner unit as shown in the tables
below.
Table 67. Connection of scanner unit SU70-25H J8A Terminal board
Function
P.MOT
AWG14/RED
P.MOT
AWG16/ORANGE
N.MOT
AWG14/WHITE
Conductor conductor
2
section (mm )
ASU40000 J2 SIDE
HRS 24 p. f. p.
SU70-25H
J8A Terminal board
N.MOT
AWG16/GREY
GND
AWG14/BLACK
+24 V
AWG14/GREEN
+12 V
AWG14/BROWN
11
-12 V
AWG16/YELLOW
13
GND
AWG24/BLACK8
Table 68. Connection of scanner unit SU70-25H J8B Terminal board

SU 70-25H
J8B Terminal board
Function
Conductor conductor
2
section (mm )
ASU40000 J2 SIDE
HRS 24 p. f. p.
ACP
AWG24/BLACK1
11
HL
AWG24/BLACK2
12
18
TX+ >
AWG24/BLACK6
16
20
TX- >
AWG24/BLACK7
17
24
RX+ <
AWG24/BLACK4
14
26
RX- <
AWG24/BLACK5
15
14
VIDEO
COAX 3
21
16
GND
BRAID CABLE 3
22
12
GNDA
BRAID CABLE 2
23
10
TRG
COAX 2
24
For electrical installation of power supply of the unit ASU40000 see the following table.
Table 69. Connection of PSU ASU40000 J1 connector
ASU40000 J1
NUVAL 3 p.m.p.
496
Function
Conductor
+24 V
2.5 mm
CHASSIS
GND
2.5 mm
MFD is connected to ASU40000 power supply unit with EB540269 cable supplied
together with ASU40000 (see the figure below). The cable is connected via an
organic connector which it is supplied with, to connector J3 of ASU4000 unit.
On the side of MFD, the cable is prepared and connected as per the table and
MFD Interface. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram drawing
(see Annex H).
Table 70. Connection of PSU ASU40000 J3 connector
ASU40000 J3
CANNON 25 p. f. p.
Function
24
Led K
11
Led A
25
On -
12
On +
20
GND
21
GND
GND
TRG
19
TRG return
Video
18
Video return
ACP
HL
TX+
15
TX-
RX+
14
RX-
Conductor
Coax 50 ohm
Coax 50 ohm
497
Fig. 204. Interface cable EB540269
Optional RU40-24 Rectifier unit transforms the input supply voltage (220 VAC or
115 VAC according to a change voltage switch located at the bottom at the unit) in a
continuous voltage 24 VDC through the power supply unit PWP-701 located inside unit.
The electrical installation consists of preparing the power supply cable through
three wires of 2,5 sq. mm. of section inserted into J1 connector through 3 spade
lugs, according to the indications of the local label.
The power supply could be selected between 220 VAC or 115 VAC, according
to the position of a dedicated switch located at the bottom of the unit.
In case of change of input voltage, the line fuses should be: 2.5A for input voltage
of 220 VAC and 5A for input voltage of 115 VAC. The unit is supplied by the
manufacturer with a default voltage of 220 and relevant fuses. The output voltage
of 24 VDC is pick out through J2 terminal board taking care of the right polarity.
For connection, see Installation Manual for this unit.
498
Installation of Scanners SRT 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast
Connection of MFD System to ASU40000 Unit

This paragraph will further describe the equipment, which MFD System is comprised
of, its connection.
Connect to RIB6 the EB540269 multi-conductor cable from the ASU40000 Transas
Interface/Power supply unit, as shown in MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up
Mast. Connection Diagram, and MFD Interface. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up
Mast. Wiring Diagram drawings (see Annex H):
4. Connect the labled P3 (wire 6) coaxial cable from the multi-conductor cable
to J3 (Video) connector of RIB6 unit.
5. Connect the labled P2 (wire 7) coaxial cable from the multi-conductor cable
to J2 (Trigger) connector of RIB6 unit.
6. Connect the marked ACP (Bearing) wire (8), HL (Heading) wire (10), and two
GND wires (9, 11) from the multi-conductor cable to X10 connector of RIB6 unit.
7. Connect the labled Rx+, Rx-, Tx+, Tx-, GND wires (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) from
the multi-conductor cable to X9 connector of RIB6 unit.
and MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram.
INSTALLATION OF SCANNERS SRT 12/25 KW X-BAND UP

MAST
Introduction
and performance check of the scanner units. The diagram of connection between
the scanner and MFD console is provided in MFD Two WS. Scanners SRT X-Band
Up Mast and S-Band Down Mast. Block Diagram, and MFD WS1. Scanner SRT XBand Up Mast. Connection Diagram (see Annex J).
X-Band scanner 12/25 kW manufactured with up mast transceiver location and 6 or
9 feet long antenna is used for work with the MFD application.
For 12 kW scanner speed setting HIGH (45 RPM) or LOW (28 RPM) is selected
in System Configuration utility and in RADAR task (see Chapter 2).
The scanner characteristics are given in the table below:
Table 71. X-Band Antenna Group specification
Dimensions
Length/Width/Height
Weight
Power
Swing
circle
Operating
temperature
Relative
humidity
364534391 mm
1800534466 mm
with 6 ft antenna.
2650534466 mm
with 9 ft antenna
35+5 kg with
6 ft antenna.
35+9 kg with
9 ft antenna
115-220 V/
50-60 HZ
1800 mm
with 6 ft
antenna.
2650 mm
with 9 ft
antenna
-25C
+55C
Up to
95% at
+40C
The equipments power supply, 48 VDC is given by the SRT Adapter Box from
the ship main line.
499
ATTENTION!
Technical Data
Table 72. SRT X-Band up mast transceiver unit specification
Parameter
Data
Nominal peak power (kW)
12 or 25
Transceiver I/N
SRT/25-002 for 25 kW
SRT/12-003 for 12 kW
Operating frequency (MHz)
9375 30 or 9410 30 (X Band)
Pulse length (nsec.)
60250800
PRF (Hz)
30001500750
Modulator
MOSFET Solid state
IF amplifier
Logarithmic
IF dynamic (dB)
100 (+30 pre STC)
IF center frequency (MHz)
60
IF bandwidth (MHz):
short pulse:
medium pulse:
long pulse:
20
4.8
1.5
Overall noise figure (nominal dB)
MDS on long pulse (dBm)
-110
Overall at receiver level
-100
At IF level
-110
Table 73. SRT X-Band up and down mast Antenna&Driver specification

Antenna model
6X
9X
Antenna Unit Type I/N
ANT6X-001
ANT9X-001
Driver & Transceiver I/N
SRT/25-002
SRT/12-003
SRT/25-002
SRT/12-003
Antenna type
End-fed-slotted wave guide
Antenna length (feet/mm.)
6'/1800
9'/2650
Antenna swing circle (feet/mm.)
1800
2650
Frequency (MHz)
93259425
Polarization
Horizontal
Gain (dB)
29
31
Horizontal beam width at -3 dB
1.35
0.9
Vertical beam width at -3 dB
22
Horizontal side lobes within 10 (dB)
-27
-26
Horizontal side lobes outside 10 (dB)
-30
-30
VSWR
PPR
500
Better than 1.20

128/1024 with encoder
Nominal Rotation speed (RPM)
>40
Nominal Wind resistance (KT)
100
Table 74. SRT X-Band up mast general specification

Width
364 mm
Depth
534 mm
Height
391 mm
Weight antennas 6/9 feet
5/9 kg
Weight Pedestal with Transceiver
35 kg
Required Power
Standard configuration
115-220 VAC/50-60 Hz
Peak Power consumption 12 kW/25 kW under 100 kn wind
250/380 W
Medium Power consumption (from minimum configuration

12 kW/6X to 25 kW/9X HSC
75/130 W
Environmental Data
-25C/+55C
Storage temperature
-25C/+70C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +40
Water resistance, Salt spray, Vibrations etc
As per IEC 60945
100 knots
Table 75. X-Band down mast Transceiver specification

Width
476 mm
Depth
340 mm
Height
585 mm
Weight
25 kg
Required Power
115/220 VAC
Power consumption
200 VA
Environmental Data
-15C/+55C
Storage temperature
-25C/+70C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +40
As per IEC 60945
Characteristics
Modulator
Nominal Peak Power
25 kW
Frequency range
93459405 MHz
60/250/800 ns
3000/1500/750 Hz
IF amplifier
Logarithmic
IF centre frequency
50 MHz
IF- Bandwidth
1620/45/1.52 MHz
3.5 dB
The 12/25 kW SRT X-Band up mast scanners consist of following units and type
designations:
X-Band Turning unit with 25 kW transceiver: SRT/PED-001 with SRT/25-002, or

X-Band Turning unit with 12 kW transceiver (standard speed): SRT/PED-001
with SRT/12-002 or X-Band Turning unit with 12 kW transceiver (high speed):
SRT/PED-002 with SRT/12-003;
501
6 or 9 feet antenna: ANT6X-001 or ANT9X-001;
SRT Adapter Box with transceiver power supply: SRTAB-001;
Performance Monitor arm: 304316A1;
Safety Switch (built-in SRTAB-001).
For handling and installation principles of the antenna unit, see appropriate items
of section Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band UP Mast in Chapter 1 and
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL document supplied as part of the equipment
delivery set.
Pedestal with Transceiver

Prepare the platform for mounting of the pedestal, with its built in transceiver.
Hole diameters and distances is evident from figure below:
Fig. 205. 12/25 kW X-Band up mast Antenna Group dimension drawing
The pedestal should be mounted with its lid hinges pointed forward and cable glands
pointed astern. However the antenna swinging plane must be horizontal in all
directions when ship is upright on even keel. Consider giving ample space for
service, especially astern of the antenna group. If such space can not be achieved
then contact manufacturer for installation alternatives.
Note: The protection waveguide covers on the antenna, and pedestal must not be
removed until when mounting the antenna. Anyhow the waveguide joints may
not be uncovered when the antenna is not mounted.
Antenna
The antenna and the pedestal must be run up the mast separately and then
assembled. The TXRX should not be lifted with the antenna already mounted.
502
The mounting procedure of the antenna to the pedestal consists of following steps:
Remove the waveguide protections on the antenna and pedestal;
Mount the antenna over its support, check that the waveguide connections are
on the same side. The antenna assumes the right position following two
reference plugs;
Rest the antenna on the pedestal and tighten the 4 bolts holding the antenna.
The tightening couple is 22 Nm.

To install the PM arm proceed as follows:
Fit the PM arm in the SRT external PM-Monitor connector;
The arm shall be angled upwards.
SRT Adapter Box

SRT Adapter Box with transceiver power supply must be installed in an operative
room or area protected against external weather conditions and far from heaters or
any warm surface. The interconnecting cables shall be located in the best way and
not obstructing the area. Special care is required to guarantee access for
maintenance actions during the unit operation; therefore is mandatory to evaluate,
as appropriate, free surrounding space requirements.
Fig. 206. SRT Adapter Box SRTAB-001 dimensional drawing
Safety Switch (External is Optional)

Standard safety switch delivered as an option to X-band is NOT suitable for
installation out door in open air.
Preferably switch shall be located inside bridge and close to door, or any other pass
way leading to antenna. If switch must be located outdoors a weather protecting
cover must be manufactured on both sides and top of switch. Any switch without
such cover must be opened and inspected for water ingress and corrosion before
relocated or weather protection is arranged.
The switch must be mounted with the cable glands pointing down.
Connect the cable as described in paragraph Electrical Installation.
503
The electrical installation of the SRT consists of cabling and connection to terminals,
as described below.
Multi-core Cables
See paragraph Multi-core Cable 55X456P001 Handling enclosed in Annex G.
Note: Use the installation materials for the multi-core cable which are delivered by
the manufacturer to ensure proper connection.
The composite multi-core cable 304330AX with the SRT connector on one side is
used for connection between Scanner unit (Main Connector) and SRT Adapter Box
(TB2, J13, SRT Power Supply). This cable is delivered to a max length of 60 m.
The cable includes wires for Power, combined Video, Safety switch signals.
The multi-core cable 55X456P001 (4 twisted pair + 2 Coax + 8 wire) is used for
connection between SRT Adapter Box (TB1, J4, J5) and Radar processor (RIB6).
Normally this cable is delivered to a length of 30 m. The 55X456P001 is the cable
used in the 304330AX cable assembly. The cable 55X456P001 includes wires
for Power, Video, Trigger and Antenna data.
It is therefore required to handle these cables with particular care.
The SRT unit end of the multi-core cable 304330AX shall be connected to the Main
Connector as shown in figures below:
Fig. 207. Cable termination
Fig. 208. Main connector drawing
504
Fig. 209. SRT X-Band scanner up mast connection drawing
Grounding
Connect a tinned braided copper wire (>25 mm2) between the GROUND TERMINAL
on the SRT and the radar mast.
Additional Safety Switch

For electric connection of the optional safety switch, make the following actions:
Check the safety switch is placed as described in paragraph Mechanical Installation;
Connect the two poles of the safety switch to pin 3-4 of TB4 placed in
SRT Adapter Box;
Make sure carefully that the switch is closed in I (On) position and open
in 0 (Off) position.

supplying the unit with power and before performing the System Setup. Perform
the following procedure:

Carefully check the integrity of the fuses.
Ships Power Voltage

The SRT should be connected to ships main voltage trough the SRT Adapter Box.
Cable section shall be 4 mm to support 15 A Current.
Connection of MFD System to Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast

of, its installation and connection.
505
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex J
and Annex Q):
MFD Two WS. Scanners SRT X-Band Up Mast and S-Band Down Mast.
Block Diagram;
MFD WS1. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
Cables List;
RS6 Computer. Connectors Layout (for connection RS6B, see Chapter 1,
section Workstation Installation, paragraph RS6B Computer Installation
below);
MFD WS1. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram.
2. Connect the multi-core cable 304330AX to SRT Adapter Box as shown in
the figure below (see also Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. SRT Adapter
Box-Antenna Group Connection diagram and MFD Interface. Scanner
SRT X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram presented in Annex J):
Fig. 210. SRT X-Band scanner connection drawing
3. Connect SRT Adapter Box (TB1, J4, J5) and RIB6 (J2, J3, X9, X10) by means
of the 55X456P001 multi-conductor cable as shown in MFD Interface. Scanner
SRT X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram and MFD WS1. Scanner SRT X-Band
Up Mast. Connection Diagram (see Annex J).
4. Connect wires 18 and 17 to Power 24 VDC from UPS or 24 VDC Power supply unit
as per CSS-TRANSAS Interface. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram.
5. Connect power 115/230 VAC from ships main to SRT Adapter Box.
and MFD WS1. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram.
506
Preventive Action During Service Attendance on SRT

1. It is recommended to check the position of HV cables on SRT MOS PCB, on
some old unit the cable is secured to a metal spacer. We experienced discharge
between Cable and the Spacer. Every time you do service on SRT transceiver,
please check the position and if it is required, move it as showed in the below
pictures:
507
2. Some SRT X-band units have not properly attached BNC connectors from
factory. It is required to check this during installation and also strongly advised
to inspect during any service on installed units. Only coaxial cables between
Power MOS and Control PCB are affected. If possible to separate connector
from cable, use proper crimping tool to firmly press connector to cable.
508
3. During a service on SRT UP MAST system, it is recommended to check the

orientation of the gas spring inside SRT, on some old unit the gas spring is
mounted reverse. Every time you do service on SRT transceiver, please check
the orientation and if it is required, modify it as showed in the below pictures.
It is recommended to check if the Gas Spring is mounted in the right position

and if the Gas Spring supports are in good condition, as shown in the following
pictures below.
In this picture the Gas Spring mounted in wrong position:
509
The thicker part of the Gas Spring must be in the highest part of the Transmitter.
The thinnest part of the Gas Spring must be in the lowest part of the Transmitter
as shown in this picture:
In this picture you can see the Gas Spring mounted in the right position:
See also Chapter 1, section Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast,

paragraph Preventive Action During Service Attendance on RTM MOS.
510
Installation of Scanners 30 kW S-Band and 25 kW X-Band Down Mast
INSTALLATION OF SCANNERS 30 KW S-BAND

AND 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST
Introduction
performance check of the down mast scanner units. The diagrams of connection
between the X-band scanner and MFD console is provided in MFD WS. Scanner 25
kW X-Band Down Mast. Block Diagram, MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down
Mast. Connection Diagram (see Annex K). The diagrams of connection between
the S-band scanner and MFD console is provided in MFD Two WS. Scanners SRT
X-Band Up Mast and S-Band Down Mast. Block Diagram, and MFD WS2. Scanner
S-Band Down Mast. Connection Diagram (see Annex J).
Two scanners manufactured with down mast transceiver location are used for work with
the MFD application. The scanners characteristics are given in the table below:
Table 76. Scanners specification
Scanner
Dimensions
(LxWxH)
Weight
Power
X-band 25 kW
476340585 mm
25 kg
S-band 30 kW
476340585 mm
Swing
circle
Operating
temperature
Relative
humidity
115220 V/
5060 HZ
-15C+55C
Up to 95%
at +40C
30 kg
220/380 VAC,
3Ph, 50 Hz or
255/440 VAC,
3Ph, 60 Hz
200 VA
-15C+55C
Up to 95%
at +40C
Transceiver
X/S-Bands Antenna Group

X-band 25 kW
364536391 mm
1800536466 mm
with 6 ft antenna.
2650536466 mm
with 9 ft antenna
33+5 kg
6 ft ant.
33+9 kg
9 ft ant.
115-220 V/
50-60 HZ
1800 mm
6 ft ant.
2650 mm
9 ft ant.
-25C+55C
Up to 95%
at +40C
S-band 30 kW
6654101000 mm
130 kg +
90 kg
12 ft ant.
220/380 VAC, 3700 mm

3Ph, 50 Hz or
255/440 VAC,
3Ph, 60 Hz
200 VA
-25C+55C
Up to 95%
at +40C
6 feet and 9 feet-long antennas are used for X-band scanner 25 kW; 12 feet-long
antenna is used for S-band scanner 30 kW. The antennas and pedestals characteristics
are given below.
The transceivers is powered from ships supply to its own built in power supply, and
is also forwarding power to, and communicates with the connected Antenna Group
and MFD.
The SRT pedestal of the X-Band scanner is supplied by the SRT Adapter Box.
X-band transceiver is connected to its Antenna Group by waveguide. The installation
of that wave-guide is described in paragraph Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast
Waveguide Installation (see Annex G).
S-band transceiver is connected to its Antenna Group by a special Coaxial Cable.
The installation of that coaxial cable is described in paragraph Scanner S-Band
Down Mast Coaxial Cable Installation (see Annex G).
511
For more detailed description of the scanners installation procedure see

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL document for each scanner. This document
ATTENTION!
Technical Data
Table 77. Scanner 30 kW S-Band down mast pedestal technical specification
Width
665 mm
Depth
410 mm
Height
1000 mm
Weight
130 kg
Required Power
220/380 VAC, 3, 50 Hz or
255/440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
Power consumption
4200 VA
Rotating speed
>20 Antenna RPM
Environmental Data
-25C/+55C
Storage temperature
-25C/+70C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +40
Water resistance, Salt spray, Vibrations etc
As per IEC 60945
100 knots
Table 78. Scanner 30 kW S-Band down mast transceiver unit specification

Length
476 mm
Depth
340 mm
Height
585 mm
Weight
30 kg
Required Power
Alternatives
220/380 VAC, 3, 50 Hz or
Power consumption
200 VA
255/440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
Environmental Data
-15C/+55C
Storage temperature
-25C/+70C
Relative humidity
Up to 95% at +40
As per IEC 60945
Characteristics
512
Modulator
Nominal Peak Power
30 kW
Frequency range
30403060 MHz
60/250/800 ns
3000/1500/750 Hz
IF amplifier
Logarithmic
IF centre frequency
50 MHz
IF- Bandwidth
1620/45/1.52 MHz
3.5 dB
Table 79. 12 feet S-Band Antenna specification

Parameter
Data
Array Type
End Fed Slotted Waveguide
Frequency
30403060 MHz
Polarization
Vertical
Horizontal Beam-Width At -3 dB
Vertical Beam-Width At -3 dB
22
Horizontal Side Lobes:10 better than

Outside 10 better than
26 dB
30 dB
Environmental Conditions
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Rain Proof
Wind Speed
-25C though to +55C

-25C though to +70C
Up to 95% at 40C
According to IEC 945 Chapter 8, paragraph 8
100 knots
Dimensions (LWH)
Weight
Swing circle
3662550340 mm
90 kg
3700 mm
For 25 kW scanners technical characteristics, see above section Installation of

Scanners SRT 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast, paragraph Technical Data.
Transceivers and SRT Adapter Box for X-Band Transceiver Power
Supply Installation
The transceivers and SRT Adapter box for X-band transceiver power supply must be
installed in an operative room or area protected against external weather conditions
and far from heaters or any warm surface. The interconnecting cables shall be
located in the best way and not obstructing the area. Special care is required to
guarantee access for maintenance actions during the unit operation; therefore is
mandatory to evaluate, as appropriate, free surrounding space requirements.
To obtain the best working conditions we recommend that the room/area be provided
with an air conditioning system and also to guarantee a comfortable ambient to
operative and maintenance personnel. Temperature and Relative Humidity shall be kept
within the limits of the Environmental Data as described in the table above.
The transceiver can be installed in the electrical locker, or in other accessible location on
the bridge, respecting the environmental conditions. The transceiver shall be mounted
by using the four holes at the back top and bottom of the transceiver. Bolts/screws used,
must be of stainless steel M12. Tightening couple is 74 Nm.
Dimensions are specified in the figures below.
513
Fig. 211. S-band transceiver type 09N-010 installation
Fig. 212. X-Band transceiver type 09N-009 installation
514
Fig. 213. SRT Adapter Box (SRTAB-002) for transceiver power supply dimensional drawing
S-Band Antenna Group Including 12 Feet Antenna

and Pedestal Installation
For handling and installation principles of antenna unit, see appropriate items of
section Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band UP Mast in Chapter 1 and
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL document supplied as part of the equipment
delivery set.
The S-band Antenna Group consists of following units and type designations:
Turning unit 03R-039/B;
12 feet antenna 02R-039B;
Performance Monitor arm 303813A1;
Safety switch 74X376P001.
Pedestal
Prepare the platform for mounting of the pedestal. Hole diameters and distances are
evident from the following drawings.
Fig. 214. 30 kW S-Band down mast Antenna Group dimensional drawing
515
Fig. 215. Platform for S-Band Antenna Group pedestal
The pedestal should be mounted with front as evident from dimension drawing.
However the antenna swinging plane must be horizontal in all directions when ship
is upright on even keel. Consider giving ample space for service, especially astern
of the antenna group.
Note: The plastic protection cover on the pedestal rotary joint must not be removed
before mounting the antenna. Anyhow the rotary joint must not be left
uncovered when the antenna is not mounted.
Antenna
For installation antenna, see appropriate item in Chapter 1, section Installation of
Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast, paragraph Mechanical Installation.
Safety Switch
For mechanical installation safety switch, see appropriate item in Chapter 1, section
Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast paragraph Mechanical
Installation.
After installation, connect cable as described below in paragraph Electrical
Installation.
For installation PM arm, see appropriate item in Chapter 1, section Installation of
Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast, paragraph Mechanical Installation.
After installation, connect cable as described below in paragraph Electrical
Installation.
Coax RF Cable Installation
The RF-signal between the transceiver and the antenna is guided through a special
Coax RF cable. Handling and installation of that cable is described in paragraph
Scanner S-Band Down Mast Coaxial Cable Installation (see Annex G).
Note: The Coax cable shall not be to a radius less than 200 mm and must be
handled with care during the installation.
X-Band Antenna Group Including 6 (9) Feet Antenna

and Pedestal Installation
For handling and installation principles of antenna unit, see appropriate items in
Chapter 1, section Installation of Scanner 30 kW S-Band UP Mast in this
chapter and INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL document supplied as part
516
The X-band/D Antenna Group consists of following units and type designations:
Turning unit SRT/PED-001;
6/9 feet antenna array ANT6X-001/ANT9X-001;
Performance Monitor arm 304316A1;
Safety Switch 74X376P001.
Pedestal
Prepare the platform for mounting of the pedestal. Hole diameters and distances
are evident from the following drawing.
Fig. 216. 25 kW SRT X-Band down mast Antenna Group dimension drawing
The pedestal should be mounted such that the antenna swinging plane is horizontal
in all directions when ship is upright on even keel. Consider to give ample space
for service of the Antenna group.
Note: The protection waveguide covers on the antenna and pedestal must not be
removed until just before mounting the antenna. Anyhow the rotary joint must
not be left uncovered when the antenna is not mounted.
Antenna
For installation antenna, see appropriate item in section Installation of Scanners
SRT 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast, paragraph Mechanical Installation.
Safety Switch (External is Optional)
For installation and electrical connection of the additional safety switch, see appropriate
items in section Installation of Scanners SRT 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast,
paragraphs Mechanical Installation and Electrical Installation.
517

To install the PM arm, proceed as follows:
Fit the PM arm in the SRT external PM-Monitor connector.
The arm shall be angled upwards.
Waveguide Installation
The waveguide consists of a special waveguide kit. The special instruction for how
to mount the waveguide is attached to the kit, but is described in paragraph
Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast Waveguide Installation (see Annex G).
For electrical installation, see also above Chapter 1, section Installation of
Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast, paragraph Preventive Action During Service
Attendance on RTM MOS.
Transceiver S-Band
Connection
See paragraph Multi-core Cable 55M455P002(3) Handling enclosed in Annex G.
Normally the cable (16 core+3 Coax), P/N 55M455P002(3), is delivered to a length
of 60 m. The multicord cable includes wires for Power, Video, Trigger and Antenna data.
It shall be used for connection between the Antenna Group and the Transceiver, as well
as for connection between the Transceiver and the RIB6 unit. It is required to handle this
cable with particular care.
The cable from the MFD shall be connected to TB9, TB10, J1 and J3 on the RTM
Cont-B Board in the Transceiver and according to separate system drawings
relevant to the application of the transceiver.
The cable from the Antenna Group shall be connected to TB8 on the RTM Cont-B
Board and to TB1 on the Torque Reduce Assembly.
The cable from ship power shall be connected to TB1 on the Filter Assembly placed
under the plate (4 screws) on the bottom of the cabinet.
518
Fig. 217. S-band 30 kW transceiver terminals drawing
For connection the Transceiver unit to MFD System, see below paragraph
Connection of MFD System to Scanner 30 kW S-Band Down Mast.
Grounding
The grounding point of the transceiver is located at bottom of the unit. The ground
binding strap should be a tinned braided copper wire (>25 mm2) connected
to the ships ground.
Installation Check-Out
After wiring connections, before closing the Transceiver, following procedures
and controls must be carried out to prevent any failure due to incorrect installation:
Clean the circuit boards with an antistatic brush.
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any possible particles from the cabinets.
Check for proper cable bends to assure a proper amount of slack.
Check that ground connections are dully tightened as well as terminal

connections on the terminal boards.
Check if cable holders have a firm grip around the cables.

to the layouts of the unit and to the interconnection drawings.
Carefully check the integrity of the fuses.
519
Pre-Setup Procedures
procedures to be done as a completion of the electrical installation and before
supplying the unit with power and before performing the System Setup:
Verify that the links on Voltage Selector on TB1 of the Transformer Assembly
is connected in the correct configuration according to the main supply applied
to the Transceiver.
Also verify that the links on Voltage Selector on TB1 of the Torque Reducer
Assembly is connected in the correct configuration according to the main supply
applied to the Transceiver (see label inside cabinet wall).
Check that the fuse F1 (on the Transformer Assembly) has the correct value
with respect to the applied ships mains power supply.
Check that the setting for the current on K4 (on the Torque Reducer) has the
correct value with respect to the applied ships mains power supply (see label
inside cabinet wall).
Check that the Power Service Switch SW1 is in position Normal.
Check that the Switches S1 and S2 on the transceiver Control B board

are in position 0.
S-Band Antenna Group

Antenna Pedestal
Pedestal is equipped with a three phase motor powered by the Transformer in the
Transceiver. The motor windings should be connected either in a star or in a triangle
configuration depending on the mains voltage available, in the following manner:
3220V 50 Hz or 3255V 60 Hz;
Y 3380V 50 Hz or 3440V 60 Hz.
Note: Motors are set by the Manufacturer for 3x380V 50 Hz main supply.
The motor setting can be modified according to the ships supply on
the motor terminal board.
The Antenna end of the multi-core cable shall be connected to TB at the inside bottom
of the pedestal chassis for the 3 phase motor power cores and to TB2 of ANTSIGN
board (see above Fig. 217).
Safety Switch
For electric connection of safety switch make the following actions:
Check the safety switch is placed as described in paragraph Mechanical
Installation;
520
Connect the two poles of the safety switch to TB5 of ANTSIGN board terminals
NC/C placed inside the pedestal. Link between NC and C terminals shall be
removed (see above Fig. 217 and picture below);
Carefully make sure that the switch is closed in I (On) position and open in 0
(Off) position.
Fig. 218. View of terminals

For electric connection of performance monitor arm, make the following actions:
After mounting the PM arm as described in item Mechanical Installation,

connect the PM arm cable to the plug and put it in the socket at TB1 RM/RM05
on the ANTSIGN, placed at the inside bottom of the pedestal chassis
(see picture above).
Grounding
Connect a tinned braided copper wire (>25 mm2) between the GROUND TERMINAL
on the antenna pedestal and the radar mast.
supplying the unit with power and before performing the System Setup. Perform
the following procedure:

Carefully check the integrity of the fuses;
Check inside the motor junction box that the Star or Delta configuration
corresponds to the used 3 phase ship main power and frequency, as shown
in the figure below:
Fig. 219. Antenna Turning Motor voltage and phase configuration
521
Transceiver X-Band and Antenna Group

Connection
See paragraph Multi-core Cable 55X456P001 Handling enclosed in Annex G.
Normally the cable 55X456P001 (4 twisted pair + 2 Coax + 8 wire) is delivered
to a length of 60 m. It shall be used for connection between the Transceiver unit
and the SRT Adapter Box, as well as for connection between SRT Adapter Box
and Radar processor (RIB6) according to separate system drawings relevant
to the application of the transceiver. The multi-core cable includes wires for Power,
Video, Trigger and Antenna data.
It is required to handle this cable with particular care.
The cable from the Antenna Group (TB10) shall be connected to TB8, TB6 on the
RTM Cont-B Board and TB2 in the Transceiver unit as shown in the figure below.
The cable from Adapter Box shall be connected to J3, TB8 on the RTM Cont-B
Board and TB2 in the Transceiver unit.
The cable from ship power shall be connected to TB1 Filter Assy in the Transceiver unit.
Fig. 220. X-Band Scanner down mast connection drawing
522
Fig. 221. X-Band scanner down mast terminals drawing
For connection the Transceiver unit to MFD System, see below paragraph
Connection of MFD System to Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast.
Grounding
The ground binding strap should be a tinned braided copper wire (>25 mm2)
connected to the ships ground. The grounding point of the transceiver is located
at bottom of the unit.
For grounding Pedestal connect a tinned braided copper wire (>25 mm2) between
the GROUND TERMINAL on the antenna pedestal and the radar mast.
Installation Check-Out and Pre Setup Procedures
See appropriate points of item Transceiver S-Band in this paragraph.
Connection of MFD System to Scanner 30 kW S-Band Down Mast

of, its connection:
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex J
and Annex Q):
Block Diagram;
MFD WS2. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Connection Diagram;
Cables List;
below);
MFD WS2. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram.
2. Connect S-Band Antenna Group (TB2, TB5, TB) and Transceiver unit (TB8,
TB1) by means of multi-conductor cable P/N 55M455P002(03) as described above
523
in this section (paragraph Electrical Installation, item Transceiver S-Band).

See also Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Transceiver-Antenna Group Connection
Diagram presented in Annex J.
3. Connect the multi-core cable 55M455P002(03) to Transceiver RTM Control B
(TB9, TB10, J1, J3) as shown in Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Transceiver-Antenna
Group Connection Diagram and MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Down Mast.
Wiring Diagram (see Annex J).
4. Connect other side of the multi-conductor cable to RIB6 (J2, J3, X9, X10)
as per diagram.
5. Connect wires 16, 12 to 24 VDC Power Supply from UPS or optional 24 VDC
Power supply unit as per diagram.
and MFD WS2. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Connection Diagram.
Connection of MFD System to Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast

of, its connection:
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex K
and Annex Q):
MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Connection Diagram;
below);
MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram.
2. Connect X-Band Antenna Group and Transceiver by means of the multiconductor cable P/N 55X456P001 as described above in this section (paragraph
Electrical Installation, item Transceiver X-Band and Antenna Group).
See also connection diagram presented in Annex K.
3. Connect the Transceiver unit (J3, TB8, TB2) and SRT Adapter Box (J13, TB2,
SRT Power Supply) by means of multi-conductor cable P/N 55X456P001 as per
Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Transceiver-Antenna Group Connection
Diagram and MFD Interface. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Wiring
Diagram (see Annex K).
4. Connect SRT Adapter Box (TB1, J4, J5) and RIB6 unit (J2, J3, X9, X10)
by means of multi-conductor cable P/N 55X456P001 as per diagram.
5. Connect wires 18 and 17 to Power 24 VDC from UPS or optional 24 VDC Power
supply unit as per diagram.
6. Connect power 115/230 VAC from ships main to SRT Adapter Box and to
Transceiver unit (TB1 of the Filter Assy).
and MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Connection diagram.
524
Installation of Scanner BridgeMaster E 10 kW X-Band Up Mast
INSTALLATION OF SCANNER BRIDGEMASTER E 10 KW XBAND UP MAST

Introduction
and performance check of the scanner unit. The diagram of connection between
the scanner and MFD console is provided in MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E
X-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram, MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up
Mast. Connection Diagram, and MFD Interface. RIB6 Scanner BridgeMaster E
X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram (see Annex L).
X-Band scanner 10 kW manufactured with up mast transceiver location and 4 or 6
feet long antenna is used for work with the MFD application. The scanners
characteristics are given in the table below:
Table 80. X-Band Antenna Group specification
Dimensions
Length/Width/Height
Weight
Power
Swing
circle
Operating
temperature
Relative
humidity
1305586440 mm
with 4 ft antenna.
1914x586x440 mm
with 6 ft antenna
49 kg with
4 ft antenna.
52 kg with
6 ft antenna
92-276 V/
47-64 HZ
1305 mm
4 ft antenna
1914 mm
6 ft antenna
-25C
+55C
Up to
95% at
+40C
ATTENTION!
Technical Data
Table 81. 4/6 feet X-Band Antenna specification
Parameter
Aperture size
Data
4 ft (1.2 m)
Operating Frequency
Horizontal Beam Width, -3 dB (maximum)
6 ft (1.8 m)
9410 MHz +/-30 MHz
1.3
Vertical Beam Width, -3 dB (nominal)
24
Sidelobes within 10 of Beam (minimum)
-23 dB
Sidelobes outside 10 of Beam (minimum)
-30 dB
Gain (nominal)
Polarization
Limiting Relative Wind Speed
Rotational Speed
-29 dB
-30 dB
Horizontal
100 kt
Standard 28 rpm
High 45 rpm
525
Table 82. Transceiver specification

Transmitter
Parameter
Data
Magnetron Frequency
9410 MHz +/-30 MHz
Magnetron Peak Power
10 kW nominal
Pulse Length/PRF
0.05 s/1800 Hz nominal (Short Pulse)

0.25 s/1800 Hz nominal (Medium Pulse)
0.75 s/785 Hz nominal (Long Pulse)
Pulse Generator
Solid-state with pulse forming network driving the

magnetron
Receiver
Parameter
Data
Type
Logarithmic, with Low Noise Front End (LNFE)
Tuning
AFC/Manual
IF (Intermediate Frequency)
Centered at 60 MHz
IF Bandwidth
20 MHz on short and medium pulses (nominal)

3 MHz on long pulse (nominal)
Noise factor
5.0 dB nominal
Dynamic range
80 dB nominal
IF amplifier
Logarithmic
IF centre frequency
50 MHz
IF- Bandwidth
1620/45/1.52 MHz
3.5 dB
Table 83. Performance Monitor specification

Parameter
Data
Performance Monitored
Separate monitors for Radar System and Radar

Receiver
Type
Transponder
Pulse Length/PRF
Four concentric arcs on Display Unit. Arcs are of

reducing brightness outwards, showing
degradation in performance (including antenna) in
5 dB increments relative to inner arc.
Table 84. Power Supply specification

Parameter
526
Data
Input voltage range
92 276 VAC RMS
Input voltage frequency range
47 to 64 Hz
Maximum Input Power
X-Band Scanner (incl. Transceiver and Motor)

Standard Speed Unit
250 VA
High Speed Unit
370 VA
Transient protection
Overvoltage transient of up to 40 % above

nominal input voltage with maximum duration of
one second. Pulse transient of up to +/- 1200 V
peak, with a rise time of 2 to 10 s and duration
up to 20 s
Protection facilities
Output short circuit

High and low input voltage
Output overvoltage
Slow start
High voltage multiphase operation
Via a suitable transformer
Table 85. Mechanical specification

Component
Height
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Weight
(mm)
X-Band Scanner Unit with 1.2 m Antenna
440
586
1305
49
X-Band Scanner Unit with 1.8 m Antenna
440
586
1914
52
Table 86. Compass Safe Distances

Component
Type No.
Standard
Steering
X-Band Scanner Unit 10 kW
65810M
1.4 m
0.8
Top Units Configuration

The BridgeMaster E X-Band top units are configured from the following unit types:
4 or 6 feet Antenna Unit 65604A or 65606A;
Antenna Turning Unit with Transceiver 65810D;
Performance Monitor (optional) 91005220.
Installation
General Information
Installation of the scanner unit entails carrying out the following operations,
preferably in the sequence outlined below:
1. Preparation of the site.
2. Bolting the Tuning Unit to the mounting platform (ships structure) as detailed in
Installation Drawing 65801050 supplied with the Turning unit.
3. Bolting the Antenna to the Support Casting as detailed in Installation Drawing
65601275 supplied with the Antenna.
4. Laying in and installing the cables for the Tuning unit in accordance with the
appropriate Cabling Schedules (including X-Band co-axial feeder).
5. Ensuring that in the Tuning Unit, the Motor Drive Board and the Pulse Bearing
Board are correctly set for the required High or Low Speed operation set via
their relevant jumper links.
Figure below also show installation details which are intended to duplicate those
provided with the equipment. However, as it is possible that changes may occur to
the equipment take precedence in the event of differences arising.
527
Fig. 222. X-Band scanner masthead TX/RX 10 kW installation
Turning Unit
ATTENTION!
The Turning unit should only be lifted using the four fixing holes at the base of the
unit. The weight and spread of the Antenna can cause a free-standing Turning unit
to topple over. The Turning unit should therefore be bolted down onto its mounting
platform before attaching the Antenna and Support Casting to the Turning Unit.
When working on the Turning unit with the top casting raised, always ensure that the
locking bolt on the stay is in the locked position. DO NOT lift the Scanner Unit by the
Antenna, this is dangerous and will seriously damage the Antenna.
Note: The Turning unit is bolted to the mounting platform with Neoprene isolating
pads (4 off 65601251) between the Turning unit casting and the mounting
platform, to prevent Galvanic corrosion. Additional washers or pads may be
added for the purpose of leveling the mounting so that the Turning unit
casting is not subject to twist when the bolts are tightened. M10 washers may
be used as shims, or purpose made parts produced locally may be used.
528
Fig. 223. Fixing Turning unit to mounting platform
Support Casting
The Support Casting is factory fitted to the Turning unit and requires no further
assembly during installation.
Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor comprises the Performance Monitor module, and an
associated control cable. The equipment is normally factory fitted.
Antenna
The Antenna is fitted to the Support Casting using the parts listed below which are
supplied with the antenna. Note that the holes in the support casing are
asymmetrically placed to prevent the antenna being fitted backwards. The support
casting has the letters FRONT visible from above to aid initial antenna location.
4 off M8 Stainless Steel Plain Nut: 4411544;
4 off Washer with locking tab: 65602116.
Figure below shows how these are fitted.
Ensure that all threads and bushes are coated with Densopaste.
Note: The lock tab ends must be bent as shown to prevent rotation of the nuts.
Fig. 224. Fixing antenna to support casting
529
Scanner Speed Settings

Two scanner speed settings, LOW and HIGH, are available, depending on the
following settings of the Motor Drive Board and the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly.
Motor Drive Board:

The position of the link LK1 fitted to the Motor Drive Board 65801811.
The link is set during installation and commissioning, and requires no tools to
change.
The factory default setting is LOW speed (28 RPM nominal).
Note, that with no jumper fitted the rotational speed defaults to HIGH speed.
Under no circumstances should the link position be removed whilst the motor is
running.
With the jumper in the position marked LO (pins 1&2 left hand pair), the
nominal scanner speed is 28 RPM.
With the jumper in the position marked HI (pins 2&3 right hand pair), the
nominal scanner speed is 45 RPM.
Fig. 225. Motor Drive Board 65801811. Showing link position
Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly.

The position of the link LK1 fitted to the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly
65801805.
Note: This link does not physically affect the rotational speed of the scanner, but
does affect the ability of the phase-locked loop within the board to track
the scanner rotational speed.
530
The factory default setting is LOW speed.

Note: With no jumper fitted the PCB defaults to HIGH speed configuration.
With the jumper in the position marked I (pins 1&2 the lower pair), the PCB is
configured for LOW speed operation.
With the jumper in the upper pair position (pins 2&3), the PCB is configured for
HIGH speed operation.
The link is set during installation and commissioning. The link can be moved
with the PCB in place using long nose pliers but the operation is not easy due to
the PCB mounting bracket which tends to obscure the position of the link. The
recommended method is to loosen the 2 Pozidrive screws that retain the
mounting bracket and slide the whole assembly to the right using the slotted
screw holes in the mounting bracket. The assembly can then be brought forward
into a more accessible position for the link to be removed. Take care during
removal and refitting of the mounting bracket not to damage the teeth on the
pulse disc assembly which run between opto-couplers mounted on the rear of
the Pulse Bearing PCB. Before re-tightening the 2 Pozidrfive screws, check that
both pairs of plain and single coil washers are above the top surface of the
mounting bracket and not trapped beneath it.
For ease of installation, it is recommended that this operation be carried out, if
required, before mounting the Turning unit aloft.
Fig. 226. Pulse Bearing Board 65801805. Showing link position
Turning Unit Input Board 65801813.

The figure below shows details of the Turning Unit Input Board 65801813. This
is revealed by lifting up the upper casting cover on its hinges after releasing the
four retaining bolts (see above figure). The screening cover is then removed by
releasing four securing screws.
531
Normal configuration of the PCB links is as follows:

Link 1 Not Normally Fitted;
Link 2 Not Normally Fitted;
Link 3 Link Pins 2&3;
Link 4 Link Pins 2&3.
Note: The Video cable does not plug into the Input Board, but goes directly to the
Receiver. Refer to paragraph Fitting the Cable Glands for further details.
Fig. 227. Turning unit. Input board details
Turning Unit Mains Input Connector

The figure below shows details of the Mains Input Connector TSE (Integral
Transceiver only). These are revealed on removal of the screening cover and the
support plate, which is retained by 4 fixing screws. Note that the screws need only
be partially undone to allow the plate to be slid out.
532
Fig. 228. Mains input details
Cabling Information
The table below shows the route by which each cable enters the Turning unit (with
or without an Integral Transceiver). Figures show the cable entry points. Three of
these are via cable glands labeled 1, 2, 3.
A hole is provided for a 6 mm bolt to enable bonding the unit to the ships structure.
This is an important safety feature and must not be used for any other connection.
Each of the cable glands has a waterproof seal and a separate EMC seal, both of
which must be installed as shown in the table below:
Table 87. Cable entry details
Cable Gland
Description
Cable Type
Cable Service Code
Cable Gland 1
Mains Input
TP3149
3228207
Cable Gland 2
Blanking Plug
Cable Gland 3
Radar Video
75 Ohm Co-ax
3236862
Cable Gland 3
Data
T/Pairs
MA00007419
533
Fig. 229. Cable entry position
Fitting the Cable Glands

The installation cables are connected into the Turning unit via the appropriate cable
glands (see above table). The body of the gland fits through a hole in the casting
and is held in position by the Top Nut. Note the O ring seal, which is fitted below
the casting surface (input side). Two seals are provided with each gland as shown in
figure below. The lower seal provides for waterproofing, and the upper for EMC.
Some glands are designed to take a single cable whilst others are intended for
several cables. Unused glands are fitted with a blanking plug, and unused cable
entries are fitted with a sealing pin to maintain the seal.
Fig. 230. General view of cable glands
Note: Cable glands and blanking plugs are normally factory fitted to the Turning unit.
534
The waterproofing seal works by clamping onto the cable PVC sheath whereas
the EMC seal clamps onto the cable braid. It is important not to force the outer
sheath through the EMC seal, as the seal is liable to split. The braid is also
formed into a tail which is grounded by means of an adjacent earth tag. The fitting
procedure is detailed in figure below.
Fig. 231. Detailed view of cable gland assembly
Installation cables:
Unscrew the gland nut and remove the waterproof seal and the EMC gasket.
Feed the cables through the gland nut and the waterproof seal;
For the multicore cables strip the outer sheath to expose approximately 300
mm of braid, and for video coaxial cable to expose about 1200 mm of braid;
Push the braid back to expose approximately 50 mm of the inner cores;
Trim 50 mm off the cores, and pull the braid back and twist into a point;
Feed the cable through EMC gasket until it positioned as shown above;
For multicore cable flare the braid out to within approximately 15 mm of the
EMC gasket and form a tail;
For coaxial cable do not fit the connector at this time.
Assembly into the scanner unit:

Feed the assembled cables and seals into the gland body, and tighten the
gland nut to compress the waterproof seal;
Crimp the earth tags provided to the braids of the multicore cables, keeping
them as short as possible attach them with the screws provided. Trim and
make off the cable inners to the appropriate connectors;
The video coaxial cable does not plug into SKV on the input PCB, but is
connected to SKV on the Receiver Assy;
Sleeve the braid of the coaxial cable with the 6 mm sleeving provided;
Route the cable through the slot at the end of the filter box cover, along the
cable loom on the right hand side of the scanner unit. Use cable ties to clip it
to the loom;
Trim to length and fit the coaxial plug.
535
Installation of Navico BR24 Broadband Scanner
Earthing
The common earth point of the power supply of the ship must be connected to the
chassis (case) of the radar unit receiving the supply. Use the crimp tags at the cable
entry points to make this earth connection.
Connection of MFD to Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast

of, its connection:
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex L
and Annex Q):
MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
below);
MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast. Power Supply
Distribution. Connection Diagram.
2. Connect Scanner Unit to RIB6 via data cable and video coaxial cable according
with MFD Interface. RIB6 Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast.
Connection Diagram.
3. Connect ships main power supply to Scanner Unit (TSE). See above item
Turning Unit Mains Input Connector.
INSTALLATION OF NAVICO BR24 BROADBAND SCANNER

Introduction
The Navico Broadband radar uses FMCW (Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave)
radar technology. Firstly it is solid state i.e. the transmitter is a semiconductor
device, not based on magnetron technology. Secondly, it transmits a 1ms long
signal of increasing frequency, rather than a short duration pulse. Thirdly, it
measures the distance to a target not by timing the returned echoes, but by
measuring the difference between the current transmitted frequency and echoed
frequency.
Additional benefits of FMCW radar are:
Safety:
Low energy emissions. 1/10th of a mobile phone;
Safe operation in anchorages and marinas;
Instant power up. No warm up required.
Short range performance:

Broadband radar can see within a few meters of the boat, compared to pulse
radars which cannot see closer than 30 meters;
Higher resolution clearly separates individual vessels and objects;
Up to five times better sea and rain clutter performance.
536
Low power:
Suitable for small boats and yachts;
Easier installation with lighter cabling;
Great for yachts on ocean passage.
Instant power-up:
Conventional radars take 2-3 minutes to heat up the filament:
Safety 2 minutes is a long time if you are concerned about collision;
Convenience switch it on and use it.
Navico radar supports only single network connection.

This section describes all the procedures required for the correct installation of the
scanner unit. The diagram of connection between the scanner and MFD console
is provided in MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Block Diagram, MFD WS.
BR24 Broadband Scanner. Connection Diagram (see Annex M).
The base scanners characteristics are given in the table below:
Table 88. BR24 Scanner characteristics
Dimensions Height x
Diameter
Weight
Power
Operating
temperature
Relative
humidity
280489 mm
(11x19.3)
7.4 kg
(16.31 lbs)
9 V to 31.2 V DC
(12/24 Volt
systems)
-25 to +55C
(-13 to
+130F)
Up to 95% at
+35C (95F)
ATTENTION!
Technical Data
Table 89. BR24 scanner specification
Characteristic
Technical Data
Compliance
FCC Part 80 and Part 90; FCC ID: RAYBR24

IC ID: 4697A-BR24, CE Mark
Environmental
IEC60945 4th edition 2002-2008

Operating Temperature: -25 to +55C
(-13 to +130F)
Relative humidity: +35 C (95 F), 95% RH
Waterproof: IPX6
Relative wind velocity
51 m/sec (Max:100 Knots)
Power consumption (with 10 m cable)
Operating: 19 W (Typ.) @ 13.8 Vdc

Standby: 2 W (Typ.) @ 13.8 Vdc ~ 150 ma
DC input (at end of radar cable)
9 V to 31.2 V DC (12/24 Volt systems).

Reverse polarity protection
Transmitter Source (Pre-heating time)
No magnetron - Instant ON
Outside dimensions
Height 280 mm x Diameter 489 mm

(Height 11" x Diameter 19.3" )
537
Weight (no cable)
7.4 kg (16.31 lbs)
Radar and Antenna Parameters

Radar Ranges
50 m (200 ft) to 24 nm with 17 range settings

(nm/sm/km)
Rotation
24 rpm +/- 10%
Transmitter frequency
X-band - 9.3 to 9.4 GHz
Transmitter source (warm up time)
No Magnetron - all solid state. Instant ON
Plane of polarization
Horizontal polarization
Transmitter peak power output
100 mW nominal
Main bang dead zone
None- not a pulse radar
Sweep Repetition Frequency
200 Hz
Sweep Time
1 ms
Sweep Bandwidth
70 MHz max
Horizontal Beam width (Tx and Rx

antenna)
5.2 +/- 10% (-3dB width)
Vertical Beam width (Tx and Rx antenna)
25+/-20% (-3dB width)
Side lobe level (Tx and Rx antenna)
Below -18 dB (within 10);Below -24dB (outside 10)
Noise figure
Less than 6 dB
Communications/Cabling/Mounting
Communications Protocol
High speed Ethernet or Serial
Heading
NMEA0183 / NMEA2000 / SimNet with interface box
Maximum Interconnecting cable length
30 m (98.5 ft) optional cable AA010213
Bolts (4)
M8 x 30 mm - 304 stainless steel
Footprint
W233 mm (9.17") (port / starboard) x L141.5 mm (5.55")

(matches Garmin GMR18HD / Raymarine RD218
footprint)
Configuration
Navico BR24 broadband scanner is configured from the following unit types:
Broadband Scanner Unit BR24 part number AA010186;
Radar Interface Box RI10 part number AA010189.
Installation
Location of the Scanner
The radar's ability to detect targets greatly depends on the position of its scanner.
The ideal location for the scanner is high above the vessel's keel line where there
are no obstacles.
A higher installation position increases the radar ranging distance, but it also
increases the minimum range around the vessel where targets cannot be detected.
When you're deciding on the location, consider the following:
538
The length of the interconnection cable supplied with your radar is usually
sufficient. If you think you'll need a longer cable, consult your dealer before
installation. Optional cable lengths are 10 m (33 ft), 20 m (65.5 ft) and 30 m
(98 ft);
If you mount the scanner on a pedestal or base, ensure that rain and sea spray
can drain away rapidly, and the breather hole in the base can operate;
The scanner is usually installed parallel to the line of the keel.
DON'T DO THIS!
DON'T install the scanner too high up, which may cause degradation of the
radar picture over short ranges;
DON'T install the scanner close to lamps or exhaust outlets. The heat emissions
may damage the dome. Soot and smoke will degrade the performance of the
radar;
DON'T install the scanner close to the antennas of other equipment such as
direction finders, VHF antennas, GPS equipment as it may cause interference;
DON'T install the scanner where a large obstruction (such as an exhaust stack)
is at the same level as the beam, because the obstruction is likely to generate
false echoes and/or shadow zones;
DON'T install the scanner where it will be subjected to strong vibrations because
these vibrations could degrade the performance of the radar;
DONT install the scanner such that boat electronics with switch mode power
supplies (such as fish-finders and chart plotters) are in the beam of the antenna.
For requirements of the scanners location see table below.

Table 90. Requirements of the scanners location
Minimum distance to install near the
ships compass is 0.7 m (3.3 ft).
It is recommended not to install the

scanner on the same beam plane as a
conventional pulse radar. A pulse
radar must be set to STBY or OFF
when the BR24 is being operated.
If possible ensure that the location site

provides the scanner with a clear view
all round the vessel.
Installations on power boats that have

a steep planing angle, it is
recommended to tilt the scanner angle
down at the front. (Beam angle is
12.5 either side of center).
Mounting of the Scanner
Use the supplied mounting template and tape it securely to the chosen location
site.
Before drilling, check that:

You have oriented the mounting template correctly so that the front of the
scanner unit will face the front of the vessel;
The location site is not more than 18 mm (0.7") thick. If the location site is
thicker use longer bolts.
539
Note: The four bolts supplied are M8 x 30 mm. If you need to use longer bolts make
sure they are marine grade stainless steel and allow for minimum of 8 mm
(0.3") and maximum of 18 mm (0.7") of thread contact.
Use a 9.5 mm (3/8") drill bit to drill the four holes where shown on the mounting
template.
Remove the mounting template.
Connect the scanner interconnection cable (see paragraph "Wiring of the Radar
System below).
Route the connection cable through the cable retention channel.
Position the scanner carefully over the bolt holes so that they are aligned.
Place a lock washer and a plain washer onto each bolt, as shown.
Insert bolt into drill hole and locate into scanners threaded mounting holes and
tighten securely.
Note: The torque settings for the mounting bolts are 12 Nm 18 Nm

(8.9 lb ft 13.3 lb ft).
Fig. 232. Mounting of the scanner
540
Fig. 233. Scanner dimensions

Table 91. Key description
Key
Description
Cable entry area
Cable retention channel
Bolt holes x 4 M8 x 30 mm
Breather
Mounting of the Radar Interface Box
Install the radar interface box (where applicable) in a dry location away from
spray, rain, drips and condensation.
The radar interface box must be located where it can be easily connected to the
ship's power source, the scanner interconnection cable, and the display or
display network.
Allow enough room for cables to form a drip loop.
Preferably mount the radar interface box on a vertical surface with cables exiting
downwards.
Insert connectors (see paragraph "Wiring of the Radar System below).
Secure to the surface using the four mounting points.
541
Fig. 234. Mounting of the Radar Interface Box
Fig. 235. Radar Interface Box dimensions
Wiring of the Radar System

Connection of the Cable to the Scanner
The scanner interconnection cable connects the scanner to the RI10 interface box.
The cable connects to the scanner using a 14 pin connector.
Protect the connectors when pulling cable through the boat and avoid putting strain
on to the connectors.
The interconnection cable is 9 mm in diameter. A 14 mm hole will be required in
order for the RJ45 connector to pass through (Interface box end) or 24 mm for the
scanner end connector.
542
For connection perform the following actions:
Run the interconnection cable between the scanner and the location of the radar
interface box.
Insert cable connector on to the male 14 pin plug on the scanner.
Take care to align the connector correctly to avoid bending the pins. Secure the
locking collar by rotating clockwise until it clicks.
Feed and secure the cable into the cable retention channel.
Fig. 236. Connection of the cable
Fig. 237. Scanner Interconnection cable pin out

Table 92. Scanner Interconnection cable pin out
Connector
Wire color
RJ45
Black
Tinned wire
Red
Tinned wire
Yellow
Tinned wire
Drain
Tinned wire
N/A
N/A
Blue
RJ45 Pin 4
White / Blue
RJ45 Pin 5
White / Brown
RJ45 Pin 7
Brown
RJ45 Pin 8
10
White / Green
RJ45 Pin 3
11
N/A
N/A
12
White / Orange
RJ45 Pin 1
13
Green
RJ45 Pin 6
14
Orange
RJ45 Pin 2
543
Connection of the Cable to Radar Interface Box

1. Slide (F), (E) and (D) over the RJ45 and data wires of the scanner
interconnection cable (G):
2. Connect RJ45 and data wires to the radar interface box:
3. Secure (D) to the radar interface box using the four supplied screws (H):
4. Slide (E) along the cable (G) and press into the cable gland housing (D):
544
5. Rotate (F) clockwise to secure:
Table 93. Key description

Key
Description
Radar Interface Box
Radar data connector RJ45
Power wires (see paragraph Connection of the

Power below)
Cable gland housing
Gland washer
Lock nut
Scanner interconnection cable
Screws x 4 M3x12 mm Phillips pan head
Note: To remove the scanner interconnection cable, follow the above procedure in
reverse order.
Note: To avoid damaging the connectors when removing the scanner
interconnection cable, it is important to remove the cable gland washer before
trying to remove the cable gland housing.
Connection of the Power

The Broadband radar can operate on 12 or 24 V DC systems. The Broadband radar
requires a +V DC to be applied on the yellow power on wire in order to operate. This
can be achieved in one of three ways.
For connection perform the following actions:
Common the red and yellow wire together. Radar will power on when power is
applied;
Use ignition or install a switch that will provide power to the yellow wire. (It is
recommended to use a 5 amp fuse or breaker). The radar will turn on when
switch is activated;
Connect the yellow wire to external wake up of suitable display. Radar will turn
on when display is turned on.
Before connecting power to the system:
Make sure the scanner has been installed and is secured;
Make sure the scanner interconnection cable is connected to the scanner;
If using the Radar Interface Box make sure all connections have been made to
the computer.
For connection perform the following:
Connect the red wire to power positive 12 or 24 V DC. Use a 5 amp fuse or
breaker;
545
Connect the yellow wire to power source that will turn on the system
(see above);
Connect black to power negative.
Fig. 238. Power connection
Connection of MFD to BR24 Broadband Scanner

of, its connection:
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex M
and Annex Q):
MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Connection Diagram;
below);
MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Power Supply Distribution. Connection
Diagram.
2. Connect Radar Interface Box (NETWORK connector) RI10 to RS6 (RS6B)
computer LAN1 via Ethernet cable according with diagrams.
3. Connect 24 V DC power supply to Radar Interface Box from UPS6 according
with diagrams and paragraph Connection of the Power above.
546
Scanners Adjustment
SCANNERS ADJUSTMENT
For adjustment 12/25 kW SRT X-Band Scanners, see Chapter 2, section Radar
Adjustment, paragraph 30 kW S-Band Scanner Adjustment.
For Distance and Bearing Offset setting, see also Chapter 2, section Radar
Adjustment, paragraph Distance and Bearing Offset.
10/25 kW Scanners Adjustment

Receiver Adjustment
Tune parameter in the middle position.
and
buttons to set
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level. In the same way set
547
Scanners Adjustment
Multipanel window.
Enter the password on Settings panel.
Uncontrollable changing of any settings may lead to serious deterioration of
the system work.
Using the Tune/Offset adjustment in Radar-Scanner page, obtain the maximum

signal (depending on the radar mark quality) from the target in the far zone.
548
Scanners Adjustment
Probably, GAIN settings on the indicator panel would be required in the course
of adjustment.
Video Indication Adjustment

Its recommended to leave default value 255 in the Delay window, since this parameter
may affect the Auto mode work. Press Auto Reg button.
Adjustment is carried out automatically taking several seconds. Upon completion

of adjustment, the best value will be displayed in the Reg field.
After making all the settings, turn on the Auto mode and check that the mode
operates on all the scales and with all the pulse lengths.
If the Tune Level is 100%, change the Reg and Offset settings in the Tune group on
the Radar-Scanner page.
Check that after this the Auto mode operates steadily and that the radar picture
quality is good.
549
Scanners Adjustment
Use the PRF Change input box to set the change of the outgoing pulse recurrence rate
in % of the average value for the Interference Rejection function (see also document
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.2.00.330). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,
Chapter 8, Video Signal Processing Principles section, Clutter Suppression
Facilities paragraph).
After scanner adjustment make fine tuning RIB6 (see previous paragraph).
ATTENTION!
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep over it does not transmit radar.
This is commonly used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ships
Multipanel window.
of the system work.
550
Scanners Adjustment
Note:
If sectors are overlapped, the single united sector should be displayed on the PPI.
551
Scanners Adjustment
BridgeMaster E Scanner Adjustment

Radar Setup
in the top right corner of the Display Panel and select TX. Leave the radar
in the transmission mode for 2030 minutes.

to set Tune parameter in the middle position.
and
buttons
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level. In the same way, set
The noise marks should be clearly discernable on the screen. With the signal too
weak or too strong, adjust the RIB6 gain.
552
Scanners Adjustment
Multipanel window.
of the system work.
On Radar-Scanner page, press Diagnostics button.
By using this table you can check the radar visual setup accuracy.
553
Scanners Adjustment
Performance Monitor Setup

The performance monitor (PM) is used for simplifying the process of adjusting the
radar transceiver and checking the device service status in the course of operation.
Multipanel window.
of the system work.
554
Scanners Adjustment
The PM signal is displayed in the form of four arcs.

On the Radar-Scanner page, press PM Settings button.
Press the System button.

By varying the value in the PM tune input field, achieve the maximum brightness and
clearness of the radar picture.
Press the RX button and repeat the setup.
ATTENTION!
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep, over it does not transmit
radar. This is commonly used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ships
555
Scanners Adjustment
Multipanel window.
of the system work.
Note: If sectors are overlapped, the single united sector should be displayed on the PPI.
556
Scanners Adjustment
557
ANNEX G
Scanners Cables Handling
10/25 kW and Network 12/25 kW X-Band Scanners Cables Installation
10/25 KW AND NETWORK 12/25 KW X-BAND SCANNERS

CABLES INSTALLATION
General
Hand tool crimp for contact diameter of 1.6 mm. For examples of crimping
for standard and coaxial conductor:
1. Arrange in advance 30 mm of shrinkable sleeve with inner diameter of 25 mm.
2. Insert the piece of the shrinkable sleeve and the components of the core hitch
(contained in the installation kit of the cable) along the cable to fix it in the
special hole of the scanner unit.
3. Strip the cable for about 90 cm; collect the braided wire shield and shorten it to
obtain a length suitable to tighten it between the dies situated just after the input
hole of the cable.
4. Tighten the cable on the scanner unit with the components of the core hitch
inserted in advance.
5. Shrink the piece of shield in correspondence of metallic cable-stop and tight
it to assure a first fixing point of the cable.
6. The second fixing point is constituted by an adhesive plastic support already
present in the scanner unit. The cable is fixed with a cable-stop band contained
in the kit.
7. Strip all the conductors for about 5 mm. The procedure to prepare coaxial
cables is the following: strip the cables for about 5 cm, then separate the
metallic core from the shield; roll-up the shield and protect it with the shrinkable
sleeve so that the shield is drawn for about 5 mm. Strip also the metallic core
for about 5 mm. Crimp all the conductors with respective spade lugs for terminal
board supplied with the kit.
For SU70-10N/S (10 kW) scanner unit in reference with Scanner 10 kW CB20
Cable Handling, or Scanner 10 kW CB15 Cable Handling (see paragraphs
below), carry out the connection with the terminal boards J8 and J9 separating
the conductors assigned to J8 from those assigned to J9 with two bands tightenwire for a length of 10 cm.
For SU70-25H (25 kW) scanner unit in reference with Scanner 25 kW CB15
Cable Handling (see paragraph below), carry out the connection with the
terminal boards J8A and J8B separating the conductors assigned to J8A from
those assigned to J8B with two bands tighten-wire for a length of 10 cm.
For scanner units SU70-14E/S, SU70-25E/S and SU78-14E/S non-TA in
reference with CHAPTER 1, section Installation of Transas Network
Scanners 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast, paragraph Electrical Installation,
carry out the connection with the terminal board J8A and the RJ45 connector J7
separating the conductors assigned to J8A from those assigned to J7 with a
band tighten-wire for a length of 10 cm. For these scanners, cable CB24 is used.
Note: Be sure that no pieces of conductor or other pieces remain inside the unit
after this task.
Annex G. Scanners Cables Handling
561
Scanner 10 kW CB20 Cable Handling
562
J9
Function
Conductor
Colour/Rif
Size mmq
0.082
ACP
Brown
HL
Red
0.082
TX+
Blue
0.082
10
TX-
Violet
0.082
12
RX+
Yellow
0.082
13
RX-
Green
0.082
TRG_GND
Braid Cable 2
TRG
Coax 2
GND_VD
Braid Cable 3
VD
Coax 3
Function
Conductor
Colour/Rif
Size mmq
P_MOT
P_MOT
Brown-Black
Red-Black
0.5
0.5
N_MOT
N_MOT
Orange-Black
Yellow-Black
0.5
0.5
GND
Green-Black
0.5
GND
Blue-Black
0.5
0.5
J8
+24V
Violet-Black
+12V
Gray-Black
0.5
-12V
White-Black
0.5
CB20 Cable
Num
Ref
Section
mmq
Colour/Rif
19
AWG20 conductor,
solder copper, format 190.20,
Isolated PVC 1.55 mm max
0.5
Brown-Black, Red-Black,
Orange-Black, Yellow-Black,
Green-Black, Blue-Black, VioletBlack, Gray-Black, White-Black
1021
AWG28 conductor,
solder copper, format 170,127,
Isolated PVC 0.94 mm max
0.082
Brown-White, Red-White,
Black, White, Gray, Violet, Orange,
Blue, Brown, Red, Yellow, Green
2224
RG174 coaxial
25
Poly stip
26
Full stip
Soldered copper >85%
27
PVC Grey stip,

GEM CB label
step 50 cm, ext. diam. max 15 mm
Numbered from 1 to 3
563

J8
Function
Conductor
Colour/Rif
Size mmq
P_MOT
P_MOT
RED
ORANGE
AWG14
AWG16
N_MOT
N_MOT
WHITE
GREY
AWG14
AWG16
GND
BLACK
AWG14
GND
BLACK 8
AWG24
+24V
GREEN
AWG14
+12V
BROWN
AWG14
-12V
YELLOW
AWG16
Function
Conductor
J9
Colour/Rif
1
HL
BLACK 2
AWG24
ACP
BLACK 1
AWG24
TRG
COAX2
RG174
TRG_GND
SHIELD COAX2
VD
COAX3
RG174
GND_VD
SHIELD COAX3
12
RX+
BLACK 4
AWG24
13
RX-
BLACK 5
AWG24
TX+
BLACK 6
AWG24
10
TX-
BLACK 7
AWG24
Num Ref
564
Size mmq
Section mmq
Block PVC core
110
Tinned-copper wire (AWG24)
1114
RG174 coaxial
1517
Tinned-copper wire with PVC coloured sheath (AWG16)
1822
23
Tinned-copper sheath
24
Inner PVC sheath
25
Polyester tape
26
Tinned-copper shield
27
Outer PVC sheath (grey)
0.25
J8A
Function
Conductor
Colour/Rif
Size, mm
P_MOT
P_MOT
Red
Orange
AWG14
AWG16
N_MOT
N_MOT
White
Grey
AWG14
AWG16
GND
Black 8
AWG24
+24V
Green
AWG14
+12V
Brown
AWG14
11
-12V
Yellow
AWG16
13
GND
Black
AWG14
Function
J8B
HL
Conductor
Colour/Rif
Size, mm
Black 2
AWG24
ACP
Black 1
AWG24
10
TRG
Coax2
RG174
12
TRG
Shield Coax2
14
VIDEO
Coax3
RG174
16
VIDEO
Shield Coax3
18
RX+
Black 4
AWG24
20
RX-
Black 5
AWG24
24
TX+
Black 6
AWG24
26
TX-
Black 7
AWG24
565
Scanners SRT 12/25 kW X-Band and 30 kW S-Band Cables
Num Ref
Section, mm
Block PVC core
110
Tinned-copper wire (AWG24)
1114
RG174 coaxial
1517
1822
23
Tinned-copper sheath
24
Inner PVC sheath
25
Polyester tape
26
Tinned-copper shield
27
Outer PVC sheath (grey)
0.25
SCANNERS SRT 12/25 KW X-BAND AND 30 KW S-BAND

CABLES
Multi-core Cable 55M455P002(3) Handling
There is the multi-conductor cable connects scanner and MFD System. With a few
exceptions, the multi-conductor cable used includes coaxial wires for Video, Trigger
and Antenna data. It is therefore required to handle these cables with particular
care.
Core overview of multi-core cable:
Cable Handling
Dismantle the outer isolation of the cable for 70 cm, however in case of 12 or 25 kW
X-Band/U Antenna Group the length must be 180 cm. Remove most of the shield,
let it be 5 cm with shield perceptive to vision:
566
Main Shield and Inner Shields Handlig

Take back the shield:
Dismantle the outer isolation of the 0.5 mmq shielded cable (let it remain 4 cm with
isolated shielded cable).
Open the shield near the outer isolation, and pull out the center cable without cutting
the shield:
Insert the shields from the inner cables into the main cable shield and take back
the shields:
Cable Holder Installation

See below, the correct procedure for installation of cable, in to the cable holder.
Refer to the Main Shield and inner shields handling for shields handling.
Fix the shields with tape:
Insert the cable in the unit, and fix the cable to the cable holder:
Cable Gland Installation

See below, the correct procedure for installation of cable, in to the cable gland:
Pass the wires trough the cable gland:
567
Refer to Main Shield and inner shields handling section, for shields handling.
Turn the shields over the first metal ring, and trim exceeding shields:
Insert the cable with all parts in to the cable gland:
After that, tight it hard, and be sure that the shield will remain inside the cable gland:
Put some silicon compound, in the remaining space between the cable gland bolt
and the cable.
0.5 MMQ Cores

Cut the core to the wanted length and dismantle the core for 10 mm:
Insert and crimp the blue-end terminal:
Note: End terminal should always be used.

Double connection in one terminal (yellow terminal):
Triple connection in one terminal (grey terminal):
568
4.5 MMQ Cores

Cut-out a few conductors in order to make easy the insertion of the grey-end terminal:
Insert and crimp the grey-end terminal:
RG Coaxial Cables
Mechanical details of BNC connector:
Cut the cable to the wanted length.

Dismantle the outer isolation of the RG coaxial cable without damaging the shield,
and put the related part of the BNC connector as below:
Details related to the ring of the BNC connector.
Take back the shield on the ring and trim exceeding shield:
569
Dismantle the outer isolation of the center core without damaging the centre
core and be sure that the shield is not shorted with the center core:
Solder the center core with the BNC pin.

Be careful not damage the isolation (i.e. burned) during the solder process:
Mount the BNC connector as below:
Shielded Conductors
Cut the cable to the wanted length.
Dismantle the outer isolation of the 0.5 mmq shielded cable (let it remain 4 cm
with isolated shielded cable).
Open the shield near the outer isolation, and pull out the centre cable without cutting
the shield.
Refer to the Main Shield and inner shields handling section for shields handling.
570
Multi-core Cable 55X456P001 Handling

Core overview of multi-core cable:
Cable Handling
Dismantle the outer insulation of the cable for 60 cm:
Remove most of the shield, let it be 5 cm with shield perceptive to vision:
Remove the main protective film and turn, as in the picture, the shield over the cable
outer isolation 5 cm remaining:
571
Main Shield and Inner Shields Handling

Remove the metallic film from each twisted pair cables and pass the 4 ground wires
through the turned shield.
0.35 mm Cores
Insert and crimp the blue-end terminal:

Double connection in one terminal (yellow terminal):
Triple connection in one terminal (grey terminal):
1.5 and 2.5 mm Cores

Cut the core to the wanted length and dismantle the core for 10mm:
572
RG coaxial Cables
Mechanical details of BNC connector:
Cut the cable to the wanted length. Dismantle the outer isolation of the RG coaxial
cable without damaging the shield, and put the related part of the BNC connector as
below:
Details related to the ring of the BNC connector.
Take back the shield on the ring and trim exceeding shield:
Dismantle the outer isolation of the centre core without damaging the centre core
and be sure that the shield is not shorted with the centre core:
Solder the centre core with the BNC pin. Be careful not damage the isolation
(i.e. burned) during the solder process:
Mount the BNC connector as below:
573
Scanner S-Band Down Mast Coaxial Cable Installation

The RF-signal between the Transceiver and the Antenna is guided through a special
Coax RF cable.
Note: The Coax cable shall not be to a radius less than 200 mm and must be
handled with care during the installation.
When installing the cable, start from the base of the Antenna Pedestal. A length
of approximately 30 cm should be left to allow replacement of the connector without
removing the cable.
As far as the coaxial cable handling is concerned, follow the instructions given below:
Do not lay curves with radius of less than 80 cm;
Install the cable far from hot exhaust ducts;
At the cable entry, leave a length of about 30 cm sufficient to allow any

necessary repair (replacement of connectors) without removing the cable.
Connect then the cable to the Antenna Pedestal.

Fix the cable into the supporting wall at intervals of at least 1 metre, paying attention
to avoid tension. The outside diameter of the cable is 23 mm (7/8). Protect the
cable with a U-shaped shield, like the waveguide, where it may suffer damage.
A standard cable gland should be used as deck gland. The hard PVC type is
recommended, as this is compatible with all deck materials and limits the amount
of pressure which can be applied to the cable. Enough pressure should be exerted
on the gland to ensure a watertight seal. Too much pressure will deform the cable
and cause a high standing-wave ratio.
Make bends and fixing of the coaxial cable prior to terminate the connector
to the transceiver.
This keeps the sliding of the inner conductor to minimum in case of minor cable
reshaping.
Coaxial cable cutting, trimming and flaring must be performed with the cable on vertical
position, its end looking down. This is to avoid fillings and chips entering the cable.
Do not use compressed air for cleaning, but wipe the cable termination with
a moistured cloth.
The procedure for terminating the connection to the TRANSCEIVER is as follows:
1. Cut and trim the free end of the cable as indicated in figure. Slightly bevel
the inner conductor.
574
2. Slide into the cable the thermo shrinkable sleeve, and then components 1
through 4, in sequence as shown in picture above:
thermo shrinkable sleeve;
external retaining ring (1) pointing to the direction shown in figure above;
flat washer (2);
silicon rubber O ring (3);
internal ring (4).
3. Slowly screw the lower retaining ring into the threaded outer conductor
of the coaxial cable (5). Proceed now with care and position the lower edge
of the retaining ring to the point where it is even with the outer conductor.
Check the position of these last two items and verify again the above step 2.
4. Slide the flange (6) into the cable.
5. Insert the end of the cable (with relevant items) into the connector body (7)
and push against its bottom end. Check that the inner conductor is centred
and then start tightening the external retaining ring; refer to following picture.
Check the length of the protruding inner conductor. It must be 28 mm0.1 mm.
In case it is longer, file it up to the proper length. Keep always the cable connector
pointed downward during this process. Before inserting the connector in the waveguide
adapter, check very carefully that the coaxial cable is aligned with the waveguide.
Put the O ring in the relevant slot of flange.
Do not force the teflon plug while inserting the connector in the guide. Using
the Allen wrench, tighten the flange firmly to the waveguide adapter. Make sure
that the retaining O ring is properly in place.
575
Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Waveguide Installation
SCANNER 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST.

WAVEGUIDE INSTALLATION
Introduction
The installation, maintenance, or removal of waveguide parts requires qualified,
experienced personnel. Manufacturer installation instructions have been written for such
installation personnel. Antenna systems should be inspected once a year by qualified
personnel to verify proper installation, maintenance and condition of equipment.
Elliptical waveguide is supplied pressurised. An air inlet valve is included with each
pressurised length. Gaskets, silicone grease, connecting hardware and assembly
instructions are packed with unattached connectors.
Typical installation is shown in figure below.
576
Outline Drawings
Installation Instructions
Elliptical Waveguide
Elliptical waveguide is supplied pressurised. An air inlet valve is included with each
pressurised length. Gaskets, silicone grease, connecting hardware and assembly
instructions are packed with unattached connectors.
Elliptical waveguide type number
EW(85)
Dimensions over jacket in inches (millimeters)
1.320.90 (33.522.9)
Volume per 100 feet (30 m) in cubic feet (liters)
0.42 (11.9)
Radius of minimum bend in inches (millimeters) E-Plane H-Plane
8 (200) 19 (480)
Recommended twist limit in degrees per foot (millimeters)
1(3)
Waveguide weight lb/ft (kg/m)
0.36 (0.54)
Preparation and Inspection

Inspect waveguide for possible shipping damage and pressure loss. Waveguide
and connector assemblies have been pressure tested at factory before shipping.
Maximum allowable pressure drop for assembly over 20 ft (6.1 m) is 1lb/in2 (7 kPa)
in 24 hours from initial pressure of 10 lb/in2 (70 kPa). Each assembly is pressurized
with dry air to 10 Ib/in2 prior to shipping and result of factory pressure test is recorded on
inspection tag tied to assembly. Tire gauge can be used to check pressure. If waveguide
has pressure loss, check all joints for possible leaks especially at pipe threads. Refer to
paragraph Pressurisation of this chapter for pressure information.
Factory attached connector is shipped with blank flange attached to maintain
pressure during shipment. Do not remove flange until after waveguide is installed.
Field attachment of connector at Transceiver end must be completed before
hoisting. Attach connector to end of waveguide in accordance with instructions
in paragraph Elliptical Waveguide Connectors of this chapter.
Pressure test assembly prior to hoisting.
577
Hoisting
Obtain suitable hoist line to support weight of waveguide. Refer to table above
for weights per foot (metre). Place protective covering over connector to prevent
damage during hoisting. Attach robe sling or cable grip near end of waveguide
allowing sufficient length to reach Antenna Group input from hoisted line to keep
from dangling. Rope sling may be used in lieu of cable grip for every short lengths.
Use cable grips in accordance with instructions received.
Additional tying is done above and below cable grips to keep weight on hoist line
and not on waveguide. Make certain to allow slack in waveguide when tying and that
slack is maintained during hoisting, tying is accomplished with strong fiber-reinforced
tape or similar material applied generously at 15 or 20 ft (4.6 or 6.1 m) intervals as
waveguide is raised.
Hoist waveguide slowly. Careless handling can cause kinks, dents and scrapes.
Waveguide may be bent in both E and H planes. Do not make bends smaller than
minimum bending radius shown in table. Note that H plane minimum bending radius
is considerably larger than E plane radius. Waveguide bend can be formed by hand.
An improvised mandrel that will provide curved forming surface of equivalent radius
may be used, waveguide may be twisted slightly for flange alignment.
Use cable grip as temporary anchor to support waveguide until connector has been
properly mated with Antenna Group input. Provide sufficient slack to permit easy
flange alignment.
Anchoring
Maintain hoist line tension until anchoring is completed. Attachment to lighting
conduit or vertical angle irons runs is recommended in installations where antenna
mast do not provide adequate or convenient hanger support. Waveguide subject to
vibration or wind must not be left unsupported.
Space hangers approximately 1 ft (0.3 m) apart for first three at top of vertical run
and 4 ft (1.2 m) apart thereafter. If distance from feed termination to 1st hanger is
more than 4 ft, waveguide must be supported. Position hangers to hold waveguide
away from antenna mast, rubbing against edges can cause damage. Do not tighten
hangers excessively as dents or deformations can cause degradation in electrical
performance.
Hangers kit contain support brackets which snaps into slots on each side of hanger
base. See detail A-A. After each hanger is attached and support bracket is snapped
in, thread captivated nut to end of bolt as shown. Place waveguide into hanger, bend
hanger around waveguide and slip bolt into slot of bent tab, catching nut under tab.
Tighten bolt until hanger grips firmly. Excessive tightening may damage waveguide.
If jacket has been cut, apply vinyl tape to damaged area. Top and bottom of
waveguide should be grounded by low impedance conductors. Antenna Group input
connection cannot serve as top ground.
578
Horizontal Runs
Route waveguide from base of mast to feed-thru flange and from feed-thru flange
to Transceiver.
It can be supported above or below roof. Attach waveguide to horizontal support
member using same type hangers and 4 ft intervals as in vertical run. Exposed
horizontal runs must be protected from weight of accumulated ice and damage from
falling ice other objects.
Waveguide Connections
Where is possible connect end of waveguide directly to Transceiver and to Antenna
Group input without any short interconnection (only the adapter must be used).
Otherwise, assemble rigid waveguide parts in accordance with the typical installation
drawing.
See that gasket and mating surface of flanges are clean. Use comothene, vythene
or other non-flammable fluid for cleaning. Do not apply silicone grease to flange
gaskets. Join flanges making certain gasket is in position. Add connecting hardware
and fasten flanges together, tightening screws evenly.
If factory prepared length of waveguide must changed, cut the waveguide to appropriate
length and attach connector to waveguide after required length of run has been
determined. Attach elliptical waveguide connector to E-bend elbow through the adapter.
579
Grounding
The grounding point is designed to provide electrical contact between the outer
conductor of the elliptical waveguide and the ships ground.
The waveguide should be grounded along the vertical run near the Antenna Group.
A section of the cable jacket is removed, and the ground strap tightly fastened
to the outer conductor. The connection is then wrapped in butyl rubber tape and
vinyl tape for protection from weather. Finally, a terminal is attached to the ground
wire. The terminal should be connected to the ships ground terminal board.
Do not make bends closer to the grounding point to prevent damage during the hoisting.
Elliptical Waveguide Connectors

STEP 1. Prepare waveguide as shown in picture below. End of waveguide must be
square. Use straight-edged piece of paper wrapped around waveguide downward
while cutting to keep copper chips from entering. Remove all burrs from cut and
of waveguide using knife and file. Clean exposed copper with solvent. Clean inside
of waveguide with bottle brush.
STEP 2. Add thin coating of silicone grease to large O ring gasket and place it into
groove inside clamping nut, then apply thin coating of silicone grease to smooth
inside surface of clamping nut that slides over smaller O ring (step 8). Place nut
over end of waveguide at distance from end as shown. Secure nut to waveguide
with several turns of tape covering end of nut to keep foreign matter from entering
during assembly operation.
STEP 3. Slip compression ring over waveguide until recessed edge bottoms against
jacket. Apply small amount of silicone grease to edge of jacket to aid in installing
compression ring. Alignment pin hole openings must face away from waveguide as
shown in pictures below.
580
STEP 4. Turn gasket inside out and place over end of waveguide. Apply very
thin of coating silicone grease to gasket threads, the flip gasket over and against
compression ring. Apply thin coating of silicone grease to outside surface of gasket.
Clean any silicone grease from exposed copper using solvent.
STEP 5. Slip recessed side of flare ring over gasket.
Alignment pin holes in flare ring and compression ring must be in line. Flare ring
must be pushed against compression ring as tight as possible. Approximate opening
between flare ring and compression ring should be as shown.
STEP 6. Use metal snips to make cuts into end of waveguide to depth and intervals
shown to form tabs. See following picture. Make cuts as close as possible to flare ring.
STEP 7. Flatten tabs against flare ring. Use mallet as shown on following picture.
Use only enough force to flatten tabs. Do not strike tabs so hard as to reduce
thickness of metal. Trim any tab that protrudes past outside of groove in flare ring.
After tabs are flattened and trimmed, tabs should be cleaned with solvent to remove
any silicone grease. Face off connector body with contacts tabs should also be
cleaned thoroughly so that no grease is present in mating RF contact surfaces.
Clean inside of waveguide with bottle brush.
STEP 8. Place smaller O ring gasket into groove in connector body. Do not apply
silicon grease to this gasket. Apply thin coating of silicon grease to rear outer
surface of compression ring. This will allow large O ring gasket inside clamping nut
to slide over compression ring.
STEP 9. Refer to figure 6. Place connector body against flare ring. Alignment pins
must be properly seated in alignment holes of flare ring and compression ring.
Untape and slide clamping nut over assembled part and screw it onto connector body.
Tighten connection with wrenches. Use adjustable wrench on rectangular portion of
connector body to hold it in position while clamping nut is tightened. Turn clamping
nut only (do not turn connector body).
STEP 10. Waveguide should be check for leaks whenever connectors are attached,
when connector-attached waveguide is received at site, or after installation.
581
At dependable method is to apply soap solution to cable connector and pneumatic fittings.
When mating two UG type flanges with the gasket grooves, two flange gasket must
be used, if flange with gasket groove is mated to flange without groove, use one
flange gasket. Two mating EIA type flanges use only one flange gasket. Do not
apply silicone grease to flange gaskets.
Wall/Roof Feed-Through
These wall/roof feed-through kits are designed to permit weatherproof path through
a roof or wall for elliptical waveguide. Each kit can be mounted to metal, wood or
concrete. A kit consists of a rubber boot, two metal flange halves, sealing washers,
and an adjustable clamp.
Elliptical waveguide type number
EW85
Kit number
35849A-3
Entrance hole diameter, in. (mm)
3 (80)
Bolt hole circle, in. (mm)
4 (102)
No. of bolts holes
Boot flange diameter, in. (mm)
5 (127)
STEP 1. Cut the entrance hole in the roof or wall to accommodate the cable size.
Refer to the chart for the proper dimension.
STEP 2. Insert the waveguide or cable through the entrance hole and connect
it to the entrance hole and connect it to the components inside the building.
STEP 3. Apply silicone grease to the hole and slit of the rubber boot. Place
the boot on the waveguide or cable and over the entrance hole. Mark the locations
of the mounting holes.
STEP 4. Remove the boot and drill the mounting holes 5/16 (8 mm) through the
wall or roof. For concrete, either drill holes through the material or drill larger holes
deep enough to insert bolt anchors.
STEP 5. Place the boot around the waveguide or cable and over the entrance hole.
Position the flange halves in the groove of the boot and align all of the mounting
holes. Fasten the assembly with 1/4 bolts, flat washers, and nuts obtained locally.
Place the sealing washer supplied under the bolt heads as shown.
Wall feed through drilling template:
STEP 6. Wrap the clamp around the boot as shown and tighten it with a screwdriver
to ensure a leak proof seal.
582
Pressurisation
After all connections have been completed, pressurise waveguide. Changes in
temperature can cause moisture from outside air that enters waveguide to condense
and seriously impair efficiency, so waveguide must be under pressure at all times.
If moist air has entered, must be purged. Remove gas port plug located on
connector at Antenna Group end of waveguide, and purge waveguide continuously
until it is dry. After purging, replace gas port plug and pressurise waveguide.
Dry air is normally used for pressurising. Dry nitrogen may also be used. After
installation, check waveguide connections for leaks. Use commercial leak detector
or liquid detergent over joints and check for bubbles. Un-broken soap film over entire
joint for several minutes will indicate very small leaks.
583
ANNEX H
Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band
Up Mast Diagrams
The following diagrams are enclosed in this Annex:
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram;
Scanner 10 kW X-Band Up Mast Units. Connection Diagram.
MFD WS. SCANNER 10/25 KW X-BAND UP MAST. BLOCK DIAGRAM
X-Band Antenna Group 6 / 7.5 feet

10
1 - X1 Connection Board 220 VAC (optional)

2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter (optional)
3 - X1 Connection Board 24 VDC (optional)
4 - Computer RS6 or RS6B
5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - RIB6
8 - Interface/Power Supply Unit ASU40000
9 - 10 kW X-Band Up Mast Scanner
10 - X-Band Array Unit 6 or 7,5 feet
(4 ft - Non-Type Approval)
11 - PM Power Supply Unit APM-030 (optional)
12 - PM Sensor Unit SPM-010 (optional)
12
9
11
APM-030
8
6
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
ASU40000
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
To VDR
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
DI1
DI2
* From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1
AC/DC
Convertor
220 VAC 1 PH.
EMC
Filter
**From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
1
Notice:
* - Low battery alarm signal (NC)
** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC)
MFD WS. SCANNER 10/25 KW X-BAND UP MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1:
ES6 Keyboard
From contacts 11 & 12 of UPS* to DI 1

From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS** to DI 2
UPS6
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
RS6 or RS6B Computer
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
Sensors signals 4xRS422
220 VAC 1 Ph.
X1 Connection
Board
Interface/
Power Supply Unit
ASU40000
RIB6 X-Band Radar
NOTE 2:
For connection cable Y20 to RIB6 see

"MFD Interface. Scanner 10 kW X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram.
For connection cables Y22 and Y24 see "Scanner 10 kW
X-Band Up Mast Units. Connection Diagram", "MFD Installation Guide"
and Installation Manual for PM 30-02 units.
To Performance Monitor Sensor Unit SPM-010
AC/DC
Convertor
To Scanner Unit SU70-10NS, Terminal Board, J8 and J9
EMC
Filter
Performance Monitor
Power Supply Unit
APM-030
MFD WS. SCANNER 10/25 KW X-BAND UP MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To RS6 Digital Inputs (DI1&DI2)

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Battery Pack
Control
Unit
QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
220 VAC 1Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
24 VDC Power to APM-030 Unit

24 VDC Power to ASU40000 Unit
24 VDC Power to ES6 Keyboard
24 VDC Power to Monitor
24 VDC Power to RS6 or RS6B Computer
24 VDC Power to RIB6 X-band Radar
NOTE:
MFD INTERFACE. SCANNER 10/25 KW X-BAND UP MAST. WIRING DIAGRAM
SCANNER 10 KW X-BAND UP MAST UNITS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ANNEX I
Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up
Mast Diagrams
MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram.
MFD WS. SCANNER S-BAND UP MAST. BLOCK DIAGRAM

6 - TFT Monitor
7 - RIB6
8 - External Power Supply Unit
9 - S- Band Pedestal with Tranciever
10 - S-Band Antenna Unit 12 feet
11 - PM Arm
12 - Safety Switch
10
11
12
8
6
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
Power Supply Unit

16PS-003
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
To VDR
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
AC/DC
Convertor
220 VAC 1 PH.
220 VAC 3 Ph.
EMC
Filter

UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
24 V DC Power
DI1
DI2
1
Notice:
MFD WS. SCANNER S-BAND UP MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To S-Band Antenna Group
PSU
16PS-003
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1: For connection cables Y3, Y27, Y28 in External Supply Unit 16PS-003
see "MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Wiring diagram"
NOTE 2:
ES6 Keyboard

UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
Alarms
220 VAC 1 Ph.
220 VAC 3 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
RIB6 S-Band Radar

NOTE 3: For connection cable Y27 to RIB6 see "MFD Interface.
Scanner S-Band Up Mast. Wiring diagram"
MFD WS. SCANNER S-BAND UP MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
220VAC 1Ph.
220VAC 3Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards

24 VDC Power to RIB6 S-Band Radar
24 VDC Power ON to External Power Supply Unit TB6
220 VAC 3 Ph. Power to External Power Supply Unit TB1
+ -
NOTE:
MFD INTERFACE. SCANNER S-BAND UP MAST. WIRING DIAGRAM
ANNEX J
Scanners SRT 12/25 kW XBand Up Mast and 30 kW SBand Down Mast Diagrams
Block Diagram;
MFD WS1. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS2. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Connection Diagram;
Cables List;
MFD WS1. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD WS2. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram;
Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. SRT Adapter Box Antenna Group.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Wiring Diagram;
Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Transceiver Antenna Group Connection Diagram;
Network Configuration. Data Flow Diagram;
MFD Two WS. Scanners SRT X-Band Up Mast and S-Band Down Mast. Standalone
Configuration. Data Flow Diagram.
MFD TWO WS. SCANNERS SRT X-BAND UP MAST AND S-BAND DOWN MAST. BLOCK DIAGRAM
S-Band Antenna Group 12 Feet
X-Band Antenna Group 6/9 feet

6 - TFT Monitor
7 - RIB6
8 - Ethernet Switch (optional)
9 - DCU6 (optional)
10 - SRT Adapter Box
11 - SRT 25 kW X-Band Up Mast Pedestal with Transciever
12 - X-Band Antenna 6/9 feet
13 - PM Arm
14 - 30 kW S-Band Down Mast Transceiver
15 - S-Band Pedestal
16 - S-Band Antenna 12 feet
6
17 - Safety Switch
18 - Wago Set for Conning (optional)
16
12
13
13
15
11
14
SEA
RAIN
Transceiver
Unit
10
GAIN
SRT
Adapter Box
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
SEA
RAIN
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
ES6
To Alarm panel
17
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
RIB6
T
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
To VDR
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
DI1
DI2
DI1
DI2
220 VAC 1 PH.
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
1
9
Sensors (RS422)
AC/DC
Convertor
EMC
Filter
LAN1
220 VAC 1 Ph.
AC/DC
Convertor
EMC
Filter
220 VAC 3 Ph.
GPS, Gyro, Log
GPS, Gyro, Log
To Alarm panel
To VDR
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
18
Sensors
Alarms
Notice:
MFD WS1. SCANNER SRT X-BAND UP MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1:
ES6 Keyboard

UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
Ethernet Switch
From Transceiver X-Band
SRT
Adapter Box
From WS2 RIB6 Radar S-Band

From WS2 RS6 Radar S-Band
DCU6
RIB6 X-Band Radar
NOTE 2: For connection cables Y32 and Y33 see "MFD Interface.
Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. Wiring Diagram" and
"Scanner SRT X-Band Up Mast. SRT Adapter Box - Antenna Group
Connection Diagram"
MFD WS2. SCANNER S-BAND DOWN MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To S-Band Antenna Group
Transceiver
Unit
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1: For connection cables Y31, Y34 and coaxial cable Y35
see "MFD Installation Guide" and "Scanner S-Band Down
Mast. Transceiver - Antenna Group Connection Diagram"
NOTE 2:
ES6 Keyboard

UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
220 VAC 1 Ph.
220 VAC 3 Ph.
WAGO Set for Conning

WAGO WAGO WAGO WAGO
750-314 750-403 750-513 750-600
Modbus 4 CH AI 2 CH D0 End Mod
To WS1 Ethernet Switch Radar X-Band
NOTE 3: For connection cable Y34 from Transceiver to RIB6

see "MFD Interface. Scanner S-Band Down Mast. Wiring
Diagram" and "Scanner S-Band Down Mast.
Transceiver - Antenna Group Connection Diagram"
To WS1 Ethernet Switch Radar X-Band
RIB6 S-Band Radar
MFD TWO WS. SCANNERS SRT X-BAND UP MAST AND S-BAND DOWN MAST. CABLES LIST
MFD WS1. SCANNER SRT X-BAND UP MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Battery Pack
Control
Unit
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
220 VAC 1Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards

24 VDC Power to Ethernet Switch
24 VDC Power to DCU6
24 VDC Power to RIB6 X-Band Radar
24 VDC Power ON to SRT Adapter Box TB1
220 VAC 1Ph. Power to SRT Adapter Box X-band Radar
NOTE:
MFD WS2. SCANNER S-BAND DOWN MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
220VAC 1Ph.
220VAC 3Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
24 VDC Power to WAGO Set

24 VDC Power to RIB6 S-Band Radar
24 VDC Power ON to Transceiver Unit S-Band Radar TB10
220 VAC 3 Ph. Power to Transceiver Unit S-Band Radar
+ -
NOTE:
MFD INTERFACE. SCANNER SRT X-BAND UP MAST. WIRING DIAGRAM
SCANNER SRT X-BAND UP MAST. SRT ADAPTER BOX ANTENNA GROUP CONNECTION DIAGRAM
MFD INTERFACE. SCANNER S-BAND DOWN MAST. WIRING DIAGRAM
SCANNER S-BAND DOWN MAST. TRANSCEIVER ANTENNA GROUP CONNECTION DIAGRAM
MFD TWO WS. SCANNERS SRT X-BAND UP MAST AND S-BAND DOWN MAST. NETWORK CONFIGURATION. DATA FLOW DIAGRAM
SRT X-BAND
ANTENNA GROUP
WITH TRANSCEIVER
ANTENNA 6/9 FT
S-BAND ANTENNA
GROUP (PEDESTAL
AND ANTENNA 12 FT)
SRT ADAPTER
BOX
RIB6 RADAR
X-BAND
TRANSCEIVER
UNIT
ETHERNET SWITCH
RIB6 RADAR
S-BAND
WORKSTATION 2
RADAR S-BAND
MONITOR TFT
WORKSTATION 1
RADAR X-BAND
MONITOR TFT
DCU 6
MFD TWO WS. SCANNERS SRT X-BAND UP MAST AND S-BAND DOWN MAST. STANDALONE CONFIGURATION. DATA FLOW DIAGRAM
SRT X-BAND
ANTENNA GROUP
WITH TRANSCEIVER
ANTENNA 6/9 FT
S-BAND ANTENNA
GROUP (PEDESTAL
AND ANTENNA 12 FT)
Notice: In the event of fault of the Ethernet switch

SRT ADAPTER
BOX
RIB6 RADAR
X-BAND
reconfigure Network connection as shown

in this drawing
ETHERNET SWITCH
TRANSCEIVER
UNIT
RIB6 RADAR
S-BAND
WORKSTATION 2
RADAR S-BAND
MONITOR TFT
WORKSTATION 1
RADAR X-BAND
MONITOR TFT
DCU 6
ANNEX K
Scanner 25 kW X-Band
Down Mast Diagrams
MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Power Supply Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Wiring Diagram;
Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Transceiver Antenna Group.
Connection Diagram.
MFD WS. SCANNER 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST. BLOCK DIAGRAM
X-Band Antenna Group 6/9 feet

11
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - RIB6
8 - SRT Adapter Box
9 - 25 kW X-Band Down Mast Transceiver
10 - X-Band Turning Unit
11 - X-Band Antenna 6 or 9 feet
12 - PM Arm
12
10
9
Transceiver
Unit
8
6
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
SRT
Adapter Box
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
To VDR
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
DI1
DI2
AC/DC
Convertor
220 VAC 1 PH.
EMC
Filter
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
Notice:
MFD WS. SCANNER 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To X-Band Antenna Group
Transceiver
Unit
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1: For connection cables Y27, Y28, Y29 and elliptical
waveguide Y30 see "MFD Installation Guide"
and "Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast.
Transceiver - Antenna Group Connection Diagram"
NOTE 2:
ES6 Keyboard

UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
Alarms
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
SRT
Adapter Box
RIB6 X-Band Radar
NOTE 3: For connection cables Y26 and Y28 see

"MFD Interface. Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast. Wiring diagram"
MFD WS. SCANNER 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Battery Pack
Control
Unit
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
220 VAC 1Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards

24 VDC Power to RIB6 X-Band Radar
24 VDC Power ON to SRT Adapter Box TB1
220 VAC 1Ph. Power to SRT Adapter Box X-Band Radar
220 VAC 1Ph. Power to Transceiver Unit X-Band Radar
NOTE:
MFD INTERFACE. SCANNER 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST. WIRING DIAGRAM
SCANNER 25 KW X-BAND DOWN MAST. TRANSCEIVER ANTENNA GROUP CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ANNEX L
Scanner BridgeMaster E
10 kW X-Band Up Mast
Diagrams
The following Diagrams are enclosed in this Annex:
MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast. Power Supply Distribution;
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. RIB6 Scanner BridgeMaster E X-Band Up Mast.
Connection Diagram.
MFD WS. SCANNER BRIDGEMASTER E X-BAND UP MAST. BLOCK DIAGRAM

BME X-Band Scanner 4/6/8 feet HSC*
1 - X1 Connection Board 220 VAC

2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter
3 - X1 Connection Board 24 VDC
6 - TFT Monitor with Buzzer
7 - RIB6
8 - 10 or 25 kW X-Band Up Mast
Turning Unit with Transceiver
9 - X-Band Antenna 4 or 6 or 8 feet
TFT
Monitor
5
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
To VDR
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
RIB6
T
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
LAN1
DI1
DI2
AC/DC
Convertor
EMC
Filter
220 VAC 1 Ph.

UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
NOTE 1:
NOTE 2:
*** - Scanner speed setting "LOW" (28 RPM) or "HIGH" (45 RPM) is selected by Link LK1 fitted
to the Motor Drive Board 65801811 and to the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801805.
With the jumper in the position marked "LO" (pins 1&2), the normal scanner speed is 28 RPM.
With the jumper in the position marked "HI" (pins 2&3), the normal scanner speed is 45 RPM.
The factory default settings is "LOW" speed (28 RPM nominal).
MFD WS. SCANNER BRIDGEMASTER E X-BAND UP MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1:

ES6 Keyboard
UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
Alarms
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
RIB6
From BME Transceiver (Data)

From BME Transceiver (Video)
220VAC PWR to BME Transceiver
NOTE 2: For connection cable Y17 and Y18 see "MFD Interface.
RIB6 - Scanner BME X-Band Up Mast. Connection Diagram"
MFD WS. SCANNER BRIDGEMASTER E X-BAND UP MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Battery Pack
Control
Unit
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
220 VAC 1Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards

24 VDC Power to RS6 Computer
24 VDC Power to RIB6
220 VAC Power to BME Transceiver
NOTE:
MFD INTERFACE. RIB6 SCANNER BRIDGEMASTER E X-BAND UP MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ANNEX M
Scanner Navico BR24
Broadband Diagrams
MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. BR24 Broadband Scanner. Power Supply Distribution;
Connection Diagram.
MFD WS. BR24 BROADBAND SCANNER. BLOCK DIAGRAM
BR24 Broadband
Scanner

2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - Radar Interface Box RI10
8 - BR24 Scanner
TFT
Monitor
RADAR
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
DIM
Radar Interface Box

TRACK CONTROL
PWR
ES6
NETWORK
To Alarm panel
To VDR
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
LAN1
DI1
DI2
AC/DC
Convertor
220 VAC 1 Ph.
EMC
Filter

UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
1
Use 5A fuse or breaker
Red
Yellow
Black
3
Notice:
MFD WS. BR24 BROADBAND SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
NOTE:
ES6 Keyboard

UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
Alarms
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
Radar Interface
Box RI10
Use 5A fuse or breaker
Black
Yellow
Red
From BR24 Scanner
MFD WS. BR24 BROADBAND SCANNER. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Battery Pack
Control
Unit
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
220 VAC 1Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards

24 VDC Power to RS6 Computer
24 VDC Power to Radar Interface Box RI10
NOTE:
ANNEX N
TRANSAS Network
12/25 kW X-Band Scanners
Up Mast Diagrams
MFD WS. TRANSAS Network 12/25 kW Scanners Up Mast. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. TRANSAS Network 12/25 kW Scanners Up Mast. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. TRANSAS Network 12/25 kW Scanners Up Mast.
Power Supply Distribution. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. TRANSAS Network 12/25 kW Scanners Interfaces. Connection Diagram.
MFD WS. TRANSAS NETWORK 12/25 KW SCANNERS UP MAST. BLOCK DIAGRAM
X-Band Antenna 6 / 7.5 feet

8

4 - Computer RS6B
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - 10 or 25 kW X-Band Up Mast Scanner
8 - X-Band Array Unit 6 or 7,5 feet
9 - PM Power Supply Unit APM-030 (optional)
10 - PM Sensor Unit SPM-010 (optional)
10
9
APM-030
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
4
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
To VDR
RS6B
LAN2
DI1
DI2
220 VAC 1 PH.
EMC
Filter

AC/DC
Convertor
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
3
NOTE:

ES6 Keyboard
ES6 Trackball
UPS6
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
RS6B Computer
Alarms Ack.
220 VAC 1 Ph.
X1
Connection
Boards
Alarms
Performance Monitor
Power Supply Unit
APM-030
To Scanner Unit J8A Terminal Board
TFT Monitor
To PM Sensor Unit SPM-010
NOTE:
To Scanner Unit J7 Connector
MFD WS. TRANSAS NETWORK 12/25 KW SCANNERS UP MAST. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
MFD WS. TRANSAS NETWORK 12/25 KW SCANNERS UP MAST. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

UPS6
L
NOTE:
E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
RS6B
Battery Pack
Control
Unit
L
E N
E N
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ Rear Side
Rear Side
220 VAC 1Ph.
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
24 VDC Power to APM-030 Unit

24 VDC Power to Scanner Unit J8A Terminal Board
24 VDC Power to RS6B Computer
TRANSAS NETWORK 12/25 KW SCANNERS UNITS INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ANNEX O
MFD Power Supplly
Distribution Diagrams
MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power Supply Distribution. Block Diagram;
MFD. Five Workstations. 220 VAC Main and 24 VDC Emergency Power Supply
Distribution. Block Diagram;
MFD. Five Workstations. MGE UPS System Power Supply Distribution.
Block Diagram.
MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. UPS6 POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT
WS1
WS2
RADAR X-BAND
RAIN
RADAR S-BAND
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
SEA
RAIN
USB
RS232
GYRO
LAN2
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
24 VDC
24 VDC
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
USB
RS232
GAIN
EMC
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
RAIN
LAN1
RS6B or RS6
GPS
GYRO
ES6
RS232
LAN1
UPS6
GYRO
EMC
FILTER
24 VDC
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
24 VDC
24 VDC
ES6
USB
RS232
VIDEO
optional
connections
LAN1
GPS
RS232
VIDEO
RS6B or RS6
GYRO
LAN2
LOG
LAN1
LAN2
LOG
LAN1
UPS6
RIB6
V
RS6B or RS6
GPS
LAN2
LOG
Battery
Pack
ES6 TRACKBALL
DIM
USB
RIB6
FILTER
SEA
VIDEO
UPS6
POWER
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
FROM RADAR X-BAND
EMC
ES6 KEYBOARD
TRACK CONTROL
LAN1
RIB6
ECDIS
CONNING
ES6
LAN2
LOG
RIB6
UPS6
RS6B or RS6
GPS
WS5
ECDIS
BACKUP
DIM
VIDEO
LAN1
WS4
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
EMC
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
UPS6
Battery
Pack
EMC
FILTER
24 VDC
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
24 VDC
ETHERNET
SWITCH 2
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1
LAN2
LAN1
DCU6*
LAN2
LAN1
DCU6*
AIS
GYRO
LOG
RAIN
TRACK CONTROL
VIDEO
RS6B or RS6
SEA
ES6
220 VAC MAIN
USB
FILTER
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
GPS
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
FROM RADAR S-BAND
SEA
TFT
WS3
ECDIS
MASTER
ES6 KEYBOARD
GAIN
TFT
220 VAC MAIN
TFT
220 VAC MAIN
TFT
Sensors (RS422)
Sensors (RS422)
NOTE: *UP TO EIGHT DCU6 CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE SYSTEM. IN THIS CASE IT IS POSSIBLE TO CONNECT 64 DIFFERENT DUPLICATED SENSORS
MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. 220 VAC MAIN AND 24 VDC EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT
TFT
TFT
WS1
WS2
RADAR X-BAND
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
SEA
RAIN
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
GYRO
LOG
RS232
VIDEO
LAN1
GPS
LAN2
LOG
RS6B or RS6
GYRO
RIB6
GAIN
USB
RS232
VIDEO
LAN1
GPS
LAN2
LOG
RS6B or RS6
GYRO
USB
RS232
VIDEO
LAN1
GPS
LAN2
LOG
GYRO
USB
RS232
optional
connections
VIDEO
LAN1
GPS
LAN2
LOG
RS6B or RS6
GYRO
RS232
VIDEO
LAN1
LAN2
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
LAN1
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
24 VDC
EMC
FILTER
24 VDC
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
FROM RADAR S-BAND
FILTER
220 VAC MAIN
24 VDC
EMC
24 VDC EMERGENCY
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
24 VDC
EMC
FILTER
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
24 VDC
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
ETHERNET
SWITCH 2
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1
LAN2
LAN1
DCU6*
LAN2
LAN1
DCU6*
AIS
FILTER
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
RS6B or RS6
ES6
RIB6
V
220 VAC MAIN
24 VDC
ES6 TRACKBALL
DIM
ES6
RIB6
POWER
EMC
24 VDC
RAIN
TRACK CONTROL
LAN1
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
24 VDC EMERGENCY
FROM RADAR X-BAND
220 VAC MAIN
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
24 VDC EMERGENCY
EMC
SEA
ES6
RIB6
V
ECDIS
CONNING
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
ES6
USB
WS5
ECDIS
BACKUP
24 VDC EMERGENCY
RS6B or RS6
RAIN
WS4
220 VAC MAIN
USB
SEA
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
GPS
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
24 VDC EMERGENCY
RAIN
RADAR S-BAND
220 VAC MAIN
SEA
TFT
WS3
ECDIS
MASTER
ES6 KEYBOARD
GAIN
TFT
Sensors (RS422)
Sensors (RS422)
MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. MGE UPS SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT
WS1
WS2
RADAR X-BAND
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
SEA
RAIN
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
ES6 TRACKBALL
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
USB
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
24 VDC
24 VDC
220 VAC
24 VDC
220 VAC
FROM RADAR X-BAND
GYRO
RIB6
POWER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
24 VDC
24 VDC
220 VAC
LAN2
220 VAC
FROM RADAR S-BAND
LAN1
LAN1
RIB6
V
VIDEO
optional
connections
RIB6
LAN1
RS6B or RS6
LAN1
LAN2
GPS
GPS
GYRO
LAN2
LOG
GPS
LAN2
RS6B or RS6
LAN1
GPS
RS6B or RS6
LAN1
RS232
LOG
RS6B or RS6
ES6
USB
RS232
LOG
GYRO
RAIN
RS232
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
ETHERNET
SWITCH 2
BATTERY
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1
BATTERY
BATTERY
BATTERY
BATTERY
UPS PULSAR EXTREME C 1500
LOW FREQUENCY FILTER
220 VAC MAIN
LAN2
LAN1
DCU6*
LAN2
LAN1
DCU6*
AIS
220 VAC
SEA
RS232
RIB6
(UPS PULSAR EX 1500 RACK,

LOW FREQUENCY FILTER,
BATTERY PACK)
ECDIS
CONNING
GAIN
USB
LAN2
MGE UPS SYSTEM
ECDIS
BACKUP
RS232
LAN1
24 VDC
WS5
ES6
USB
24 VDC
WS4
ES6 KEYBOARD
DIM
ES6
USB
GPS
RAIN
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
RS6B or RS6
SEA
GYRO
RAIN
RADAR S-BAND
LOG
SEA
TFT
WS3
ECDIS
MASTER
ES6 KEYBOARD
GAIN
TFT
GYRO
TFT
LOG
TFT
Sensors (RS422)
Sensors (RS422)
ANNEX P
NS 4000 Dual ECDIS
Diagrams
MFD. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations. Block Diagram;
MFD. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram;
MFD. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS. Backup Workstation. Connection Diagram;
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Dual ECDIS and Back of the Bridge
Workstation. Block Diagram;
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram;
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Backup Workstation.
Connection Diagram;
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Back of the Bridge Workstation.
Connection Diagram
MFD. NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS. MASTER AND BACKUP WORKSTATIONS. BLOCK DIAGRAM
ECDIS MASTER CONSOLE
ECDIS BACKUP CONSOLE
WS1
WS2
ECDIS MASTER
ECDIS BACKUP
6
ES6 KEYBOARD
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
SEA
RAIN
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
ES6
optional
To Alarm panel
To Alarm panel
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
RS6 or RS6B
GPS
DI1 DI2
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER

Battery
Pack
GPS
EMC
FILTER
220 VAC MAIN
UPS
CU
220 VAC MAIN
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
GYRO
LOG
LAN1
FROM RADAR (V,T,H,B signals)
DI1 DI2
RS6 or RS6B
LAN2

EMC
LAN2
LAN1
GYRO
LOG
FILTER
DIM
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
4
2
Battery
Pack
LAN1
NOTE:
8
Sensors (RS422)

2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter (optional, for different power configuration
see diagrams in Annex M)
5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball (for Backup WS Keyboard optional)
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - MOXA Ethernet Switch (optional)
8 - DCU6 (optional)
9 - RIB6 (optional)
MFD. NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS. MASTER WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:

UPS6
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
Ethernet Switch
From WS2 RS6 LAN 1
DCU6
RIB6 X-Band Radar
To WS2 RS6 LAN2
AC/DC
Convertor
From Radar
EMC
Filter
MFD. NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS. BACKUP WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:

UPS6
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
To WS1 RS6 LAN 2
AC/DC
Convertor
To WS1 Ethernet Switch
EMC
Filter
NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. DUAL ECDIS AND BACK OF THE BRIDGE WORKSTATION. BLOCK DIAGRAM
ECDIS MASTER CONSOLE
PLANNING STATION
WS1
WS2
ECDIS MASTER
GPS
TPC24
GYRO
LOG
ECDIS BACKUP
WS3
PLANNING STATION
BACK OF THE BRIDGE STATION
LAN1
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
SERVICE
HDD
BRILLIANCE
+
ECDIS
ON/OFF
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
ES6
To Alarm panel
To Alarm panel
RS6B
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
GPS
ES6
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
9
DI1 DI2
POWER
Battery
Pack
EMC
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
4
2
Battery
Pack
EMC
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
3
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
UPS
CU

220 VAC MAIN
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
LOG
RIB6
V
FROM RADAR (V,T,H,B signals)

LAN1
11
DI1 DI2
EMC
LAN2
LAN1
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
GYRO
GPS
GYRO
LOG
FILTER
LAN2
RS6B
LAN1
NOTE 1:
10
Sensors (RS422)
NOTE 2:
*** - Connect sensors if Planning Station is used
as Back of the Bridge Station (BOB)

2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter (optional, for different power configuration
see diagrams in Annex M)
4 - RS6B Computer
6 - ES6 Trackball
7 - TFT Monitor
8 - TPC24 Computer
9 - MOXA Ethernet Switch (optional)
10 - DCU6 (optional)
11 - RIB6 (optional)
NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. MASTER WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:

UPS6
Control
Unit
RS6B Computer
Battery Pack
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
Ethernet Switch
From WS2 RS6B LAN 1
DCU6
RIB6 X-Band Radar
To WS2 RS6B LAN2
AC/DC
Convertor
From Radar
EMC
Filter
NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. BACKUP WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:

UPS6
Control
Unit
RS6B Computer
Battery Pack
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Alarms Ack.
Alarms
To WS1 RS6B LAN 2
AC/DC
Convertor
EMC
Filter
NAVI-SAILOR 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. BACK OF THE BRIDGE WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TPC24 Computer
UPS6 (optional)
EMC
Filter
AC/DC
Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
220 VAC 1 Ph.
ES6 Trackball
ES6 Keyboard (optional)
ANNEX Q
MFD Additional Diagrams
RS6 Computer. Connectors Layout;
WAGO Modules for Conning and BNWAS. Functional Diagram;
ES6 Keyboard with Three Trackballs. Connection Diagram;
MFD. Two Workstations. BNWAS. Connection Diagram No.1;
Connection TFAP to ECDIS MFD WS. Block Diagram;
Connection Four Scanners to MFD. Block Diagram;
Connection of RIB6 to Some Radar Types. Connection Diagrams;
Autopilot Raytheon NP2025 PLUS. Connection Diagram;
Autopilot NAVIS AP 3000.Typical Connection Diagram;
Autopilot Yokogawa PT500A. Connection Diagram;
Autopilot EMRI SEM200 AEU511 Unit. Connection Diagram
RS6 Computer. Connectors Layout
RS6 COMPUTER. CONNECTORS LAYOUT
Annex Q. MFD Additional Diagrams
699
WAGO Modules for Conning and BNWAS. Functional Diagram
WAGO MODULES FOR CONNING AND BNWAS.

FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
700
ES6 KEYBOARD WITH THREE TRACKBALLS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
MFD. TWO WORKSTATIONS. BNWAS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM NO.1
WS1
WS2
ECDIS MASTER
ECDIS BACKUP
Crew Areas
BNWAS
ALARM
BUZZER
ES6 KEYBOARD
VIDEO
DIM
ALARM
BUZZER
AB A -
AB A -
RS232
RAIN
RS232
SEA
VIDEO
GAIN
ES6 TRACKBALL
Optional
TRACK CONTROL
Master Cabin /
Backup Officer
ES6
ES6
USB
GPS
RS6 or RS6B
LAN2
GYRO
LOG
TCS ECDIS
UPS
CU
UPS6
Battery
Pack
EMC
LOG
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
AUTOPILOT ON
TRACK CONTROL ON
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
DO1
AB A -
DI3
Optional non-TRANSAS
Equipment
EXTERNAL
ALARM
PANEL
S S - + +B AB M M +N MI
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
ALARM
BUZZER
AB A -
RESET
BUTTON
Battery
Pack
+
+ ALARM (BATTERY)
24 VDC
+V BATT
NOTE:
DO2
DO3
UPS6
24 VDC
AIS
ALARM
BUZZER
DI4
DI1
*From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 DI2
GYRO
EMC
AUTOPILOT
GYRO
LOG
RS6 or RS6B
LAN1
GPS
DI1
Optional
USB
Fuse 200 mA
WS1
WS2
ECDIS MASTER
ECDIS BACKUP
Crew Areas
BNWAS
ALARM
BUZZER
ES6 KEYBOARD
VIDEO
DIM
ALARM
BUZZER
AB A -
AB A -
RS232
RAIN
RS232
SEA
VIDEO
GAIN
ES6 TRACKBALL
Optional
TRACK CONTROL
Master Cabin /
Backup Officer
ES6
ES6
USB
Optional
USB
GPS
RS6 or RS6B
GYRO
LOG
RS6 or RS6B
LAN1
GYRO
LOG
TCS ECDIS
DO2
DO3
EMC
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
+
24 VDC
DI3
Equipment
EXTERNAL
ALARM
PANEL
+ ALARM (BATTERY)
Fuse 200 mA
NOTE:
RESET
BUTTON
24 VDC EMERGENCY
Battery
Pack
220 VAC MAIN
UPS
CU
220 VAC MAIN
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
AB A -
UPS6
LOG
EMC
AB A -
DI4
DO1
GYRO
DI1
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT ON
TRACK CONTROL ON
ALARM
BUZZER
AIS
LAN2
GPS
ALARM
BUZZER
WS1
WS2
ECDIS MASTER
ECDIS BACKUP
Crew Areas
BNWAS
ALARM
BUZZER
ES6 KEYBOARD
VIDEO
DIM
ALARM
BUZZER
AB A -
AB A -
RS232
RAIN
RS232
SEA
VIDEO
GAIN
ES6 TRACKBALL
Optional
TRACK CONTROL
Master Cabin /
Backup Officer
ES6
ES6
USB
Optional
USB
GPS
RS6 or RS6B
GYRO
LOG
RS6 or RS6B
LAN1
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT ON
TRACK CONTROL ON
LOG
TCS ECDIS
UPS6
Battery
Pack
24 VDC
EMC
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
UPS
CU
AB A -
DO2
DO3
DI3
Equipment
UPS6
Battery
Pack
24 VDC
+V BATT
NOTE:
DO1
QUINTDIODE/40
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
EXTERNAL
ALARM
PANEL
RESET
BUTTON
+
220 VAC MAIN
UPS
CU
220 VAC MAIN
FILTER
AC/DC
CONVERTOR
*From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1

LOG
EMC
DI1
DI2
GYRO
DI1
AB A -
DI4
24 VDC EMERGENCY
GYRO
ALARM
BUZZER
AIS
LAN2
GPS
ALARM
BUZZER
Fuse 200 mA
+ ALARM (BATTERY)
CONNECTION TFAP TO ECDIS MFD WS. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT
Monitor
TFT
Monitor
TFT
Monitor
W01
W02
IP 10.8.1.101
LAN1
RS6B
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
IP 10.8.1.102
LAN1
RS6B
DIM
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
W03
RAIN
SEA
DIM
ES6
Ethernet Switch
TFAP
12
11
14
12
10
10M
16
15
FAULT
PWR1
PWR2
100M
EtherDevice Switch
Tx
Rx
NOTE: TFAP's external IP address may be static or dynamic
100M
INTERNAL IP 10.8.1.100
EDS-316-M-SC
RS7
EXTERNAL
SEA
RAIN
DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
Communication
Equipment
GAIN
TRACK CONTROL
IP 10.8.1.103
LAN1
RS6B
ES6
CONNECTION FOUR SCANNERS TO MFD. BLOCK DIAGRAM
Scanner S-2
Scanner S-1
Scanner X-1
Scanner X-2
TFT
Monitor
SEA
RAIN
RIB6 X-1
DIM
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
IP 10.8.2.212
RIB6 X-2
RIB6 S-1
RIB6
IP 10.8.2.211
ES6 Keyboard
W02
IP 10.8.2.210
IP 10.8.2.209
W01
GAIN
TFT
Monitor
Ethernet
Switch
(LAN2)
POWER
RIB6 S-2
RIB6
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
ES6 Keyboard
POWER
GAIN
SEA
RAIN
DIM
RIB6
V
Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2
POWER
TRACK CONTROL
TRACK CONTROL
IP 10.8.1.101
UPS6
AC/DC
Convertor
UPS
CU
IP 10.8.2.102
IP 10.8.1.212
IP 10.8.1.102
UPS6
24VDC
Connecion
Board
Battery
Pack
EMC
Filter
220 VAC 1 PH.
220 VAC 1 PH.
EMC
Filter
24VDC
Connecion
Board
Ethernet
Switch
(LAN1)
IP 10.8.1.211
IP 10.8.2.101
IP 10.8.1.210
ES6
IP 10.8.1.209
ES6
AC/DC
Convertor
UPS
CU
Battery
Pack
CONNECTION OF RIB6 TO SOME RADAR TYPES. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
JRC JMA 9000 SERIES
SPERRY RASCAR
FURUNO FR 15XX SERIES

DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
RIB6
RAYTHEON PATHFINDER
DISPLAY UNIT
RIB6
FURUNO FR 21XX, FR 28XX SERIES
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
RIB6
RIB6
RIB6
AUTOPILOT RAYTHEON NP2025 PLUS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
OPERATORUNITAUTOPILOT NP20x5
TYPE: 102-886
L1
RX+
RXTX+
TXGND
L2
1 2 3 4 5 6
B5
1 2 3
B6
SERIAL INTER
FACE SERIAL INTER
FACE
OUT
IN
1 2 3
<-AUTO ON
TILLER->
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
YELLOW
wire
24V
AUTO ON
24V
ONLY R.2
24V
TRACK ON
24V
TILLER ON
24V
OVERR. ON
24V
TILL. 2
24V
2 PUMPS
24V
LOG PULS
+
CANH
CANL
MAGNETIC
HEADING
TRACK C.
ACTIVE
R.O.T.
TILLER
OFF
HEADING
1 2 3 4
COURSE
MONITOR
OFFCOURSE
& C. MON
AUTOPILOT
FAILURE
BLACK
RED
1 2 3 4 5 6
24V DC OUT
DB9
L1
24V DC SUPP
LY
24V
GND
TRACKCONTROL
RX+
RXTX+
TXGND
OPE
RATOR UNIT
DB9
U5
24V
GND
6.1
CONNECTION UNITAUTOPILOT NP2025
TYPE: 102-885
L2
1
2
3
4
(4800)
RS422
TX+
TXRX+
RX-
Steering command
NMEA (APB,HTR)
Track control Data
NMEA (S
TA, RS
A)
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
AUTO ON *)
L1
L2
COURSE IN
SYNC ORSTEP
IN
RUDDER
ANGLE
1
2
wire
1
2
1 2
wire
SWITCHING OUTPU
TS
L2
Pt
+
Stb
+
Pt
+
24V DC
GND
(4800 / 10Hz)
Heading
NMEA (H
DT)
(4800)
RS422
TX+
TX-
Ship's speed
NMEA (VBW)
1
2
Analogue signal +/- 10V

M1
GND
Rudder FEEDB
ACK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
wire
WHITE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Stb
+
BROWN
ON
REF
RUD.
GND
15V
GND
GND
(SE
V.)
RUDDER1RUDDER2 FU ADJUST R
L1
RS422
TX+
TX-
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
1 2
wire
R1
R2
S1
S2
S3
10V
GND
10V
GND
R1
R2
S1
S2
S3
RX+
RX-
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
3 4
RX+
RXGND
RUDDER2MAG. SONDE IN (NMEA)
M2
GND
FB RUDDER 1
U+
M1
REF
UGND
R.O.T IN
M1
GND
U+
M1
U-
R.O.TTILLER
1 2
TRACK ON *)
1
2
wire
1 2
1
1
2
Analogue signal +/- 10V

GND
Rudder ORDER
Power
24V
GND
From 24VDC power supply
*) OPTIONA
AUTOPILOT NAVIS AP 3000.TYPICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
STEERINGCONTROL SYSTEM
(SINGLE RUDDER)
CONTROL UNIT CU-MPP/MRR
CONTROL UNIT CU-M
2
1
2
1
RUDDER FEEDB
ACK
2
3
2*
LOG
1*
2*
AI
RUDDER CMD
1
2
1
2
TX+
TX-
GYRO
1
2
TX+
TX-
LOG
1
2
TX+
TX-
GPS
3*
WIND
4*
MODE SELE
CTOR
SMS-BTYPE 1
1
2
1
2
1
2
NS4000 MFD
2
3
CONTROLPANEL APH3000
5
6
BATTERY SWI
TCH
1
2
3
4
RX+
RXTX+
TX-
COM
AUTOPILOT YOKOGAWA PT500A. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
SWITCH UNIT
(SYS/NF)
SWITCH UNIT
(MODE)
AUTO STEERING
UNIT
PH720
PH718
20P
50P
CN5-1
50P
TERMINAL UNIT PN026
CN7-1
8P
TB8
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
TB5
NO.2
MANUALTERMINAL
SD8A
SD8B
RD9A
RD9B
RD10A
RD10B
SD10A
SD10B
BSP
GND
VCC
GND
WOC
NO.1
MANUALTERMINAL
TB1-1
CN11-3
7P
CN11-2
8P
RSA
RSB
FLA
FLB
OHA
OHB
CN11-1
8P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
TB1-2
U
V
MCA
ACU
FU
NFS
NFP
NF
RUN
SFL1
SFL2
SFL3
SFL4
BCM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
TB1-1
MOT
COM
CN11-3
7P
CN11-2
8P
NVA
NVB
RDA
COM
CDV
COM
13 12 17 16
CN11-1
8P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TB1-2
U
V
MCA
ACU
FU
NFS
NFP
NF
RUN
SFL1
SFL2
SFL3
SFL4
BCM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
MOT
COM
NVA
NVB
RDA
COM
CDV
COM
3 4
TB5
RD1A
RD1B
RD2A
RD2B
RD3A
RD3B
SD1A
SD1B
SG
LOG
GND
P
N
E
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
GND
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TB5
1A
1B
1ST
1RCS
1DIM
24V
1RC+
1RCGND
ORS
ORP
GND
CAG
GND
P
N
100
101
103
104
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
2A
2B
2ST
2RCS
2DIM
24V
2RC+
2RCGND
FL
EMG
CAU
CRS
ACM
BSP
BCM
BSA
BSB
FLA
FLB
1 2
6 5 15 14 11 7 8 9 10
N P
wire
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
8
11
9
11
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Alarm
#1
No.1 control power failure alarm
#2
No.2 control power failure alarm
#3
Autopilot system failure alarm
#4
Off-course ala
rm
#5
Caution ala
rm
#6
Emergency alarm
#7
Autopilot CPUFAIL ala

rm
#8
#9
#10
Off-heading ala
rm
Buzzer stop alarm
(for Annunciator unit)
Buzzer stop alarm
(for Auto steering unit)
NOTE: NO - no
rmal open contact
NC - rmal
no close contact
Type
NC outpu
t-in use
RS6 DI1
NC outpu
t-in use
RS6 DI2
NO outpu
t-not
used
NO outpu
t-not
used
NC outpu
t-in use
RS6 DI3
NC outpu
t-in use
RS6 DI4
NO outpu
t-not
used
NO outpu
t-not
used
NO input-not
used
NO input-in use
RS6 DO1
wire RS422
RD9A TX+
RD9B TX-
(4800)
Analogue si
gnals
wire
Ship's speed
NMEA(VBW)
COM
COM
wire
U
V
Power
100VAC 50/60
Hz 1 Ph
(from No.2 Power box)
wire
U
V
Rudder roder
Rudderfeed-back
Power
100VAC 50/60
Hz 1Ph
(from No.1 Power box)
Current
1mA/degree
+:S, -:P
1mA/degree
+:P, -:S
Voltage
0.1V/degree
+:S, -:P
0.1V/degree
+:P, -:S
wire Signal detection

P
N
+24V
0V
Pump running
wire RS422
RD3A TX+
RD3B TXSD1A RX+
SD1B RXSG
(4800)
Steeringcommand
NMEA (H
TC)
Trackcontrol Data
NMEA (HT
D, RS
A)
Shield
wire RS422
RD1A TX+
RD1B TX-
Heading
NMEA (H
DT)
(4800)
CABLE NO.5
2X0.75 SQ.
CABLE NO.2
WIRE AUTOPILOT FAIL ALARM

1
2
J11/4
AUTOP.FAIL.AL.CON T.
J11/3
DI(7) SW_AL_RES'
J11/2
24V-_ISOL
J11/1
24V-AL
GND
X7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
24V+AL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CH.A
CH.B
TXD2NC
TXD1+
TXD1RXD1RXD1+
RXD2RXD2+
TXD2+
NC
1
1
1
1
2
24VDC+
24VDC-
FROM 24 VDC POWER

SUPPLY
WIRE RS422
TXTX+
Y/G 0.75SQ
B
BK
BE
BN
B
BK
B
BK
Y/G 0.75SQ
1
2
3
4
RX+
RXTXTX+
(4800)
TRACK CONTRO L DATA
NMEA (SSA, SSD, SSX)
STEERING COMMAND
NMEA (SSA, SSD, SSX)
WIRE
1
2
(4800 / 10Hz)
HEADING
NMEA (HDT)
WIRE RS422
MODE SELEC TOR

(optinal)
TXTX+
2 3 4
WIRE POWER SUPP LY
TO ECDIS VIA DRY

CONTACT
P2
WIRE RS422
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
PLUGS FOR MI P PANEL CONNECTIONS.

PLUG P2 AND CABLE NO. 5,6 AND 7 TOGETHER WITH
GREEN CORE TO P2 / PIN 9 ARE OPTIONA L
ONLY MOUNTED IN TWO PANEL SYSTEMS
1
2
1
DI1
DI1
P1
WIRE RS422
1 2
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
CH.G
WIRE AUTOPILOT POWER FAIL ALARM
(4800 / 10Hz)
1
2
TXTX+
(4800)
SHIP'S SPEED
NMEA (VBW)
HEADING
NMEA (HDT)
2
WIRE POWER SUPP LY
1
2
24VDC+
24VDC-
FROM 24 VDC POWER

SUPPLY
TXD2+
TXD2NC
CABLE NO.3
G
0.5 SQ.
G
0.5 SQ.
BK 0.5 SQ.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CH.F
2x0.5SQ
X5 TERMINA L LAYOUT
IF RS422 TYPE
X5
EXTERN.
ALARM
RESET
RS422
CABLE
SCREENS
B
BK
BE
BN
X5 TERMINA L LAYOUT
IF RS232 TYPE
B
BK
B
BK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
ALARM
SUPPLY
CABLE
SCREENS
NC
NC
RXD2
NC
ISOGND
NC
RXD1
TXD2
J9/1
J9/2
DG(0V)
VCC(5V+)
COURSE MON CONT COM

WATCH ONE CONT COM
COURSE MON CONT NO
AL24V+ IN
ETS11 CONNEC.MODULE
CH.A CH.B
TXD2+
TXD2NC
B
BN
Y/G
ISOGND
NC
NC
NC
TXD1
RXD1
TXD2
RXD2
NC
DG
X2
RS232
B
B
BK
BK
BK
DB15
FEMALE
NC
GND
CH.F CH.G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
CABLE NO.10
CORCOM
LINEFILTER 1A
1VK3
TSI11 SER.COM. MODULE

EITHER TSI 11 / RS422
OR TSI 11 / RS232
X6
BE
B
BK
J11/5
B
BN
24VDC-
X1
J11/7
RESET
RESREF
24VDC+
X4
J11/8
24V-_OUT
AL24V-_OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
J10/1
AL24V+_OUT
DB15
MALE
DO(3)
WATCH ONE CONT NO
COURSE MON CONT NC
WATCH ONE CONT NC
POW FAIL CONT

DO(2)
POW FAIL CONT
LOG INNC
NC
PG
LOG IN+
TIM11
(ISOLATED RS232)
OR
OII12
(ISOLATED RS422)
DO(0)
24V+_OUT
ETS 11 CONNEC.MODULE
CH.C
CH.D
CABLE NO.7
4x0.5SQ
J10/2
TXD1RXD1RXD1+
RXD2RXD2+
J10/3
DO(1)
NC
TXD1+
DO(2)
DB15
FEMALE
B
BK
BN
BE
BN
J10/4
J11/6
MPB11/J1
+15V PROT
OR REMOTE SELECT
DI COM LO W,(INT.24V-)
TWO PUMPS RUN'
GYRO2 SEL.'
AUTOP READY' DI(1)

AUTOP INCONTR' DI(0)
NO PANEL CONTR.' DI(3)
SHOWER CH1,AO(1)
SG
SHOWER CH2,AO(2)
SG
RATE,SHOW CH3,AO(3)
SG
+15VDC
-15VDC
CONTR REQ CON T.,DO(1)
CONTR REQ CON T.,DO(1)
DI COM HI 1,(EX T.24V+)
DI COM LO W,(INT.24V-)
+15VDC
-15VDC
RUDDER ORDER,AO(0)
SG
TRACK GAIN/DAM P,AI(1)

SG
RUDDER FB,AI(2)
SG
WHEEL ORDER,AI(0)
SG
Y/G 0.75 SQ
BK
5A
MODE WHEE L DI(2)

DI COM HI 2,(EX T.24V+)
B
B
BK
BK
CORCOM
LINEFILTER 3A
3EQ1
AMC 11/J2
TO ECDIS VI A DRY
CONTACT
CABLE NO.4
4x0.5SQ
J10/5
DO(3)
CABLE NO.6
2x0.5SQ
VCC(5V+)
AUTOP.FAIL.AL.CON T.
AL24V- IN
OR PILOT GAIN MOD. ENABLE
MPB 11
PROCESSOR MODULE
FLAT CABLE CONNECTIONS TO GIP11 MODULES

FOR 1:1 GYRO SYNCHRO DECODING.
DI2
DI2
CABLE NO. 11
AMC 11
AUTOPILOT
IO-MOTHERBOARD
AMC 11/J1
DB15
MALE
MPB11/J2
SCR.
5A
OII12
ISOLATED RS422
PIGGY-BACK
MODULE
DG
TXD1
GND
MPB 11/W2
PIN-JUMPER:
GND TO 0V CONNECTION
TXD1+
TXD1RXD1RXD1+
RXD2RXD2+
J1/3
J4
J9/4
24VDC-
J9/3
24VDC+
J1/2
DO(7) STBD SOL.ORDER
J1/1
DO(6) PORT SOL.ORDER
CABLE NO.1 2X0.75 SQ.
SCR.
2X0.75 SQ.
BK
AUTOPILOT EMRI SEM200 AEU511 UNIT. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
1
2
ANALOGUE SIGNA L
0.25 V/deg negative stbd
R.ORDER
RUDDER ORDER
SG
ANNEX R
System Certificates
Multi-Functional
Display
Installation Guide
Version 2.00.330
Transas MIP Ltd.

WEB: www.transasmarine.com
Phone: +46 31 769 56 00.
E-mail: info@transas.com
24/7 Support: +46 771 460 100

MFD Installation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MFD Installation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Multi-Functional

Copyright: Transas MIP Ltd 19912012. All rights reserved.

This document contains:

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide

RS6B/RS6 Computers Discrete Signal Interface .................................... 97

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide

Procedure of TCS Control Setup Algorithms ................................................... 228

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide

Autopilots ......................................................................................................... 356

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide

Copyright Transas MIP Ltd., 2012

Warnings and Cautions

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Warnings and Cautions

Table 2. Radio-frequency radiation levels for 10 kW scanner

Open array 6-feet

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide

Warnings and Cautions

Compass Safety Distance

Compass safety distance (m)

BridgeMaster E X-Band Scanner

Compass safety distance (m)

19 TFT Display JH19T14

23 TFT Display JH23T14

26 TFT Display JH26T11

27 TFT Display JH27T11

Equipment Mean Time between Failure (MTBF)

Fan Processing unit Chasse

Fan Processing unit CPU

Fan Processing unit GPU

MC-4506 (TMIRS6B) V1.x

Table 6. Scanners parts required for periodic replacement

SRT X-Band, Up Mast

JRC M1475A, E2V MG5424*

JRC MSF1425A, E2V MG4010

X-Band, Down Mast

JRC M1475A, E2V MG5424*

S-Band, Down Mast

Expose the system to improper or insufficient ventilation by obstructing

Expose the system to violent movements, excessive vibration or any situation

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v. 2.00.330). Installation Guide

How to Use This Manual

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Additional Information on Ports Interfaces.

Additional Settings for Navi-Conning 4000.

Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector Adjustment.

Upgrade RS3/RS4 to RS6/RS6B Computers.

Transas Scanners Installation and Adjustment.

Scanners Cables Handling.

Scanners 10/25 kW X-Band Up Mast Diagrams.

Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast Diagrams.

Scanners SRT 12/25 kW and 30 kW S-Band Down Mast

Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast Diagrams.

Scanner BridgeMaster E 10 kW X-Band Up Mast Diagrams.

Scanner Navico BR24 Broadband Diagrams.

Transas Network 12/25 kW Scanners Up Mast Diagrams.

MFD Power Supply Distribution Diagrams.

NS 4000 Dual ECDIS Diagrams.

MFD Additional Diagrams.

AIS Automated Identification System;

ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aids;

COG Course Over Ground;

CPA Closest Point of Approach;

CTW Course Over the Water;